Krone BiG X 500, BiG X 650, BiG X 800, BiG X 1000 Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions
150 000 103 01 US
Self-propelled Forage Harvester
BiG X 500
BiG X 650
BiG X 800
BiG X 1000
(Machine No. 732 000 or higher)
Contents
Contents
1
General Aspects ............................................................ I -1
1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.10
Purpose ...................................................................................................................
Information on the product .......................................................................................
General Aspects ......................................................................................................
Address of the manufacturer: ...................................................................................
Declaration ..............................................................................................................
Designation .............................................................................................................
Information for enquiries and orders ........................................................................
Intended Use ...........................................................................................................
Technical Data.........................................................................................................
Weights ...................................................................................................................
Consumables ..........................................................................................................
Accompanying documents ......................................................................................
2
Safety ..............................................................................II -1
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
2.2.10
2.2.11
2.2.12
2.2.13
2.2.14
2.2.15
2.2.16
2.2.17
2.2.18
2.2.19
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
Identifying important information in the Operating Instructions ................................ II -1
Safety instructions and accident prevention regulations .......................................... II -1
Personnel qualification and training ........................................................................ II -1
Dangers in case of non-compliance with the Safety Instructions ............................. II -1
Safety-conscious work practices ............................................................................. II -1
Safety and accident prevention regulations ............................................................. II -2
Self-propelled work machine ................................................................................... II -3
Autopilot .................................................................................................................. II -3
Implements .............................................................................................................. II -4
PTO operation ......................................................................................................... II -4
Hydraulic system ..................................................................................................... II -4
Battery ..................................................................................................................... II -5
Cooling system ........................................................................................................ II -5
Tyres ........................................................................................................................ II -5
Emergency exit ........................................................................................................ II -5
Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines ................................................. II -5
Fire prevention measures ........................................................................................ II -5
Maintenance ............................................................................................................ II -6
Telephones and radio sets ...................................................................................... II -6
Unauthorised conversion/modification and manufacture of spare parts .................. II -6
Non-permissible modes of operation ....................................................................... II -6
Safety instructions on the machine .......................................................................... II -7
Location of the warning pictograms on the machine ................................................ II -8
Location of general labels on the machine ............................................................ II -18
I -1
I -1
I -1
I -1
I -1
I -1
I -2
I -2
I -3
I -8
I -9
I -9
Contents
3
Operators controls ...................................................... III - 1
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.9
3.2.8
3.2.10
3.2.11
3.2.12
3.2.12
3.2.13
3.2.14
3.2.15
3.2.16
3.2.17
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.6.6
3.7
3.8
Overview ............................................................................................................... III - 1
Switch panel .......................................................................................................... III - 1
Panel switches and pilot lamps ............................................................................. III - 2
Release switch – road/field ................................................................................... III - 3
Release switch – feed drive/front attachment ........................................................ III - 3
Release switch – holding brake ............................................................................ III - 3
Release switch – travelling gear ........................................................................... III - 4
Release switch – all-wheel drive ........................................................................... III - 4
Axle separation key ............................................................................................... III - 4
Release switch - maintenance .............................................................................. III - 5
Release switch – autopilot .................................................................................... III - 5
Release Switch for Diesel Engine II (only for BiG X 800 and BiG X 1000) ............ III - 5
Engine failure indicator light .................................................................................. III - 6
Charge indicator light ............................................................................................ III - 6
Keyboards ............................................................................................................. III - 7
Ignition lock ........................................................................................................... III - 7
Cigarette lighter ..................................................................................................... III - 8
12-V socket ........................................................................................................... III - 8
Instantaneous stop switch ..................................................................................... III - 8
Diagnostics socket ................................................................................................ III - 8
Multi-function lever ................................................................................................ III - 9
Roof console ....................................................................................................... III - 11
Switch group – roof panel .................................................................................... III - 12
Steering column and foot pedals ......................................................................... III - 13
Steering column adjustment ................................................................................ III - 14
Horn .................................................................................................................... III - 14
Indicator switch .................................................................................................... III - 14
Full beam ............................................................................................................ III - 15
Headlamp flasher ................................................................................................ III - 15
Using the operating brake ................................................................................... III - 15
Manual operation on the platform ........................................................................ III - 16
Control unit for measuring the humidity of the foraged crops ............................... III - 18
4
"EasyTouch" Info Centre ............................................ IV -1
4.1
4.1.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
Information Section ................................................................................................ IV -3
Basic Screen ......................................................................................................... IV -3
Settings ................................................................................................................. IV -6
Working Width ....................................................................................................... IV -6
Temporary change in the working width of the grass pickup .................................. IV -6
Temporary Change of the Maize Header Working Width ....................................... IV -7
Temporary Change of the Working Width of the Direct Cutting System ................. IV -8
Front Attachment ................................................................................................... IV -9
Status (1) ............................................................................................................... IV -9
Metal Detection (2) ................................................................................................ IV -9
Setting the Setpoint Speed (3) ............................................................................... IV -9
Feed Drive ........................................................................................................... IV -10
Adjusting the cutting length ................................................................................. IV -10
Lifting Gear .......................................................................................................... IV -11
Status .................................................................................................................. IV -11
Changing the setpoint pressure or setpoint height .............................................. IV -12
Contents
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.1.1
4..6.1.2
4.6.1.3
4.6.1.4
4.6.2
4.6.2.1
4.6.2.2
4.6.2.3
4.6.2.4
4.6.2.5
4.6.2.6
4.6.2.7
4.6.2.8
4.6.2.9
4.6.2.10
4.6.3
4.6.3.1
4.6.3.2
4.6.3.3
4.6.4
4.6.4.1
4.6.4.2
4.6.4.3
4.6.4.4
4.6.5
4.6.6
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
4.7.5
4.7.6
4.7.7
4.7.8
4.7.9
4.7.9.1
4.7.10
4.8
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.2
4.9
4.9.1
4.9.2
4.9.3
4.9.4
4.9.4
General Machine Settings ................................................................................... IV -13
General machine settings - grass pickup ............................................................. IV -13
Setting the grass pick-up operating mode ........................................................... IV -13
Setting the grass pick-up working width .............................................................. IV -14
To adjust the lifting gear control ........................................................................... IV -14
Setting the number of blades ............................................................................... IV -15
General machine settings - maize header ........................................................... IV -15
To set the operating mode of the maize header ................................................... IV -15
Setting the maize header working width .............................................................. IV -16
Adjusting the lifting gear control .......................................................................... IV -17
Setting the number of blades ............................................................................... IV -17
Selecting row tracer for autopilot ......................................................................... IV -18
Setting the row tracer ........................................................................................... IV -18
Setting the autopilot centre adjuster .................................................................... IV -19
Setting the response sensitivity of the autopilot ................................................... IV -19
Automatic setting of the cutting length by maturity detection
on the on the maize plant (AutoScan) .................................................................. IV -20
Adjusting the minimum and maximum chop length ............................................. IV -21
General machine setting - direct cutting system .................................................. IV -21
To set the working width of the direct cutting system ........................................... IV -22
To adjust the lifting gear control ........................................................................... IV -22
Setting the number of blades ............................................................................... IV -23
Customer Data Counter ....................................................................................... IV -24
Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one ....................................... IV -25
Switching the counter on or off ............................................................................ IV -25
Deleting the customer counter ............................................................................. IV -26
Switching to general counters (machine data counters) ...................................... IV -26
Silage Fodder Addition ........................................................................................ IV -27
Adjusting the Grain Conditioner Distance ........................................................... IV -28
Menu Level ......................................................................................................... IV - 29
Bringing up a Menu Level ................................................................................... IV - 30
Main menu 1 „Settings“ ....................................................................................... IV - 30
Menu 1-1 „Parameters“ ....................................................................................... IV - 31
Menu 1-3 „Units“ ................................................................................................. IV - 32
Menu 1-5 „Language“ ......................................................................................... IV - 33
Menu 1-7 „Display“ ............................................................................................. IV - 33
Menu 1-7-1 contrast/brightness .......................................................................... IV - 34
Menu 1-7-2 Beeper ............................................................................................. IV - 35
Menu 1-6 „Date/time“ .......................................................................................... IV - 36
To set date/time .................................................................................................. IV - 36
Menu 1-9 "Contractor" ........................................................................................ IV - 37
Main Menu 2 „Counters“ ..................................................................................... IV - 38
Machine Data Counter ....................................................................................... IV - 38
Deleting the Machine Data Counters.................................................................. IV - 39
Switching to Customer Data Counters ............................................................... IV - 39
Main Menu 3 „Maintenance“ ............................................................................... IV - 40
Menu 3-1 "Central lubrication/cleaning of the engine compartment" .................. IV - 41
Menu 3-2 „Grinding / Counterblade“ ................................................................... IV - 42
Menu 3-3 „Calibration of Pendulum Frame and Absolute Lifting Gear Height“ ... IV - 45
Menu 3-4 „Calibration of Autopilot“ ..................................................................... IV - 49
Menu 3-5 „Calibration of upper discharge chute“ ................................................ IV - 60
Contents
4.9.5
4.9.6
4.9.7
4.9.7.1
4.9.7.2
4.9.8
4.9.9
4.10
4.10.1
4.10.1.1
4.10.1.2
4.10.2
4.10.3
4.10.4
4.10.5
4.10.6
4.10.7
4.10.8
4.10.9
4.10.10
4.10.11
4.10.12
4.10.13
4.10.14
4.10.15
4.10.16
4.10.17
4.10.18
4.10.19
4.10.20
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.13.1
4.13.2
4.13.3
4.14
4.14.1
4.14.2
4.15
4.15.1
4.15.2
4.15.3
4.15.4
4.15.5
4.16
4.16.1
4.17
4.18
4.18.1
4.18.2
Menu 3-6 „Calibration of grain conditioner“ ........................................................ IV - 63
Menu 3-7 „Calibration of Feed Drive/Front Attachment“...................................... IV - 65
Menu 3-8 „Calibration of Travel Path“ .................................................................. IV - 70
Performing a calibration trip (field mode with 2-wheel drive) .............................. IV - 71
Performing a calibration trip (field mode with all-wheel drive) ............................. IV - 74
Menu 3-9 „Calibration of RockProtect“ ............................................................... IV - 74
Menu 3-10 "Calibration of main coupling" .......................................................... IV - 75
Main Menu 4 Service .......................................................................................... IV - 78
Menu 4-1 „Diagnostics“ ...................................................................................... IV - 78
Display of Release Conditions Not Met for Diagnostics ..................................... IV - 80
Display of possible faults for diagnostics ............................................................ IV - 81
Menu 4-1-1 „Feed Drive“ .................................................................................... IV - 82
Menu 4-1-2 „Front attachment“ ............................................................................ IV - 84
Menu 4-1-3 „CAN Bus“ ....................................................................................... IV - 86
Menu 4-1-4 „Upper Discharge Chute“ ................................................................ IV - 88
Menu 4-1-5 „Lifting Gear“ .................................................................................... IV - 91
Menu 4-1-6 „Drive“ ............................................................................................. IV - 96
Menu 4-1-7 „Metal Detection“ .......................................................................... IV - 101
Menu 4-1-8 „Diesel Engine“ ............................................................................. IV - 103
Menu 4-1-9 „Autopilot“ ...................................................................................... IV - 104
Menu 4-1-11 „Electronics“ ................................................................................ IV - 106
Menu 4-1-12 „Work“ .......................................................................................... IV - 108
Menu 4-1-13 „Grinding“ .................................................................................... IV - 111
Menu 4-1-14 „Counterblade“ ............................................................................ IV - 113
Menu 4-1-15 „Grain conditioner“ ....................................................................... IV - 115
Menu 4-1-16 „Joystick“ ..................................................................................... IV - 116
Menu 4-1-17 „Control Unit Console“ ................................................................. IV - 117
Menu 4-1-18 „Manual Operation“ ...................................................................... IV - 118
Menu 4-1-19 „Terminal“ .................................................................................... IV - 119
Menu 4-1-20 "RockProtect Diagnostics" .......................................................... IV - 120
Menu 4-2 „Error list“ .......................................................................................... IV - 122
Menu 4-3 „Service level“................................................................................... IV - 126
Menu 4-4 „Information“ ..................................................................................... IV - 127
Menu 4-4-1 „Joystick“ ....................................................................................... IV - 127
Menu 4-4-2 „Software“ ...................................................................................... IV - 128
Menu 4-4-3 „Machine“ ...................................................................................... IV - 129
Menu 5 „Basic Screen“ ..................................................................................... IV - 130
error message .................................................................................................. IV - 130
Information message ........................................................................................ IV - 131
Printer Connection ........................................................................................... IV - 131
Printing Customer Data .................................................................................... IV - 131
Customer Data Print Menu ............................................................................... IV - 132
To print a customer record or records: ............................................................... IV - 132
Printing Cultivated Area Counter States ........................................................... IV - 133
Description of Printer Errors ............................................................................. IV - 133
Battery Change on the Terminal ....................................................................... IV - 134
Procedure for Replacing the Battery ................................................................. IV - 134
"Setting of the constant power load limit control" menu appears ...................... IV - 135
CropControl control unit ................................................................................... IV - 138
General Description ......................................................................................... IV - 138
Mounting .......................................................................................................... IV - 139
Contents
4.18.2.1
4.18.3
4.18.3.1
4.18.3.2
4.18.4
4.18.5
4.18.6
4.18.6.1
4.18.7
4.18.8
4.18.9
4.18.10
Mounting the control unit .................................................................................. IV - 139
Control unit ....................................................................................................... IV - 140
Overview .......................................................................................................... IV - 140
Description of the keys ..................................................................................... IV - 141
Operational Readiness ..................................................................................... IV - 141
Brief instruction ................................................................................................. IV - 142
Basic screen ..................................................................................................... IV - 143
Softkeys basic screen ....................................................................................... IV - 143
Basic screen graphic display ............................................................................ IV - 144
Start / stop yield counter ................................................................................... IV - 145
Control weighing and calibration ...................................................................... IV - 145
Menu Level ....................................................................................................... IV - 147
4.18.10.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... IV - 147
4.18.10.1.1 Bringing up a Menu Level .............................................................................................. IV - 147
4.18.10.2 Main menu 1 "Settings" .................................................................................................. IV - 148
4.18.10.2.1 Menu 1-1 "Calibration of path recorder" ......................................................................... IV - 149
4.18.10.2.2 Menu 1-2 "Calibration of pressure sensor" .................................................................... IV - 150
4.18.10.2.3 Menu 1-1 "Minimum excursion setting" .......................................................................... IV - 152
4.18.10.2.4 Menu 1-4 "Contrast" ...................................................................................................... IV - 153
4.18.10.3 Main menu. 2 "Yield counter" ......................................................................................... IV - 155
4.18.10.3.1 "Yield counter" ............................................................................................................... IV - 155
4.18.10.3.2 Printing the values ......................................................................................................... IV - 155
4.18.9.3.3 Deleting the values ........................................................................................................ IV - 155
4.18.10.3.4 Entering the weighed mass ........................................................................................... IV - 156
4.18.10.3.5 Entering the calibration factor directly ............................................................................ IV - 158
4.18.10.4 Main menu 4 "Service" .................................................................................................. IV - 159
4.18.10.4.1 Menu 4-2 "Manual sensor test" ...................................................................................... IV - 159
4.18.10.4.2 Menu 4-5 "Current alarms" ............................................................................................ IV - 161
4.18.10.4.3 Main Menu 5 “Info” ......................................................................................................... IV - 161
4.19
4.19.1
4.19.2
Alarm Message ................................................................................................ IV - 162
Physical alarm messages ................................................................................. IV - 163
Physical alarm messages ................................................................................. IV - 163
5
Driver’s cab .................................................................. V - 1
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.14
5.12
5.13
5.15
5.15.1
5.15.2
5.15.3
5.15.4
Ladder to driver’s cabin ......................................................................................... V - 1
Opening the cabin door ......................................................................................... V - 1
The air comfort seat ............................................................................................... V - 2
Right armrest ......................................................................................................... V - 3
Storage compartment for first-aid kit/operating instructions ................................... V - 4
Passenger seat (optional) ...................................................................................... V - 4
Inside mirror ........................................................................................................... V - 4
Sun blind ............................................................................................................... V - 5
Outside mirrors ...................................................................................................... V - 5
Emergency exit ...................................................................................................... V - 6
Windshield wipers ................................................................................................. V - 6
Diagnosis socket - motor ....................................................................................... V - 7
Washer system - windshield .................................................................................. V - 7
Side window washer (optional) ............................................................................. V - 7
Climatronic / Heating ............................................................................................ V - 8
Control and indicator elements .............................................................................. V - 8
Control ................................................................................................................... V - 9
Switch on system................................................................................................... V - 9
Setting the desired cabin temperature ................................................................... V - 9
Contents
5.15.5
5.15.6
5.15.7
5.15.8
5.15.9
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.18.1
5.18.2
5.18.3
Switching air conditioning operation on/off .......................................................... V - 10
Switching REHEAT - operation on and off .......................................................... V - 10
Manual adjustment of the evaporator fan speed .................................................. V - 11
Switching the temperature display to ° Fahrenheit ............................................... V - 11
Showing errors on the display ............................................................................. V - 12
Adjustable air jets ................................................................................................ V - 13
Radio ................................................................................................................... V - 13
Ladders ............................................................................................................... V - 14
Flaps with safety locks ........................................................................................ V - 14
Ladder to the machine compartment ................................................................... V - 14
Ladder to the motor compartment ........................................................................ V - 15
6
Lighting ........................................................................ VI - 1
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake light ................................................. VI - 1
Parking light .......................................................................................................... VI - 1
Dipped beam ........................................................................................................ VI - 3
Working floodlights ............................................................................................... VI - 3
Allround lights ...................................................................................................... VI - 6
Reversing lights .................................................................................................... VI - 6
7
Start-up ........................................................................ VII -1
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.1.6
7.1.7
7.1.8
7.1.9
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7
7.3.8
7.3.8.1
7.3.8.2
7.3.8.3
7.3.8.4
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
Daily checks ......................................................................................................... VII -1
Dirt deposits in the engine and machine compartment ........................................ VII -1
Engine - oil level check ........................................................................................ VII -2
Hydraulic oil level check....................................................................................... VII -3
Checking the engine coolant level ....................................................................... VII -3
Checking the central lubrication system ............................................................... VII -3
Tyres ..................................................................................................................... VII -3
Light functions ...................................................................................................... VII -4
Brake .................................................................................................................... VII -4
Fuel level.............................................................................................................. VII -4
Fuel system .......................................................................................................... VII -5
Fuel ...................................................................................................................... VII -5
Refueling .............................................................................................................. VII -5
Venting the fuel system......................................................................................... VII -5
Engine operation .................................................................................................. VII -6
Running in the engine .......................................................................................... VII -6
Before starting the engine .................................................................................... VII -6
Starting the engine ............................................................................................... VII -7
Starting at low temperatures ................................................................................. VII -8
Starting with auxiliary battery ............................................................................... VII -8
Killing the engine.................................................................................................. VII -8
Switching off the engine ....................................................................................... VII -8
Starting the Second Engine (BiG X 800 and BiG X 1000 only) ............................ VII -9
Pre-condition for Starting the Second Engine ...................................................... VII -9
Starting / Switching off the Second Engine before Cutting Operation .................. VII -9
Starting / Switching off the Second Engine during Cutting Operation ................ VII -10
Switching off the Second Engine ........................................................................ VII -10
Driving ................................................................................................................ VII -11
General aspects of driving .................................................................................. VII -11
Steering .............................................................................................................. VII -11
Contents
7.4.3
7.4.4
7.4.5
7.4.6
7.4.7
7.4.8
7.4.9
7.4.10
7.4.11
7.4.12
7.4.13
7.4.14
7.4.15
7.4.15
7.4.16
7.4.17
7.4.18
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.5.4
7.5.5
7.5.6
7.6
7.7
7.8
Starting the engine ............................................................................................. VII -12
Road/field mode ................................................................................................. VII -12
Switching the travelling gear on ......................................................................... VII -12
Release holding brake ....................................................................................... VII -12
Operating brake .................................................................................................. VII -13
Setting the acceleration behaviour ..................................................................... VII -13
Driving forwards ................................................................................................. VII -13
Reversing ........................................................................................................... VII -14
Quick stop .......................................................................................................... VII -14
Fast direction change (fast reversing) ................................................................. VII -14
Cruise control ..................................................................................................... VII -15
Constant-Power load limit control ....................................................................... VII -16
Autopilot ............................................................................................................. VII -17
All-wheel drive .................................................................................................... VII -19
Axle separation .................................................................................................. VII -19
Hydrostat system ................................................................................................ VII -20
Towing ................................................................................................................ VII -20
Fitting attachments ............................................................................................. VII -24
Adjusting the adapter frame ................................................................................ VII -24
Pendulum frame ................................................................................................. VII -25
Coupling ............................................................................................................. VII -25
Adjusting hydraulics of the forage harvester ....................................................... VII -28
Adjusting the lifting gear ..................................................................................... VII -29
Converting the grass channel grain conditioner ................................................. VII -31
Trailer operation.................................................................................................. VII -41
Registration plates ............................................................................................. VII -42
Connecting an Additional Silage Agent Dosing Unit .......................................... VII -43
8
Operation .................................................................... VIII -1
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
Road travel .......................................................................................................... VIII -1
Transport position ................................................................................................ VIII -1
Prior to travel ....................................................................................................... VIII -2
Travel ................................................................................................................... VIII -3
Field operation .................................................................................................... VIII -4
Lifting gear ........................................................................................................... VIII -4
Feed drive/front attachment ................................................................................. VIII -7
Cutting length and upper discharge chute ........................................................... VIII -8
Tips for optimising crop flow ................................................................................ VIII -9
Grinding the cutting blade.................................................................................. VIII -12
Measuring the humidity of the crop with the humidity-measuring device ........... VIII -15
Blowing device on the feed attachment ............................................................. VIII -17
Adjusting blowing times .................................................................................... VIII -17
Performing a functional test and monitoring set times ........................................ VIII -17
9
Maintenance ................................................................. IX -1
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.3.1
9.3.2
Special safety instructions ..................................................................................... IX -1
General Aspects .................................................................................................... IX -1
Maintenance of the supply system......................................................................... IX -2
Detaching the feed drive housing .......................................................................... IX -2
Attaching the feed drive housing ........................................................................... IX -6
Contents
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
9.3.6
9.3.7
9.3.8
9.3.9
9.3.10
9.3.11
9.3.12
9.4
9.4.1
9.5
9.5.1
9.5.2
9.5.3
9.5.4
9.5.5
9.5.6
9.5.7
9.5.8
9.6
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
9.7
9.7.1
9.7.2
9.7.3
9.7.4
9.7.5
9.7.6
9.8
9.8.1
9.8.2
9.9
9.10
9.11
9.11.1
9.11.2
9.11.3
9.11.4
9.12
9.12.1
9.12.2
9.12.3
9.12.4
9.12.5
9.12.6
Fold down the feed drive housing ......................................................................... IX -7
Maintenance jobs on the lifting gear while it is folded down or raised ................... IX -7
Adjusting or replacing the grindstone .................................................................... IX -8
Adjusting or replacing the cutting blade .............................................................. IX -10
Working with half the number of cutting blades ................................................... IX -12
Turning or replacing the counterblade ................................................................. IX -13
Conveyor bars of the front baling roller ................................................................ IX -14
Adjusting the scraper - smooth roller ................................................................... IX -14
Adjusting the baling roller - scraper ..................................................................... IX -15
Adjusting the tension springs of the feed drive housing....................................... IX -16
Crop track ............................................................................................................ IX -16
Access points to the crop track ............................................................................ IX -16
Engine maintenance ........................................................................................... IX -19
Overview of maintenance (DaimlerChrysler) Excerpt .......................................... IX -19
Important maintenance instructions ..................................................................... IX -20
Fuel system ......................................................................................................... IX -21
Fuel filter/water separator .................................................................................... IX -22
Fuel filter ............................................................................................................. IX -22
Engine oil ............................................................................................................ IX -23
Cooling system .................................................................................................... IX -24
Air filter ................................................................................................................ IX -26
Hydraulics maintenance ...................................................................................... IX -27
Special safety instructions ................................................................................... IX -27
System layout of work and brake hydraulics........................................................ IX -27
Hydraulic tank ..................................................................................................... IX -30
Gearbox maintenance ......................................................................................... IX -33
Checking the oil level and changing oil on the gearbox engine power drive ....... IX -33
Checking the oil level and changing the oil on the distributor gearbox ................ IX -35
Checking the oil level and changing the oil on the OM 460 fan gearbox ............. IX -35
Checking the oil level and changing the oil on the lower roller gearbox .............. IX -36
Checking the oil level and changing the oil on the upper roller gearbox ............. IX -37
Oil level check and oil change on the tower gearbox of the
upper discharge chute ......................................................................................... IX -37
Maintenance - Belt drives .................................................................................... IX -38
Main belt drive ..................................................................................................... IX -38
Screen drum drive ............................................................................................... IX -39
Windscreen washer system ................................................................................. IX -40
Fire extinguisher .................................................................................................. IX -40
Tyres .................................................................................................................... IX -41
Checking and servicing the tyres......................................................................... IX -41
Fitting tyres .......................................................................................................... IX -43
Wheel mounting .................................................................................................. IX -43
Fitting different tyres ............................................................................................ IX -43
Maintenance – electrical system ......................................................................... IX -44
Electrical equipment – technical data .................................................................. IX -44
Batteries .............................................................................................................. IX -44
Main battery switch .............................................................................................. IX -45
Battery – hazards when handling ........................................................................ IX -46
Cleaning the battery ............................................................................................ IX -46
Battery – checking the acid level ......................................................................... IX -46
Contents
9.12.7
9.12.8
9.12.9
9.12.10
9.12.11
9.12.12
9.13
9.14
9.14.1
9.14.2
9.13.2
9.14.3
9.14.4
9.14.5
9.14.8
9.14.6
9.14.7
9.14.9
9.14.10
9.14.11
9.15
9.16
9.17
9.18
9.19
9.19.1
9.19.2
9.19.3
9.19.4
9.19.5
9.19.6
9.19.7
9.19.8
9.19.9
9.19.10
9.19.11
9.19.12
9.20
9.20.1
9.20.2
9.21
9.21.1
9.21
Battery – measuring the acid density ................................................................... IX -47
Installing Batteries and Connecting Poles Correctly ............................................ IX -47
Three-phase generator ........................................................................................ IX -47
Starter.................................................................................................................. IX -48
Lights ................................................................................................................... IX -48
Control units and fuses ........................................................................................ IX -49
Maintenance – compressed air system ............................................................... IX -54
Maintenance – Air conditioning system and heating ........................................... IX -54
Special warnings ................................................................................................. IX -54
Components of the air conditioning system ......................................................... IX -54
Compressed air storage tank ............................................................................... IX -54
Data sheet of refrigerant R134a (extract) ............................................................. IX -55
Technical Data..................................................................................................... IX -55
Air intake and distribution .................................................................................... IX -56
Fresh air fan and circulation mode (cabin) ........................................................... IX -57
Refrigerant ........................................................................................................... IX -57
Manometric switch ............................................................................................... IX -57
Collector/Drier ..................................................................................................... IX -58
Checking the state of the refrigerant and the fill ................................................... IX -59
Capacitor ............................................................................................................. IX -60
Maintenance – central lubrication system (Vogel) ............................................... IX -61
Maintenance – central lubrication system
(BEKA-MAX) ....................................................................................................... IX -67
Lubricant ............................................................................................................. IX -71
Lubrication chart .................................................................................................. IX -72
Periodic maintenance .......................................................................................... IX -73
Maintenance during the running-in period ........................................................... IX -73
Every 10 operating hours .................................................................................... IX -73
After the first ten operating hours only ................................................................. IX -73
Up to the first fifty operating hours ....................................................................... IX -73
After the first 100 operating hours ........................................................................ IX -74
Every 250 operating hours .................................................................................. IX -74
Every 400 operating hours .................................................................................. IX -74
Every 500 operating hours .................................................................................. IX -74
Every 1500 operating hours ................................................................................ IX -75
As required .......................................................................................................... IX -75
Annually .............................................................................................................. IX -75
Every two years ................................................................................................... IX -75
Silage Agent System (Optional) .......................................................................... IX -76
Special Instructions for Using Silage Agents ....................................................... IX -76
Cleaning Work on the Silage Agent System ........................................................ IX -76
Cable Winch ........................................................................................................ IX -77
Replacing the Cable Winch ................................................................................. IX -77
Maintenance schedule ........................................................................................ IX -78
10
List of parameters BiG X 500......................................................... X - 1
11
Error messages ............................................................................. X - 10
Contents
General Aspects
1
General Aspects
These operating instructions contain fundamental
instructions. These must be observed in operation and
maintenance. For this reason, these operating
instructions must be read by operating personnel
before commissioning and use, and must be available
for easy reference.
1.2.4 Designation
Vehicle identification plate
The machine data are rendered on a type plate (1),
which is located on right front side of the machine.
Follow both the general safety instructions contained in
the section on safety and the specific safety
instructions contained in the other sections.
1.1 Purpose
The self-propelled forage harvester BiG X is used to
harvest and chop blades and leaves, maize and similar
crops, when provided with front attachments in the
works of the manufacturer.
1.2 Information on the product
1.2.1 General Aspects
1
Maschinenfabrik Bernard KRONE GmbH
Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10
D-48480 Spelle
Typ
Fahrzeugident-Nr.:
These operating instructions are valid for the selfpropelled forage harvester BiG X.
1.2.2 Address of the manufacturer:
Zul.Gesamtgewicht:
Zul.Achslast vorn:
Zul.Achslast hinten
Made in Germany
Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH
Heinrich-Krone-Str. 10
D-48480 Spelle (Germany)
Telephone: 0 59 77/935-0
Fax: 0 59 77/935-339
E-mail: [email protected]
BX500067
Type
1.2.3 Declaration
Vehicle ID No.
EC declaration of conformity corresponding to the EC
directive
See reverse side of title page
Year of
construction
Tank cover
key number
The entire identification plate
represents a legal document and
should not be altered or rendered
illegible!
I-1
General Aspects
Vehicle frame number
1.2.6 Intended Use
The vehicle frame number is located in the wheel
well of the right rear wheel.
The self-propelled forage harvester "BiG X" is intended
exclusively for the conventional use in agricultural or
similar work (intended use).
Any use of the machine for other purposes is deemed
not to be in accordance with specifications. The manufacturer shall not be liable for any resulting damage; the
user alone shall bear the risk.
Use as intended includes compliance with the operating,
maintenance and repair conditions specified by the manufacturer.
If unauthorised modifications are made to the machine,
the manufacturer is released from liability for any resulting damage.
BX100370
1.2.5 Information for enquiries and orders
When asking questions concerning the machine or
ordering spare parts, be sure to provide type
designation, vehicle ID number and the year of
construction.
Original spare parts and accessories
authorised by the manufacturer ensure
safe use. Use of other parts may void
the liability for any resulting damage.
I-2
General Aspects
1.2.7 Technical Data
Type
Motor manufacturer
Type of engine
Output at rpm
Cylinders
Stroke capacity
Harvesting attachment drive
Feed drive rollers/front baling rollers
Feed drive rollers drive
Cutting length
Gathering drum width
Diameter
Speed
Cutter arrangement/number of cutters
Cuts/min
Swivel range of discharge
Overload height
Travelling gear
Vmax at engine speed
1600 rpm
All-wheel drive
Spring-mounted steering axle
Comfort cab with driver information system
Air conditioning system
Air cushioned seat
Undercarriage
Drive axle tyres
BiG X 500
KW/HP
l
mm
mm
mm
rpm
mm
km/h
Tread
air pressure, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres
Steering axle tyres
air pressure, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres
Tread
Tightening torque for wheel nuts
Hydrostatic travelling gear
(speeds)
Nm
Drive pumps (double pump)
Wheel motors, front
Wheel motors, rear
Feed drive pump
Hydraulic engine feed drive
Front attachment pump
Hydraulic motor front attachment drive
Daimler-Chrysler
OM 460 LA
375 / 510
R-6
12,8
Hydraulic, continuous
6
Hydraulic
Continuous 4-21 mm
800
660
1,100
V-shaped 20 / 28
11.000 / 15.400
210°
approx. 6.000
Hydrostatic
40 km/h
standard
standard
standard
standard
standard
4 wheels
Direct drive provided by radial piston engines
Michelin
650/75 R32
Michelin
710/75 R34
Michelin
Michelin
Michelin
Michelin
800/65 R32
900/60 R32
18.4 R30 TL
600/70 R28
Michelin
710/55 R30
485 drive axle/485 steering axle
Level I axle separation:0 to 14 km/h continuous
Level II all-wheel drive:0 to 17 km/h continuous
Level III field mode:0 to 26 km/h continuous
Level IV road travel:0 to 40 km/h continuous
Connectable axle separation in stage I
Absorption volume 105/75 ccm pressure 430 bar
Switchable 3494/1774 ccm
not switchable 1259 ccm (old generation)
not switchable 1536 ccm (current)
Absorption volume 75 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 75 ccm
Absorption volume 55 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 55 ccm
I-3
General Aspects
Type
Motor manufacturer
Type of engine
Output at rpm
Cylinders
Stroke capacity
Harvesting attachment drive
Feed drive rollers/front baling rollers
Feed drive rollers drive
Cutting length
Gathering drum width
Diameter
Speed
Cutter arrangement/number of cutters
Cuts/min
Swivel range of discharge
Overload height
Travelling gear
Vmax at engine speed
1600 rpm
All-wheel drive
Spring-mounted steering axle
Comfort cab with driver information system
Air conditioning system
Air cushioned seat
Undercarriage
BiG X 650
KW/HP
l
mm
mm
mm
rpm
mm
km/h
Drive axle tyres
air pressure, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres
Tread
Steering axle tyres
air pressure, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres
Tread
Tightening torque for wheel nuts
Level I axle separation:
(speeds)
Nm
Drive pumps (double pump)
Wheel motors, front
Wheel motors, rear
Feed drive pump
Hydraulic engine feed drive
Front attachment pump
Hydraulic motor front attachment drive
I-4
Daimler-Chrysler
OM 502LA
480/650
V-8
16
Hydraulic, continuous
6
Hydraulic
Continuous 4-22 mm
800
660
1,100
V-shaped 20/28/40
11,000/15,400/22,000
210°
approx. 6,000
Hydrostatic
40 km/h
standard
standard
standard
standard
standard
4 wheels
Direct drive provided by radial piston engines
Michelin
650/65 R32
Michelin
800/65 R32TL
Michelin
900/60 R32 TL
Michelin
710/75 R34 TL
Michelin
18.4 R30
Michelin
600/70 R28 TL
Michelin
710/55 R30 TL
485 drive axle/360 steering axle
0 to 14 km/h continuous
Level II all-wheel drive:0 to 17 km/h continuous
Level III field mode:0 to 26 km/h continuous
Level IV road travel:0 to 40 km/h continuous
Connectable axle separation in stage I
Absorption volume 105/75 ccm pressure 430 bar
Switchable 4250/1500 ccm
Switchable 2099/1049 ccm
Absorption volume 105 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 75 ccm
Absorption volume 55 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 55 ccm
General Aspects
Type
Motor manufacturer
Type of engine
Output at rpm
Cylinders
Stroke capacity
Harvesting attachment drive
Feed drive rollers/front baling rollers
Feed drive rollers drive
Cutting length
Gathering drum width
Diameter
Speed
Cutter arrangement/number of cutters
Cuts/min
Swivel range of discharge
Overload height
Travelling gear
Vmax at engine speed
1600 rpm
All-wheel drive
Spring-mounted steering axle
Comfort cab with driver information system
Air conditioning system
Air cushioned seat
Undercarriage
Drive axle tyres
BiG X 800
KW/HP
l
mm
mm
mm
rpm
mm
km/h
Tread
air pressure, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres
Steering axle tyres
air pressure, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres
Tread
Tightening torque for wheel nuts
Level I axle separation:
(speeds)
Nm
Drive pumps (double pump)
Wheel motors, front
Wheel motors, rear
Feed drive pump
Hydraulic engine feed drive
Front attachment pump
Hydraulic motor front attachment drive
Daimler-Chrysler
1x OM 926 LA 1x OM 460 LA
240 / 326
375 / 510
R-6
9,6 12,8
Hydraulic, continuous
6
Hydraulic
Continuous 4-20 mm
800
660
1.200 1.100
V-shaped 28 / 40 20
16.800 / 24.000 11.000 / 15.400 / 22.000
210°
approx. 6.000
Hydrostatic
40 km/h
standard
standard
standard
standard
standard
4 wheels
Direct drive provided by radial piston engines
Michelin
650/75 R32
Michelin
710/75 R34
Michelin
Michelin
Michelin
Michelin
800/65 R32
900/60 R32
18.4 R30
600/70 R28
Michelin
710/55 R30
485 drive axle/485 steering axle
0 to 14 km/h continuous
Level II all-wheel drive:0 to 17 km/h continuous
Level III field mode:0 to 26 km/h continuous
Level IV road travel:0 to 40 km/h continuous
Connectable axle separation in stage I
Absorption volume 135/75 ccm pressure 430 bar
Switchable 5133/3300/1833 ccm
Switchable 2808/1404 ccm
Absorption volume 105 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 75 ccm
Absorption volume 55 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 55 ccm
I-5
General Aspects
Type
Motor manufacturer
Type of engine
Output at rpm
Cylinders
Stroke capacity
Harvesting attachment drive
Feed drive rollers/front baling rollers
Feed drive rollers drive
Cutting length
Gathering drum width
Diameter
Speed
Cutter arrangement/number of cutters
Cuts/min
Swivel range of discharge
Overload height
Travelling gear
Vmax at engine speed
1600 rpm
All-wheel drive
Spring-mounted steering axle
Comfort cab with driver information system
Air conditioning system
Air cushioned seat
Undercarriage
Drive axle tyres
BiG X 1000
KW/HP
l
mm
mm
mm
rpm
mm
km/h
Tread
air pressure, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres
Steering axle tyres
air pressure, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres
Tread
Tightening torque for wheel nuts
Level I axle separation:
(speeds)
Nm
Drive pumps (double pump)
Wheel motors, front
Wheel motors, rear
Feed drive pump
Hydraulic engine feed drive
Front attachment pump
Hydraulic motor front attachment drive
I-6
Daimler-Chrysler
2 x OM 460 LA
375 / 510
R-6
12,8
Hydraulic, continuous
6
Hydraulic
Continuous 4-20 mm
800
660
1,200
V-shaped 28 / 40
16.800 / 24.000
210°
approx. 6.000
Hydrostatic
40 km/h
standard
standard
standard
standard
standard
4 wheels
Direct drive provided by radial piston engines
Michelin
650/75 R32
Michelin
710/75 R34
Michelin
Michelin
Michelin
Michelin
800/65 R32
900/60 R32
18.4 R30
600/70 R28
Michelin
710/55 R30
485 drive axle/485 steering axle
0 to 14 km/h continuous
Level II all-wheel drive:0 to 17 km/h continuous
Level III field mode:0 to 26 km/h continuous
Level IV road travel:0 to 40 km/h continuous
Connectable axle separation in stage I
Absorption volume 135/75 ccm pressure 430 bar
Switchable 5133/3300/1833 ccm
Switchable 2808/1404 ccm
Absorption volume 135 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 75 ccm
Absorption volume 55 ccm pressure 430 bar
Absorption volume 55 ccm
General Aspects
H
1.2.7.1 Dimensions
L
B
BX100001
Length L (mm)
Width B (mm)
Height H (mm)
Depending on version
min
max
min
max
min
max
8335
9440
3200
3455
3990
4000
I-7
General Aspects
1.2.8 Weights
I-8
General Aspects
1.2.9 Consumables
Quantities
Litres
Diesel tank
Big X 500/650
Big X 800/1000
Filtered oils
Brand name
Bio-degradable
lubricants
Brand name
Approx. 960
approx. 960
approx. 1150
Diesel fuel (DIN EN 590)
Please observe the operating instructions
of the engine manufacturer!
*
Engine oil 10W40
Please observe the operating instructions
of the engine manufacturer!
Engine oil
Hydraulic oil
Approx. 150
HLP 46
Coolant
Approx. 60
Anti-freeze ( 30 litres) /water (30 litres)
Mixing ratio 50:50
Please observe the operating
instructions of theengine manufacturer!
Gear of power takeoff
BiG X 500
BiG X 650,800,1000
BiG X 800/1000
Distributor gearbox
13,5
10,0
23.0 initial filling**
8.0
HE 46 (on request)
Gear oil PGLP DIN 51502
ISO viscosity Class (220)
Fan gear
Lower roller gear
Lower roller gear
Upper tower
1.7
5.0
1.6
Gear oil PGLP DIN 51502
ISO viscosity Class (220)
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
Upper roller gear
tower gearbox on the
upper discharge chute
3.6
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
1,0
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
* See accompanying documents ** After a runtime of 5 min., top up the transmission oil up
(DaimlerChrysler)
to the middle of the inspection window.
As a general rule, the oils listed in the chapter on
maintenance/hydraulic can be used as well.
Do not mix different types of oil!
Viscosity class ISO VG 46.
Vegetable oil cannot be used.
Ask our after-sales department about
the use of other oils.
1.2.10
•
•
•
•
•
•
Accompanying documents
Engine operating instructions (DaimlerChrysler)
Engine maintenance manual (DaimlerChrysler)
Engine parts catalogue (DaimlerChrysler)
Directives on consumables (DaimlerChrysler)
List of spares parts BiG X (Krone)
Operating instructions of the central lubrication
system (Vogel)
All information, illustrations and technical data in
this operating manual are in keeping with the latest
state of technology at the point of publication.
Design subject to modifications at any time without
any stated reason.
I-9
General Aspects
I - 10
Safety
2
Safety
2.1 Identifying important
information in the Operating
Instructions
Important safety instructions in the present operating
instructions are identified with the general hazard
symbol. Non-observance of these safety instructions
may result in personal injury:
Safety symbol as per DIN 4844 - W9
General functional instructions are indicated as follows:
2.2 Safety instructions and
accident prevention
regulations
2.2.1 Personnel qualification and training
The self-propelled forage harvester BiG X may be
used, maintained and repaired only by persons who are
familiar with it and have been informed of the hazards
involved. The operator must define areas of
responsibility and arrange the monitoring of the
personnel. Should personnel lack the required
knowledge, they must receive the required training and
instruction. The operator must ensure that the contents
of these operating instructions have been fully
understood by personnel.
Repair work not described in these operating
instructions must only be carried out by authorised
service centres.
2.2.2 Dangers in case of non-compliance
with the Safety Instructions
Instructions affixed directly to the machine must be
complied with and kept in a completely legible
condition by all means. If illegible, they must be
replaced.
Failure to follow the safety instructions could result in
personal injury and environmental hazards as well as
damage to the machine. Failure to comply with the
safety instructions can lead to the forfeiture of any
claims for damages.
If the safety instructions are not respected, this may
result, for example, in the following hazards:
– Danger to persons through improperly safeguarded
working areas
– Failure of important functions of the machine
– Failure of compulsory procedures for maintenance
and repair
– Danger to persons due to detrimental mechanical
and chemical effects
– Danger to the environment due to leaking hydraulic
oil
2.2.3 Safety-conscious work practices
Always observe the safety instructions set out in these
operating instructions, all existing accident prevention
rules and any internal work, operating and safety rules
issued by the operator.
The safety and accident prevention regulations issued
by the responsible professional associations are
binding.
The safety instructions of the vehicle manufacturer
must be complied with.
II - 1
Safety
Always observe the applicable traffic laws when using
public roads (for example, in Germany, the Road
Traffic Type Approval Law and Road Traffic Law).
13. Check and attach transport equipment, such as
lighting, warning devices and any protective
equipment!
Be prepared for emergencies. Always store the fire
extinguisher and the first-aid kit close at hand.
Always keep the numbers for emergency calls to
physicians and the fire department ready at the
telephone.
14. Actuating mechanisms (ropes, chains, rods, etc.)
of remotely operated devices must be run so that
they do not trigger unintended movements in any
transport and working positions.
2.2.4 Safety and accident prevention
regulations
1. In addition to the instructions in these operating
instructions, you must comply with the generally
applicable safety and accident prevention
regulations!
2. The warning and safety signs affixed to the vehicle
provide important information for safe operation.
For your own safety always pay attention to these!
15. Ensure that implements are in the prescribed
condition for road travel and lock them according to
the instructions of the manufacturer!
16. Never leave the driver’s seat when the vehicle is
moving!
17. Always drive at the correct speed for the prevailing
driving conditions! Avoid sudden changes in
direction when travelling uphill or downhill or across
a gradient!
3. When using public roads, make sure that you
observe the applicable traffic regulations!
18. Implements and ballast weights attached to the
vehicle affect its driving, steering and braking
response. For this reason, make sure that you are
able to steer the machine and brake as required!
4. Make sure that you are familiar with all equipment
and controls as well as their functions before you
begin working with the machine. It is too late to
learn this when you are operating the machine!
19. Take into account the extension radius and/or
inertia of an implement when turning corners!
5. Users must wear close-fitting clothes. Avoid
wearing loose or baggy clothing. Wear protective
gloves when performing work in the vicinity of the
crop conveying mechanisms.
6. Keep the machine clean to prevent the danger of
fire!
7. Before starting or moving the machine, make
certain that nobody is in the vicinity of the
machine! (Watch out for children!) Make sure that
you have a clear view!
8. You may carry passengers during operation and
transport on the working implement only if they use
the passenger seat provided.
9. Attach implements correctly! Only attach and
secure implements to the prescribed devices!
10. When attaching or removing implements, place the
supporting devices in the correct positions!
11. Always attach ballast weights properly to the fixing
points provided!
12. Observe permitted axle loads, gross weight and
transport dimensions!
II - 2
20. Start up implements only when all protective
devices have been attached and set in the required
position!
21. Always keep the safety equipment in good working
order. Replace missing or damaged parts.
22. Keep out of the working range of the machine at all
times!
23. Do not stay in the swivel and ejecting range of the
ejector!
24. Hydraulic hinged frames/lifting equipment may be
operated only if no persons are in the swivel range!
25. Parts operated by external power (e.g. hydraulics)
can cause crushing and shearing injuries!
26. Before leaving the forage harvester, lower the front
attachments onto the ground, apply the holding
brake, switch off the engine and remove the
ignition key!
27. There must not be anyone between the forage
harvester and the front attachment without the
vehicle being secured against rolling off through the
holding brake and/or wheel chocks!
Safety
2.2.5 Self-propelled work machine
2.2.6 Autopilot
1. When driving on public roads, the hazard warning
lights or the revolving signal light and the excess
width identification equipment must be used in
compliance with the applicable national traffic
regulations.
1. The autopilot must only be used for its intended
purpose. It must only be used in open fields, off
public and semi-public roads, away from open
areas frequented by people and far away from any
persons that could be endangered. They must only
be used for their intended purpose:
• Automatic forage harvester guiding on
a stalk-line row of plants.
2. Switch on the lights so that the vehicle can be
easily recognised.
3. Safety equipment.
4. Always check the machine for driving and
operational safety before use.
5. Hold on to the hand grip when getting on and off
the forage harvester.
6. It is not permitted to transport people on the
platform.
7. The road safety switch must be in road position
during road travel to ensure that all hydraulic
functions - except for the steering and brakes – are
deactivated.
8. Only drive the machine at the permitted speed.
9. Implements must be in transport position and
locked in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions for road driving.
10. If the engine is running in an enclosed space,
divert the exhaust fumes and ensure sufficient
ventilation.
11. When using starting fluid, avoid ignition sources
and naked flames. Keep starting fluid clear of
batteries and electrical cables.
12. When passing through corners, always take into
consideration the width of the front attachment and
the fact that the rear of the forage harvester will
swivel out. The condition of the ground influences
the driving properties of the forage harvester.
13. Drive with care if you notice pits, ditches and
obstacles; they can cause the forage harvester to
overturn. This is particularly important on slopes.
2. Before placing autopilot in service, its full
functionality must be verified and all its modules
checked.
To do this, the user should proceed as follows:
- Check switching off of the autopilot when the
steering wheel is moved and the door contact
switch engages (open the door).
- Check for proper operating condition - i.e. free of
mechanical damages and leaks – row tracers,
wheel angle transmitter as well as all visible hoses
and wiring.
3. When the autopilot is in operation, there must be on
one within 50 m of the forage harvester in any
direction.
4. The operator is not permitted to leave the driver’s
cabin while the autopilot is in operation.
5. While the autopilot is in operation, the driver must
regularly check the direction in which the machine
is moving and its travel path to be able to take over
manual control of the harvest forager immediately if
obstructions or interruptions come up in the
vehicle’s path.
6. After the autopilot has been in operation and before
leaving the field, the autopilot must always be
switched off on the autopilot release switch on the
console.
7. Manipulating safety-related elements of the
autopilot is prohibited, as is making changes to the
hydraulic, electrical or electronic components.
8. The autopilot should only be installed by an
authorised service centre.
II - 3
Safety
2.2.7 Implements
1. Caution! Once the drives have been switched off,
a hazard remains from the flywheel which
continues to turn by inertia! Keep away from the
implement during this time. Be sure that the
machine has come to a complete stop before
starting any maintenance work!
2. Cleaning, lubricating and adjusting the implements
must be carried out only when the drive is switched
off, the engine switched off and the ignition key
removed!
2.2.8 PTO operation
1. Only PTO shafts specified by the manufacturer
may be used!
2. The protective tube and protective funnel of the
PTO shaft as well as the PTO shield - also on the
implement end - must be attached and in proper
condition!
13. Caution! After switching off the PTO, there is
danger due to the inertia of the flywheel mass!
Keep away from the implement during this time. Be
sure that the machine has come to a complete
stop before starting any maintenance work.
14. Cleaning, lubricating or adjusting PTO driven
implements or the PTO shaft only with PTO
disengaged, engine switched off and ignition key
withdrawn!
15. Place the uncoupled PTO shaft on the holder
provided!
16. After detaching the PTO shaft, fit the protective
sleeve on the PTO stump!
17. Immediately repair any damage before working with
the implement!
2.2.9 Hydraulic system
1. The hydraulic system is pressurised!
3. Make sure that the required tube covers for PTO
shafts are in place in transport and working
position!
2. When connecting hydraulic cylinders and motors,
make sure the hydraulic hoses are connected as
specified!
4. Before installing or detaching PTO shafts, switch
off the PTO shaft, turn the engine off and remove
the ignition key!
3. When connecting the hydraulic hoses to the forage
harvester hydraulics, take care that the hydraulic
system is depressurised both on the tractor side
and on the device side!
5. When using PTO shafts with an overload or freewheel coupling that is not covered by the protective
equipment on the tractor, the overload or free-wheel
couplings must be attached to the device!
6. Always make sure that the PTO shafts are
mounted correctly and secured properly!
7. Secure the PTO shaft guard against turning by
hooking in the chains!
8. Before switching on the PTO shaft, make sure that
the selected PTO shaft speed of the tractor agrees
with the permissible speed of the device!
9. Before switching on the PTO shaft make sure that
no person is in the hazard area of the device!
4. When functions are connected hydraulically between
the forage harvester and the front attachment,
coupling sleeves and plugs should be identified so
that faulty operation is excluded! If the connectors
are interchanged, the functions will be reversed (e.g.
raising/lowering) - Risk of accident!
5. Check the hydraulic hose lines at regular intervals
and replace them if damaged or worn! The
replacement hose lines must meet the technical
requirements of the device manufacturer!
6. When searching for leaks, use suitable aids to
avoid the risk of injuries!
10. Never switch on the PTO with the engine switched
off!
7. Liquids escaping under high pressure (hydraulic oil)
can penetrate the skin and cause serious injury! In
the case of injuries, seek medical assistance
immediately. Risk of infection!
11. While working with the PTO, nobody is permitted to
stay in the range of the turning PTO or PTO shaft.
8. Before working on the hydraulic system,
depressurise the system and switch off the engine!
12. Always switch off the PTO in the case of
excessive bending and if the PTO is not required!
II - 4
Safety
2.2.10 Battery
1. Maintenance work on the batteries requires
sufficient knowledge and mounting tools according
to the instructions.
2. Keep naked flames, burning matches and spark
sources clear of the battery. Risk of explosion!
3. Never check the charging level of the battery by
connecting the two poles with a metal object. Use
an acid tester or voltmeter.
4. Never charge a frozen battery. Explosion hazard!
Warm the battery to 16 °C beforehand.
5. Battery acid can cause severe injuries by burning
your skin and eyes. For this reason, wear suitable
protective clothing.
2.2.14 Working in the vicinity of power
transmission lines
1. Always take great care when working under or in
the vicinity of power transmission lines.
2. Please remember that during operation of the
forage harvester, the overall height of 4 m is
exceeded considerably due to the upper discharge
chute.
3. If there is any need to travel under overhead lines,
the machine operator must request information on
the rated voltage and the minimum height of the
overhead lines from the overhead line operator.
4. Always keep the safety distances according to the
table.
Rated voltage
2.2.11 Cooling system
A heated cooling system is pressurised –
Burning hazard! For this reason, only remove the
radiator cap with the engine switched off and after
the engine has been able to cool.
2.2.12 Tyres
1. When working on the tyres, make sure that the
device is in a safe position and has been secured
against rolling (wheel chocks).
2. You must have adequate knowledge and the proper
tools to undertake the work of fitting wheels and
tyres!
3. Repair work on the tyres and wheels should only be
carried out by specially trained personnel and only
tools appropriate to the job should be used!
4. Check tyre pressure regularly! Inflate the tyres to
the recommended pressures!
5. Check the wheel nuts periodically! Missing wheel
nuts can result in a wheel falling off and the
machine tipping over.
2.2.13 Emergency exit
There is an emergency hammer in the cab. In
emergency situations, you can use it to smash the
cabin window.
kV
to
1
Above
1 to 110
Above 101 to 220
Above 220 to 380
Safe distance from
overhead lines
m
1
2
3
4
2.2.15 Fire prevention measures
1. Before starting to work, make sure the fire
extinguisher is in a condition according to the
regulations and familiarise yourself with how to use
it.
2. The associated fire extinguisher must be serviced
periodically. If it was used, it must always be
refilled, even if you only used it very briefly.
3. To avoid fire hazards, always keep the forage
harvester clean! In particular remove any crop
wound around rotating parts.
4. The forage harvester is also used to process very
dry crop (hay, straw), which constitutes an
imminent fire hazard.
5. The fire hazard can be reduced by removing
accumulated crop from the machine several times
a day (interval depends on the type of crop) and
checking the machine components for overheating.
Check for oil leaks or exiting oil and take corrective
action. Heed the lubricating instructions. Take
special care when regrinding the cutting blades –
fire hazard due to flying sparks! Before regrinding
the blades, clear the vicinity of the machine of any
crop/substances that may catch fire!
II - 5
Safety
6. Frequently check the hydraulic oil lines thoroughly
for proper condition and position with sufficient
clearance to contact edges that may be sharp.
7. Check the vicinity of the hot zones of the engine,
the exhaust system and pipes and the turbo
charger, and remove crop residues.
8. Take great care when handling fuels. Never fill in
fuel in the vicinity of unshielded flames or sparks
that may cause ignition. Do not smoke when filling
in fuel! Extreme fire hazard.
2.2.16 Maintenance
1. Always perform repair, maintenance and cleaning
work as well as troubleshooting only when the drive
is switched off and the engine stopped!
- Remove the ignition key!
2. The audio coastdown alarm, which is sounded after
the main drive is switched off, does not relieve the
operator of the obligation to make certain the
machine is at an absolute standstill before working
on it.
3. Regularly check that nuts and bolts are properly
seated and tighten them if necessary!
4. When performing maintenance work with the
implement raised, always secure it with suitable
supporting elements.
5. When replacing working tools with cutting edges,
use suitable tools and gloves!
6. Dispose of oils, greases and filters according to
the regulations!
7. Always disconnect the power supply before
working on the electrical system!
8. If protective devices and guards are subject to
wear, check them regularly and replace them in
good time!
9. When performing repair and electric welding work
on the forage harvester, always switch off the
engine, disconnect the power supply via the battery
power switch and disconnect the plug of the
electric system from the PLD controller on the
engine!
10. Replacement parts must, as a minimum, comply
with the technical requirements set by the
manufacturer of the implements!
This is ensured by using genuine KRONE
replacement parts!
11. Use only nitrogen for filling pneumatic
accumulators - Explosion hazard!
II - 6
2.2.17 Telephones and radio sets
Telephones and radio equipment not connected to an
external antenna may cause malfunctions in the
electronic system of the vehicle and thus jeopardising
the operating safety of the vehicle.
2.2.18 Unauthorised conversion/
modification and manufacture of
spare parts
Modifications to the machine are permitted only with
the prior approval of the manufacturer. Original spare
parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer
ensure safe use. The use of other parts may void the
liability for any consequential damage.
2.2.19 Non-permissible modes of
operation
The operational safety of the machine is only
guaranteed if it is used for its intended purpose in
accordance with the Chapter "General Information" of
these operating instructions. The limit values stated in
the data sheets must not be exceeded under any
circumstances.
Safety
2.3 Safety instructions on the
machine
The self-propelled forage harvester BiG X is equipped
with all the required safety equipment (protective
devices). However, it is not possible to eliminate all
potential hazards on this machine since to do so would
impair its full functional capability. You will find
corresponding hazard warnings on the machine that point
out the residual risks.
We have implemented the hazard warnings in the form of
warning pictograms.
In the following, you will find important information on the
locations of these warning pictograms and an associated
description/supplementation!
Familiarise yourself with the statement
of the warning pictograms.
The adjacent text and the selected
location on the machine provide
information on the special danger spots
on the machine.
II - 7
Safety
2.3.1 Location of the warning pictograms on the machine
1 3 9 10 14
7
5
2 3 11
6 7
6 7
4
7
8
7
12
14
7 11
13
12
16
8
15
16
BX500062
Left-hand side and front of the machine
8
8
9
14
5
12
12
16
12
16
BX500063
Right-hand side and rear of the machine
II - 8
Safety
1
Before placing the machine
into operation, read the
operating instructions and
safety instructions. Both
must be heeded.
Order No. 939 471-1 (1x)
3
2
Before performing
maintenance and repair work,
switch off the engine and
remove the ignition key.
Order No. 942 289-0 (1x)
4
Keep sufficient distance to
rotating machine parts.
Keep the stipulated safe
distance to power
transmission lines.
Order No. 942 293-0 (2x)
5
Order No. 942 200-1 (1x)
6
Burning hazard! Hot
surface, keep sufficient
distance.
While performing grinding work, keep your
distance. Close the protective cover once
you have completed the grinding work.
Order No. 942 210-0 (2x)
Order No. 942 294-0 (1x)
7
Never touch any moving
machine parts.
Wait until they have come
to a complete stop.
Order No. 939 410-2 (6x)
8
The pressure accumulator is under gas and
oil pressure.
Always perform dismounting and repair work
exclusively in compliance with the
instructions in the technical manual.
Order No. 939 529-0 (4x)
II - 9
Safety
1 3 9 10 14
7
5
2 3 11
6 7
6 7
4
7
8
7
12
14
7 11
13
12
16
8
15
16
BX500062
Left-hand side and front of the machine
8
8
9
14
5
12
12
16
12
16
BX500063
Right-hand side and rear of the machine
II - 10
Safety
9
10
It is impermissible to carry
passengers on ladder
steps or platforms.
The machine may be taken into
operation only when a suitable fire
extinguisher is at hand.
Order No. 942 291-0 (2x)
Order No. 942 290-0 (1x)
11
12
Before parking the
machine, secure it with
wheel chocks against
unintended rolling.
Order No. 942 250-0 (1x)
Do not open or remove the
protective equipment when
the engine is running.
Order No. 942 002-4 (5x)
12 Volt - Netz
13
When performing welding
work, switch off the power
switch and disconnect the
plug of the PLD engine timer
from the engine block!
Bei Schwei arbeiten
ist der Hauptschalter
auszuschalten und
die Stecker der
Motorregelung PLD
am Motorblock
abzuziehen!
942 409-0
Order No. 942 409-0 (1x)
15
E
F
GB
I
When performing welding
work, switch off the power
switch and disconnect the
plug of the PLD engine timer
from the engine block!
12 Volt - Netz
Bei Schwei arbeiten
ist der Hauptschalter
auszuschalten und
die Stecker der
Motorregelung PLD
am Motorblock
abzuziehen! 942 408-0
Order No. 942 408-0 (1x)
942 441 -0
D
14
Kugelhahn nur bei kpl. abgesenktem Hubwerk
betätigen.
El grifo de bola solamente deberá operarse después
de haber bajado totalmente el elevador hidráulico.
N'agir sur le robinet à boisseau sphérique qu'après
avoir abaissé totalement le relevage hydraulique.
16
Stop points
The ball cock should only be operated with the
power lift totally lowered.
Azionare il rubinetto a sfera solo dopo aver
abbassato completamente il sollevatore.
Order No. 942 012-1 (4x)
Order No. 942 441-0 (1x)
II - 11
Safety
10
9
12
4
10
1
3
11
10
5
3
2
3
1
13 14
8
17
BX500501
7
3
1
6
10
BX500502
15
16
II - 12
Safety
1
DANGER
2
DANGER
Avoid blade contact injury
Rotating knives can
cause serious injury
or death.
Sounding alarm means
cutterhead and blower are
turning. Do not open access
doors or try to access
cutterhead or blower area.
Alarm will not sound if engine
is running and operator is
seated. Do not open access
door while engine is running.
Never operate enginge
with feedroll housing
open.
942 543-0
942 540-0
942 540 -0
(3) Required
942 543 -0
(1) Required
WARNING
3
WARNING
4
Components behind guards or access
doors in this area may rotate several
minutes after power is shut off.
To avoid bodily injury:
942 549 -0
(3) Required
942 549 -0
DANGER
5
942 536 -0
(1) Required
1. Look and listen for rotation evidence.
2. Do not open or remove guard or
access door until all components
habe stopped.
942 536 -0
ACHTUNG
ATTENTION
6
1. ALLE SCHUTZVORRICHTUNEN
MÜSSEN ANGEBRACHT SEIN.
2. VOR DEM WARTEN ODER REINIGEN
DER MASCHINE ALLE ANTRIEBE
AUSKUPPELN UND MOTOR ABSTELLEN.
Avoid death or serious injurj from
entanglement in feed roll.
The harvester takes crop faster
than you can release it.
NEVER feed with hands or feet use
as a manually-fed stationary machine.
Disengage drives and shut off engine
before manually unplugging.
1. PLACER TOUS LES ÉCRANS DE
PROTECTION.
2. DEBRAYER TOUTES LES COMMANDES
ET ARRÊTER LE MOTEUR POUR TOUS
TRAVAUX DE SERVICE ET ENTRETIEN
DE LA MACHINE.
1. KEEP ALL SHIELDS IN PLACE.
2. DISSENGAGE ALL POWER AND SHUT
OFF ENGINE BEFORE SERVICING
OR CLEANING MACHINE:
942 556 -0
942 556 -0
(1) Required
942 550 0
(1) Required
7
Avoid bodily injuries
from rotating knives.
Keep hands out of knife
area when cutter head
is turning.
1. COLOCAR TODAS AS TAMPAS DE
PROTECÇÃO.
2. COLOCAR TODAS AS ALAVANCAS DE
COMANDO EM PONTO MORTO E
PARAR O MOTOR SEMPRE QUE SE
EFECTUAR QUALQUER TRABALHO DE
REPARAÇÃO E MANUTENÇÃO DA
MAQUINA.
942 550 -0
WARNING
8
EMERGENCY
EXIT
Avoid severe injury to eyes
and skin from sulfuric acid.
942 537 -0
Wear face mask, gloves and
goggles when servicing battery.
942 538 -0
942 537 -0
(1) Required
942 538 -0
(1) Required
II - 13
Safety
10
9
12
4
10
1
3
11
10
5
3
2
3
1
13 14
8
17
BX500501
7
3
1
6
10
BX500502
15
16
II - 14
Safety
DANGER
9
10
DANGER
Prevent blade contact injury
This machie has a cutterhead / blower
rotation alarm. Do not remove
cutterhead or blower doors or try to
access area if alarm is sounding
Alarm will not sound if engine is
running and operator is seated. Do not
allow others to access cutterhead or
blower area until engine is off and
alarm has stopped sounding.
Periodically test alarm according to
operator´s manual.
942 541 -0
942 547 -0
(1) Required
11
942 542 -0
(1) Required
To avoid injury or death,
do not contact electric
942 547 -0
lines.
CAUTION
942 541 -0
(5) Required
12
Before operating machine, add
rear ballast as specified in
Operaror´s Manual. Failure to
add proper amount of ballast
can result in vehicle instability
and loss of steering control.
WARNING
942 546 -0
(2) Required
942 542-0
942 546 -0
14
13
CAUTION
942 551 -0
(1) Required
Avoid bodily injury from
rotating engine fan.
Keep hands out of fan
discharge area when
engine is running.
CAUTION
1. Keep all shields in place.
2. Disengage and shut off all
engine and/or motor power
before servicing or uncloggin machine.
3. Keep hand, feet and clothing away from power942 551 -0
driven parts.
15
Avoid bodily injury.
Before searching for metal:
1. Disengage all drives.
942 552 -0
(1) Required
2. Shut off engine. Remove key.
3. Wait until all parts stop moving.
942 552 -0
16
WARNING
WARNING
Av o i d b o d i l y i n j u r i e s f r o m h y d r a u l i c o i l a n d g a s
under pressure.
Before removing, disassembling or charging parking
brake accumulator or removing hydraulic lines or
disassembling electro-hydraulic valve stack:
Av o i d b o d i l y i n j u r i e s f r o m h y d r a u l i c o i l a n d g a s
under pressure.
Before removing, disassembling or charging service
brake accumulator or removing hydraulic lines or
disassembling electro-hydraulic valve stack:
1. Switch ignition on without starting engine
2. Activate the parking brake and
release it again as so many times as
necessary until there is no more motion
o f t h e s p r i n g l o a d e d p a r k i n g b r a k e z y l i n d e r.
3. Switch ignition off
1. Switch ignition on without starting engine.
2. Press the brake pedal down so far as it will go
and release it several times.
3 . C h e c k i n t h e " S e n s o r Te s t " f u n c t i o n w h e t h e r t h e
system is depressurised.
3. Switch ignition off.
U s e o n l y d r y n i t r o g e n f o r r e c h a r g i n g a c c u m u l a t o r.
S e e y o u r K R O N E d e a l e r.
942-539-0
U s e o n l y d r y n i t r o g e n f o r r e c h a r g i n g a c c u m u l a t o r.
S e e y o u r K R O N E d e a l e r.
942-545-0
942 539 -0
(1) Required
942 545 -0
(1) Required
II - 15
Safety
10
9
12
4
10
1
3
11
10
5
3
2
3
1
13 14
8
17
BX500501
7
3
1
6
10
BX500502
15
16
II - 16
Safety
17
WARNING
Avoid bodily injuries from hydraulic oil and gas
under pressure.
Before removing, disassembling or charging lift
system accumulator or removing hydraulic lines or
disassembling electro-hydraulic valve stack:
1. Start engine and press switch for header down
for 20 seconds after rollerbox or header is
on the ground or in a supported position to
relieve system hydraulic pressure
2. Stop engine
Use only dry nitrogen for recharging accumulator.
See your KRONE dealer.
942-544-0
942 544 -0
(1) Required
II - 17
Safety
2.3.2 Location of general labels on the machine
6
2
3
1
7
10
8
9
10
7
4
BX500064
Left-hand side and front of the machine
3
2
6
6
9
3
3
4
10
8 11
10
7
4
2 23 4
7
BX500065
Right-hand side and rear of the machine
II - 18
Safety
1
2
942 434 0 (1x)
942 393 0 (2x), length of 1400, beige
942 392 0 (2x), length of 1250, green
4
3
27 000 342 0 (2x) H= 68 anthrazit
27 000 343 0 (2x) H= 190 anthrazit
27 000 344 0 (2x) H= 68 anthrazit
27 000 345 0 (2x) H= 190 anthrazit
27 001 160 0 (2x) H= 68 anthrazit
27 001 161 0 (2x) H= 190 anthrazit
942 395 0 (2x), length of 1098, green
942 394 0 (2x), length of 395, green
27 001 162 0 (2x) H= 68 anthrazit
27 001 163 0 (2x) H= 190 anthrazit
7
6
40
924 569 0 (4x)
939 145 1 (3x)
9
8
942 038-1
942 134 0 (2x)
942 038 1 (4x)
mit / with
mit / with
mit / with
EasyCollect EasyCollect EasyCollect
6000
7500
9000 *
(bar)
(bar)
(bar)
40
25
2,4
3,2
3,2
2,4
10
6
1,4
1,7
1,9
1,4
40
max.
(bar)
Achse
axle
Bereifungstyp
wheel type
km/h mp/h
3,2
650/75 R 32 172A8
25
1,6
2,4
2,4
1,6
10
6
1,0
1,2
1,4
1,0
40
25
1,6
2,4
2,4
1,6
40
2,4
710/75 R 34 178A8
2,4
800/65 R 32 172A8
10
6
40
25
10
6
1,0
1,2
1,4
1,4
1,8
2,0
1,4
1,0
1,0
1,2
1,0
25
/
Big X 1000
mit / with
Easyflow 3001
mit / with
mit / with
mit / with
oder / or
EasyCollect EasyCollect EasyCollect max.
Solomaschine 6000 / 753
7500 / 903 9000 * / 1053 * (bar)
solo machine
(bar)
(bar)
(bar)
(bar)
1,8
2,4
2,4
1,8
2,4
710/75 R 34 178A8
1,6
10
6
1,0
1,4
1,4
1,4
40
25
1,6
2,4
2,4
1,6
2,4
800/65 R 32 172A8
10
6
1,0
1,4
1,4
1,4
40
25
1,4
2,0
2,0
1,4
10
6
1,0
1,2
1,2
1,2
2,0
900/60 R 32 176A8
2,0
900/60 R 32 176A8
40
25
3,2
3,2 **
3,2 **
3,2
10
6
1,7
1,9
1,9
1,7
40
25
2,4
2,4
2,4 **
2,4
10
6
1,4
1,4
1,4
1,4
40
25
1,6
2,4
2,4
1,6
10
6
1,2
1,4
1,4
1,2
40
25
1,6
1,6
1,6 **
1,6
10
6
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
3,2
2,4
600/65 R 28 154A8
2,4
600/70 R 28 157A8
942-529-1
710/55-34 155A8
T 414
(Trelleborg)
1,6
710/55 R 30 153A8
942 529-1 (1x)
600/70 R 28 157A8
TM 900 HP
(Trelleborg)
Hinterachse
rear axle
18.4 R 30 155A8
* = Strassenfahrt ohne EasyCollect 9000
* = Transport on road without EasyCollect 9000
** = Vmax: 25km/h / 15mp/h
270 022 780 (1x)
270 022 780
Achse
axle
Vorderachse
front axle
km/h mp/h
Big X 800
BigX 650
Vorderachse
front axle
Bereifungstyp
wheel type
Big X V12
mit / with
Easyflow 3000
oder / or
Solomaschine
solo machine
(bar)
Reifenluftdruck
tyre pressure
11 BIG X 800/100
Reifenluftdruck
tyre pressure
Big X 500
40
25
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
10
6
1,7
1,7
1,7
1,7
40
25
1,6
1,6
1,6
1,6
10
6
1,4
1,4
1,4
1,4
1,6
Hinterachse
rear axle
11
* = Strassenfahrt ohne EasyCollect 9000 / 1053
* = Transport on road without EasyCollect 9000 / 1053
II - 19
Safety
6
2
3
19
15
1
7
16
7
17
10
13 9 20 8
3
2
10
4
12
18
14
6
6
BX500064
9
3
3
4
10
8
11
10
7
4
2 23 4
7
BX500065
II - 20
Safety
10
13
12
(4x)
Also refer to
Technical Data
942 377-0
942 432-0
939 170-1
942 418-0
942 233-0
942 433-0
1.6 bar
1.8 bar
2.0 bar
2.4 bar
2.7 bar
3.2 bar
12
V
V
12
V
12
12
V/
24
V
V
12
V
942 574 -0
942 574-0 (1x)
12
15
60
80
942 573 -0
942 573-0 (1x)
942 524-0
942 524-0 (1x)
14
17
Pat. 6, 638, 153
942 522-0
942 475-0 (1x)
16
19
60
Pat. 6, 594, 979
12 V
60
942 522-0 (1x)
942 572 -0
942 572-0 (1x)
942 453-0 (1x)
18
116
Pat. 6, 510, 679
12V / 24 V
60
20
942 570 -0
942 447-0 (1x)
942 570-0 (1x)
II - 21
Safety
21
22
BX500670_US
3
2
6
6
9
3
3
4
10
8
11
10
7
4
2 23 4
7
BX500065
II - 22
Safety
21
22
Pat. 6, 550, 231
942 452-0 (1x)
Pat. 6, 539, 693
942 448-0 (1x)
23
Pat. 6, 607, 204
942 482-0 (1x)
II - 23
Safety
24
25
27 31
26 30
28
29
BX500665_US
Rear side of machine
II - 24
Safety
24
BiG X 500
BiG X 650
200 229 680 (1x)
28
200 227 300 (1x)
27
BiG X 650
200 229 690 (1x)
BiG X 650
800
1000
200 227 280 (1x)
30
BiG X 500
200 208 250 (1x)
200 208 240 (1x)
26
25
29
BiG X 650
800
1000
200 227 270 (1x)
BiG X 800
1000
31
BiG X 800
1000
200 227 290 (1x)
II - 25
Safety
II - 26
Operators controls
3
Operators controls
3.1 Overview
1
-
4
Switch group – air conditioning/heating
2
-
Switch group – roof panel
3
-
Camera monitoring system (optional)
4
-
Side window wiper (right/left) (optional)
5
-
Info Centre
6
-
Switch panel
7
-
Multi-function lever
8
-
Steering column
9
-
Operating brake
3
2
1
6
5
7
8
9
BX500098
3.2 Switch panel
1
-
Panel switches
2
-
Pilot lamps
3
-
Keyboards
4
-
Instantaneous stop switch
5
-
12-Volt socket
6
-
Cigarette lighter
7
-
Ignition lock
3
4
2
7
6
1
BX500000
III - 1
Operators controls
3.2.1 Panel switches and pilot lamps
1
-
Release switch – road/field
2
-
Release switch – feed drive/front attachment
3
-
Release switch – holding brake
4
-
Release switch – travelling gear
5
-
Release switch – all-wheel drive
6
-
Axle separation key
7
-
Release switch – autopilot
8
-
Release switch - maintenance
9
-
Engine failure indicator light
10
-
Charge indicator light
1
2 3
9 10
8
4
5 6
7
BX500001
Actuating release switches
The release switches are locked
against unintentional actuation.
•
1
1
To actuate the release switches (1), push the lock (2)
forward and press the release switch.
2
BX100040
III - 2
Operators controls
3.2.2 Release switch – road/field
1
When travelling on roads, the road/
field release switch must be set to the
position "I".
This ensures that only the travelling
gear, the steering mechanism and the
brakes are active.
The road/field release switch (1) is used to switch from
road travel to field operation and vice versa.
I
II
-
Road travel
Field operation
I
II
BX100041
3.2.3 Release switch – feed drive/front
attachment
2
II
II
1
Actuating the feed drive/attachment release switch (1)
releases the feed drive rollers and the corresponding
attachment.
•
The road/field release switch (2) must be set to field
operation ( II).
I
II
-
Feed drive/front attachment off
Feed drive/front attachment on
I
3.2.4 Release switch – holding brake
1
BX100050
II
Driving for an extended period of time
with the holding brake applied will
result in overheating of the brake.
I
II
-
Holding brake released
Holding brake applied
The holding brake is applied automatically when the
ignition is switched off.
I
BX100051
III - 3
Operators controls
3.2.5 Release switch – travelling gear
II
1
When the travelling gear release switch (1) is actuated,
the travelling gear is released.
No persons may be present in the
direct hazardous area of the machine
when the travelling gear release switch
is actuated!
Always remove the ignition key when
leaving the driver’s cab. To switch off
the forage harvester, actuate the
holding brake switch and set the
travelling gear switch (1) to the off
position (I).
I
-
Travelling gear off
II
-
Travelling gear on
I
BX100150
When the travelling gear is switched on (II position), the
maintenance functions (manual operation on the left
platform) are not released.
3.2.6 Release switch – all-wheel drive
Actuating the all-wheel drive release switch (1)
connects all-wheel drive.
•
The road/field release switch must be set to field
operation.
•
The travelling gear release switch (2) must be
switched on ( II) and the forage harvester must be
at a standstill.
I
-
All-wheel drive switched off
II
-
All-wheel drive switched on
3.2.7 Axle separation key
2
II
II
1
I
2
BX100160
1
Actuating the axle separation key switches axle
separation on or off.
•
The all-wheel drive release switch (2) must be
switched on; the drive speed must be below 10 km/h.
•
Actuate axle separation key (1) – axle separation
switched on.
•
Actuate axle separation key (1) again – axle
separation switched off.
BX100161
When all-wheel drive is switched off, axle separation is
also switched off.
III - 4
Operators controls
3.2.8 Release switch – autopilot
II
1
Actuating the autopilot release switch (1) releases the
autopilot function.
The autopilot is available only in maize
operation when the EasyCollect maize
header has been attached.
•
The road/field release switch must be active in field
operation and the travelling gear release switch
must be switched on.
I
II
-
I
BX500031
Autopilot off
Autopilot on
3.2.9 Release switch - maintenance
1
II
Actuating the maintenance release switch (1) releases
all maintenance functions (manual operation on the left
platform).
•
The road/field release switch must be active in field
operation and the travelling gear release switch
must be switched off.
I
II
-
Maintenance off
Maintenance on
I
BX500032
3.2.10 Release Switch for Diesel Engine II
(only for BiG X 800 and BiG X 1000)
1
II
Activating the release switch for diesel engine II (1)
releases the functionality of diesel engine II.
I - Diesel engine II switched off
II - Diesel engine II released
I
BX500100
III - 5
Operators controls
3.2.11 Engine failure indicator light
The engine pilot lamp (I) (1) lights up as soon as a
failure in the engine (I) is detected..
Switch the engine off immediately.
Rectify the fault.
BiG X 500, BiG X 650
1
2
The engine pilot lamp (II) (3) lights up as soon as a
failure in the second engine is detected.
(Only for BiG X 800 and BiG X 1000)
Switch the engine off immediately.
Rectify the fault.
BX500033
3.2.12 Charge indicator light
BiG X 800, BiG X 1000
The charge indicator light (2) will light up, if the output
voltage of the three-phase generator is not sufficient
to charge the batteries.
•
Check the cables and connections on the threephase generator and on the batteries. Check the
V- belt on the three-phase generator.
3
1
2
BX500101
III - 6
Operators controls
3.2.12 Keyboards
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
-
not taken (BiG X 500,650)
not taken (BiG X 500,650)
Start diesel engine II (BiG X 800, 1000)
Switch off diesel engine II (BiG X 800, 1000)
Main coupling on
Main coupling off
Pendulum frame - swing up to the left
Pendulum frame - swing up to the right
(red) pick-up = lift roller-type crop guard
(red) maize header = retract
(red) pick-up = lower roller-type crop guard
(red) maize header = fold out
By pressing the keys (7) and (8)
simultaneously, switch off the pressure in the
first hydraulic circuit.
(blue) pick-up = swing in roller feelers
(blue) maize header = lift plant divider
(blue) pick-up = extend roller feelers
(blue) maize header = lower plant divider
By pressing the keys (9) and (10)
simultaneously, switch off the pressure in the
second hydraulic circuit.
(green) optional for additional control
(green) optional for additional control
A = optional for additional control
B = optional for additional control
(black) optional for additional control
(black) optional for additional control
8 -
9 10 -
11
12
13
14
15
16
-
1
3
1
5
1
6
1
2
4
13 14
7
1
8
1
11
1 12
1
9 10 15 16
BX500004
3.2.13 Ignition lock
I
-
Electric circuit for electronics is switched on
II
-
The ignition is switched on
III
-
Start position
1
III
Off
II
-
O
0
I
The ignition lock (1) has four positions:
BX500005
III - 7
Operators controls
3.2.14
Cigarette lighter
In order to prevent damage and injury,
never hold the cigarette lighter (1) in
pressed position.
•
Press the cigarette lighter (1) in; when the required
temperature is reached the insert will come out by
itself.
1
The socket of the cigarette lighter can be used to
connect other power consumers with 12 volts and a
maximum of 10 amps. When the engine has been
switched off, the battery will be discharged. Use the
specified plug to connect accessory units.
3.2.15 12-V socket
BX500006
1
The 12-Volt socket can be used to connect accessory
units.
Power consumers with a maximum of 15 amps can be
connected.
3.2.16 Instantaneous stop switch
When the instantaneous stop switch (1) is actuated,
the travelling gear is deactivated and the machine
stops. All work functions are stopped.
When the instantaneous stop switch (2) is actuated, all
work functions are stopped.
•
Press the instantaneous stop switch (1 or 2) – the
machine stops/work functions are stopped.
•
In order to activate the machine, move the actuated
instantaneous stop switch (1 or 2) to its initial
position by turning it slightly to the right.
2
BX500007
3.2.17 Diagnostics socket
•
CAN interface (1)
Only devices that are approved by
KRONES may be connected to the
CAN interface.
1
BX500018
III - 8
Operators controls
3.3 Multi-function lever
3
1
6
7
10
11
2
15
4
22
5
8
13 14
9
17
18
16
12
19
20
21
1
-
Autopilot (field operation of maize header
only)
2
-
Feed drive/front attachment on - off
3
-
Reverse feed drive/front attachment
4
-
Lower the lifting gear (sensing mode)
5
-
Raise the lifting gear (sensing mode)
6
-
Automatic header contour (step mode)
7
-
Raise the lifting gear up to top (step mode)
8
-
Rotate discharge chute left
9
-
Ejector flap down
10
-
Ejector flap up
11
-
Rotate discharge chute right
BX500002
12
-
Mirror upper discharge chute (with main
coupling switched on)
Upper discharge chute in transport position
(with main coupling switched off)
13
-
Memory key for adjustment process – lifting
gear
14
-
Pilot lamp – travelling gear on
15
-
Actuation key for travelling gear
16
-
Selector switch – acceleration ramp
17
-
Save the cutting length
18
19
20
-
21
22
-
Free
Raise engine speed
Change from nominal speed to idling speed
and vice versa
Reduce engine speed
Free
III - 9
Operators controls
E
F
J
H
G
D
K
15
L
M
17
16
A
B
C
BX500003
A
-
Acceleration (in forward travel)
Deceleration (in reverse)
Start travelling gear with actuation key (15)
pressed
G
-
Bring up cutting length value 1
If the 17 button is pressed and is past the
action point, the cutting length is saved in the
Info Centre (value 1)
B
-
Multi-function lever – centre position
H
-
Central position
C
-
Acceleration (in reverse)
Deceleration (in forward travel)
Start travelling gear with actuation key (15)
pressed
J
-
Bring up cutting length value 2
If the 17 button is pressed and is past the
action point, the cutting length is saved in the
Info Centre (value 2)
D
-
Deceleration to 0 km/h
Fast reversing with actuation key (15)
pressed (field operation only)
K
-
Lower upper discharge chute
L
-
Central position
M
-
Lift upper discharge chute
E
-
Multi-function lever – centre position
F
-
Switch on cruise control (in forward travel
only)
Save present speed for cruise control –
Press actuation key (15) and move multifunction level in direction F
In field mode, the load limit control "Constant
Power" will be activated by briefly pressing
the driving lever twice to the right.
-
III - 10
Operators controls
3.4 Roof console
5
3
2
1
4
1
-
Switch – air conditioning/heating
2
-
Switch group – roof panel
3
-
Interior lighting
4
-
Cooling compartment
5
-
ISO compartment for radio
BX500601
III - 11
Operators controls
3.5 Switch group – roof panel
1
2
3
5
6
4
7
8
9
10
BX200030
1
-
Working floodlight – side of cab
2
-
Working floodlight – cab roof and upper
discharge chute
3
-
Working floodlight - front
4
-
Mirror adjustment (right rear view mirror only)
5
-
Rear working floodlights
6
-
Side light/dipped beam
7
-
Allround lights
8
-
Warning flashers
9
-
Windshield wipers
10
-
Windshield washer unit
III - 12
Operators controls
3.6 Steering column and foot pedals
11a
11b
5
1
optional
2
4
8
10
3
9
7
6
BX200111
1
-
Button for horn
2
-
Indicator switch
3
-
Pilot lamp indicator
4
-
Full beam
5
-
Headlamp flasher
6
-
Full beam indicator light
7
-
Pilot lamp – trailer function
8
-
Release lever for horizontal steering column
adjustment
9
-
Release lever for horizontal and vertical
steering column adjustment
10
-
Operating brake
11a -
Swivel the foot pedal discharge chute to the
left (optional)
11b -
Swivel the foot pedal discharge chute to the
right (optional)
III - 13
Operators controls
3.6.1 Steering column adjustment
Adjust the steering column only when
the machine is at a standstill.
Horizontal and vertical steering column adjustment
The steering column (1) is held in
vertical position by spring pressure.
Before actuating the pedal (2), hold the
steering wheel with both hands.
•
1
Use the pedal (2) to release the steering column (1),
and adjust to the desired position. After the pedal
(2) has been released, the steering column (1) will
be locked.
3
Horizontal steering column adjustment
•
Loosen release lever (3). Move the steering column
(1) into the requested position. Lock the release
lever (3) again.
2
BX100300
3.6.2 Horn
•
When the push-button (1) is pressed, the horn is
sounded.
1
BX100210
3.6.3 Indicator switch
1
In road traffic the change of travelling
direction is indicated by a flashing
light.
•
Switch (1) forward – right indicator
•
Switch (1) backward – left indicator
•
Set the switch to neutral position by hand.
The indicator pilot lamp (2) will light up when the
indicator has been switched on.
III - 14
2
BX100213
Operators controls
3.6.4 Full beam
1
High beam is operational only when
the dipped beam has been switched
on.
Switch off high beam when a vehicle
approaches.
•
Switching high beam on – press lever (1) down.
•
Switching high beam off – press lever (1) up.
2
When high beam is switched on, the blue pilot lamp (2)
will be lit.
BX100212
3.6.5 Headlamp flasher
•
Pull the headlamp flasher lever (1) up.
1
BX200040
3.6.6 Using the operating brake
In road traffic
1
For reasons of traffic safety the brake
pedals must be connected at all times.
No individual brake fitted.
Check the brake function prior to
travel.
BX100111
III - 15
Operators controls
3.7 Manual operation on the platform
1
9
2
3
5
4
6
10
7
8
BX500008
Activation of manual operation:
1
-
Move the right counterblade to blade drum
Road/field release switch in field
operation position
2
-
Move the left counterblade to blade drum
3
-
Move the right counterblade away from blade
drum
4
-
Move the left counterblade away from blade
drum
5
-
Close grinding flap
6
-
Open grinding flap
7
-
Automatic grinding operation
8
-
Move grindstone by hand
9
-
reverse feed drive/front attachment
10
-
Instantaneous stop switch
Travelling gear release switch off
Maintenance release switch on
Main coupling on
III - 16
Operators controls
Activation of manual operation:
Road/field release switch in field
operation position
Travelling gear release switch off
1
-
Raise lifting gear
2
-
Lower lifting gear
1
2
BX500009
III - 17
Operators controls
3.8 Control unit for measuring the
humidity of the foraged crops
The humidity-measuring unit is used to display and
save the humidity values of the foraged crops.
6
1
5
2
4
3
1-
Display
2-
ON / OFF key
3-
Key for average values
4-
Key for the selection of the foraged crops
5-
Display of the selected foraged crops
6-
Display for average values
III - 18
BX500602
Info Centre
4
"EasyTouch" Info Centre
Overview
I
II
III
IV
V
BX500148
•
I
= Display
•
II = Keys
•
III = Keys
•
IV = Rotary potentiometer
•
V = Menu key
1
A
to
to
8
D
(1 - 8)
(A - D)
IV - 1
Info Centre
The Info Centre renders information on the power
actions and the present operating conditions of BiG X.
The Info Centre can be used to carry out settings in the
machine as well as to start and stop actions.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Its main components are:
Keys 1-8
Keys 1-8 are used to activate the softkeys located in
the right column. For the assignment of the keys, see
the illustration.
If there is no softkey next to the key, it has no
function.
B
A
C
D
BX500000
Keys A-D
The keys A-D are used to activate the softkeys located
in the line just above them. For the assignment of the
keys, see the illustration.
If there is no softkey above the key, the key has no
function.
Rotary potentiometer
The rotary potentiometer has two functions:
1. The rotary potentiometer can be turned to change
settings and to select the desired menu in the menu
level.
2. Pressing the rotary potentiometer activates and
saves the settings.
You can use the
key with the rotary potentiometer
to call or close the menu level or to go to the preceding
menu level. Holding the key down slightly longer takes
you back to the basic screen.
Display (screen display)
The display is divided up into the following sections:
Status line (I):
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Time, number of errors, central
lubrication, pendulum frame.
II
Information section: Engine data (II)
Drive data (III)
Settings (IV and V)
IV
III
V
A
B
C
D
BX500001
IV - 2
Info Centre
4.1 Information Section
After the ignition is switched on, the basic screen
appears in the display.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4.1.1 Basic Screen
•
III
II
Status line (I):
IV
= Error; at least one error occurred. The
number of errors present is in front of the icon.
•
V
Central lubrication
= Central lubrication active (green)
B
A
C
D
BX500002
= Error in central lubrication (red)
•
Pendulum frame
= Pendulum frame free. Position of
pendulum frame is as shown.
= Pendulum frame free. Position of
pendulum frame is as shown.
= Pendulum frame free. Position of
pendulum frame is as shown.
= Position of pendulum frame unknown
because pendulum frame sensor is defective or not
calibrated.
= Pendulum frame locked. Position of
pendulum frame is as shown.
= Pendulum frame locked. Position of
pendulum frame is as shown.
= Pendulum frame locked. Position of
pendulum frame is as shown.
= Position of pendulum frame unknown
because pendulum frame sensor is defective or not
calibrated.
Engine data information section (II):
1080
•
0
•
Engine speed
Road operation: 0 - 1700 rpm
Field mode: 0 -2100 rpm
20
40
60
80
100
Engine capacity as %
I
UPM
1080
0
20
40
60
80
III
100
IV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
100
75
50
25
• Cooling water temperature display
If the cooling water temperature reaches the critical
range, the background of the cooling water
temperature display
changes to red.
•
Fuel gauge
67°C
0
V
A
B
C
D
BX500163
IV - 3
Info Centre
Information section of the travelling gear data (III):
I
= Cruise control active; the number after
•
the icon is the saved speed for Tempomat
operation in km/h.
•
Travelling speed
Road operation: 0 - 40 km/h
Field mode: 0 - 22 km/h (BiG X 500)
0 - 18 km/h (BiG X 650)
0 - 25 km/h (BiG X 800 / BiG X 1000)
V
A
•
Acceleration ramp
1 = lowest acceleration ramp
2 = ...
3 = ...
4 = highest acceleration ramp
•
Direction of travel
= Forward travel
= Neutral (standstill)
= Reverse travel
•
Type of drive
= Front wheel drive active
= Front wheel drive inactive
= All-wheel drive active (only possible in
field mode, can only be activated at a standstill,
travelling speed 0 - 14 km/h)
= All-wheel inactive
= Axle separation of active (only
possible in field mode with all-wheel drive turned
on, activation at travelling speed < 10 km/h)
= Axle separation inactive
= Parking brake is applied
= Emergency mode; allows the driver to
drive the vehicle out of the danger zone even if
there are serious drive problems.
•
IV
II
= Cruise control inactive
Others:
= Quick stop button has been activated on
the console.
= Quick stop button has been activated by
manual operation device (platform).
IV - 4
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500165
Info Centre
•
= Load limit control active - the travelling
speed is automatically adjusted to the speed
reduction of the engine.
•
•
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Load limit control inactive
IV
II
Autopilot (optional, only in maize field mode):
= Autopilot active, the row tracer is
evaluated on the left
V
= Autopilot active, the row tracer is
evaluated on the right
A
= Autopilot active, both row tracers are
B
C
D
BX500165
evaluated
= Autopilot active, the row tracer is
evaluated on the left (depending on the upper
discharge chute)
= Autopilot active, the row tracer is
evaluated on the right (depending on the upper
discharge chute)
= Autopilot active, the mirrored row tracer
is evaluated on the left (depending on the upper
discharge chute)
= Autopilot active, the mirrored row tracer
is evaluated on the right (depending on the upper
discharge chute)
•
Lifting gear control (only in field mode)
= The lifting gear pressure control is
active
= The lifting gear pressure control is
inactive
= The lifting gear distance control is
active
= The lifting gear distance control is
inactive
= The lifting gear position control is active
= The lifting gear position control is
inactive
Information section of settings (IV and V):
(see Chapter "Settings").
IV - 5
Info Centre
4.2 Settings
I
4.2.1 Working Width
The working width must be set in order to be able to
calculate the surface.
III
II
In grass pickup mode, the symbol
and the set
width (swathed width) is displayed in the information
section settings (IV) in cm or inches.
V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
In maize header mode, the settings (IV) information
section displays the symbol
and the number
A
B
C
D
BX500005
of rows set with the resulting working width in cm or
inches.
In Direct cutting system mode, the symbol
and the set width are displayed in the information
section settings (IV) in cm or inches.
4.2.2 Temporary change in the working
width of the grass pickup
Working width = swathed width
•
Pressing the
if the
1
1
key decreases the working width;
key is held down for a longer time, the
working width will decrease faster.
•
Pressing the
2
key increases the working width
(up to the maximum for the fixed set width). If the
2
key is held down for a longer time, the working
width will increase faster.
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the working width. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can adjust the desired working width with the
rotary potentiometer (up to a maximum for the fixed
set width).
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
7
Activating the key on the multifunction
lever ((7) = raise lifting gear up to top)
causes the system to switch back to
the permanently set working width.
BX500500
IV - 6
Info Centre
4.2.3 Temporary Change of the Maize
Header Working Width
I
The resulting working width is
calculated from the row distance and
the number of rows directly and the
result is displayed.
•
Pressing the
rows; if the
1
III
II
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key decreases the number of
V
key is held down for a longer time,
1
1
the number decreases faster.
A
•
Pressing the
2
B
C
D
key increases the number of rows
BX500009
(up to the maximum for the fixed set number). If the
2
key is held down for a longer time, the number
will increase faster.
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the working width. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can adjust the desired number of rows with the
rotary potentiometer (up to a maximum for the fixed
set number).
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
7
Activating the key on the multifunction
lever ((7) = raise lifting gear up to top)
causes the system to switch back to
the permanently set working width.
BX500500
IV - 7
Info Centre
4.2.4 Temporary Change of the Working
Width of the Direct Cutting System
•
Pressing the
if the
1
1
I
III
II
key is held down for a longer time, the
Pressing the
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key increases the working width
(up to the maximum for the fixed set width). If the
2
2
key decreases the working width;
working width will decrease faster.
•
1
V
key is held down for a longer time, the working
width will increase faster.
A
B
C
D
BX500010
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the working width. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can adjust the desired working width with the
rotary potentiometer (up to a maximum for the fixed
set width).
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
Activating the key on the multifunction
lever ((7) = raise lifting gear up to top)
causes the system to switch back to
the permanently set working width.
7
BX500500
IV - 8
Info Centre
2
4.3 Front Attachment
I
During field mode, if the feed drive/front attachment
release switch is turned on, the current actual speed
and the set setpoint speed of the front attachment are
shown in the Settings (IV) info area in the Front
attachment menu field.
1
III
II
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4.3.1 Status (1)
•
= Front attachment standstill
•
= front attachment not OK
•
= front attachment OK
•
= Front attachment forward inactive
•
= Front attachment forward active
•
= Front attachment reverse inactive
•
= Front attachment reverse active
V
A
B
C
D
BX500006
4.3.2 Metal Detection (2)
•
= Metal detection deactivated
•
= metal detected in feed drive
•
= An error has occurred in metal detection.
4.3.3 Setting the Setpoint Speed (3)
•
Pressing the
3
speed; if the
3
key decreases the setpoint
key is held down for a longer
time, the setpoint speed will decrease faster.
•
Pressing the
4
speed; if the
4
key increases the setpoint
key is held down for a longer
time, the setpoint speed will increase faster.
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the setpoint speed. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the
desired setpoint speed.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
IV - 9
Info Centre
4.4 Feed Drive
I
The cutting length is determined by the speed of the
feed drive rollers and the number of blades that are
used.
In field mode, the current cutting length is displayed in
the feed drive menu field in the information section of
settings (IV).
•
III
II
inches.
Depending on the number of blades that are used,
the cutting length can be set within a range from 3 62 mm.
4.4.1 Adjusting the cutting length
Pressing the
if the
5
5
key decreases the cutting length;
key is held down for a longer time, the
cutting length will decrease faster.
•
Pressing the
if the
6
6
key increases the cutting length;
key is held down for a longer time, the
cutting length will increase faster.
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
•
•
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cutting length display
V
and the current cutting length in mm or
•
1
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the cutting length. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired cutting length.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
The change is accepted immediately.
Two different cutting lengths (value 1/ value 2) can be
saved and retrieved with the multifunction lever (see
the chapter on the Multi-Function Lever).
IV - 10
A
B
C
D
BX500007
Info Centre
4.5 Lifting Gear
I
In field mode, the current lifting gear control is
displayed in the Drive data info area (II). The actual
height of the lifting gear and the corresponding setpoint
pressure or the setpoint height is displayed in the
Settings info area (IV) in the Lifting gear menu field.
II
IV
1
4.5.1 Status
•
V
= The lifting gear pressure control is
active. The controller regulates the pressure against
the ground to a constant value. Control is active.
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
BX500008
= The lifting gear pressure control has
•
been switched on. Control is still inactive.
•
= Lifting gear distance control (optional,
only in conjunction with distance sensors); the
control sets the height constant relative to the
ground. Control is active.
•
= The lifting gear distance control has
been switched on. Control is still inactive.
•
= Lifting gear position control; the control
sets the height constant relative to the machine.
Control is active.
= The lifting gear position control has
•
been switched on. Control is still inactive.
•
1st value (1) = actual height of the lifting gear in
cm or inches
•
2nd Value (2) = setpoint pressure as a percentage
value for the own weight of the front
attachment. It is adjustable between 6% (front attachment sways above
the ground) to a maximum of 70%
(front attachment presses on to the
ground with 70% of its own weight).
or
2nd value (2) = nominal height in cm or inches or
as a % if the lifting gear distance
control is set.
IV - 11
Info Centre
4.5.2 Changing the setpoint pressure or
setpoint height
•
Pressing the
if the
7
7
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key decreases the setpoint value;
II
key is held down for a longer time, the
IV
setpoint value will decrease faster.
•
Pressing the
if the
8
8
1
key increases the setpoint value;
key is held down for a longer time, the
V
setpoint value will increase faster.
A
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the lifting gear. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired setpoint value.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
The setpoint pressure or setpoint
height can also be saved using the
multi-function lever.
IV - 12
B
C
D
2
BX500008
Info Centre
4.6 General Machine Settings
I
•
Activating this key
D
brings up general machine
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
settings.
II
A
IV
III
B
C
D
BX500011
4.6.1 General machine settings - grass
pickup
4.6.1.1 Setting the grass pick-up operating mode
•
•
•
•
•
= Grass pickup
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the operating mode. The selection box is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
operating mode of the grass pickup.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
D
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500013
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 13
Info Centre
4..6.1.2 Setting the grass pick-up working width
Working width = swathed width
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the working width. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired working width.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500016
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
D
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.6.1.3 To adjust the lifting gear control
•
= Lifting gear pressure control; the control
sets the pressure on the ground to a constant
value.
•
= Lifting gear position control; the control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
sets the height constant relative to the machine.
•
= Lifting gear distance control (optional,
only in conjunction with distance sensors); the
control sets the height constant relative to the
ground.
A
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the lifting gear control. The selection box
is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired lifting gear control.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
D
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 14
B
C
D
BX500017
Info Centre
4.6.1.4 Setting the number of blades
After the number of blades has been changed (see
chapter Maintenance - Working with Half the Number of
Blades), the current number of blades must be set.
Setting the number of blades automatically adjusts the
speed of the feed drive roller to the set cutting length of
the new number of blades.
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the number of blades. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired number of blades.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
D
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500018
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.6.2 General machine settings - maize
header
4.6.2.1 To set the operating mode of the maize
header
•
= Maize header
Machine type:
•
= KRONE-EasyCollect (6000,7500,9000)
•
= KRONE-EasyCollect (953,1053)
•
= Not a KRONE product
To set the operating mode:
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the setting
for the operating mode. The selection box is highlighted in
colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to
the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
operating mode of the maize header.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be
applied and returns you from the selection box.
A
B
C
Activating the
•
Pressing the
D
takes you one menu level back.
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX500014
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
2
D
To set the machine type:
• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the machine type. The selection box is
highlighted in colour.
• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
• Use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the machine
type.
• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
1
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500166
IV - 15
Info Centre
4.6.2.2 Setting the maize header working width
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the number of rows. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
Use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the desired
number of rows.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the spacing between rows. The input field
is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired spacing between rows.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
Activating the
Pressing the
D
A
B
C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500019
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
The resulting working width is
calculated directly from the row
spacing and the number of rows and
the result is displayed.
IV - 16
1
A
B
C
D
BX500020
Info Centre
4.6.2.3 Adjusting the lifting gear control
•
= Lifting gear pressure control; the control
sets the pressure on the ground to a constant
value.
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Lifting gear position control; the control
sets the height constant relative to the machine.
•
1
= Lifting gear distance control (optional,
only in conjunction with distance sensors); the
control sets the height constant relative to the
ground.
A
B
C
D
BX500021
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the lifting gear control. The selection box
is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired lifting gear control.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
D
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.6.2.4 Setting the number of blades
After the number of blades has been changed (see
chapter Maintenance - Working with Half the Number of
Blades), the current number of blades must be set.
Setting the number of blades automatically adjusts the
speed of the feed drive roller to the set cutting length of
the new number of blades.
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the number of blades. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired number of blades.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
D
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500022
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 17
Info Centre
4.6.2.5 Selecting row tracer for autopilot
This mode determines which row tracer on the maize
header will be evaluated for control of the autopilot.
Chaffing should preferably be in row tracer mode left or
right, with automatic row tracer mode for crops.
•
= Row tracer left is evaluated.
•
= Row tracer right is evaluated.
•
= Both row tracers are evaluated.
•
= Row tracer is automatically evaluated.
The row tracer selection is made automatically
based on the position of the upper discharge chute.
Upper discharge chute left = row tracer left
Upper discharge chute right = row tracer right
•
= Row tracer is automatically evaluated
mirrored.
The row tracer selection is made automatically
based on the position of the upper discharge chute.
Upper discharge chute left = row tracer right
Upper discharge chute right = row tracer left
In "Row tracer automatic" and "Row
tracer mirrored automatic" mode, if
the upper discharge chute is not
swivelled out, the "Upper discharge
chute left" position is used as the
basis.
4.6.2.6 Setting the row tracer
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the row tracer. The selection box is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the
desired mode.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
D
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 18
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500023
Info Centre
4.6.2.7 Setting the autopilot centre adjuster
The centre setting can be used to justify the side
distance from the forage harvester to the crop edge
queried by the row tracer.
If the lateral distance needs to be reduced, a negative
number should be set. To increase it, set a positive value.
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the centre adjuster. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired distance.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
D
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500024
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.6.2.8 Setting the response sensitivity of the
autopilot
The response sensitivity can be used to adjust the
response (delay) of the autopilot control system.
The response sensitivity must be adjusted to the
specific combination of crop edge, driving speed and
ground conditions.
With an even crop edge, slow driving speed and dry
ground conditions, a low (slow) response sensitivity
can be set.
With an uneven crop edge, faster driving speed and
moist ground conditions, a higher (faster) response
sensitivity should be set.
The setting must be made based on specific local
factors and depends on the situation in question.
The setting can be changed during operation while
driving.
Setting range:
•
•
•
•
A
B
C
Activating the
•
Pressing the
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500025
1 (slow) - 10 (fast)
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the response sensitivity. The input field
is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the
desired value.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
•
1
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500025
IV - 19
Info Centre
4.6.2.9 Automatic setting of the cutting length by
maturity detection on the on the maize
plant (AutoScan)
The system uses the AutoScan sensor to detect the
degree of maturity of the maize plant.
The AutoScan control electronics calculate the
optimum cutting length of the maize plant from the
previously entered minimum and maximum cutting
length and control the speed of the pre-compression
rollers accordingly.
Activating the
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key brings up the "AutoScan"
A
settings menu.
B
C
D
BX500025
Explanation of the symbols:
= AutoScan available
= AutoScan not available
50%
9.1
STOP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Automatic cutting length detection
mm
(AutoScan) activated and active.
50%
9.1
STOP
STOP
= Automatic cutting length detection
mm
(AutoScan) activated but not active.
0%
STOP
3.2
STOP
= Automatic cutting length detection
mm
(AutoScan) not available.
A
B
C
D
BX500167
50%
•
Automatic cutting length detection "
9.1
STOP
"
mm
is activated by pressing the
key.
1
0%
•
Automatic cutting length detection "
STOP
3.2
STOP
mm
is deactivated by pressing the
2
key.
Automatic cutting length detection is
deactivated as soon as the driver
adjusts the cutting length manually.
IV - 20
"
Info Centre
4.6.2.10Adjusting the minimum and maximum chop
length
(1) = Chop length calculated by the system
(2) = Minimum chop length
(3) = Maximum chop length
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
•
Activate the
and
3
4
keys and enter the
3
desired minimum chop length (2).
•
Activate the
and
5
6
keys and enter the
desired maximum chop length (3).
A
•
Activating the
•
You can bring up the previous page with the
A
B
C
D
BX500168
key brings up the basic screen.
B
key.
4.6.3 General machine setting - direct
cutting system
Set the operating mode to direct cutting system
1
2
•
3
4
5
6
7
8
•
•
•
•
= Direct cutting system
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the operating mode. The selection box is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
operating mode of the direct cutting system.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
D
A
B
C
D
BX500015
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 21
Info Centre
4.6.3.1 To set the working width of the direct
cutting system
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the working width. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired working width.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
D
key brings up the basic screen.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500026
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.6.3.2 To adjust the lifting gear control
•
= Lifting gear pressure control; the control
sets the pressure on the ground to a constant
value.
•
= Lifting gear position control; the control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
sets the height constant relative to the machine.
•
= Lifting gear distance control (optional,
only in conjunction with distance sensors); the
control sets the height constant relative to the
ground.
A
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the lifting gear control. The selection box
is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired lifting gear control.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
D
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 22
B
C
D
BX500027
Info Centre
4.6.3.3 Setting the number of blades
After the number of blades has been changed (see
chapter Maintenance - Working with Half the Number of
Blades), the current number of blades must be set.
Setting the number of blades automatically adjusts the
speed of the feed drive roller to the set cutting length of
the new number of blades.
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the number of blades. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired number of blades.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
D
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500028
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 23
Info Centre
4.6.4 Customer Data Counter
•
To bring up the Customer counter, activate the
B
•
key under the
The softkey
I
softkey.
is displayed green if a
II
customer counter is active.
IV
III
When the customer counter is active, a
dataset will be selected but not yet
incremented.
B
A
C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500169
Customer record (1)
1
Status display (2)
STOP
1
2
Counter stopped
1
2
3
4
Freely usable numeric input field (for the
5
6
example to assign several different
cultivated areas to the customer record)
7
8
A counter is activated
10
4
Counter (active counters are highlighted in colour)
A
3
B
C
D
BX500047
•
= operating hour counter (h)
•
= drum hours counter (h)
•
= working hours counter (h)
•
= surface counter (ha)
•
= road kilometre counter (km)
•
= fuel consumption (l)
(3)= absolute fuel consumption (can be deleted
with
C
key)
(4)= current average consumption (l/h)
IV - 24
Info Centre
4.6.4.1 Changing a customer record (1) or
creating a new one
A total of 30 customer records can be created. Select
the customer record you want to modify; select a free
customer record to create a new entry with the
and
•
•
•
•
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
keys.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in
colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer opens an
alphanumeric input field.
You can change the customer record or enter a
new one with the rotary potentiometer. (To accept
the desired alphanumeric value, press the rotary
potentiometer.)
Selecting the "ESC" symbol (1) and
confirming causes the program to exit
the input field without saving the
entries or changes.
Selecting the "Enter" symbol (2) and
confirming causes the program to
accept and save the entry or change.
Pressing the
2
1
A
B
C
D
BX500170
key on the rotary potentiometer
also takes you one menu level back.
4.6.4.2 Switching the counter on or off
•
Use the
on
•
•
5
and
or off
Activating the
Pressing the
6
STOP
B
keys to switch the counter
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500171
IV - 25
Info Centre
4.6.4.3 Deleting the customer counter
•
Pressing the
C
key under the
sofkey
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
deletes the counters of the selected cultivated
area
10
in the selected customer record (in
the example shown here, the tenth cultivated
area).
Pressing the
D
key under the
sofkey deletes all counters
in the selected customer record.
Repeat deletion of the counters for
each previously created cultivated
area as necessary.
4.6.4.4 Switching to general counters (machine
data counters)
•
Pressing the
A
key under the
softkey
brings up the "Counters and machine data" menu.
For more information see chapter "Counters and
Machine Data"
You can print out all customer
records or selected ones with the aid
of a printer.
For additional Information, please
refer to chapter "Printing Customer
Data"
IV - 26
A
B
C
D
BX500171
Info Centre
4.6.5 Silage Fodder Addition
In field mode, the silage fodder addition icon is displayed
in the information section of settings (V) with the current
setting.
Pre-requisite for switching on Automatic mode:
•
•
•
•
Feed drive/front attachment switched on
Main drive switched on
Front attachment lowered
Driving forward
Status (1)
•
1
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500172
= Automatic mode switched on, silage
fodder addition active.
= Automatic mode switched on, silage
•
1
fodder addition inactive.
•
= silage fodder addition is deactivated.
•
= silage fodder addition is always active.
•
= filling level indicator for silage agent
2
addition (optional)
•
Activating the
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key brings up the silage fodder
addition screen.
A
B
C
D
BX500149
Conditions for release not met
•
= lower lifting gear
•
= vehicle moving
•
= Main coupling on
•
= feed drive on
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= stop switch for manual operation
Fault
•
= CU
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
•
= KMC3
•
= Metal detection
•
= DIOM
IV - 27
Info Centre
Silage fodder addition (1)
•
= silage fodder addition not active
•
= silage fodder addition always active
•
= silage fodder addition Automatic
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
mode
Activate/deactivate fill level indicator for silage
fodder addition (optional) (2)
= fill level indicator for silage fodder
•
addition activated
A
B
C
D
BX500149
•
= fill level indicator for silage fodder
addition deactivated
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the
silage fodder addition setting. The selection box is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired setting.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
•
Activating the
•
Pressing the
C
key brings up the basic screen.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.6.6 Adjusting the Grain Conditioner
Distance
If "Maize header or X-Disc" mode has been set, the
symbol
conditioner distance is displayed in the information
section of settings (V).
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the grain conditioner. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
distance.
To exit the input field again, press the rotary
potentiometer.
The currently set target distance is
approached automatically.
Calibrating the grain conditioner
(See chapter on Grain Conditioner Calibration).
IV - 28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
and the current actual value of the grain
A
B
C
D
BX500012
Info Centre
4.7 Menu Level
Short overview
1
1-1
1-1-1
1-2
2
1-1-2
1-3
3
3-1
3-6
1-1-3
1-5
3-2
3-7
1-7-1
1-1-4
1-7
3-3
3-8
1-1-5
1-8
3-4
1-7-2
3-9
1-1-8
1-9
3-5
3-10
1-1-9
4-1-10
4
4-1
4-1-1
1-1-10
XD
4-1-11
4-1-2
4-2
1-1-11
4-1-12
4-1-3
4-3
1-1-12
4-4
4-4-1
4-1-4
4-1-13
1-1-13
4-1-14
4-4-2
4-1-5
1-1-14
4-4-3
4-1-6
4-1-15
1-1-15
4-1-7
4-1-16
1-1-21
4-1-8
4-1-17
4-1-9
4-1-18
5
4-1-19
4-1-20
IV - 29
Info Centre
4.7.1 Bringing up a Menu Level
•
You can bring up a menu level with the
key on
the rotary potentiometer.
The display indicates the menu level.
The menu level is divided into five main menus:
•
= main menu 1 „Settings“
•
= main menu 2 „Counters“
•
= Main menu 3 „Maintenance“
•
= main menu 4 „Service“
•
= Main menu 5 „Basic screen“
•
You can close the menu level that was called with
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500172
on the rotary potentiometer.
4.7.2 Main menu 1 „Settings“
The main menu level is active.
•
Select main menu 1 with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display shows menu level 1 „Settings“.
The main menu, „Settings“, is divided up into five
menus:
A
•
= Menu 1-1 „Parameters“
•
= Menu 1-2 „Machine setting“
•
= Menu 1-3 „Units“
•
= Menu 1-5 „Language“
•
= Menu 1-7 „Display“
•
= Menu 1-8 „Date/time“
•
= Menu 1-9 "Contractor"
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 30
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500030
Info Centre
4.7.3 Menu 1-1 „Parameters“
The main menu „Settings“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 1-1 „Parameters“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display indicates the menu level „Parameters“.
The „Parameters“ menu is divided into ten sub-menus:
•
= Menu 1-1-1 „Feed drive“
•
= Menu 1-1-2 „Front attachment“
•
= Menu -1-1-3 „Discharge chute“
•
= Menu 1-1-4 „Grinding“
•
= Menu 1-1-5 „Counterblade“
•
= Menu 1-1-8 „EasyFlow“
•
= Menu 1-1-9 „EasyCOLLECT“
•
XD
= Menu 1-1-11 „Metal detection“
•
= Menu 1-1-12 „Diesel engine“
•
= Menu 1-1-13 „Drive“
•
= Menu 1-1-14 „Autopilot“
•
= Menu 1-1-15 „Work“
•
•
B
C
Pressing the
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500031
= Menu 1-1-10 „X-DISC“
•
•
A
1
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500032
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired menu.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
parameters of the selected menu to be displayed.
Entering parameters
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select
individual parameters. The input field is highlighted
in light blue.
A
B
C
D
BX500147
Only input fields with a light blue
background can be changed.
•
•
•
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the
desired value.
When you press the rotary potentiometer, you exit
the input field and the value that was entered is
applied.
IV - 31
Info Centre
•
To stop the process temporarily, press the
next to the
•
3
key
softkey.
To apply the default setting values, press the
key next to the
softkey.•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
To jump back to
the screen that was previously displayed, press the
key next to the
7
•
Pressing the
softkey.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500147
For additional information on the
individual parameters, please refer to
the parameter list in the appendix
entitled „Parameter list“.
4.7.4 Menu 1-3 „Units“
The main menu „Settings“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 1-3 „Units“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display indicates the selected measuring units.
The currently set measuring unit is highlighted in
colour.
•
= Anglo-American units active
•
= English/American units active
•
= Metric (SI) units
•
= Metric (SI) units inactive
A
B
C
D
BX500033
Setting the measuring units
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired setting.
•
To accept the setting, press the rotary
potentiometer.
•
1
Pressing the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500034
IV - 32
Info Centre
4.7.5 Menu 1-5 „Language“
The main menu „Settings“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 1- 5„Language“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
1-5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display shows the language selection.
Set language
(1)
(2)
= currently set language
= display of the selected language
•
You can select the language you want with the
rotary potentiometer.
•
To confirm the selection, press the rotary
potentiometer.
•
Pressing the
A
B
C
D
BX500035
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
The selected language will be active
after the machine is restarted (ignition
off and on again).
2
A
B
C
D
BX500036
4.7.6 Menu 1-7 „Display“
The main menu „Settings“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 1-7 „Display“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
The display shows menu level 1-7 „Display“.
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500037
The "Display" menu is divided into two sub-menus:
•
= Menu 1-7-1 "Contrast/brightness"
•
= Menu 1-7-2 „Beeper“
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 33
Info Centre
4.7.7 Menu 1-7-1 contrast/brightness
The „Display“ menu is active.
•
•
Select menu 1-7-1 „Contrast/brightness“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display shows the settings for contrast and
brightness.
•
= brightness
•
= contrast
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500611
Adjusting contrast/brightness
•
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired setting. The selection box is highlighted in
colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired function.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
Pressing the
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 34
1
A
B
C
D
BX500612
Info Centre
4.7.8 Menu 1-7-2 Beeper
The „Display“ menu is active.
•
•
1-5-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select menu 1-7-2 „Beeper“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display indicates the beeper settings.
•
= Key pressed
•
= Alarm
•
= Note
A
B
C
D
BX500038
Beeper function
•
= Beeper inactive
•
= Beeper active
•
= Beeper limited by time
The activation time of the beeper can be set optionally
to
and
A
•
•
•
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
.
To set the beeper
•
1
B
C
D
BX500043
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired setting. The selection box is highlighted in
colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired function.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 35
Info Centre
4.7.9 Menu 1-6 „Date/time“
The main menu „Settings“ is active.
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select menu 1-8 „Date/time“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display shows the date and the time.
A
B
C
D
BX500044
4.7.9.1 To set date/time
•
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in
colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
Set the desired date/time with the rotary
potentiometer.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
Pressing the
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 36
1
A
B
C
D
BX500045
Info Centre
4.7.10 Menu 1-9 "Contractor"
The main menu "Settings" is active.
•
Select menu 1-9 "Contractor" with the rotary
potentiometer.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500659
•
Press the rotary potentiometer to call the
<Contractor Information> mask.
A maximum of 6x30 characters can be
entered. The information is used each
time a print job is sent to the CAN
printer. If a line contains no characters
(including no spaces), that line will not
be considered for printing.
•
•
•
•
Pressing the rotary potentiometer opens an
alphanumeric input field (1).
Turn the rotary potentiometer to select a letter
(yellow mark).
Press the rotary potentiometer to select the letter.
Selecting the "Enter" symbol (2) and confirming
causes the program to accept and save the entry or
change.
A
B
C
Pressing the key
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX500660
1
on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
2
D
Selecting the "ESC" symbol (3) and
confirming causes the program to exit
the input field without saving the entries
or changes.
•
1
A
B
C
D
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
BX500661
IV - 37
Info Centre
4.8
•
Main Menu 2 „Counters“
You can bring up a menu level with the
key on
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
the rotary potentiometer.
•
Select main menu 2 „Counter“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display shows various counters.
Counter level(sets)
A
B
C
D
BX500046
•
= total bale counter (cannot be deleted)
•
= counter level 1 (can be deleted)
•
= counter level 2 (can be deleted)
•
= counter level 3 (can be deleted)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
647 h 5 min
72 h 21 min
7 h 32 min
4.8.1
17.95 ha
Machine Data Counter
134.8
42 . 00
(Active counters are highlighted in colour)
•
= Operating hours counter
•
= Drum hours counter
•
= Working hours counter
•
= Surface counter
•
= Odometer (both street and
= Fuel consumption meter
To set the counter level
•
To change counter level, activate the
2
or
1
key for
.
It is also possible to make a setting with the rotary
potentiometer:
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the counter level. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired counter level.
To exit the selection field, press the rotary
potentiometer.
IV - 38
L
B
C
D
BX500047
field mode) (km)
•
25 . 0
L/h
A
km
Info Centre
4.8.2
•
Deleting the Machine Data Counters
Pressing the
C
key under the
softkey
deletes all counters in a set. (Only the counters of
sets 1 to 3 can be deleted.)
•
0.0
ha
0.0
km
42 . 00
Pressing the
B
key under the
3
4
5
6
7
8
0 h 0 min
takes you one menu level back.
•
2
0 h 0 min
key on the rotary potentiometer
Pressing the
1
0 h 0 min
softkey
0.0
L
L/h
brings up the basic screen.
A
B
C
D
BX500048
4.8.2
•
Switching to Customer Data Counters
Pressing the
A
key under the
softkey brings
up the „Customer data counter“ menu.
For more information, see chapter „Customer Data
Counters“
IV - 39
Info Centre
4.9 Main Menu 3 „Maintenance“
The main menu level is active.
•
Select main menu 1 with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The display shows menu level 3 „Maintenance“.
The main menu „Maintenance“ is divided up into six
menus:
= Menu 3-1 "Central lubrication/cleaning
•
the engine compartment"
•
= Menu 3-2 „Grinding / counterblade“
•
= Menu 3-3 „Calibration of pendulum
frame“
•
= Menu 3-4 „Calibration of Autopilot“
•
= Menu 3-5 „Calibration of upper
discharge chute“
•
= Menu 3-6 „Calibration of cracker“
•
= Menu 3-7 „Calibration of front
attachment“
•
= Menu 3-8 „Calibration of travel path“
•
= Menü 3-9 „RockProtect“ (optional)
•
= Menü 3-10 „Kalibrierung Hauptkupplung“
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
When the maintenance switch in the
basic screen is activated, the
„Maintenance“ main menu appears
automatically.
IV - 40
A
B
C
D
BX500075
Info Centre
4.9.1 Menu 3-1 "Central lubrication/
cleaning of the engine
compartment"
The main menu "Maintenance" is active.
•
•
Select menu 3-1 "Central lubrication/cleaning the
engine compartment" with the rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500613
Conditions for release not met
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Diesel engine speed
•
= Release switch – feed drive/front
attachment
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= Stop switch for manual operation
Malfunction
•
= CU
•
= Manual operation
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
•
= KMC3
IV - 41
Info Centre
4.9.2 Menu 3-2 „Grinding / Counterblade“
The main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
•
Select menu 3-2 „Grinding / counterblade“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
Warning notices appear pointing out
special dangers associated with
grinding the cutting blade (refer to the
section on Operation – grinding the
cutting blade).
A
•
Actuating the
7
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500615
key takes you to a parameter
input box for the grinding of the counterblade.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Conditions for release not met
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Diesel engine speed
•
= Release switch – feed drive/front
attachment
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= Stop switch for manual operation
Malfunction
•
= CU
•
= Manual operation
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
•
= KMC3
IV - 42
A
B
C
D
BX500616
Info Centre
Status of the grinding flap (1)
•
= Grinding flap is closed
•
= Grinding flap is open
4
Status of the grinding stone (2)
•
= Grinding stone is on the left
•
= Grinding stone is in the centre
•
= Grinding stone is on the right
•
= Position of grinding stone unknown;
1
2
1
3
4
2
5
6
7
8
3
A
B
C
D
BX500052
grinding stone sensors are both alive/sensor is
defective - FAULT
Status of grinding operation (3)
•
1. number = current grinding cycle, 2nd
number = number of target grinding cycles
One grinding cycle corresponds to a double stroke of
the grinding stone (1 x left/1 x right).
Status „Total of all grinding cycles“ (4)
• (4) = Counter „Total of all grinding cycles“ since the
last time the counter status was set to „Zero“.
4
# 00420
After approximately 420 grinding
cycles (depending on the grinding
stone adjuster), the error message (5)
"Readjust grinding stone" appears on
the display. The grinding process is
disabled until the error message has
been reset.
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Acknowledging the error message
•
Using the
key under softkey
A
, hide the
A
B
C
D
BX500174
message.
•
Activate the
1
4
key to set counter „Total of all
grinding cycles“ (4) to zero. Message (6) appears in
the display.
•
Using the
A
key under softkey
# 00420
message.
•
Using the
B
key under softkey
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
, hide the
, cancel the
process.
Readjust the grinding stone or replace
it. (See Chapter „Readjusting or
Replacing the Grinding Stone“)
A
B
C
D
BX500175
IV - 43
Info Centre
Counterblade – status of the counterblade motors
(data as seen in direction of travel)
Visual display if the counterblade will be moved
manually.
•
= Approach counterblade on the right
active
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Approach counterblade on the right
inactive
•
= Moving away from counterblade on the
right active
•
= Moving away from counterblade on the
right inactive
•
= Counterblade right broken cable
•
= Counterblade right short circuit
•
= Approach counterblade on the left
A
B
C
D
BX500173
active
•
= Approach counterblade on the left
inactive
•
= Moving away from counterblade on the
left active
= Moving away from counterblade on the
•
left inactive
•
= Counterblade left broken cable
•
= Counterblade left short circuit
Adjusting the number of grinding cycles
(Factory setting 20)
• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in
colour.
• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
• You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
desired number.
• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
Start/stop grinding operation
Pressing the
8
key starts or stops grinding
operation.
•
= Grinding operation not possible.
•
= Start grinding operation.
•
= Stop grinding operation.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
•
Pressing the
7
key takes you to a parameter
input box for counterblade adjustment.
IV - 44
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500173
Info Centre
4.9.3 Menu 3-3 „Calibration of Pendulum
Frame and Absolute Lifting Gear
Height“
During the calibration, components
may move around, in particular the
lifting gear and pendulum frame - risk
of injury!
1
2
3
4
The pendulum frame only needs to be
calibrated after work on the pendulum
frame or after replacement of the
electronic system.
Before calibrating the pendulum
frame, adjust the lifting gear (see
chapter „Adjusting the lifting gear“)
5
6
7
8
The main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
•
Select menu 3-3 „Calibration of pendulum frame“
with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
D
BX500053
1
2
1
The „Calibration of pendulum frame and absolute lifting
gear height“ menu appears.
Conditions for release not met
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Seat switch
•
= Diesel engine speed
•
= Release switch – feed drive/front
BX500176
attachment
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= Stop switch for manual operation
Malfunction
•
= CU
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
•
= KMC3
IV - 45
Info Centre
Lifting gear
•
The current lifting height is indicated as a % with
the
•
symbol.
The currently saved absolute height of the lifting
gear at 80 % is indicated by the symbol
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
.
The currently saved absolute height of the lifting
gear at 20 % is indicated by the symbol
.
Pendulum frame
• The saved digital value for maximum deviation is
indicated by the symbol
A
B
C
D
BX500055
; the digital value
for the pendulum frame by the symbol
.
The digital value for the pendulum frame is updated
during the calibration process.
•
The current value of the sensor is indicated as a
for pendulum
digital value with the symbol
frame.
Calibration process for the pendulum frame
Prerequisites
1
•
Field mode release switch turned on.
•
Front attachment unit connected.
•
The front attachment (with the maize header folded
out) must be standing on the ground with a solid
subsurface
2
1
• Lower the lifting gear until the front attachment
comes to rest on the ground.
•
If the front attachment is not horizontal to the
machine, align the pendulum frame exactly with the
pendulum frame left (1) or pendulum frame right (2)
keys.
• To start calibration, activate the
softkey
D
key under
= „Apply setpoint value“. The
display on the softkey switches to
„Calibration process running“ and
=
= „Calibration
process successfully completed“.
The saved digital value for the pendulum frame
is updated.
IV - 46
BX500097
Info Centre
Calibration process for absolute lifting gear height
Calibration of the absolute lifting gear height is required
so that the lifting gear height can be specified in
absolute terms in the Info Centre.
The calibration values are stored separately for grass
pick-up and maize header.
Prerequisites
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lifting gear adjusted (see chapter „Adjusting the
lifting gear“).
Field mode release switch off.
Travelling gear release switch off.
Front attachment unit connected.
Adjust the connected front attachment to match
grass pick-up or maize header mode as appropriate.
The front attachment (with the maize header folded
out) must be standing on the ground with a solid
subsurface and are aligned horizontally.
1
2
Calibrate the upper lifting gear height
•
Press the raise lifting gear key (2) and the save
button for the lifting gear adjustment process (3) at
the same time until the display of the current lifting
height is 80 % with icon
3
.
BX420273
• For pick-up (1), measure the distance „a“ between
the ground and the lowest point under spring tine
(2).
For the maize header, measure the distance
between the ground and the cutter blade.
1
2
a
BX200431
•
•
•
•
With the rotary potentiometer, select the setting
„Save the absolute height of lifting gear at 80 %“.
The input field is highlighted in the colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
measured distance „a“.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500055
IV - 47
Info Centre
To calibrate the lower lifting gear height
•
Press the key to lower (1) or raise (2) the lifting gear
until the current lifting height displayed with the
symbol in the sixth field is 20 %.
1
2
BX420274
• For pick-up (1), measure the distance „b“ between
the ground and the lowest point under spring tine
(2).
For the maize header, measure the distance
between the ground and the cutter blade.
1
2
b
BX200432
•
With the rotary potentiometer, select the setting
„Save the absolute height of lifting gear at 20
•
•
•
%“. The input field is highlighted in the colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the
measured distance „b“.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The calibration process for „absolute lifting gear height“
is complete.
A
B
C
D
BX500056
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 48
Info Centre
4.9.4 Menu 3-4 „Calibration of Autopilot“
• There is danger of injury during
calibration due to the spontaneous
movements of mechanical parts (for
example the steering axle). No
persons may remain in the danger
zone of the machine.
• Work steps apply to Autopilot with
software version 150 200 029-08.
Before using autopilot for the first
time, the autopilot must be calibrated
to ensure problem-free operation.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500057
Pre-requisite:
• EASYCOLLECT maize header with row tracer
attached.
• The main menu "Maintenance" is called.
When the autopilot is calibrated, the
work steps must be performed in the
specified order.
Work steps:
1. Start the diesel engine and set the release
switch to ON.
Start the diesel engine and turn on release switches
<Field>, <Travelling gear>, and <Autopilot>.
If one of these conditions is not
fulfilled, the right side of the screen
will display a corresponding message.
Release conditions are highlighted in
yellow; errors are highlighted in red.
Conditions for release not met
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Seat switch
•
= Release switch autopilot
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Stop switch for manual operation
A
Malfunction
B
C
D
BX500058
•
= CU
•
= Joystick
•
= Autopilot
•
= KMC3
IV - 49
Info Centre
2. Calling up the calibration screen on the terminal
B
A
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500057
It is displayed the picture "Calibration of Autopilot"
• Picture BX500617 display with outside tip
13
7
8
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
6
1
1
3
2
9
11
12
10
14
B
A
C
D
BX500617
•
Picture BX500660 Display with centre tip
13
7
8
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
6
1
3
2
11
9
10
12
14
A
B
C
D
BX500660
Pos.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
IV - 50
Meaning
Saved value, maximum steering angle, left
Saved value, straight-ahead driving
Saved value, maximum steering angle, right
Saved value, minimum row tracer, left
Saved value, minimum row tracer, right
Actual value, steering angle sensor
Actual value, row tracer, left
Actual value, row tracer, right
Setpoint value, voltage/pulse duty factor at a steering angle of 0.01%, left
Saved value, minimum current steering angle, left
Setpoint value, voltage/pulse duty factor at a steering angle of 0.01%, right
Saved value, minimum current steering angle, right
Actual value, engine speed
Automatically calibration the minimum current from the valve steering left / right
Info Centre
The calibrated values are checked, if
there possible. If a value out of range, it
is displayed with an exclamation mark
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
by the calibrated value.
3.
Calibrating the steering angle sensor
3.1 Calibrate steering angle left max.
•
•
•
•
•
Move the steering angle to the max. left position
(move it to the left until the steering angle has gone
as far as it can).
A
B
C
D
BX500661
Use the rotary potentiometer to select
<saved value, maximum steering angle, left>. The
input field is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump
to the input field.
To save the current actual value of the steering angle
sensor and exit the input field, press the rotary
potentiometer again.
The actual value or the saved value must not be
less than 220. If it is, readjust the sensor.
3.2 Calibrating steering angle - straight-ahead
driving
•
Move the steering axle to the centre position (move it
until the steering is set to straight-ahead driving).
•
Use the rotary potentiometer to select
•
•
•
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500058
<saved value, straight-ahead driving>. The input field
is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump
to the input field.
To save the current actual value of the steering angle
sensor and exit the input field, press the rotary
potentiometer again.
The actual value or the saved value should be in the
range of 400 +/- 10. If it is not, readjust the sensor.
3.3 Calibrating the steering angle - right max.
•
Move the steering axle to the max. right position
(move it until the steering has gone as far as it can).
•
Use the rotary potentiometer to select
•
•
•
<saved value, maximum steering angle, right>. The
input field is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump
to the input field.
To save the current actual value of the steering angle
sensor and exit the input field, press the rotary
potentiometer again.
The actual value or the saved value may not be
greater than 630. If it is not, readjust the sensor.
IV - 51
Info Centre
If the values for the steering angle
sensor
are reversed (with large sensor values
for a left turn and small sensor values
for a right turn) the steering angle
sensor
must be checked. The notch (1) in the
axle from the steering angle sensor
and
the pin (2) must point towards the
plug.
2
1
BXII5217
4. Calibrate the row tracer:
The two row tracers right/left must be
calibrated together.
Since the program does not know
which sensor brackets are attached to
the machine, the row tracers are
shown reversed right/left with the
central tip (see Fig. BX500618).
Fig. BX500619 shows the display with
external sensors.
Beginning with Terminal software
version 150200104-08, the row tracer is
also taken into consideration in the
terminal in the central tip. For this
action, parameter 34016 "Autopilot row
tracer in central tip" must be set. 0 =
outside tip, 1 = central tip. If the
parameter is set to 1 accordingly, the
mask for calibration see picture
BX500652.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500652
The mask for calibration with outside tip
see picture BX500651.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500651
IV - 52
Info Centre
4.1 Calibrate row tracer left
The left row tracer must be in its basic
position and must not be actuated.
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting
•
•
•
•
or
for the „Left row
tracer“. The input field is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
To save the current actual value of the current
actual value of the left row tracer and exit the input
field, press the rotary potentiometer.
The actual value must be in the range of 250 ±50. If
necessary, readjust the sensor.
When the row tracer has been moved to the limit
obstruction, the sensor value must have a
difference of 300 - 320.
1
EC100630
Actuating <Row tracer left> increases
the sensor value.
BX500618
4.2 Calibrate row tracer right
The right row tracer must be in its
basic position and must not be
actuated.
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting
•
•
•
•
or
for the „Right row
tracer“. The input field is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
To save the current actual value of the current
actual value of the right row tracer and exit the input
field, press the rotary potentiometer.
The actual value must be in the range of 590 ±50. If
necessary, readjust the sensor.
When the row tracer has been moved to the limit
obstruction, the sensor value must have a
difference of 300 - 320.
1
EC100630
Actuating <Row tracer right> increases
the sensor value.
BX500619
IV - 53
Info Centre
5.
Calibrating of the valves - steering left/right
(manually)
Calibration with outside tip
Prerequisite
•
Move the steering axle to the centre position (move
it until the steering is set to straight-ahead driving).
13
7
5.1 Minimum current for the valve, steering to the
left (manually)
•
4
•
•
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select
input field is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
With the rotary potentiometer, increase the current
setpoint value (in increments of 0.01%) of the valve
until the steering just starts to move.
Then with the potentiometer, decrease the setpoint
value (in increments of 0.01%), until the steering
had just stopped moving.
To accept the setting as a calibrated value, press
the rotary potentiometer.
1
5
6
1
9
<Current value valve right> (9) . The
•
8
11
12
10
14
A
B
C
D
BX500617
Calibration with centre tip
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The saved minimum current value for the left valve
is updated.
•
Activating the
key under the rotary
11
9
potentiometer cancels the process.
5.2 Minimum current for the valve, steering to the
right (manually)
A
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select
<Current value valve right> (11) . The
•
•
•
input field is highlighted in colour.
Durch Drücken des Drehpotis in das Eingabefeld
springen.
Mit dem Drehpoti den aktuellen Sollwert (in 0,01%)
des Ventiles vergrößern, bis die Lenkung sich
gerade bewegt.
Mit dem Drehpoti dann den Sollwert (in 0,01%)
verringern, bis die Lenkung sich nicht mehr bewegt.
To accept the setting as a calibrated value, press
the rotary potentiometer.
The saved minimum current value for the right valve
is updated.
•
Activating the
key under the rotary
potentiometer cancels the process.
IV - 54
B
C
D
BX500654
Info Centre
6. Automatic calibration of steering valves left /
right
Risk of injury!
The steering axle moves
automatically while the steering
valves are being calibrated. No one
is permitted in the danger zone!
Beginning with Terminal software
version 150 200 104 - 08, automatic
calibration of minimum valve currents
left/right is possible.
Correct calibration of the steering angle
sensor is required to start automatic
calibration.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Start the automatic calibration process with the
key. A new window appears.
A
B
C
D
BX500655
IV - 55
Info Centre
Item
1
2
3
4
Meaning
Current PWM pulse duty cycle. Voltage expressed as a %; the relevant coil is
controlled.
Current is presently flowing through the relevant coil
Current value of steering angle sensor B64
Status of the calibration:
Valve Y39 "Steering left" is calibrated.
Valve Y40 "Steering right" is calibrated.
Calibration successful and values saved.
Calibration stopped
If an error occurs, the corresponding error number appears.
5
Then the valves are immediately controlled
automatically. The steering axle moves accordingly.
•
The process can be interrupted at any time with the
B
•
key.
When calibration has stopped, you can switch back
to the previous view with the
B
key.
The automatic calibration process may last several
minutes. If minimum currents were successfully
determined during automatic calibration, this is
indicated by a diskette icon that appears for about 3
seconds.
If an error occurs during calibration, the
calibration process is interrupted and
the corresponding error appears.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500656
IV - 56
Info Centre
Error
number
1
2
3
Icon
Meaning
The value of steering angle sensor B64 is
less that the calibrated value "Steering full
left"
The value of steering angle sensor B64 is
greater that the calibrated value "Steering
full right"
Valve Y39 "Steering left" is controlled. The
value of steering angle sensor B64 should
therefore also become smaller. However the
sensor value has become greater.
Cause / remedy
" Recalibrate steering angle sensor B64 left,
centre and right.
"
Recalibrate steering angle sensor B64 left,
centre and right.
"
Exchange valves Y39 and Y40 between
themselves. Activation is to the left, but
steering turns to the right.
Parameter 26027 "Valves reversed" is set
incorrectly.
Steering angle sensor B64 is mounted
incorrectly
Wrong sensor as steering angle sensor B64.
"
"
"
4
"Steering right" valve is activated. The
value of steering angle sensor B64 should
therefore also become greater. However,
the sensor value has become smaller.
"
"
"
"
5
Valve Y39 "Steering left" was activated, but
no change was noted on steering angle
sensor B64.
"
"
"
"
"
6
Valve Y39 "Steering left" was activated, but
no change was noted on steering angle
sensor B64.
"
"
"
"
"
7 und 9
Broken cable Y39 valve Steering Left
"
"
"
Valves reversed. Activation is to the right,
but steering turns to the left.
Parameter 26027 "Valves reversed" is set
incorrectly.
Sensor on the steering axle is mounted
incorrectly
Wrong sensor on the steering axle
The minimum current that was previously
determined automatically is not correct Ò
repeat calibration.
Steering angle sensor B64 defective
Steering angle sensor B64 or linkage on
steering angle sensor B64 mounted
incorrectly.
Hydraulics defective
Hydraulic valve Y39 "Steering left"
defective
The minimum current that was previously
determined automatically is not correct Ò
repeat calibration.
Steering angle sensor B64 defective
Steering angle sensor B64 or linkage on
steering angle sensor B64 mounted
incorrectly.
Hydraulics defective
Hydraulic valve Y40 "Steering right"
defective
Broken cable to valve Y39 "Steering left"
Valve coil Y39 defective
Autopilot control defective
IV - 57
Info Centre
Error
number
8 und 10
11
IV - 58
Icon
Meaning
Broken cable Y40 valve Steering Right.
Pressure was detected on pressure sensor
B63 "Pressure steering".
Cause / remedy
"
"
Broken cable to valve Y40 "Steering right"
Valve coil Y40 defective
"
"
"
"
"
Autopilot control defective
Steering intervention on steering wheel
Pressure sensor B63 defective
Autopilot control defective
Hydraulics defective
Info Centre
6. Functional check of the autopilot
At the standard setting, the automatic
pilot does not start working until the
speed is 0.7 km/h. To be able to test
the automatic pilot even when it is
stopped, you can set the parameter „w
min speed control on“ (No. 26007) in
the „Autopilot“ group to 0.
The minimum speed will be displayed
at which the autopilot starts regulating
(in 0.1 km/h).
After the functional check is
complete, set parameter 26007 back
to 7 again (0.7 km/h)!
Risk of injury!
Temporarily fasten straps on the
sensor hooks so that hooks can be
activated from the side, from a safe
distance.
Persons must not stay directly in
front of the machine because the
travelling gear release switch is
switched ON.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Switch ON the release switches „Travelling gear“,
„Road/field“ and „Autopilot“. The cabin door must be
closed. There must be no error message present
from the autopilot.
Activate the left crop edge.
Activate the autopilot and the left sensor hook
completely. Turn the steering wheel to the left. If
the sensor hook is released to its home position,
turn the steering to the right.
Activate the right crop edge.
Activate the autopilot and the right sensor hook.
Turn the steering wheel to the right. If the sensor
hook is released to its home position, turn the
steering to the left.
If the steering is set up exactly backwards, this can
be remedied with the „Valves reversed“ parameter
(No. 26027) in the autopilot group. To do this,
change the value from 0 to 1 if 0 was entered, or
from 1 to 0 if 1 was entered.
Set the parameter „w min speed control on“ (No.
26007) in the „Autopilot“ group back to 7 (0.7 km/h).
IV - 59
Info Centre
4.9.4 Menu 3-5 „Calibration of upper
discharge chute“
During the calibration, components
may move around, in particular the
lifting gear and upper discharge chute
- risk of injury!
Prerequisite
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The upper discharge chute must be raised.
The main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
•
Select menu 3-5 „Calibration of upper discharge
chute“ with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
D
BX500620
„Calibration of upper discharge chute“ appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Conditions for release not met
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Seat switch
•
= Upper discharge chute not up
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= Stop switch for manual operation
Malfunction
•
= CU
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
IV - 60
A
B
C
D
BX500066
Info Centre
Upper discharge chute
•
= Upper discharge chute up
•
= Upper discharge chute down
•
= Position of upper discharge chute
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
sensor, bottom - broken cable
•
= Position of upper discharge chute
sensor, bottom - short circuit
•
= Position of upper discharge chute
unknown, lower sensor position may be defective
A
B
C
D
BX500067
•
= Upper discharge chute position left
•
= Upper discharge chute position centre
•
= Upper discharge chute position right
•
= Upper discharge chute position
unknown, sensor position centre or defective
•
The
symbol indicates the current number of
pulses for the current side, while the
symbol
indicates the momentary current of the upper
discharge chute valve for the current direction of
rotation.
•
The
symbol indicates the saved
number of max. pulses for left.
•
The
symbol indicates the saved
number of max. pulses for right.
Data requiring calibration
The maximum number of pulses must be determined
for left and right.
The individual calibration processes
are interrupted by manually operating
the upper discharge chute with the key
on the multi-function lever and when
the driver leaves the driver’s seat!
IV - 61
Info Centre
Calibrating the maximum number of pulses to the
right
• Move the upper discharge chute all the way to the
right manually with the keys on the multi-function
lever.
The upper discharge chute stops when the
maximum number of pulses for the side in question
has been reached.
• If the upper discharge chute is not reached at the stop,
press the
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key to continue turning.
Turning is performed at minimum current.
Softkey display:
= Upper discharge chute right turning active
A
B
C
D
BX500067
= Upper discharge chute right turning inactive
= Upper discharge chute right turning error
•
If the upper discharge chute has reached the stop,
stop the upper discharge chute by activating the
multi-function lever.
• To start calibration, activate the
softkey
C
key under
= „Apply max. number of
pulses“. The display on the softkey switches to
= „Calibration process running“ and
=
„Calibration process successfully completed“.
Calibrating the maximum number of pulses to the
left
• Move the upper discharge chute all the way to the
left manually with the keys on the multi-function
lever.
The upper discharge chute stops when the
maximum number of pulses for the side in question
has been reached.
• If the upper discharge chute is not reached at the stop,
press the
B
key to continue turning.
Turning is performed at minimum current.
Softkey display:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Upper discharge chute left turning active
= Upper discharge chute left turning inactive
A
B
C
D
BX500067
= Upper discharge chute left turning error
•
If the upper discharge chute has reached the stop,
stop the upper discharge chute by activating the
multi-function lever.
• To start calibration, activate the
softkey
A
key under
= „Apply max. number of
pulses“. The display on the softkey switches to
= „Calibration process running“ and
=
„Calibration process successfully completed“.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 62
Info Centre
4.9.5 Menu 3-6 „Calibration of grain
conditioner“
The main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
•
•
1
2
Select menu 3-6 „Calibration of grain conditioner“
with the rotary potentiometer.
3
4
Press the rotary potentiometer.
5
6
7
8
„Calibration of grain conditioner“ appears.
Conditions for release not met
A
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Seat switch
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= Stop switch for manual operation
B
C
D
BX500621
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Malfunction
•
= CU
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
•
= KMC3
A
B
C
D
BX500069
IV - 63
Info Centre
Calibrating the grain conditioner
1
The grain conditioner should only be calibrated when
the grain conditioner is being installed or if the actual
value of the grain conditioner distance is significantly
different than the setpoint value.
3
2
To ensure exact calibration, it is important to determine
the exact distance between the two rollers (1, 2) of the
grain conditioner with a sensor gauge (3).
BX200440
The current power consumption of the grain conditioner
is indicated by the symbol
. It is required for
diagnostic purposes by the Krone service technicians.
•
•
•
•
Measure the grain conditioner distance on the
machine (actual value).
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
setting for the „Distance“. The input field is
highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump
to the input field.
You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the
distance to the measured actual value
.
A
•
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to exit
the input field.
•
The display on the softkey switches to
„Calibration process running“ and
=
= „Calibration
process successfully completed“.
•
Press the
3
or
4
key to decrease or increase or
reduce the grain conditioner distance.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 64
10.0
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500070
Info Centre
4.9.6 Menu 3-7 „Calibration of Feed Drive/Front Attachment“
The main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
•
•
1
2
Select menu 3-7 „Calibration of feed drive/front
attachment“ with the rotary potentiometer.
3
4
Press the rotary potentiometer.
5
6
7
8
„Calibration of feed drive/front attachment“ appears.
Display of Symbol (1):
= Central lubrication active (green)
A
B
C
D
BX500622
= Error in central lubrication (red)
Conditions for release not met
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Seat switch
•
= Diesel engine speed
•
= Release switch – feed drive/front
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
attachment
A
•
= Maintenance release switch
•
= Stop switch for control unit console
•
= Stop switch for manual operation
B
C
D
BX500071
Malfunction
•
= CU
•
= Joystick
•
= KMC2
•
= KMC3
IV - 65
Info Centre
Calibrating the front attachment
The front attachment should be calibrated only, when
the actual speed massively deviated from the setpoint
speed (by technician or after replacement of the job
computer).
After the front attachment is calibrated, the feed drive
should also be calibrated.
278
567
451
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
Prerequisites
•
•
Travelling gear release switch off
Release switch for feed drive/front attachment on
The front attachment must be stopped.
The engine speed must be 2000 rpm.
You can increase the engine speed to
2000 rpm with the
2
key.
• To start calibration for the front attachment, activate
the
C
key under softkey
.
The Y7 valve „Front attachment forward“ is activated.
The front attachment should start to turn after a brief
time.
The calibration process lasts up to 120 seconds. If the
necessary data cannot be determined during this time,
the calibration process is interrupted.
•
Use the
or
D
key under the softkey to abort
the calibration.
•
The progress display after the icon for the front
attachment
indicates the status:
= Calibration has been stopped
= Calibration is running
= Calibration was successful
= Calibration was not successful
•
The
symbol is used to indicate the present
current of valve Y7 „Front attachment forward“ in
mA.
•
The
symbol is used to indicate the current
speed of the front attachment.
IV - 66
A
B
C
D
BX500072
Info Centre
•
The speeds are indicated for support values 1 and 2
of the calibration:
Speed (support value) 1:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Calibration 1 has been stopped
278
567
451
0
= Calibration 1 is running
= Calibration 1 was successful
= Calibration 1 was not successful
Speed (support value) 2:
= Calibration 2 has been stopped
A
B
C
D
BX500072
= Calibration 2 is running
= Calibration 2 was successful
= Calibration 2 was not successful
Display stopped; current power consumption and
engine speed are at 0.
The calibration is complete.
•The power consumption display is updated:
I 0 = Power consumption when turning is started.
I min = Power consumption at minimum speed.
I max = Power consumption at maximum speed.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 67
Info Centre
Calibrating the feed drive
The feed drive should be calibrated together with the
front attachment and should not be performed if the
actual cutting length is different from the displayed
cutting length.
278
567
451
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
Prerequisites
•
Travelling gear release switch off
•
Release switch for feed drive/front attachment on
The feed drive must be at a standstill.
The engine speed must be 2000 rpm.
The engine speed can be increased to
2000 rpm with the
2
key.
• To start calibration for the feed drive, activate the
A
key under softkey
.
The Y5 valve „Feed drive forward“ is activated. The
front attachment should start to turn after a brief time.
The calibration process lasts up to 120 seconds. If the
necessary data cannot be determined during this time,
the calibration process is interrupted.
•
Use the
B
or
key under the softkey to abort
the calibration.
•
The display after the icon for the feed drive
indicates the status:
= Calibration has been stopped
= Calibration is running
= Calibration was successful
= Calibration was not successful
•
The
symbol is used to indicate the present
current of valve Y5 „Feed drive forward“ in mA.
•
The
symbol is used to indicate the current
speed of the feed drive.
IV - 68
A
B
C
D
BX500072
Info Centre
•
The speeds are indicated for support values 1 and 2
of the calibration:
Speed (support value) 1:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Calibration 1 has been stopped
278
567
451
0
= Calibration 1 is running
= Calibration 1 was successful
= Calibration 1 was not successful
Speed (support value) 2:
= Calibration 2 has been stopped
A
B
C
D
BX500072
= Calibration 2 is running
= Calibration 2 was successful
= Calibration 2 was not successful
Display stopped; current power consumption and
engine speed are at 0.
The calibration is complete.
•The power consumption display is updated:
I 0 = Power consumption when turning is started.
I min = Power consumption at minimum speed.
I max = Power consumption at maximum speed.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 69
Info Centre
4.9.7
Menu 3-8 „Calibration of Travel
Path“
It may become necessary to calibrate the travel path in
order to calculate the exact surface area of the new
field you are working.
Before you start to calibrate the travel
path, you must cover a travel distance
of between 50 m and 200 m.
Calibrating the travel path involves 2 work steps.
1.) The first calibration trip of the distance covered at
V1= 4 km/h (for example)
2.) The second calibration trip of the distance covered
at V2= 8 km/h (for example)
The main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
• Select menu 3-8 „Calibration of travel path“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The “Calibrate travel path” menu appears.
Explanation of the display:
1= Indicates the selected travel mode:
•
Road operation, 2-wheel
•
Field operation 2-wheel
•
A
The travel speed of (4) may differ from
the travel speed of (3), since the
calculated speed accounts for tyre
pressure and slippage.
5= Display for the first calibration trip of the travel path
covered.
6= Display for the second calibration trip of the travel
path covered.
7= The
8
key is used to save the parameters
calculated from the first and second calibration
trips.
IV - 70
C
D
BX500192
1
Field operation 4-wheel
2= Input field for the travel path covered (value
between 50 m and 200 m).
3= Travel speed extracted from the basic screen.
4= Travel speed measured on the wheel.
B
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
2
5
6
8
A
B
9
C
D
7
BX500177
Info Centre
8= Start or stop of the first calibration trip
9= Start or stop of the second calibration trip
1
Explanation of symbols for item 8+9:
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
Calibration trip 1 or 2 is stopped.
2
Start calibration trip 1 or 2 with the
STOP
A
or
B
key.
5
Calibration trip 1 or 2 is started.
Stop calibration trip 1 or 2 with the
A
or
B
key.
Calibration trip 1 or 2 has been successfully
6
8
A
B
9
C
D
7
BX500177
completed. Calibration trip 1 or 2 can be started
again with the
10= The
•
C
A
or
B
key.
key sets the travel path to zero.
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.9.7.1 Performing a calibration trip (field
mode with 2-wheel drive)
•
•
•
•
Bring up the „Calibration of travel path“ menu
The „Road/Field“ release switch must be in position
(II) field mode
„All-wheel drive“ release switch = OFF
„Axle separation“ release switch = OFF
If one of the release switches named
above is switched during the
calibration trip, all values not saved
until then will be deleted. The
calibration trip must be performed
again.
•
•
•
Using the rotary potentiometer, select input field (2);
the input field is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to input field (2).
Using the rotary potentiometer, set the value of the
previously measured travel path in input field (2).
IV - 71
Info Centre
1
First calibration trip:
•
•
Move up to the starting line of the measured travel
path with the machine.
Activate the first calibration (V1 in field (5)) with the
A
•
key.
Drive the measured travel path at an approximately
constant driving the speed (for example 4 km/h)
The display shows the average speed
in the field (5) and the travel path
covered so far.
3
A
key to save the average speed and the travel path
actually covered.
The
symbol (8) Calibration trip 1
saved appears in the display.
If the
symbol does not appear,
perform calibration trip 1 again.
IV - 72
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
2
5
6
8
A
At the end of the measured travel path, press the
1
B
9
C
D
7
BX500177
Info Centre
1
Second calibration trip:
The second calibration trip is performed at twice
the speed of the first calibration trip (in this
example at 8 km/h).
•
•
Move up to the starting line of the measured travel
path with the machine.
Activate the second calibration (V2 in field (6)) with
the
•
B
key.
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
2
5
6
Complete the measured travel path at twice the
speed of the first calibration trip (in this example at
8 km/h). Make certain to maintain an approximately
constant travel speed.
1
8
A
B
9
C
D
7
BX500177
The display shows the average speed
in the field (6) at the travel path
covered so far.
At the end of the measured travel path, press the
B
key to save the average speed and the travel path
actually covered.
The
symbol (9) Calibration trip 2
saved appears in the display.
If the
symbol does not appear,
perform calibration trip 2 again.
As soon as both calibration trips have been
successfully saved and the system can determine
possible parameters, the
display. The
8
symbol appears in the
key saves the parameters that have
been calculated to EEPROM.
The temporarily stored values from the first and second
calibration trip are reset by the system.
If the system is unable to determine
any reasonable parameters from the
calibration trips that were saved, the
symbol does not appear in the
display.
Then the calibration trips must be
performed again.
IV - 73
Info Centre
4.9.7.2 Performing a calibration trip (field
mode with all-wheel drive)
Repeat the calibration process for all-wheel drive. The
process is identical to the one in chapter „Performing a
Calibration Trip (Field Mode with 2-Wheel Drive)“
The only difference is that the „Allwheel drive“ release switch must he
set to the „ON“ position.
4.9.8 Menu 3-9 „Calibration of
RockProtect“
The main menu „Maintenance“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 3-9 „Calibration of RockProtect“ with
the rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Calibration of RockProtect“ appears.
is
The current voltage value of the sensor
displayed according to the configuration .
The calibrated voltage value of the sensor
is
displayed according to the configuration.
Any release conditions that have not been fulfilled are
displayed in the area highlighted in grey, if applicable.
Before starting the calibration, make sure that the front
attachment is in the harvest position. In addition, the
feed drive must be free from crop and the precompression rollers must rest against the bottom limit
stop. The feed drive may not be switched on.
•
Press the
key under the
ROP00003
softkey to
start the calibration.
The display on the softkey shows an active or
completed calibration process, if applicable:
= Calibration process inactive
=
Calibration process active
= Calibration process successfully completed
ROP00004
IV - 74
Info Centre
4.9.9 Menu 3-10 "Calibration of main
coupling"
Risk of injury !
While the main coupling valve is
being calibrated, the cutting drum
starts running automatically!
As of software version 150 200 104-08
the valve current can be calibrated for
the main coupling.
Prerequisites:
In order to be able to calibrate the speeds, the following
conditions have to be fulfilled:
• Quick-stop switch - panel: OFF
• Quick-stop switch – manual operation: OFF
• Travelling gear release switch: OFF
• Road/field switch: ON
• Maintenance release switch: OFF
• The driver must be sitting on the driver’s seat.
• The door must be closed.
If one of these conditions has not been fulfilled, a
corresponding symbol is displayed on the terminal.
The keys which must be pressed are displayed on the
graphics
The terminal keys must be pressed.
When calibrating the main coupling,
observe the sequence of the work
steps.
Work steps:
Risk of injury!
During the calibration process
components may move, in particular
the cutting drum.
The main menu "Maintenance" is active.
1. Select menu 3-10 "Calibration of main coupling"
with the rotary potentiometer.
2. Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500657
IV - 75
Info Centre
Conditions for release not met
Field release switch not in position <ON>.
To start the calibration process, the switch
must be in the <ON> position.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Travelling gear release switch not in <OFF>
position. To start the calibration process, the
switch must be in the <OFF> position.
Maintenance release switch is not in the
<OFF> position. To start the calibration
process, the switch must be in the <OFF>
position.
The seat switch has not been actuated. To
start the calibration process, there must be a
person on the seat.
The quick-stop switch on the panel of the cab
has been actuated. To start the calibration
process, the switch must not be actuated.
The quick-stop switch in manual operation
has been actuated. To start the calibration
process, the switch must not be actuated.
The door has not been closed. To start the
function, the door must be closed .
IV - 76
A
B
C
D
BX500658
Info Centre
When all conditions have been fulfilled for calibration of
the main coupling, no symbols are displayed in the left
screen area.
3. Starting the calibration process
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When all conditions have been fulfilled and the symbol
is displayed, the calibration process can be
started:
•
Press the
5
key.
The current of the "main coupling ON"
•
flows through the valve Y12 in mA
The speed of the cutting drum
in r.p.m.
When a rotation of the cutting drum is detected, the
min and max current for the cutting drum valve is
calculated and automatically saved.
A
B
C
D
BX500659
If no speed is detected on the cutting
drum, the automatic calibration process
is stopped at 1400 mA.
If no current is measured, e.g. because
the valve cable is broken, the
calibration process is also interrupted
and an error message is displayed.
•
To stop the calibration process, press the
key.
6
The following conditions are possible during the
calibration process:
STOP
The calibration process has been stopped
The calibration process is running
A speed of the cutting drum has been
measured. The values have been saved.
The calibration process was concluded successfully.
The speed of the diesel engine in r.p.m.
All conditions for automatic calibration of the
main coupling have been fulfilled. The calibration
process can be started with the key
A
below.
The calibration process is running and can be
stopped with the key below. No values are saved.
or:
The calibration process cannot be started
because e.g. one or more conditions have not
been fulfilled.
IV - 77
Info Centre
4.10
Main Menu 4 Service
The main menu level is active.
•
Select the main menu with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display shows menu level 4 „Service“.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The main menu „Service“ is divided up into four menus:
•
= Menu 4-1 „Diagnostics“
A
•
= Menu 4-2 „Error list“
•
= Menü 4-3 „Fitter’s section (password-
B
C
D
BX500074
protected“)
•
•
= Menu 4-4 „Information“
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.10.1 Menu 4-1 „Diagnostics“
The main menu level is active.
•
Select main menu 4-1 with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The display shows menu level 4-1 „Diagnostics“.
The main menu, „Diagnostics“, is divided up into 17
menus:
•
= Menu 4-1-1 „Feed drive“
•
= Menu 4-1-2 „Front attachment“
•
= Menu 4-1-3 „CAN bus“
•
= Menu 4-1-4 „Discharge chute“
•
= Menu 4-1-5 „Lifting gear“
•
= Menu 4-1-6 „Drive“
•
= Menu 4-1-7 „Metal detection“
•
= Menu 4-1-8 „Diesel engine“
•
= Menu 4-1-9 „Autopilot“
A
IV - 78
B
C
D
BX500624
Info Centre
•
= Menu 4-1-10 „Autoscan“
•
= Menu 4-1-11 „Electronics“
•
= Menu 4-1-12 „Work“
•
= Menu 4-1-13 „Grinding“
•
= Menu 4-1-14 „Counterblade“
•
= Menu 4-1-15 „Grain conditioner“
•
= Menu 4-1-16 „Joystick“
•
= Menu 4-1-17 „Control unit console“
•
= Menu 4-1-18 „Manual operation“
•
= Menu 4-1-19 „Terminal“
•
= Menu 4-1-20 „RockProtect“
•
Pressing the
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500624
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 79
Info Centre
4.10.1.1 Display of Release Conditions
Not Met for Diagnostics
Menu field (I) shows conditions that have not yet been
met but which must be met to be able to perform
diagnostics. An appropriate remedy must be found in
each case.
•
I
= Diesel engines1 and 2 not running
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
synchronously
•
= Diesel engine coupling engaged or
disengaged
B
A
C
D
= Diesel engine speed not at 2000 rpm
•
=Diesel engine has not been started
•
=Diesel engine is not off
•
= Diesel engine idle speed of 1100UPM not
BX500185
•
= Seat switch (driver’s seat is unoccupied)
•
= Stop switch in the console on or off
•
= Manual operation stop switch on or off
•
= Open or close door
•
= Switch the maintenance release switch on
reached
•
=Speed of vehicle is not correct
•
= Switch the axle separation release switch
or off
on or off
•
= Switch the all-wheel release switch on or off
•
= Switch the release switch autopilot on or off
•
= Switch the second diesel engine release
switch on or off
•
= Switch the feed drive/front attachment
release switch on or off
•
= Switch the travelling gear release switch on
or off
•
•
= Switch the road/field release switch on or
off
= Switch the parking brake release switch on
or off
IV - 80
•
= Main coupling on/off.
•
= Lifting gear too high/not high enough
= Lifting gear too low/not low enough
•
= Upper discharge chute not parked
•
= Upper discharge chute not up
•
= Feed drive off / not off
•
= Feed drive on / not on
•
= Cutting drum running / not running
•
= Cutting drum stopped / not stopped
•
= Pendulum frame not in horizontal position
•
= Grinding flap closed
•
= Grinding flap open
•
= Front attachment not folded out
•
= Front attachment not folded in
•
= Front attachment off / not off
•
= Front attachment on / not on
Info Centre
4.10.1.2 Display of possible faults for
diagnostics
The faults listed below may appear in menu field (I).
•
= Error CAN to ADM 1
•
= Error CAN to ADM 2
•
= Error CAN to Autopilot
•
= Error CAN to CU
•
= Error CAN to DIOM
I
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500185
•
= Error CAN to EMR
•
= Error CAN to manual operation
•
= Error CAN to Joystick
•
= Error CAN to KMC2
•
= Error CAN to KMC3
•
= Error CAN to metal detection
•
= Error CAN to maturity detection
•
= Error CAN to SD
IV - 81
Info Centre
4.10.2 Menu 4-1-1 „Feed Drive“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select menu 4-1-1 „Feed drive“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Feed drive diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
A
B
C
D
BX500076
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“
The menu „Feed drive diagnostics“ is divided into
2 pages:
Page 1: Sensor test
Page 2: Actuator test
Sensor test (page 1)
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Error (symbol will be displayed after the
incorrect position)
•
= Broken cable sensor
•
= Sensor alive
•
= Sensor not alive
•
= Sensor short circuit
•
= Metal detection inactive (no medal in the
A
B
C
D
BX500625
feed drive)
•
= Metal detection active (metal in the feed
drive)
Press the
C
key under the
softkey to bring up
page 2 <Actuator test> of the „Feed drive“ menu.
IV - 82
Info Centre
Actuator test (page 2)
•
= Feed drive forward inactive
•
= Feed drive forward active (green)
•
= Feed drive forward free
•
= Feed drive forward error (red)
•
= Feed drive rear inactive
•
= Feed drive reverse active (green)
•
= Feed drive rear free
•
= Feed drive reverse error (red)
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500626
•
= Horn off
•
= Horn on (green)
•
= Horn broken cable (red)
•
= Horn short circuit (red)
Switching actuators on/off
Pre-condition: Conditions for release must be met.
(See Section „Display of release conditions not met for
diagnostics“).
•
When all conditions have been met for the actuator
test, the
•
key and
key.
4
key.
key and
7
key.
To show the current value, press the
the
•
2
To turn the horn on and off, use the
8
•
key and
To turn the reverse feed drive on and off, use the
3
•
softkeys will be displayed
and the displayed actuators will be released.
To turn the forward feed drive on and off, use the
1
•
and
Press the
D
key under
softkey.
B
key under the
softkey to go
back to page 1 <Sensor test> of the „Feed drive“
menu.
•
Pressing the
C
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 83
Info Centre
4.10.3 Menu 4-1-2 „Front attachment“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-2 „Front attachment“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
„Front attachment diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“
A
B
C
D
BX500629
The menu „Front attachment diagnostics“ is
divided into 2 pages:
Page 1: Sensor test
Page 2: Actuator test
Sensor test (page 1)
•
= Sensor alive
•
= Sensor not alive
•
= Sensor short circuit
•
= Metal detection inactive (no medal in the
A
feed drive)
= Metal detection active (metal in the feed
drive)
Press the
C
key under the
softkey to bring up
page 2 <Actuator test> of the „Feed drive“ menu.
IV - 84
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Broken cable sensor
•
•
2
= Error (symbol will be displayed after the
incorrect position)
•
1
B
C
D
BX500627
Info Centre
Actuator test (page 2)
•
= Front attachment forward inactive
•
= Front attachment forward active (green)
•
= Front attachment forward is free
•
= Front attachment forward error (red)
•
= Front attachment reverse inactive
•
= Front attachment reverse active (green)
•
= Front attachment reverse free
•
= Front attachment reverse error (red)
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500628
Switching actuators on/off
Pre-condition: Conditions for release must be met.
(See Section „Display of release conditions not met for
diagnostics“).
•
When all conditions have been met for the actuator
and
test, the
•
and the displayed actuators will be released.
To turn the forward feed drive on and off, use the
1
•
2
key.
key and
4
key.
To turn the horn on and off, use the
8
•
key and
To turn the reverse feed drive on and off, use the
3
•
softkeys will be displayed
7
key and
key.
Press the
B
key under the
softkey to go
back to page 1 <Sensor test> of the „Feed drive“
menu.
•
Pressing the
C
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 85
Info Centre
4.10.4 Menu 4-1-3 „CAN Bus“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-3 „CAN bus“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the rotary potentiometer.
Diagnostics „CAN bus“ appears.
CAN bus user:
A
•
= KMC2 active
•
= KMC2 inactive or disconnected from
B
C
D
BX500082
CAN bus
•
= SmartDrive active
•
= SmartDrive inactive or disconnected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
from CAN bus
•
= DIOM active
•
= DIOM inactive or disconnected from
CAN bus
A
B
C
D
BX500083
•
= Autopilot active
•
= Autopilot inactive or disconnected from
CAN bus
•
= Joystick active
•
= Joystick inactive or disconnected from
CAN bus
•
= Terminal active
•
= Terminal inactive or disconnected from
CAN bus
•
= CU active
•
= CU inactive or disconnected from CAN
bus
•
= KMC3 active
•
= KMC3 inactive or disconnected from
CAN bus
IV - 86
Info Centre
•
= ADM1 active
•
= ADM1 inactive or disconnected from
CAN bus
•
= Not assigned
•
= Not assigned
•
= EMR active
•
= EMR inactive or disconnected from
CAN bus
•
= Manual operation active
•
= Manual operation inactive or
B
A
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500083
disconnected from CAN bus
•
= Metal detection active
•
= Metal detection inactive or
disconnected from CAN bus
•
= (optional) AutoScan active
•
= (optional) AutoScan inactive or
disconnected from CAN bus
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
Press the
C
key to bring up the second page of the
„Can bus“ menu.
Switching terminating resistors
•
= Terminating resistor active
•
= Terminating resistor inactive
B
key to bring up the previous page of
the „Can bus“ menu.
•
Pressing the
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
II
Press the
1
III
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500649
IV - 87
Info Centre
4.10.5 Menu 4-1-4 „Upper Discharge
Chute“
The diagnostics menu „Upper discharge chute“ is
divided into 3 pages.
Page 1:
Page 2:
Page 3
Sensor Test
Actuator test part 1
Actuator test part 2
•
Select menu 4-1-4 „Upper discharge chute“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500084
„Upper discharge chute diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“
Sensor test for upper discharge chute (1) (page 1)
A
B
C
D
BX500630
The sensor test is used to test sensors that have
been attached to the machine for the function of
the upper discharge chute.
•
= Upper discharge chute position left
•
= Upper discharge chute position centre
•
= Upper discharge chute position right
•
= Upper discharge chute position
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
unknown, sensor position centre or defective
•
= Upper discharge chute up
•
= Upper discharge chute down
•
= Position of upper discharge chute
A
B
C
D
3
BX500631
sensor, bottom - broken cable
•
= Position of upper discharge chute
sensor, bottom - short circuit
•
= Position of upper discharge chute
unknown, lower sensor position may be defective
IV - 88
Info Centre
Status display of general sensors (2)
•
= Broken cable sensor
•
= Sensor alive
•
= Sensor not alive
•
= Sensor short circuit
General error messages (3)
•
=Problem with the 12V3/12V4 power supply of
the KMC2
= The 12V3/12V4 power supply of the KMC2
•
is OK
•
The
symbol indicates the current number of
pulses for the present side.
•
The
symbol indicates the present current of
the upper discharge chute valve for the current
direction of rotation.
Actuator test part 1/2 (page 2/page 3)
Actuators are controlled during the
actuator test. This may result in the
machine performing unexpected
actions. Because of this, the test
must only be performed from a safe
position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by
the actuators.
The actuator test is used to test actuators that have
been attached to the machine for the function of the upper
discharge chute.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Menu control:
A
Press the
C
B
C
D
key under the softkey to bring up the
BX500179
next page of the „Upper discharge chute/actuator test“
menu.
Press the
B
key to bring up the previous page of the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
„Upper discharge chute“ menu.
If an actuator is turned on, the next or
previous page cannot be called.
(If necessary, turn the actuator off and
repeat the process)
Pre-requisite: Conditions for release must be met.
((See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not Met
for Diagnostics“)
A
B
C
D
BX500180
IV - 89
Info Centre
To select an actuator:
To run an actuator (for example upper discharge chute
rotate left), activate the corresponding keys on the
control unit. For the actuators to be switched, see the
table below.
The example below explains how to perform an
actuator test. Proceed in a similar manner with the
other actuators.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Turn on the actuator „Upper discharge chute rotate left“
with the
1
key
Possible status display of the selected actuator
A
B
C
D
BX500180
Actuator turned off
Actuator turned on
Broken cable
Short circuit
The status displays described above
are valid for all actuators related to the
upper discharge chute.
Valve
Icon
Description
Turn on the actuator
Turn off the actuator
Y20
Upper discharge chute rotate left
1
2
Y21
Upper discharge chute rotate right
3
4
Y22
Raise ejector flap
5
6
Y23
Lower ejector flap
7
8
Y24
Lift upper discharge chute
1
2
Y25
Lower upper discharge chute
3
4
Y63
Fold in upper discharge chute
5
6
Y64
Fold out upper discharge chute
7
8
IV - 90
Info Centre
4.10.6 Menu 4-1-5 „Lifting Gear“
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
• Select menu 4-1-5 „Lifting gear“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
• Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Lifting gear diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“
The diagnostics menu „Lifting gear“ is divided into 4
pages.
Page 1:
Information page
Page 2:
Actuator test (part 1)
Page 3:
Actuator test (part 2)
Page 4:
Calibration display
B
A
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500092
Menu overview – information page (page 1) 2
I
Display sensor values
II
Status display valves
III
Display saved setpoint value
Menu control
•
Press the
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
II
key under the $$$ softkey to bring
Press the
up page 2 <Actuator test> of the „Lifting gear“
menu.
•
1
A
key under the
III
softkey to
bring up page 4 <Calibration display> of the „Lifting
gear“ menu.
A
B
C
D
BX500649
IV - 91
Info Centre
Lifting gear sensor test (page 1)
The Diagnostics menu is used to test whether the sensor
responds when a function is performed.
This is indicated by the values after the symbols in the
sensor display (I) changing when the corresponding
function is performed.
II
= Sensor header contour left; the current
value is displayed as a digital and
percentage value
= Error, sensor header contour left
•
= Position of sensor lifting gear; the current
value is displayed as a digital,
percentage, and absolute value
•
= Error, lifting gear position sensor
•
= Sensor header contour right; the current
value is displayed as a digital and
percentage value
•
= Error, sensor header contour right
•
= Sensor for lifting gear pressure; the
current value is displayed as a digital and
percentage value
•
= Error, lifting gear pressure sensor
Status displays of sensor display (IV):
•
= Front attachment folded out left
(EasyCollect)
•
= Front attachment folded out right
(EasyCollect)
•
= Position of pendulum frame
•
= Broken cable sensor
•
= Sensor alive
•
= Sensor not alive
•
= Sensor short circuit
•
= Suspension active
•
= Suspension inactive
Damping = oscillation absorption for
road travel
•
Press the
C
key under the
softkey to bring
up page 2 <Actuator test> of the "Lifting gear"
menu.
IV - 92
3
4
5
6
7
8
III
A
•
2
I
The status displays listed below also appear in the sensor
display (I)
•
1
B
C
D
BX500649
Info Centre
Actuator test part 1 (page 2)
Actuators are controlled during the
actuator test. This may result in the
machine performing unexpected
actions. Because of this, the test
must only be performed from a safe
position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by
the actuators.
Menu control
•
Press the
C
key under the
softkey to bring
up page 1 <Information page> of the "Lifting gear"
menu.
•
Press the
B
key under the
softkey to bring
up page 3 <Actuator test> of the "Lifting gear"
menu.
If an actuator is turned on, the next or
previous page cannot be called.
(If necessary, turn the actuator off and
repeat the process)
Pre-requisite: Conditions for release must be met.
((See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not Met
for Diagnostics“)
Actuator turn on/off
•
To turn <Raise lifting gear> on and off, use the
key and
•
4
3
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key.
To turn <Lifting gear accumulator> on and off, use
the
•
key.
To turn <Lower lifting gear> on and off, use the
key and
•
2
1
key and
6
key.
To turn the LED on the EMR on and off, use the
7
key and
8
key.
A
B
C
D
BX500632
Valve
Description
Y32
Raise lifting gear
Y33
Lower lifting gear
Y34
Lifting gear accumulator
Actuator turned on
Actuator turned off
(LED lights up in green)
(LED is not lit)
LED on EMR
Additional status displays of the selected actuator:
Broken cable
Short circuit
IV - 93
Info Centre
Actuator test part 2 (page 3)
•
When all conditions have been met for the actuator
test, the softkeys
and
will be displayed and
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
the displayed actuators will be released.
Actuator turn on/off
• To turn <Turn pendulum frame to the left> on and off,
use the
key and
1
2
key.
• To turn <Turn pendulum frame to the right> on and off,
use the
key and
3
4
key.
• To turn <Pendulum frame locked horizontally> on and
off, use the
key and
5
6
A
B
C
D
BX500633
key.
• To turn <Pendulum frame locked horizontally> on and
off, use the
key and
6
8
key.
Valve
Description
Actuator turned on
Actuator turned off
(LED lights up in green)
(LED is not lit)
Y37
Turn pendulum frame to the left
Y38
Turn pendulum frame to the right
Y54
Pendulum frame locked horizontally
Y55
Pendulum frame locked horizontally
Actuator status displays
Actuator status (1)
active
Actuator status (1) Actuator status (1) Actuator status (1)
inactive
Broken cable
Short circuit
Description
Raise lifting gear
Lower lifting gear
Lifting gear accumulator
Pendulum frame rotate left
Pendulum frame rotate left
Pendulum frame locked
horizontally
Pendulum frame locked
horizontally
Menu control
•
Press the
B
key under the
softkey to bring
up page 2 <Actuator test> of the „Lifting gear“
menu.
IV - 94
Info Centre
To increase/reduce the PWM value
On the bar graph (1), you can adjust in percentage
terms how far the control valve opens (PWM value).
•
•
•
•
With the rotary potentiometer, select the bar graph.
The bar graph is highlighted in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the bar graph.
Turning the rotary potentiometer clockwise
increases the value. Turning it anticlockwise
reduces the value.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the value
to be applied and returns you from the bar graph.
1
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500650
Calibration display (page 4)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
II
A
The list in the table below shows how the elements on
which the sensor display (I) and calibration display (III)
depend.
DesignationSensor display
Calibration display
(I)
B
C
D
BX500648
Notes
(III)
Lifting Gear
Lower lifting gear must be floating freely
Top pressure control
(no
Lifting gear distance control
/
contact with ground)
Lifting gear must be completely up/
completely down
Header contour left
/
Front attachment must be(optional)
completely up / completely down
Header contour right
/
Front attachment must be (optional)
completely up / completely down.
Menu control
•
Press the
key under the softkey
B
to bring
up page 1 <Information page> of the „Lifting gear“
menu.
•
Pressing the
C
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 95
Info Centre
4.10.7 Menu 4-1-6 „Drive“
The diagnostics menu „Drive“ is divided into 4 pages.
Page 1:
Sensor Test
Page 2:
Actuator test part 1
Page 3:
Actuator test part 2
Page 4:
Actuator test part 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-6 „Drive“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Drive diagnostics“ appears.
A
B
C
D
BX500101
Drive switch
•
= Release switch – road/field
•
= Release switch – road/field activated
•
= Travelling gear release switch
•
= Travelling gear release switch activated
•
= Parking brake release switch
•
= Parking brake release switch activated
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500102
•
= Release switch all-wheel
•
= Release switch all-wheel activated
•
= Release switch axle separation
•
= Release switch axle separation activated
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“
IV - 96
Info Centre
Drive
•
Direction of travel; the number after the symbol is
the current travel speed.
= Forward travel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Neutral (standstill)
= Reverse travel
•
= Cruise control active; the number after
the icon is the saved speed for Cruise control
operation in km/h
= Cruise control inactive
A
•
Type of drive
B
C
D
BX500102
= Front wheel drive active
= Front wheel drive inactive
= All-wheel drive active (only possible in
field mode, can only be activated at a standstill,
travelling speed
0 - 14 km/h)
= All-wheel in active
= Axle separation of active (only possible
in field mode with all-wheel drive turned on,
activation at travelling speed < 10 km/h)
= Axle separation inactive
= Parking brake is applied
= Emergency mode; allows the driver to
drive the vehicle out of the danger zone even if
there are serious drive problems.
Drive sensor test (1) (page1)
The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been
attached to the machine for the function of the drive.
•
= High pressure OK
•
= High pressure not OK
•
= High pressure unknown
•
= Temperature of flush valve OK
•
= Temperature of flush valve not OK
•
= Temperature of flush valve unknown
IV - 97
Info Centre
•
= Brake pressure OK
•
= Brake pressure not OK
•
= Brake pressure unknown
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Brake pedal switch
•
= Brake pedal switch activated
•
= Brake pedal switch OK
•
= Brake pedal switch unknown
A
B
C
D
BX500102
•
= Brake tank pressure OK
•
= Brake tank pressure not OK
•
= Brake tank pressure unknown
•
= Pivoting angle pump, front axle
•
= Pivoting angle pump, front axle OK
•
= Pivoting angle pump, front axle not OK
•
= Pivoting angle pump, front axle unknown
•
= Pivoting angle pump, rear axle
•
= Pivoting angle pump, rear axle OK
•
= Pivoting angle pump, rear axle not OK
•
= Pivoting angle pump, rear axle unknown
•
= Power limitation active
•
= Power limitation inactive
IV - 98
Info Centre
Actuator test part1 (page 2)
Actuators are controlled during the
actuator test. This may result in the
machine performing unexpected
actions. Because of this, the test
must only be performed from a safe
position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by
the actuators.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Menu control:
•
Press the
C
key to bring up the next page of the
A
B
C
D
BX500102
„Lifting gear“ menu.
•
Press the
B
key to bring up the previous page of
the „Lifting gear“ menu.
If an actuator is turned on, the next or
previous page cannot be called.
(If necessary, turn the actuator off and
repeat the process)
Pre-requisite: Conditions for release must be met.
(See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not Met
for Diagnostics“)
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible Faults
for Diagnostics“
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500103
To select an actuator:
To run an actuator (for example reversing lights),
activate the corresponding keys on the control unit. For
the actuators to be switched, see the table below.
The example below explains how to perform an
actuator test. Proceed in a similar manner with the
other actuators.
Using the
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key, turn on the „Reversing lights“
actuator.
Possible status display of the selected actuator
A
B
C
D
BX500183
Actuator turned off
Actuator turned on
Broken cable
Short circuit
The status displays described above
are valid for all actuators related to the
upper discharge chute.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500184
IV - 99
Info Centre
The status displays described in this
chapter are valid for all actuators
related to the travelling gear.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500662
Valve
Icon
Description
Turn on the actuator
Turn off the actuator
Y1
front axle backward
1
2
Y2
front axle forward
3
4
Y3
rear axle backward
5
6
Y4
rear axle forward
7
8
Y13
All-wheel
1
2
Y10
Axle separation
3
4
Y69
Stop valve front axle
5
6
Y70
Stop valve rear axle
7
8
Y14
1/2 absorption volume front axle
1
2
Y11
1/2 absorption volume front axle
3
4
Y68
1/3 absorption volume front axle
5
6
Reversing lights
1
2
Brake light
3
4
IV - 100
Info Centre
4.10.8 Menu 4-1-7 „Metal Detection“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select menu 4-1-7 „Metal detection“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible
Faults for Diagnostics“
A
B
C
D
BX500106
Metal detection
•
= Operating voltage for metal detection
1
2
•
= Voltage of the stop valve.
3
4
5
6
7
8
0 mV = Stop valve switched
Operating voltage = Stop valve not switched
•
= Status of the metal detection output
= No metal in feed drive
A
= Metal in feed drive
•
B
C
D
BX500107
= Status of the KMC2 input, which is
also switched through the metal detection output.
= No metal in feed drive
= Metal in feed drive
= Error
IV - 101
Info Centre
•
= The current speed of the feed drive is
displayed. This makes it possible to check that the
attachments have come to a complete stop.
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= software version of metal detection
•
= Metal detection is on
= Metal detection is off
•
=The output of the metal detection is in
A
good working order
in good working order
= Broken cable stop valve
= Short circuit stop valve
= Power consumption too high
= Interference limit value
•
= Average interference value
To switch actuator on/off
•
A test stop for metal detection can be triggered by
activating the
A
key under the
softkey.
• To release metal detection again, activate the
key under the
•
•
Pressing the
1
softkey.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 102
B
softkey.
To apply the default setting values, press the
key next to the
C
D
BX500107
= The output of the metal detection is not
•
B
Info Centre
4.10.9 Menu 4-1-8 „Diesel Engine“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select menu 3-8 „Diesel engine“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Diesel engine Diagnostics“ appears.
Diesel engine page 1
•
= Engine speed
•
= Engine cooling water temperature
•
= Engine cooling water level
•
= Engine oil pressure
•
= Engine oil temperature
•
= Engine oil level
• Activating the
key for
C
A
B
C
D
BX500108
key for
A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
causes the next
page to be displayed.
• Activating the
1
causes the next
A
B
C
D
maintenance interval to be displayed
BX500109
Diesel engine page 2
•
= Diesel tank fuel level
•
= Diesel fuel consumption
•
= Temperature of air intake
•
= Engine oil temperature
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maximum engine capacity
Engine capacity, speed
• Activating the
A
key for
causes the next
A
B
C
D
maintenance interval to be displayed.
• Activating the
B
key for
BX500110
causes the
previous page to be displayed.
• Activating the
C
key for
causes the next
1
2
causes the
3
4
5
6
7
8
page to be displayed.
• Activating the
A
key for
diesel engine Diagnostics to be displayed.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500161
IV - 103
Info Centre
4.10.10 Menu 4-1-9 „Autopilot“
The Diagnostics menu „Autopilot“ is divided into 2
pages.
Page 1:
Sensor Test
Page 2:
Actuator test
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-9 „Autopilot“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
D
„Autopilot Diagnostics“ appears.
•
Pressing the
BX500111
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible
Faults for Diagnostics“
Sensor test for upper discharge chute (page1)
Actuator test (page 2)
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500153
Actuators are controlled during the
actuator test. This may result in the
machine performing unexpected
actions. Because of this, the test
must only be performed from a safe
position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by
the actuators.
The actuator test is used to test actuators that have
been attached to the machine for the function of the
Autopilot.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Menu control:
A
Press the
B
key under the softkey to bring up the
next page of the „Autopilot/actuator test“ menu.
Press the
B
key to bring up the previous page of
the „Autopilot“ menu.
If an actuator is turned on, the next or
previous page cannot be called.
(If necessary, turn the actuator off
and repeat the process)
Pre-requisite: Conditions for release must be met.
((See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not
Met for Diagnostics“)
IV - 104
B
C
D
BX500152
Info Centre
To select an actuator:
To run an actuator (for example disable steering (I)),
activate the corresponding keys on the control unit.
For the actuators to be switched, see the table below.
The example below explains how to perform an
actuator test. Proceed in a similar manner with the
other actuators.
Turn on the actuator „Disable steering (I)“ with the
1
key
Possible status display of the selected actuator
1
2
Actuator turned on
3
4
Broken cable
5
6
7
8
Actuator turned off
Short circuit
The status displays described above
are valid for all actuators related to
the Autopilot.
Valve
Icon
Description
A
B
C
D
BX500152
Turn on the actuator
Turn off the actuator
Y66
Disable steering (I)
1
2
Y67
Disable steering (II)
3
4
Y39
Steering left
5
6
Y40
Steering right
7
8
IV - 105
Info Centre
4.10.11 Menu 4-1-11 „Electronics“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
Select menu 4-1-11 „Electronics“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Electronics Diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
A
B
C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500112
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible
Faults for Diagnostics“
• The
1
symbol identifies diagnostic values that
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
lie within a valid range.
• The
symbol identifies diagnostic values that
do not lie within a valid range.
A
B
C
D
BX500142
IV - 106
Info Centre
• To scroll forward
backward
•
Pressing the
, use the
, use the
B
C
key. To scroll
key.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500143
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500634
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500144
IV - 107
Info Centre
4.10.12 Menu 4-1-12 „Work“
The Diagnostics menu „Work“ is divided into 5 pages.
Page 1:
Sensor Test
Page 2:
Actuator test part 1
Page 3:
Actuator test part 2
Page 4:
Actuator test part 3
Page 5:
Actuator test part 4
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-12 „Work“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
„Work Diagnostics“ appears.
BX500113
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible
Faults for Diagnostics“
Sensors
•
= Broken cable sensor
•
= Sensor alive
•
= Sensor not alive
•
= Sensor short circuit
•
= No error
•
= Error
•
= Function is active
•
= Function is inactive
A
B
C
D
BX500154
• To scroll forward
•
Pressing the
, activate the
key.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 108
C
Info Centre
Actuator test part 1 to part 5 (page 2 to page 5)
Actuators are controlled during the
actuator test. This may result in the
machine performing unexpected
actions. Because of this, the test
must only be performed from a safe
position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by
the actuators.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The actuator test is used to test actuators that have
been attached to the machine for the work function.
A
B
C
D
BX500155
Menu control:
Press the
B
key to bring up the next page of the
„Actuator test/Work“ menu.
Press the
B
key to bring up the previous page of
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
the „Work“ menu.
If an actuator is turned on, the next or
previous page cannot be called.
(If necessary, turn the actuator off
and repeat the process)
Pre-requisite: Conditions for release must be met.
((See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not
Met for Diagnostics“)
A
B
C
D
BX500186
To select an actuator:
To run an actuator (for example main coupling),
activate the corresponding keys on the control unit.
For the actuators to be switched, see the table below.
The example below explains how to perform an
actuator test. Proceed in a similar manner with the
other actuators.
Using the
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key, turn on the „Main coupling“
actuator.
Possible status display of the selected actuator
A
B
C
D
BX500187
Actuator turned off
Actuator turned on
Broken cable
Short circuit
The status displays described above
are valid for all actuators related to
the work.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500188
IV - 109
Info Centre
Valve
Icon
Turn on the actuator
Turn off the actuator
Main coupling
1
2
Main coupling acoustic signal
3
4
Y26
Fold in front attachm.
1
2
Y27
Extend front attachm.
3
4
Y29
Lower plant divider /
5
6
Supporting wheel in
7
8
Y51
Additional hydraulics (I) up „Hitch“
1
2
Y52
Additional hydraulics (I) down „Hitch“
3
4
Y61
Additional hydraulics (II) up
5
6
Y62
Additional hydraulics (II) down
7
8
Y60
Molasses addition
1
2
Y73
Additional valve for engine
3
4
M12
cleaning/compressed air
electric power supply
Central lubrication
5
6
Storage switch grass / maize
7
8
Y12
H61
Description
Supporting wheel out
Y28
Y53
IV - 110
Raise plant divider /
Info Centre
4.10.13 Menu 4-1-13 „Grinding“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-13 „Grinding“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
„Grinding Diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible
Faults for Diagnostics“
A
B
C
BX500114
Status of the grinding flap (2)
•
= Grinding flap is closed
•
= Grinding flap is open
3
= Grinding stone is on the left
•
= Grinding stone is in the centre
•
= Grinding stone is on the right
•
= Position of grinding stone unknown;
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
4
Status of the grinding stone (3)
•
D
5
A
B
C
D
BX500157
grinding stone sensors are both alive/sensor is
defective - FAULT
Status display of sensors (4)
•
= Broken cable sensor
•
= Sensor alive
•
= Sensor not alive
•
= Sensor short circuit
Status display of general errors (5)
•
= Electrical power supply 12V3 of KMC3
(for grinding stone) is OK
•
= Electrical power supply 12V3 of KMC3 (for
grinding stone) is not OK
•
= Output is turned off
•
= Output is turned on (electrical current in
mA for valve Y65 „grinding flap open/
closed“ is OK)
•
= Output is turned on (electrical current in
mA for valve Y65 „grinding flap open/
closed“ is not OK)
IV - 111
Info Centre
Actuator test
Actuators are controlled during the
actuator test. This may result in the
machine performing unexpected
actions. Because of this, the test
must only be performed from a safe
position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by
the actuators.
The actuator test is used to test actuators that have
been attached to the machine for the grinding function.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500158
Pre-condition: Conditions for release must be met.
((See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not
Met for Diagnostics“)
To select an actuator:
• To open the grinding flap, use the
•
key and
4
key.
The valves for the grinding stone are controlled by
the
•
3
5
key and the
Pressing the
6
key.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 112
Info Centre
4.10.14 Menu 4-1-14 „Counterblade“
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select menu 4-1-14 „Counterblade“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Counterblade Diagnostics“ appears.
For release conditions (1) not met see chapter
„Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“
A
B
C
D
BX500115
For faults (1) see chapter „Display of Possible
Faults for Diagnostics“
3
2
Status of the grinding flap (2)
•
= Grinding flap is closed
•
= Grinding flap is open
1
= Grinding stone is on the left
•
= Grinding stone is in the centre
•
= Grinding stone is on the right
•
= Position of grinding stone unknown;
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
Status of the grinding stone (3)
•
1
A
B
C
D
BX500159
grinding stone sensors are both alive/sensor is
defective - FAULT
Status display of general errors (5)
•
= Electrical power supply (12V1/12V3) of
KMC3 (for counterblade) is OK
•
= Electrical power supply (12V1/12V3) of
KMC3 (for counterblade) is not OK
IV - 113
Info Centre
Actuator test
Actuators are controlled during the
actuator test. This may result in the
machine performing unexpected
actions. Because of this, the test
must only be performed from a safe
position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by
the actuators.
The actuator test is used to test actuators that have
been attached to the machine for the counterblade
function.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500160
Pre-condition: Conditions for release must be met.
(See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not
Met for Diagnostics“
• You can use the
3
key to move away from the
counterblade on the right and the
4
key to
approach it.
• You can use the
5
key to move away from the
counterblade on the left and the
6
key to
approach it.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
Actuator status displays
Actuator status (1) Actuator status (1) Actuator status (1) Actuator status (1)
aktive
inaktive
Broken cable
Short circuit
Beschreibung
Approach counterblade on the
right
Move away from counterblade on
the right
Approach counterblade on the left
Move away from counterblade on
the left
IV - 114
Info Centre
4.10.15 Menu 4-1-15 „Grain conditioner“
In diagnostic menu 4-1-15 you can test whether voltage
is present on the cracker motor.
You can also see whether the voltage via KMC 3 is
OK and whether current is flowing on the cracker
motor.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-15 „Grain conditioner“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
A
B
C
D
BX500116
Diagnostics „Grain conditioner“ appears.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
Status display of general errors (1)
•
= Electrical power supply (12V2) of KMC3
(for grain conditioner) is OK
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
= Electrical power supply (12V2) of KMC3
(for grain conditioner) is not OK
If menu field (2) shows a value with
the actuator turned on (cracker
motor rotating anticlockwise/
clockwise), current is flowing. If the
value remains at zero, no current is
flowing.
Actuator test (3)
3
A
B
C
D
BX500189
Actuators are controlled during the actuator test. This may result in the machine performing
unexpected actions. Because of this, the test must only be performed from a safe position
outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.
The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the function of the grain
conditioner.
Pre-condition: Conditions for release must be met. (See chapter „Display of Release Conditions Not Met for
Diagnostics“)
To select an actuator:
To run an actuator (for example cracker motor rotating anticlockwise), activate the corresponding keys on the
control unit.
Using the
Using the
3
4
key, turn on the „Reduce cracker distance“ actuator.
key, turn on the „Increase cracker distance“ actuator.
Possible status display of the selected actuator
Actuator turned off
Actuator turned on
Broken cable
Short circuit
IV - 115
Info Centre
4.10.16 Menu 4-1-16 „Joystick“
The key functions of the joystick can be checked in
the „Joystick“ Diagnostics menu.
When bringing up the „Joystick“
Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine
must be stopped.
No functions are performed when the
joystick is activated in the „Joystick“
Diagnostics menu.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
A
•
Select menu 4-1-16 „Joystick“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
B
C
D
BX500117
„Joystick Diagnostics“ appears.
•
Pressing the
Menu control:
A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
Pressing the
1
key under the
softkey brings
up the „Work“ menu.
Press the
C
key under the
softkey to bring up
A
B
C
D
BX500190
the next page of the „Joystick“ menu.
Press the
C
key under the
softkey to bring up
the next previous of the „Joystick“ menu.
A representation of the joystick appears in the
display. If a function is activated on the joystick, the
status of the function that is performed appears in the
display.
Possible status display of the activated key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Key not activated
A
Key activated.
Broken cable
Short circuit
IV - 116
B
C
D
BX500190
Info Centre
4.10.17 Menu 4-1-17 „Control Unit
Console“
Both the release switches and the keys on the console
can be checked for their functionality in the „Control
unit console“ Diagnostics menu.
When bringing up the „Control unit
console“ Diagnostics menu, the diesel
engine must be stopped.
No functions are performed in the
„Control unit console“ Diagnostics
menu when the release switches or
keys are activated.
A
B
C
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
The „Diagnostics“ main menu is active.
•
1
BX500118
Select menu 4-1-17 „Control unit console“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Control unit console Diagnostics“ appears.
Malfunction
•
= Fault in diesel engine 1
•
= Not assigned diesel engine 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
Release switch
Activated Inactive Release switch
A
Road/field
B
C
D
BX500145
Feed drive/front attachment
Parking Brake
Travelling gear
All-wheel
Axle separation
Autopilot
Not assigned
Maint.
Seat switch
Door switch
Stop switch CU
Stop switch for manual operation
Keypads (1)
When the keypads (1) are activated, the keys are
highlighted in colour.
For assignment of keypads, see
chapter on „Keypads“ controls
IV - 117
Info Centre
4.10.18 Menu 4-1-18 „Manual Operation“
Keys for manual operation can be checked for their
functionality in the „Manual operation“ Diagnostics
menu.
When bringing up the „Manual
operation“ Diagnostics menu, the
diesel engine must be stopped.
No functions are performed when
keys are activated in the „Manual
operation“ Diagnostics menu.
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500119
•
Select menu 4-1-18 „Manual operation“ with the
rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Manual operation Diagnostics“ appears.
2
= Manual operation
Keypads (1)
When the keypads (1) are activated, the keys are
highlighted in colour.
For the assignment of keypads, see
chapter „Manual operations on the
platform“
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
Possible status display of the activated key (2)
Key not activated
Key activated.
Broken cable
Short circuit
IV - 118
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
Malfunction
•
1
A
B
C
D
BX500146
Info Centre
4.10.19 Menu 4-1-19 „Terminal“
You can adjust the brightness of the display in the
„Terminal“ Diagnostics menu.
The main menu „Diagnostics“ is active.
•
Select menu 4-1-19 „Terminal“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The „Terminal“ setting appears.
= Day design
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500196
= Night design
The value after the symbols
/
indicates
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
the set brightness value.
Setting and saving the brightness
The higher the value after the symbols
/
,
the greater the brightness of the display.
•
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired selection. The selection box is highlighted
in colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the selection box.
Turning the rotary potentiometer increases or
reduces the value.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection box.
Pressing the
A
B
C
D
BX500197
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 119
Info Centre
4.10.20 Menu 4-1-20 "RockProtect
Diagnostics"
"Diagnostics" main menu is called up.
•
•
Select menu 4-1-20 "RockProtect Diagnostics" with
the rotary potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
"RockProtect diagnostics" appears.
RockProtect Diagnostics Page 1
Any release conditions that have not been fulfilled are
displayed in the area highlighted in grey, if applicable.
Status display of the sensor (1)
ROP00005
Depending on the configuration, the voltage value
and the status of the sensor are displayed.
= Sensor is OK
= Cables/sensor defective.
= Broken cable
1
= Voltage value too high
2
3
Status display of the stop request (2)
= Stop was requested
ROP00006
= Normal Operation, no stop
Status display of the stop lock (3)
It indicates whether the stop lock is set. It is always
active in reverse drive.
= Stop lock inactive, normal operation
= Stop lock active, no rock detection
•
Press the
key under the
softkey to
release the RockProtect after a stop.
•
To show the next page, press the
the
IV - 120
softkey.
key under
Info Centre
RockProtect Diagnostics Page 2
Any release conditions that have not been fulfilled are
displayed in the area highlighted in grey, if applicable.
Status display of the stop request (1)
= Stop was requested
= Normal Operation, no stop
3
Status display of the stop lock (2)
1
It indicates whether the stop lock is set. It is always
active in reverse drive.
2
= Stop lock inactive, normal operation
= Stop lock active, no rock detection
•
Press the
ROP00007
key on the left next to the
softkey to switch the output for the stop valve on or
off.
The target status of the output is displayed on the
icon next to the icon.
= Output is not switched.
= Output is switched.
•
If for any reason no diagnostics may be performed,
the
•
icons will not (3) appear
To show the previous page, press the
under the
key
softkey.
IV - 121
Info Centre
4.11
Menu 4-2 „Error list“
The main menu level is active.
•
Select main menu 4-2 with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
„Error list“ appears.
•
= Current error
•
= Fault storage
•
= Current error, diesel engine
•
= Fault storage, diesel engine
A
B
C
D
BX500120
Current errors
The display shows the error list with the current errors.
The time, status, error number and designation are
shown.
• Status
C = Error has come (Come)
G = Error has gone (Gone)
A = Error acknowledged
• To display fault storage, activate the
the
B
key under
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500121
softkey.
Fault storage
Fault storage is arranged chronologically.
The date, time, status, error numbers, and designation
are shown.
• Status
C = Error has come (Come)
G = Error has gone (Gone)
A = Error acknowledged
• To display current errors of the diesel engine,
activate the
IV - 122
C
key under the
softkey.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500122
Info Centre
Current diesel engine errors
The display shows the error list with the current errors
of the diesel engine.
Error codes are displayed with a sequential number.
Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms
present.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• To display diesel engine fault storage, activate the
D
key under the
softkey.
A
B
C
D
BX500123
Diesel engine fault storage
The display shows the fault storage of the diesel
engine.
Error codes, the status, date and time are indicated
with a sequential number.
Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms
present.
1
• Status
1 = Error set
2 = Error deleted
• To scroll to the
end of a list, use the
7
top, use the
8
• To display current errors, activate the
under the
•
Pressing the
key.
A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key.
A
To scroll to the
1
B
C
D
BX500124
key
softkey.
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
IV - 123
Info Centre
Error list „Informative events“
The „Current errors“ menu appears.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500121
•
Activating the
7
key calls the „Informative
events“ menu.
The „Informative events“ menu records the
following messages:
• 3507 Diesel engine maintenance
• 3508 Air filter contamination
• 3509 Hydraulic oil filling level
• 4301 Metal in feed drive!
• 7016 Stone detected!
• 42 SmartDrive parking brake active
• 45 Travelling gear release (S3) not switched
A
Menu control:
•
Activating the
Activating the
A
softkey
B
key under the
softkey
brings up the current alarm list.
•
Activating the
2
key next to the
softkey
scrolls one page up
•
Activating the
4
key next to the
softkey
key next to the
softkey
scrolls one line up
•
Activating the
4
scrolls one line down
•
Activating the
8
key next to the
softkey
scrolls one page down
•
Activating the
D
key under the
brings up the „Service events“ menu.
IV - 124
C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500663
key under the
brings up the basic screen.
•
B
1
softkey
Info Centre
Error list "Service events"
The "Service events" menu contains the following
events with the time stamp:
• 60000 Update completed
• 60001 Service performed for diesel engine 1
• 60002 Service performed for diesel engine 2
• 60003 Error list deleted
• 60004 Error deleted
• 60005 Max. speed changed
• 60006 Front tyre size changed
• 60007 Rear tyre size changed
• 60008 Max. road speed changed
• 60009 SmartDrive software updated
• 60010 SmartDrive parameter set updated
• 60011 ERR-INIT
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500664
Menu control:
•
Activating the
A
key under the
softkey
brings up the basic screen.
•
Activating the
2
key next to the
softkey
scrolls one page up
•
Activating the
4
key next to the
softkey
key next to the
softkey
scrolls one line up
•
Activating the
6
scrolls one line down
•
Activating the
8
key next to the
softkey
scrolls one page down
•
Pressing the
C
key next to the
softkey
takes back you to the "Informative
Events" menu.
IV - 125
Info Centre
4.12
Menu 4-3 „Service level“
The main menu level is active.
•
Select main menu 4-3 with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The „Service level“ is protected by a password and is
accessible only to the Krone service staff.
•
Pressing the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500125
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500126
IV - 126
Info Centre
4.13
Menu 4-4 „Information“
The main menu level is active.
1
2
3
4
The display shows menu level 4-4 „Information“.
5
6
The main menu, „Settings“, is divided up into three
menus:
7
8
•
Select main menu 4-4 with the rotary potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
•
= Menu 4-1 „Joystick“
•
= Menu 4-2 „Software“
•
= Menu 4-3 „Machine“
•
Pressing the
A
B
C
D
BX500127
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.13.1 Menu 4-4-1 „Joystick“
The main menu „Information“ is active.
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select menu 4-4-1 „Joystick“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Joystick information“ appears.
•
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
A
B
C
D
BX500128
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500129
IV - 127
Info Centre
4.13.2 Menu 4-4-2 „Software“
The main menu „Information“ is active.
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select menu 4-4-2 „Software“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Software information“ appears.
The display shows the software versions of the various
controllers.
A
B
C
D
BX500130
Page 1
•
= Terminal
If the versions of resources and DLLs
do not match for the terminal, the
version numbers appear in red.
•
= SmartDrive
•
= KMC2
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= KMC3
If the KMC2 and KMC3 software is not
designed for your machine type, the
version numbers appear in red
•
Activating the
•
potentiometer causes the second page to be
displayed on the rotary potentiometer.
To show or hide extended information, press the
key
1
or
A
B
C
D
BX500131
key or turning the rotary
B
.
2
Page 2
•
= Joystick
•
= CU
•
= Manual operation
•
= EMR
•
Activating the
•
potentiometer causes the fourth page to be
displayed on the rotary potentiometer.
To show or hide extended information, press the
key
1
IV - 128
or
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key or turning the rotary
C
2
1
.
A
B
C
D
BX500132
Info Centre
Page 3
•
= Autopilot
•
= Metal detection
•
= ADM1
•
= Not assigned
• Activating the
•
key or turning the rotary
D
potentiometer causes the fourth page to be
displayed on the rotary potentiometer.
To show or hide extended information, press the
key
1
or
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500133
.
2
Page 4
•
= DIOM
•
= AutoScan (optional)
• Activating the
•
Pressing the
•
takes you one menu level back.
To show or hide extended information, press the
1
or
key on the rotary potentiometer
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
key or turning the rotary
A
potentiometer causes the third page to be displayed
on the rotary potentiometer.
key
1
A
B
C
D
BX500134
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4.13.3 Menu 4-4-3 „Machine“
The main menu „Information“ is active.
•
Select menu 4-4-3 „Machine“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Machine information“ appears.
A
B
C
D
BX500136
The display shows machine information.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500135
IV - 129
Info Centre
4.14 Menu 5 „Basic Screen“
The main menu is active.
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select menu 5 „Machine“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
Press the rotary potentiometer.
The „Basic screen“ is displayed.
A
B
C
D
BX500137
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500194
4.14.1 error message
If an error occurs on the machine, the error message
appears in the display.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The error message and the fault code are displayed.
•
The error message can be confirmed with the
A
•
key under softkey
.
The acoustic signal can be turned off with the
key under the softkey
B
.
A
For a list of error messages, error
description, potential error reason and
remedy of error, please refer to
appendix A – Error messages.
IV - 130
B
C
D
BX500138
Info Centre
4.14.2 Information message
If one or several conditions are not met to carry out an
action, the information message will be displayed in the
information section of settings (IV).
The information message and the information code are
displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Acknowledging the information message
•
The error message can be confirmed with the
A
B
A
key under softkey
C
D
.
BX500162
4.15 Printer Connection
The information items listed below can be printed with
the aid of the printer.
•
Individual customer records or all
•
= operating hour counter (h)
•
= drum hours counter (h)
•
= working hours counter (h)
•
= surface counter (ha)
•
= road odometer (km)
•
= fuel consumption (l)
I
Create connection:
•
•
•
Connect the printer via the diagnostics socket (1)
(CAN interface) in the console.
Insert the paper as explained in the printer’s
operating instructions.
The printer is now ready for operation.
II
IV
III
4.15.1 Printing Customer Data
To print customer records, activate the
the
B
key under
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500169
softkey to switch to the „Customer data
counter“ submenu
If there is no printer available, or no
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
printer ready for operation, the
symbol does not appear.
•
Press the
7
key to bring up the „Customer data“
print menu.
Before bringing up the „Customer
data“ menu, make certain the
customer record you want to print is
selected in the Customer data counter
menu.
A
B
C
D
BX500195
IV - 131
Info Centre
4.15.2 Customer Data Print Menu
Menu overview:
(1) = Use the
key to select the displayed
1
customer record for printing.
(2) = Select all customer records to be printed with
the
key.
2
(3) = Use the
3
key to select the last selected
1
cultivated area counter or the one that was
entered in the „Customer data counter“ menu
for printing.
(4) = Select all cultivated area counters of a
customer record to be printed with the
4
(5) =
(6) =
(7)=
(8)=
(9) =
Paper feed
Start printer
Stop print job
Bring up basic screen
Switch to „Customer data counter“ menu
(10)
=
2
3
10
key.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
9
8
5
6
Counter is selected for printing.
1
A
B
C
D
7
BX500193
Counter will not be printed
•
•
•
•
•
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the
desired counter. The entry box is highlighted in
colour.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to
jump to the input field.
You can activate or deactivate the counter for
printing with the rotary potentiometer.
Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the
setting to be applied and returns you from the
selection field.
Pressing the
key on the rotary potentiometer
takes you one menu level back.
4.15.3 To print a customer record or
records:
•
The customer record to be printed
must previously be selected in the
„Customer data counter“ menu. (If
necessary switch to the customer
data counter menu with the $$$ key
and and select the desired customer
data record)
Select the displayed customer record for printing
with the
the
•
7
1
key and start the print process with
key.
To print all customer records, press the
2
key
and then start the print process with the
7
key.
All counters will be printed for which
the counter status is greater than
zero.
IV - 132
Info Centre
4.15.4 Printing Cultivated Area Counter
States
• Use the
3
1
3
10
key to select the last selected
2
cultivated area counter or the one that was entered in the „Customer data counter“ menu for
printing. Start the print process with the
•
You can use the
7
9
8
key.
7
6
A
B
C
D
Printing all customer records and all cultivated
area counter states
•
First press the
•
Then activate the
the
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
area counters of a customer record. Start the print
process with the
2
4
key
key to select all cultivated
4
1
7
BX500193
key.
4
key and start printing with
key.
All counters will be printed for which
the counter status is greater than
zero.
4.15.5 Description of Printer Errors
Error message
Icon
Description
No paper. Insert paper and restart the print process.
The print buffer is full. Restart the terminal and repeat the print process.
No CAN connection to the printer. Check the cabling to the printer.
IV - 133
Info Centre
4.16 Battery Change on the Terminal
The terminal is equipped with a battery.
The battery is used to protect data in case the power
supply fails or when the terminal is turned off.
Caution!
Changing the battery
Effect: Failure to observe instructions
will result in loss of data and
incorrect settings on the machine.
• Battery (type CR 1/2 AA, 950 mAh
Order No. 20 080 607 0) - replace at
least once every 2 years.
• Follow the exact order of steps when
changing the battery.
• Do not hold the pole of the new
battery with your hands.
• Do not create a conducting
connection between the two poles of
the battery.
(Battery discharges and will need to
be replaced).
• When installing the battery, make
certain it is always installed with the
poles correctly aligned.
1
4.16.1 Procedure for Replacing the
Battery
•
•
•
•
•
Turn on the ignition to ignition stage 2.
Wait until the Work icon appears in the terminal.
Open the console (1) and fold the cover all the way
up.
Pry the battery support (2) out of its holder with a
small screwdriver (3).
(Apply the screwdriver once on the top and once on
the bottom of the battery support.)
Remove the old battery (4).
When the battery is removed, an audio signal
sounds and an error message appears on the
terminal.
Please ignore the error message. The error
message is automatically deleted after a new
battery is inserted.
•
•
•
2
3
3
+
Install the new battery (4). Make certain polarity is
correct.
Insert the battery support (2).
Fold down the cover and close the console (1).
BX500503
IV - 134
Info Centre
4.17 "Setting of the constant power load limit control" menu
appears
•
Press the
D
key on the basic screen to switch to
the mask for „Machine settings“.
BX500606
•
Press the
C
key to bring up the next page „Set-
tings of the load limit control“. (In maize mode,
press the
C
key twice, because additional
settings can be made).
The changes become effective
immediately.
In doing so, the forage harvester can
be adapted to the respective
circumstances during its use.
BX500607
IV - 135
Info Centre
Entering the degree of speed reduction
Speed reduction can be set dependent
on speed and engine duty.
Speed-dependent entry:
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select setting
(1). The selection box is highlighted in colour.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer to switch to the
selection box (3). The box has a yellow background.
•
The degree of speed reduction can be increased or
decreased from 3% - 15% by turning the rotary
potentiometer engine to the left or right.
•
1
3
To accept and save the value, press the rotary
potentiometer again. The colour of the background
will change to light blue again.
A degree of speed reduction by 10%
means that, at a setpoint engine speed
of 2000 rpm, the engine speed of 1800
rpm will be controlled by increasing
or reducing the speed of the travelling
gear.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500608-1
Engine duty-dependent entry:
You can use the rotary potentiometer to select setting
(2). The selection box is highlighted in colour.
•
Press the rotary potentiometer to switch to the
selection box (3). The box has a yellow background.
•
The degree of speed reduction can be increased or
decreased from 65% - 95% by turning the rotary
potentiometer engine to the left or right.
•
2
3
To accept and save the value, press the rotary
potentiometer again. The colour of the background
will change to light blue again.
A
The changes become effective
immediately.
In doing so, the forage harvester can
be adapted to the respective
circumstances during its use.
IV - 136
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500608-2
Info Centre
Setting the maximum speed
Press the rotary potentiometer to select the input field
for the maximum speed
.
•
Pressing the rotary potentiometer once will mark the
input field.
The colour of the background will change to yellow,
and the value of the maximum speed can be
increased or decreased by turning the rotary
potentiometer to the left or to the right.
•
To accept and save the value, press the rotary
potentiometer again.
The colour of the background will change to light
blue again.
The load limit control will now accelerate the travelling
gear up
to the speed at which it is set.
BX500608
The changes become effective
immediately.
In doing so, the forage harvester can
be adapted to the respective
circumstances during its use.
Setting the minimum speed
Press the rotary potentiometer to select t he input field
for the minimum speed
.
•
Pressing the rotary potentiometer once will mark the
input field.
The colour of the background will change to yellow,
and the value of the minimum speed can be
reduced or increased by turning the rotary
potentiometer to the left or to the right.
•
To accept and save the value, press the rotary
potentiometer again.
The colour of the background will change to light
blue again.
BX500609
The load limit control will now delay the travelling gear
to the speed at which it is set.
The changes become effective
immediately.
In doing so, the forage harvester can
be adapted to the respective
circumstances during its use.
IV - 137
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18 CropControl control unit
4.18.1 General Description
The electronic equipment of the CropControl system
consists essentially of the job computer along with the
control unit and the sensors.
1
The job computer (1) is located on the right-hand side
of the machine under the side hood behind the driver’s
cab.
Its functions are:
•
•
•
•
Yield counter
Reading in of the signals
Transfer of alarm messages
Diagnostics sensors
ERT00006
The control unit (2) communicates information to the
driver and performs settings to operate the
CropControl. This information is received and further
processed by the job computer.
2
The control unit (2) must be
protected against water.
ERT00007
IV - 138
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.2 Mounting
Mount the control unit with its support (3) where it can
be seen by the driver following the Operating Manual.
3
4
4.18.2.1 Mounting the control unit
•
Attach the control unit (2) using the two holes on
the back onto the support (3) and press onto the
support (3).
The control unit (2) is fixed by the magnetic plate
(4) on the support (3).
2
ERT00008
•
Connect the cable (1) included with delivery to the
ISO socket and to the socket (3) on the control unit
(2).
2
3
1
ERT00040
IV - 139
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.3 Control unit
4.18.3.1 Overview
1
Display
2
Keys (1-3)
3
Menu key
4
"+" key
5
Esc key
6
"+" key
7
OK key
1
6
2
15321 kg
4mm
ON
3
ON
4
5
6
7
ERT00009
IV - 140
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.3.2 Description of the keys
Keys 1-2
1
The keys 1-3 are used to activate the softkeys located
in the line just above them.
For the assignment of the keys, see the illustration.
If there is no softkey above the key it has no function.
6
15321 kg
Key 3
4mm
ON
The
ON
key can be used to bring up the menu level.
Key 4 and key 6
2
Use the
and
keys to change the settings
and to select the desired menu at the menu level.
Key 5
Use the
3
6
4
5
key to go to the previous screen or
previous menu level.
Holding the key down slightly longer takes you back to
the basic screen.
7
Key 7
You can use the
key to save settings, bring up
ERT00039
selected menus or switch back and forth between
display formats for yield recording (kg, t/h and t/ha).
4.18.4 Operational Readiness
Switching ON
To turn on the CropControl System,
turn on the ignition of the forage
harvester. It does not need to be
turned on separately.
After you have switched the unit on, the connection to
the job computer is established.
ERT00010
If it is not possible to set up a connection, data
connection interrupted, the message shown on the right
appears in the display.
The CAN connections and job computer must be checked.
If the connection is established, the basic screen
appears after a brief time.
IV - 141
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.5 Brief instruction
Start yield recording:
Switch on control, press keys
and
6
and to
select the desired area and operate softkey ON.
If such amount of foraged crops is now fed that the bar
is outside the hatching, the mass will be added up
according to the excursion.
15321 kg
4mm
To obtain an accurate result, the system must be
calibrated in the middle of the stock (average of the
stock) if possible. This is done by a control weighing.
ON
ON
Perform control weighing:
ERT00011
Initially, request an empty wagon with known tare
weight. Before filling the wagon, press the softkey
ON to start the control weighing. Now fill the wagon.
Make sure that no foraged crops are lost during cutting
and during transport. Once the wagon is full, terminate
the control weighing by pressing the softkey
ON,
send the wagon for weighing and request the weight of
the load.
Cutting can continue normally while you wait for the
value.
2
5
6
7
8
130563kg
15321kg
0kg
0kg
Enter weight of the control weighing:
X
Once the value of the control weighing is known, it can
be entered as follows:
ERT00027
Press the "
" softkey.
The "Yield counter" menu is displayed.
Press the "
" softkey.
The "Enter weighed mass" menu is displayed.
Use the softkeys
and
2
to enter the value of
the control weighing and save it using the key
.
The calibration factor will then be recalculated and the
measured mass will be corrected retrospectively for the
entire field.
Pressing the
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic screen.
For more detailed information, please read the
corresponding chapters.
IV - 142
6
1/1
400
???
0kg
X
ERT00041
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.6 Basic screen
4.18.6.1 Softkeys basic screen
The following softkeys are found in the lower line:
15321 kg
ON Start / stop control weighing
•
Start / stop control weighing
•
Press the
key for softkey "
6
ON
".
For more information see Section "Control weighing
and calibration"
4mm
ON
ON
ERT00011
Call yield counter
•
Call yield counter
•
Press the
key for softkey "
".
For further information, see the "Yield Counter"
chapter.
it is possible to
Using the softkey
enter the respective values for the
control weighing of the CropControl
system directly from the basic screen
•
ON start/stop yield counter
Start/stop yield counter
•
Press the
key for softkey "ON".
For further information, see the "Starting / stopping
yield counter" chapter.
Chose between display formats
Click
to select display of recorded yield in the
basic screen. You can chose between display formats
kg, t/h and t/ha.
IV - 143
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.7 Basic screen graphic display
Description of the graphic display:
ON
Yield counter has been stopped
Yield counter has been started
Area (the value (1) indicates the
area that is currently selected)
You can use the
and
keys to select among
6
1
the 50 areas.
After the yield counter has been started (visible from
softkey "ON" being represented in reverse colours), no
other area can be selected.
To be able to select a different area,
the yield counter must first be
stopped.
•
Depending on the selection, the value (2) shows the
current weight of the selected cultivated area in kg,
the current machine throughput in t/h or the current
yield in t/ha. Throughput and current yield are only
shown when the yield counter is started.
•
The display "3" indicates the current excursion of
the rear top pre-compression roller.
Only when the bar in the display is outside the
hatching, the yield counter is active. The value range
for the hatching is determined by the minimum
excursion. (refer to menu 1-1 "Minimum excursion
setting")
If the display bar is far outside the
hatching in no-load operation, this
indicates significant dirt at the feed
drive, which must be removed.
IV - 144
15321 kg
2
ON
3
4mm
ON
ERT00012
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.8 Start / stop yield counter
The following conditions must be met so that the yield
counter can operate correctly.
•
•
•
•
Feed drive is moving
Front attachment down
Machine is moving
Excursion larger than minimum excursion
Start yield counter:
ON
•
Yield counter has been stopped
Yield counter has been started
Press the
key for softkey "ON" (softkey
"ON" is displayed in reverse colours, the yield
counter has been started).
Pressing the key once again will stop the yield counter,
(softkey "ON" is no longer displayed in reverse
colours.)
6
15321 kg
4mm
ON
ON
ERT00011
4.18.9 Control weighing and calibration
To achieve a high accuracy of the yield measurement,
the CropControl system must be calibrated. For this, at
least one (but max. 10) control weighings must be
performed for each area and each fruit sort.
To obtain correct measurement values, counter
weighing should be performed in the middle of the
stock and not at the edge of the field.
A maximum of 10 control weighings are
available for each area.
Recalculation of the calibration factor
initiates the correction of the measured
mass retrospectively for the entire field.
If several control weighings are
performed (max. 10), the calibration
factor is calculated from the average of
the up to 10 control weighings.
•
The yield counter has been started.
(
Yield counter has been started)
•
Press the
key for softkey
ON.
(Softkey "
ON " is displayed in reverse colours
while control weighing is running.)
The display shows the basic screen with the additional
information control weighing in that the current control
weighing and the respective mass are displayed.
6
15521 kg
1: 2973 kg
ON
34mm
ON
ERT00013
IV - 145
CropControl Operating Instructions
•
Fill wagon
Accuracy can be influenced positively
by selecting a trailer load for the control
weighing that corresponds to the
average of the entire field. Travelling
speed and engine capacity should also
be average.
Pressing the key
weighing, (softkey "
reverse colours.)
•
once again will stop the control
ON " is no longer displayed in
Then, weigh the load of the trailer and enter the
determined value according to Section "2.3.4
Entering the weighed mass".
Cutting can continue normally while
you wait for the value of the weighing.
It is still possible to start a second
control weighing directly.
IV - 146
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10 Menu Level
4.18.10.1
Overview
1
Path recorder calibration
1-2
Pressure sensor calibration
1-3
1
min
Setting
Minimum excursion
1-4
2
Contrast
Yield counter
4
Service
4-2
5
Manual sensor test
Information
4-3
Current alarms
ERT00014
4.18.10.1.1 Bringing up a Menu Level
•
Press the
key (1).
6
15321 kg
4mm
ON
The menu level is shown in the display.
You can exit the menu level again with the
(2).
esc
6
key
ON
1
2
ERT00015
IV - 147
CropControl Operating Instructions
The menu level is divided into three main menus:
•
•
•
•
1
1
= Main menu 1 "Settings"
2
= Main menu. 2 "Yield counter"
4
= Main menu 4 "Service"
5
= Main Menu 5 „Information“
BPM50270
•
You can use the
and
keys to select
the main menus. The selected icon is shown in
reverse colours.
•
Pressing the
key brings up the menu level
of the main menu that is selected.
•
Use the
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
4.18.10.2
Main menu 1 "Settings"
Calling the main menu
•
Call the main menu with the
•
You can select main menu 1 "Settings
with the
or
1
key.
1
"
keys. The icon is shown in
reverse colours.
•
Press the
key.
BPM50270
The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".
Menu level 1 "Settings" is divided into two menus:
•
1
= Menu 1-1 "Calibration of path
recorder"
•
1-2
1-1
= Menu 1-2 "Calibration of pressure
sensor"
•
1-3
min
= Menu 1-3 "Minimum excursion
setting"
•
1-4
= Menu 1-4 "Contrast"
ERT00016
IV - 148
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.2.1 Menu 1-1 "Calibration of path
recorder"
Before placing the machine in service the first time and
after any assembly work on the path recorder, it must
be calibrated. For this, it must be ensured that no
crops are in the feed drive and that the precompression rollers have been moved to the bottom
limit stop.
Displaying the menu
Main menu 1 "Settings" appears
•
Use the
"
and
1
1-1
keys to select menu 1.1
Calibration of path recorder". The icon
is shown in reverse colours.
•
Press the
key.
The display shows menu 1-1 "Calibration of path
recorder".
ERT00016
The
icon in the upper line indicates that the
displayed values are saved.
•
Press the
key for softkey
. The icon
appears in reverse colours for a short while. The
calibration value of the path recorder is
displayed; the symbol
in the upper line will
1-1
val: 791 mV
disappear.
•
key. The calibration value is
Press the
saved and the
icon appears in the upper
line.
ERT00017
The calibration value must be between
500 mV and 1000 mV.
•
Use the
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".
•
Pressing the
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
screen.
IV - 149
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.2.2 Menu 1-2 "Calibration of pressure
sensor"
The pressure sensor must be calibrated before placing
the machine in service the first time, after any
assembly work and weekly during operation. For this, it
must be ensured that no crops are in the feed drive and
that the pre-compression rollers have been moved to
the bottom limit stop.
Displaying the menu
1-2
Main menu 1 "Settings" appears
•
Use the
"
1-2
and
keys to select menu 1.2
Calibration of pressure sensor". The
icon is shown in reverse colours.
•
Press the
key.
min
The display shows menu 1-2 "Calibration of pressure
sensor".
The
ERT00018
icon in the upper line indicates that the
displayed values are saved.
The value in the middle (1) underneath the bar
indicates the current drive pressure. The value on the
left (2) is the calibration value "maximum feed drive
speed", the value on the right (3) is the calibration
value "maximum feed drive speed".
1-2
To calibrate the pressure sensor, proceed according to
the following steps one after the other:
43bar
•
Switch on cutting drum
•
Switch on feed drive
•
Adjust engine to working speed (2000 rpm)
„
Set chop length to minimum possible value
•
Press the
key for softkey
47bar
67bar
ERT00019
1-2
, the symbol is
shown in reverse colours.
The symbol
•
•
in the upper line will disappear
and calibration is started. An arrow will appear
underneath the hatching on the left.
Slowly increase chop length until the bar is
within the hatching on the left.
Wait for a short time
43bar
47bar
67bar
ERT00020
IV - 150
CropControl Operating Instructions
•
The left calibration will be overwritten. The arrow
underneath the hatching on the left will disappear
and an arrow will appear underneath the hatching on
the right.
•
Slowly increase chop length once again until the bar
is within the hatching on the right.
•
Wait for a short time
•
The right calibration will be overwritten. The arrow
underneath the hatching on the right will disappear
and the softkey
is no longer displayed in reverse
colours.
•
Press the
Use the
43bar
47bar
67bar
ERT00021
key. The calibration values are
icon appears in the upper line.
saved and the
•
1-2
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".
•
Pressing the
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
screen.
IV - 151
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.2.3 Menu 1-1 "Minimum excursion
setting"
Use the minimum excursion to set from what excursion
of the pre-compression rollers the measurement is
started. The higher the minimum excursion setting, the
more crops must flow through the rollers to activate the
yield counter.
1-3
min
Standard value for minimum excursion: 5 mm
Displaying the menu
Main menu 1 "Settings" appears
ERT00012
•
Use the
and
keys to select menu 1.3
"Calibration of minimum excursion". The icon is
shown in reverse colours.
•
key.
Press the
1-3
min
The display shows menu 1-3 "Minimum excursion
setting".
The
icon in the upper line indicates that the
displayed values are saved.
5mm
The minimum excursion can be set in
the range from 0mm to 30mm
DEF
ERT00023
The bar display and the value on the right next to it
indicate the set minimum excursion.
•
You can use the
and
keys to adjust the
desired minimum excursion. The
line goes out.
•
Press the
and the
icon in the top
key. The calibration value is saved
icon appears in the upper line.
Set minimum excursion to factory setting
•
Press the key
for softkey "DEF", the icon will
be displayed in reverse colours for a short while,
and the minimum excursion is reset to the factory
setting. The symbol
disappear.
•
Press the
saved and the
IV - 152
in the upper line will
key. The minimum excursion is
icon appears in the upper line.
CropControl Operating Instructions
•
Use the
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".
•
Pressing the
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
screen.
4.18.10.2.4 Menu 1-4 "Contrast"
1-4
Displaying the menu
Main menu 1 "Settings" appears
•
Use the
1-4
and
min
keys to select menu 1-4
"Contrast", the icon will be in reverse
colours.
•
Press the
key.
ERT00025
The display shows menu 1-1 "Contrast".
The progress bar indicates the contrast value set.
The
icon in the upper line indicates that the
1-4
displayed value is saved.
Setting and saving the contrast
The higher the bar, the stronger the contrast in the
display.
•
Use the
and
keys to set the contrast. The
icon in the top line goes out.
ERT00024
•
Press the
key, the set contrast value will be
saved,the icon
•
Use the
esc
6
the upper line will disappear.
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".
•
Pressing the
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
screen.
IV - 153
CropControl Operating Instructions
Day/night design
Switching from day to night design reduces background
lighting.
1-4
Night design:
•
Press the
key for softkey
.
Background lighting is reduced.
Day design:
•
key for softkey
Press the
.
Background lighting is increased.
•
Use the
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed menu.
•
Pressing the
screen.
IV - 154
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
ERT00024
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.3
Main menu. 2 "Yield counter"
Calling the main menu
•
Call the main menu with the
•
Use the
"
2
and
key.
4
keys to select main menu 2
Yield counter", the icon is displayed in
reverse colours.
•
Press key
.
The display shows menu 2 "Yield counter".
ERT00026
4.18.10.3.1 "Yield counter"
The total mass is displayed for each area.
2
•
or
key to pre-select the
Use the
requested area. The pre-selected area is
displayed in reverse colours.
At the end of the list, maximally 2 fields without mass
(0kg) are visible.
5
6
7
8
130563kg
15321kg
0kg
0kg
X
ERT00027
4.18.10.3.2 Printing the values
If a CAN printer is connected to the diagnostics
interface of the machine, the values of the yield
counter can be printed.
•
Press the
key for softkey
the value for the pre-selected field.
•
Press
key for softkey
to print out
for longer than 3s
to print out the values for all fields.
4.18.9.3.3 Deleting the values
•
Press the
key for softkey
and hold it
down for 1 second to delete the value for the
pre-selected field.
•
Press the
key for softkey
and hold it
down for longer than 3s to delete the values for
the entire yield counter.
IV - 155
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.3.4 Entering the weighed mass
If at least one control weighing is available for a field,
the respective weighed mass can be entered as
follows:
•
Select the area for that a weighed mass is to be
entered as described in Section "2.3.1 Yield
counter".
•
Press the
key for softkey
or key
.
The display shows the menu "Entering the weighed
mass".
The
2
icon in the upper line indicates that the
displayed values are saved.
The value (1) indicates the current calibration factor for
the selected area (in this example area 7). It is
determined from the factors of the individual control
weighings.
6
1/1
400
???
0kg
As long as no calibration factor has
been saved for the displayed field, the
factor from the previous field is
displayed and is used for calculating
the mass.
The value (2) indicates the selected control weighing.
In the adjacent picture, the 2nd control weighing from a
total of 4 control weighings is selected.
•
and
Use the key
control weighing.
X
ERT00028
2
to select the requested
Use the keys
softkey
for softkey
and
in the
upper line will disappear.
Press the
X
for
ERT00029
to enter the weighed mass for the
selected control weighing. The symbol
•
534
???
12370kg
The value (3) indicates the calibration factor for the
selected control weighing. If not factor has been saved,
this is indicated by a question mark.
•
7
2/4
key. The entered mass is saved, the
calibration factor is recalculated and the
appears in the upper line.
icon
2
7
2/4
534
520
12370kg
X
ERT00030
IV - 156
CropControl Operating Instructions
Recalculation of the calibration factor
initiates the correction of the measured
mass retrospectively for the entire field.
Deleting the control weighing
If an error has occurred when entering the weighed
mass and the correct value is no longer known, it is
possible to delete the respective control weighing.
•
Press the
key for softkey
to delete the
value for the selected control weighing. The symbol
in the upper line will disappear.
•
Press the
key. The change is saved, the
calibration factor is recalculated and the
icon
appears in the upper line.
•
Use the
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
The display shows menu 2 "Yield counter".
•
Pressing the
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
screen.
IV - 157
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.3.5 Entering the calibration factor
directly
If no control weighing is available for a field, it is
possible to enter a calibration factor directly. However,
this calibration does not necessarily reflect the
characteristics of the field.
The accuracy that can be achieved by direct entering
of the calibration factor strongly depends on the
experience of the operator.
The calibration factor should therefore only be entered
if it is not possible to carry out a control weighing and
the current calibration factor appears to be unrealistic.
However, if the direct entry of the calibration factor
function is to be used repeatedly, it is purposeful to
compile an own table for each fruit sort from
experience values in that the calibration factors for the
different degrees of ripeness and moisture contents are
saved.
A calibration factor can only be entered
for fields that either contain the mass
0 kg or for that not control weighing has
yet been carried out.
2
6
7
8
9
137386kg
305768kg
0kg
0kg
X
The factor can be entered as follows:
•
Select the field for that a calibration factor is to be
entered as described in Section "2.3.1 Yield
counter".
•
Press the
key for softkey
or key
.
ERT00031
2
The display shows the menu "Entering the calibration
factor".
The
8
0
0
icon in the upper line indicates that the
displayed values are saved.
•
Use the keys
softkey
for softkey
and
for
to enter the calibration factor for the
selected field. The symbol
ERT00032
in the upper line will
disappear.
•
Press the
key. The calibration factor is saved
icon appears in the upper line.
and the
•
Use the
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
2
8
510
510
The display shows menu 2 "Yield counter".
•
Pressing the
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
screen.
ERT00033
IV - 158
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.4
Main menu 4 "Service"
4
Calling the main menu
•
You can select main menu 4 "
or
the
4
Service" with
keys. The icon is shown in reverse
colours.
•
Press the
key.
The display shows menu level 4 "Service".
Menu level 4 "Service" is divided into two menus:
•
•
= Menu 4-2 "Manual sensor test"
ERT00026
4-2
= Menu 4-5 "Current alarms"
ERT00034
4.18.10.4.1 Menu 4-2 "Manual sensor test"
In the manual sensor test, the sensors fitted on the
machine for the CropControl system are tested for
errors.
4-2
Main menu 4 "Service" is called.
•
You can select the menu 4-2 "
test" with the
Manual sensor
keys. The icon is shown in
reverse colours.
ERT00034
•
Press the
key.
The display shows menu 4-2 "Manual sensor test".
4-2
Selecting the sensor
B73
•
Select the sensor with the
and
5,1V
keys.
The selected sensor at the left in the display is shown
in reverse colours and is tested.
state
0,9V
1,6V
ERT00035
IV - 159
CropControl Operating Instructions
Diagnostics – analogue sensors
Possible status messages (state):
•
7
•
8
= Broken cable or short circuit
Error
= Defect in the sensor or job computer
Setting values:
The bar must be inside the marked area of the bar
display.
Analogue Sensors
No. Icon
Description
B72
B72
Path recorder (must always be
in the marked area).
B73
B73
Pressure sensor (must always be
in the marked area).
Diagnostics power supply voltages
Nominal voltages:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
12 V tot.:
12 V Ter:
SS_5V:
8 V ana:
8 V dig:
12 V P2:
12 V P3:
3V Bat
N°
12 - 14.5 V
12 - 14.5 V
4.5 - 5.5 V
8.5 - 9.1 V
8.5 - 9.1 V
12 - 14.5 V
12 - 14.5 V
>2,5 V
Icon
U1
Description
BPM50490
U1
U1
•
Use the
Supply voltage
esc
6
key to close the menu currently
displayed menu.
The display shows menu level 4 "Service".
•
Pressing the
screen.
IV - 160
esc
6
key twice brings up the basic
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.18.10.4.2 Menu 4-5 "Current alarms"
Currently pending errors for the CropControl system are
displayed in the menu "Current alarms".
4-5
Calling the menu
Main menu 4 "Service" is called.
•
You can select the menu 4-5 "
alarms" with the
and
Current
keys. The icon is
shown in reverse colours.
•
Press the
ERT00036
key.
The display shows menu 4-5 "Current alarms".
Currently pending alarms are displayed in the
lower part (1) with the corresponding alarm
number (2).
4-5
1
1/2
B72
102
•
You can use the
or
keys to switch to
2
another window.
(only possible if there is more than one error present
at the same time)
•
Use the
esc
6
ERT00037
key to close the menu currently
displayed.
The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".
•
Pressing the
esc
6
5
key twice brings up the basic
screen.
4.18.10.4.3 Main Menu 5 “Info”
Calling the main menu
•
Call the main menu with the
•
You can select main menu 5
or
•
key.
5
BPM50340
with the
keys. The icon is shown in reverse colours.
Press the
key.
The display shows menu 5 “Info”.
•
= Version of the job computer
ERT00050
IV - 161
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.19
Alarm Message
If a malfunction occurs in the machine an alarm
message appears in the display and an audio signal is
heard at the same time (rapid-interval horn sound).
Description, possible cause and remedy are shown in
Chapter "3.1 General alarm messages".
All functions in the menu that is covered
over are still active.
6
101
15321 kg
4mm
The softkeys that are covered by the
alarm message are disabled.
ON
Stop audio signal:
B72
ON
ERT00038
•
Press the
key for softkey
.
key for softkey
, the alarm is
To reset alarm:
•
Press the
reset and the audio signal stops.
If the malfunction occurs again, the alarm message will
appear again.
To delete an alarm:
Alarms should only be deleted in
emergency situations.
Press the
key for softkey
and hold it
down 5 seconds. The alarm is deleted.
If the malfunction occurs again, no alarm message will
appear.
The alarm message does not appear when the
malfunction occurs until after the control unit is turned
off and back on.
IV - 162
CropControl Operating Instructions
4.19.1 Physical alarm messages
Nr.
Description
Possible cause
Remedy
A01
Fuse 2 defective
Short circuit at the
outputs
A02
Fuse 3 defective
(self-repairing)
Short circuit in
the power supply for
sensors
A03
CAN connection
interrupted
between terminal
and job computer
EEPROM error
CAN wiring defective
Replace the fuse
and then test all actuators in the
actuator test to determine whether an
actuator has a short circuit.
Check cables to the Multibalepotentiometer, star wheel, pressure
sensor and force measurement
amplifier.
Check the CAN wiring
Job computer defective
Replace the job computer
A04
A13
Undervoltage
backup battery
Backup battery faulty
A14
Undervoltage
- Tractor battery defective
- Tractor light machine
too weak
-12 V power supply cable
too thin on the tractor side
or not directly connected to
battery
A15
Overvoltage
Tractor light machine defective Check the dynamo
A16
RAM error
Job computer defective
-
4.19.2
Nr.
101
Check backup battery and replace if
necessary battery
Connect KRONE connection cable
directly to battery
Replace job computer
Physical alarm messages
Description
Possible cause
Remedy
Sensor or supply line defective
- Perform a sensor test
B72
Path recorder
- Check the sensor and supply line for
damage
102
B73
Pressure sensor
Sensor or supply line defective
- Perform a sensor test
- Check the sensor and supply line for
damage
IV - 163
CropControl Operating Instructions
IV - 164
Driver’s cab and ladders
5
Driver’s cab
5.1
Ladder to driver’s cabin
Do not ascend or descend on the
ladder during travel.
Riding on the steps of the ladder or on
the platforms is not permitted.
•
Ladder (1) to the driver’s cab.
•
Steps (2) to the roof.
2
1
BX100460
5.2
•
Opening the cabin door
From the outside: Use the door key to unlock the
door lock (1); press in the button (1) and open the
door.
1
BX100220
•
From the inside: Lift the door opening lever (1) and
open the door.
The cab door must be closed during
operation.
1
BX100230
V-1
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.3
The air comfort seat
10
The air-cushioned comfort seat (1) can be individually
adapted to the requirements of the driver.
The adjustment devices of the driver’s
seat must not be actuated during the
operation.
Weight adjustment
In order to prevent health problems, the individual
driver’s weight adjustment should be checked and
adjusted prior to operation of the machine.
The adjustment should be carried out whilst sitting
absolutely stationary.
•
1
8
2
3
Pull the lever (6) upwards briefly (position I).
9
Height adjustment
The height can be adjusted continuously by means of
the hydraulic system.
In order to prevent damage, actuate the compressor for
a maximum of 1 minute.
•
Pull the lever (6) upwards completely (position II) to
move the driver’s seat (1) up; press the lever (6)
down completely (position II) to move the driver’s
seat (1) down. When the upper or lower end position
of the height adjustment mechanism is made, the
height will be adjusted automatically in order to
ensure a minimum spring travel.
Horizontal suspension
The shock load in direction of travel through the
driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the horizontal
suspension.
•
Swing the lever (5) to the front - the horizontal
suspension is active; swing the lever (5) back – the
horizontal suspension is switched off.
Longitudinal adjustment
•
Pull the locking lever (4) up, and push the driver’s
seat (1) forward or backward into the requested
position. Permit the locking lever (4) to snap into
place; after locking the driver’s seat must not be
movable into any other position.
Seat angle adjustment
•
Pull the left key (3) up and at the same time set the
angle of the sitting surface by increasing or
decreasing the pressure on the seat surface.
V-2
4
5
6
7
BX500010
Driver’s cab and ladders
Seat depth adjustment
•
Pull the right key (2) up and at the same time bring
the sitting surface into the required position by
pushing forward and backward.
Headrest
Set the headrest in such a way that the upper edges of
the head and the headrest are on the same height, if
possible.
•
Adjust the height of the headrest (10) by pulling out
and pressing down across the noticeable snaps.
Lumbar support
•
The height as well as the intensity of the arching in
the backrest can be adapted individually by turning
the hand wheel (9) to the left or right.
Adjustment of the backrest
•
Pull the locking lever (7) up to set the inclination of
the backrest. Permit the locking lever (7) to snap
into place – after locking, the backrest must not
move into a different position any more.
Setting the left armrest
•
Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.
•
Remove the cover cap (1) to adjust the height of the
armrest.
•
Undo the hexagon nut; move the armrest into the
requested position and tighten the hexagon nut
again. Press the cover cap (11) onto the hexagon
nut again.
8
11
BX100520
5.4
Right armrest
The right armrest (1) and the multi-function lever are
one unit.
1
Setting the right armrest
•
Undo the clamping screw (2); move the armrest (1)
into the requested height and tighten the clamping
screw (2) again.
2
BX500011
V-3
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.5
Storage compartment for firstaid kit/operating instructions
1
The storage compartment for the first-aid kit and the
operating instructions (2) are located below the front of
the driver’s seat (1).
2
BX100280
5.6
Passenger seat (optional)
Apart from the driver, only one
additional person may be present in
the driver’s cab during operation.
•
Folding down the passenger’s seat (1).
1
BX100290
5.7
Inside mirror
Set the interior mirror (1) according to the requirements
of operation.
•
Set the interior mirror (1) by hand.
1
BX100102
V-4
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.8
•
Sun blind
Set the sun visor (1) as required.
1
BX100101
5.9
Outside mirrors
Left outside mirror
•
1
Set the left outside mirror by hand.
BX100461
Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror
The right outside mirror (1) and the anti-collision mirror
(2) are electrically adjustable. The switch (3) is located
in the roof panel.
1
2
Setting the anti-collision mirror
Set the anti-collision mirror in such a
way that the ground area next to the
right front wheel can be checked prior
to starting.
•
•
Turn the switch (3) to the left (arrow to the left).
Press the switch (3) up, down and to the side until
the anti-collision mirror (2) is set correctly.
Setting the right outside mirror
•
•
Turn the switch (3) to the right (arrow to the right).
Press the switch (3) up, down and to the side until
the anti-collision mirror (1) is set correctly.
3
BX200321
V-5
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.10 Emergency exit
b
a
1
2
1
c
d
1
2
3
BM 400 0171
In case of an emergency, the side window on the RH
side in the direction of travel, next to the driver’s seat,
can be opened as an exit door.
To do this:
• Swivel the lever (1) upward.
• Press the lever (1) outwards and open the side
window (2) slightly.
• Pull the lever (1) from the pin (3).
• Open the side window (2) completely
5.11 Windshield wipers
The rocker switch (1) for the windshield wipers is
located in the roof panel.
The switch has three positions:
I
II
III
-
Off
Interval
Continuous operation
1
Switching on the windshield wipers
•
Actuate the rocker switch (1).
V-6
BX200091
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.12 Washer system - windshield
The rocker switch (1) for the windshield washer system
is located in the roof panel.
1
Switching on the windshield washer system
•
Actuate the rocker switch (1).
BX200092
5.13 Side window washer
(optional)
1
The switch (1) for the side window washer is located in
the housing of the washer (right/left).
Switching on the side window washer
•
Actuate the rocker switch (1) (right/left) as required.
BX100190
5.14 Diagnosis socket - motor
The diagnostics socket (1) for the engine is located in
the driver's cab (in the direction of travel) on the bottom
right in the switch panel next to the driver's seat.
1
BM 400 0173
V-7
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.15 Climatronic / Heating
5.15.1 Control and indicator elements
The climatronic is a control unit for air conditioning and heating systems in modern vehicle cabins.
The driver is being relieved from all tasks of the ideal air conditioning in the cabin by easy and clear controlling.
In case the power supply for the control unit is interrupted, the control unit accomplishes a
self-testing after impressing power. After finishing the self-testing the last saved setting is
displayed.
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LCD
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
V-8
1
2
4
3
16
11
12
10
13
9
15
14
Key function
Key for switching air conditioning on and off
Key for adjusting the desired cabin temperature up.
Alternative: manual adjustments „up“
Key for adjusting the desired cabin temperature down.
Alternative: manual adjustments „down“
Key for switching the control on and off
Shift-key evaporator fan speed manual/automatic
Key for switching REHEAT (dehumidify cabin air) on and off
Blind key for switching the temperature display to ° Fahrenheit
Function of LCD-display
Symbol indicates REHEAT – operation on
Symbol indicates air conditioning on
Symbol indicates that fully automatic control is switched on
Bar indicates the fan speed during manual operation
Symbol indicates manual fan operation
4-digit seven segment display indicates set value or error code
Symbol indicates temperature unit ( °)
Indicates symbol for the vehicle cabin
6
5
8
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.15.2 Control
5.15.3 Switch on system
Press key
After switching on, the control
accomplishes a self-testing, the
software version is displayed for
about 5 sec., e.g.:
Afterwards the hours of operation of the air conditioning
system are displayed for about 5 sec.:
(e.g. 6 hours of operation)
Afterwards the last saved setting is shown in the
display.
5.15.4 Setting the desired cabin
temperature
The adjusted cabin temperature in °C, e.g. 26°C, is
displayed.
The control is set on automatic operation.
For lowering the desired cabin temperature to e.g. 21°C
press key
until the desired value is shown in the
display. (press key 5 times)
V-9
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.15.5 Switching air conditioning
operation on/off
Switching air conditioning on with the key
.
The air conditioning is now operating, this symbol
indicates the air conditioning operating.
If required, the compressor is
switched on by the control.
By pressing this key
again the air conditioning is
switched off.
(Compressor deactivated), symbol
is no longer
shown.
5.15.6 Switching REHEAT - operation on
and off
REHEAT-operation = (dehumidify cabin air)
Switching REHEAT- operation on with this key
The following notice is shown in the display:
The REHEAT - operation is switched on now, this
symbol
indicates REHEAT - operation.
The compressor is constantly
switched on. The evaporator fan
speed is raised to 100%. If required,
the control turns the heater on for
keeping the room temperature on set
value.
The REHEAT – operation is
automatically limited to 10 minutes.
By pressing this key
again, the REHEAT -
operation is switched off.
This symbol
V - 10
is no longer shown.
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.15.7 Manual adjustment of the
evaporator fan speed
Switch on evaporator fan speed with
this key
.
Manual setting of the fan speed is now active.The
currently adjusted fan speed value is shown with this
bar
(full bar = 100%).
The symbol AUTO is no longer shown.
Fan
flashes for 5 sec., during this time the fan
speed can be raised in 10%-steps with the key
lowered with the key
or
.
The lowest adjustable fan speed is
30% (three bars is shown).
By pressing the key
two times the AUTO -
operation is reactivated, symbol Auto is shown,
symbols
and
are no longer shown.
5.15.8 Switching the temperature display
to ° Fahrenheit
The adjusted set temperature is shown in ° Celsius.
Keep blind key (8) pressed, additionally press
key
, display switches to ° Fahrenheit.
Adjusted set temperature is shown in ° Fahrenheit.
By pressing the key (8) and the key
display switches back to ° Celsius.
again the
8
V - 11
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.15.9 Showing errors on the display
Error code (F0)
Error room temperature sensor is shown with blinking
display (F0) .
The control received an error of the
room temperature sensor, the
function is inoperable.
Cause of the sensor error:
Short circuit or interruption of the sensor line, plug
connection on the sensor or control, temperature
sensor damaged.
Only after eliminating the error, the control is operable
again, the sensor error is no longer shown.
In case of an sensor error, the control
keeps working with the setting which
was in effect before receiving an
error.
Error code (FI)
Error blow out-temperature sensor is shown with
blinking display (F1).
The control received an error of the
blow out-temperature sensor, the
function is inoperable.
Cause of the sensor error:
Short circuit or interruption of the sensor line, plug
connection on the sensor or control, temperature
sensor damaged.
Only after eliminating the error, the control is operable
again, the sensor error is no longer shown.
In case of an sensor error, the control
keeps working with the setting which
was in effect before receiving an
error.
V - 12
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.16 Adjustable air jets
C
C
A/B
A/B
BMII-200
A
-
Knurled wheel to control the amount of air
B
-
Adjustment of the louvers
C
-
Air slots
Set the louvers in such a way that the
panes do not mist up.
5.17 Radio
1
ISO compartment for radio.
For data on the connections, please refer to circuit
diagram in the chapter titled "Maintenance – electrical
system".
Telephones and radio equipment not
connected to the outside antenna may
lead to functional troubles in the
vehicle’s electronic system, thus
jeopardising the operational safety of
the vehicle.
1
BX100103
V - 13
Driver’s cab and ladders
5.18 Ladders
5.18.1 Flaps with safety locks
Opening the flaps
•
1
Use an open-jawed spanner or ring spanner (NW 13)
or a screwdriver (2) to unlock the flap locks (1) by
turning to the left. Open the flap with the handle (3).
Closing the flap
•
3
Close the flap by pressing (without tools).
2
BX100480
5.18.2 Ladder to the machine compartment
Left-hand side of the machine
•
Open the flap (1).
1
BX500068
V - 14
Driver’s cab and ladders
Right-hand side of the machine
•
•
1
Rotate the flap (1) upward.
Open the lock (3) of the tool box and fold down the
lid (2).
3
2
BX500069
5.18.3 Ladder to the motor compartment
•
•
Open the rear flap (1).
Fold down the ladder (2).
1
2
2
BX500019
V - 15
Driver’s cab and ladders
V - 16
Lighting
6
Lighting
6.1 Indicator, hazard warning
flasher and brake light
In road traffic indicate the change of
travelling direction by means of the
indicator.
1
1
Switching on the indicator
•
Actuate the direction indicator on the steering
wheel; the indicators (1, 2, 3) will flash on one side
(right/left).
3
3
Hazard warning flasher
When the hazard warning flasher has been switched
on, all indicators (1, 2, 3) will flash at the same time.
4
4
Brake light
When the ignition is switched on, the brake lights (4)
will light up as soon as the operating brake is pressed.
2
2
BX500020
Switching on the hazard warning flasher
The switch (1) for the hazard warning flasher is located
in the roof panel switch group.
•
Actuate the rocker switch (1). The red pilot lamp in
the switch (1) will start flashing.
1
BX200096
6.2 Parking light
Switching on the parking light
1
The rocker switch (1) for the parking light and the
dipped beam is located in the roof panel switch group.
The switch has three positions:
I
II
III
•
-
Off
Parking light
Dipped beam
Set the rocker switch (1) to position II.
BX200093
VI - 1
Lighting
The following lamps will light up when the parking light
is switched on:
1
-
Front side lamps.
If the forage harvester has been fitted
with tyres size 900-60 R32 on the
driving axle, the additionally fitted
side lamps on the two sides of the
platform will also light up.
1
1
BX500400
2
-
Rear side lamps
3
-
Side lamps
4
-
Upper side lamp
4
3
3
2
2
BX500021
VI - 2
Lighting
6.3 Dipped beam
Switching on the dipped beam
1
The rocker switch (1) for the parking light and the
dipped beam is located in the roof panel switch group.
The switch has three positions:
I
II
III
-
Off
Parking light
Dipped beam
BX200093
The dipped beam can be switched on
only when the ignition has been
switched on.
•
Set the rocker switch (1) to position III.
When the parking light is on, the following lamps will
light up:
1
-
Head lights
2
-
Rear lights
3
-
License plate lighting
1
1
3
2
2
BX500022
6.4 Working floodlights
Switching on the working floodlights
1
2
3
4
The rocker switch (1, 2, 3) for the working floodlights is
located in the roof panel switch group.
1
-
Front working floodlights I
2
-
Working floodlight cab roof and upper
discharge chute
3
-
Front working floodlights II
4
-
Rear working floodlights
BX200094
VI - 3
Lighting
Front working floodlights I
The front working floodlights I can be
set by hand.
They have an on/off switch on the rear
side.
1
-
Front working floodlights I
1
1
BX500402
Working floodlight – cab roof and upper discharge
chute
2
-
Working floodlights of the ejector
2
BX100440
3
-
Right and left rear wheel lights
3
3
BX200421
VI - 4
Lighting
1
-
Cab roof working floodlights
1
BX500403
Front working floodlights II
1
-
Front working floodlights II
1
1
BX500404
VI - 5
Lighting
Rear working floodlights
1
-
Rear working floodlights
1
1
BX200441
6.5 Allround lights
In some countries the allround lights
must be switched on in road traffic.
Switching on the allround lights
1
The switch (1) for the allround lights is located in the
roof panel switch group.
•
Actuate the rocker switch (1). The orange pilot lamp
in the switch (1) will light up.
BX200095
Allround lights
1
-
Allround lights
1
2
1
If the allround lights (1) are not visible through the
folded-in maize header for road driving, an allround light
can be placed on the middle support (2).
BX200412
6.6 Reversing lights
The reversing lights will light up when reversing, and at
the same time an acoustic warning signal is sounded.
1
VI - 6
1
BX500023
Start-up
7
Start-up
7.1 Daily checks
•
Check machine for cleanliness, clean if necessary
•
Central lubrication
•
Engine oil level
•
Tyres
•
Hydraulic oil level, tightness of the system
•
Light functions
•
Coolant level, engine
•
Brake
7.1.1 Dirt deposits in the engine and
machine compartment
1
Engine compartment (1)
A mixture of dust, oil, grass and chaff
in the engine compartment is a source
of fire and means an increased fire
hazard.
•
•
•
Always keep the engine and engine compartment
(1) clean.
Blow off dirt with compressed air.
Wipe off oil deposits.
BX500017
Machine compartment
•
•
Always keep the radiator sieve (1) and air filter
cover (2) clean.
Blow off dirt with compressed air.
1
2
BX500056
The compressed air connection (1) and compressed air
gun (2) are in the machine compartment.
1
2
BX101440
VII - 1
Start-up
7.1.2 Engine - oil level check
Park the machine on level ground, perform an oil level
check approx. 5 minutes after the engine has stopped.
•
•
Pull out the oil dipstick.
Clean the oil dip stick with a non-fibrous cloth and
push it in completely.
Pull the oil dipstick back out.
•
The oil level must lie between the min. and max. mark.
•
If necessary refill engine oil (see engine
maintenance section).
Engine OM 460 LA
1
-
VII - 2
Oil dipstick
1
max.
min.
BX100800
Start-up
7.1.3 Hydraulic oil level check
2
•
Lower the lifting gear and switch off the engine.
•
Check the hydraulic fluid level in the viewing glass
(2) of the hydraulic fluid tank (1).
1
The hydraulic fluid must be visible in the viewing glass (2).
•
If necessary refill hydraulic oil (see hydraulic
maintenance section).
BX500055
7.1.4 Checking the engine coolant level
•
Check the coolant level in the overflow container (1)
in the viewing pane (2).
The coolant level must reach up to the middle of the
control eye (2).
•
If necessary refill coolant (see section on engine
maintenance).
2
1
BX500057
7.1.5 Checking the central lubrication
system
•
Perform visual filling level check at the lubricant
tank (1).
1
min
The lubricant level must be above the min. mark.
•
If necessary refill lubricant (see section
Maintenance - Central lubrication system).
BX101960
7.1.6 Tyres
•
Check tyres (1) daily for damage and cracks and
obviously low tyre pressure.
•
Measure the tyre pressure with an accurately
working test device at least 1x weekly.
For tyre pressure information, refer to the section on
Maintenance - Tyres.
The tyre pressure data refer to cold tyres.
•
Correct the tyre pressure if necessary.
1
BX500034
VII - 3
Start-up
7.1.7 Light functions
•
Check the functioning of the lighting before the start
of every journey.
7.1.8 Brake
•
Check the functioning of the operating brake before
the start of every journey.
7.1.9 Fuel level
•
•
I
With the ignition switched on, check the fuel level (1)
in the display of the Info centre.
If the symbol
(2) appears in the engine data
UPM
1080
0
20
40
info area, refuel without delay.
60
80
III
100
IV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
100
75
50
25
67°C
0
V
A
B
C
D
BX500163
VII - 4
Start-up
7.2 Fuel system
7.2.1 Fuel
Take care when handling fuel.
Refuel only outdoors and with the
engine switched off. No smoking.
The quality and cleanliness of the fuel are of critical
importance for consistently good performance and a
long service life for the engine.
Observe the data in the engine
operating instructions, operating
materials section (Daimler
Chrysler) and the operating
regulations (DaimlerChrysler).
For temperatures under 10 °C (50 °F), always use
winter fuel.
1
7.2.2 Refueling
•
•
•
•
•
•
Switch off the engine.
Clean grass and dust from the area around the filler
neck (1).
Use only clean fuel in the tank. If necessary, filter
the fuel before adding it to the tank.
Capacity of the fuel tank approx. 960 l.
Close and seal the tank after filling it.
Dispose of spilled fuel.
BX200770
Refuel the fuel tank daily after the end
of work to avoid the formation of
condensation in the fuel tank and
freezing when cold.
7.2.3 Venting the fuel system
The fuel system must be vented if necessary after a
lengthy standstill.
For more information, please refer to the operating
instructions in the section on engine maintenance
(DaimlerChrysler).
VII - 5
Start-up
7.3 Engine operation
7.3.1 Running in the engine
Modifications to the engine not
authorised by the manufacturer result
in expiry of the warranty protection.
The engine is immediately ready for normal operating
conditions; particular caution is required, however, in
the first 100 operating hours.
Observe the following notes:
•
If one of the following error messages (1) appears in
the display of the Info centre and at the same time
an acoustic signal sounds, immediately switch off
the engine and remedy the fault (see also Appendix
A - Error messages).
-
Engine fault!
-
Diesel engine oil pressure!
-
Diesel engine oil level!
-
Cooling water temperature!
-
Cooling water level!
•
Check the engine oil level at regular intervals of
time (see section 7.1.2 Engine oil level check),
watch out for leaks.
•
Pay particular attention and be particularly aware
until you have the required sense and ear for the
engine and operating noises.
•
Avoid high loading or idling of the engine for more
than 5 minutes during the first 20 operating hours.
7.3.2 Before starting the engine
Always make sure there is no one in
the vicinity of the forage harvester;
sound horn.
Never let the engine run in closed
rooms without extraction system.
Ensure sufficient ventilation.
VII - 6
Start-up
7.3.3 Starting the engine
Prerequisites
•
1
Main battery switch (1) in closed position (vertically
downwards).
BX200621
•
Travelling gear release switch (2) off.
4
Switching on the electronics circuit
O
1
Switching on the ignition
III
•
3
Turn the ignition key (1) into the II position.
The charging pilot lamp (3) lights up. It must go out
after the engine starts.
The engine fault pilot light (4) shines for approx. 2
seconds.
II
Turn the ignition key (1) to the I position.
I
•
2
BX500012
The task computer makes a system check internally,
the main display appears in the display of the Info
centre.
Starting the engine
Start the engine only from the driver’s
seat.
•
Turn the ignition key (1) into the III position. Do not
operate the starter too briefly, but not longer than 20
seconds. Immediately let go of the ignition key (1)
after the engine starts.
If the engine does not start within the
20 seconds, wait for at least 2 minutes
before trying to start it again.
After the engine is started the engine fault control light
(4) shines briefly. Check that the pilot light goes out, if
not immediately switch off the engine and remove the
fault.
If the ignition key (1) is turned back into the I position
before the engine starts, wait until the engine is at rest
before trying to start it.
The task computer makes a system check internally,
the main display appears in the display of the Info
centre.
VII - 7
Start-up
7.3.4 Starting at low temperatures
In the cold season let the engine run in the lower idling
speed for a few minutes after the start.
If necessary use winter-grade fuel.
7.3.5 Starting with auxiliary battery
Under cold operating conditions use a further 12 V battery as required parallel with the batteries.
Leaking battery gas is highly explosive. Avoid spark formation and open
flames in the vicinity of the battery.
Always connect the battery with the
correct polarity, the earth cable to the
minus pole and starter cable to the
plus pole of the battery.
Never connect batteries in series,
since otherwise excess voltages that
damage the electronics can arise.
In the case of non-compliance of the
correct polarity between battery and
three-phase generator severe faults in
the electrical system arise.
Always connect the plus pole first and
then the minus pole.
7.3.6 Killing the engine
If an engine at operating heat stalls,
immediately restart the engine to
avoid an excessive heat accumulation
at functionally important parts.
Before switching off the engine, let it
run without load for 1-2 minutes in the
lower idling range to let all important
parts of the engine cool down.
7.3.7 Switching off the engine
1
III
Turn the ignition key (1) into the 0 position.
II
•
O
Let the engine run without load for 1-2 minutes in
the lower idling range to let all important parts of the
engine cool down.
I
•
Always pull out the ignition key (1)
before leaving the driver’s cab. The
holding brake is applied automatically.
BX500013
VII - 8
Start-up
7.3.8
Starting the Second Engine (BiG X
800 and BiG X 1000 only)
II
1
Self-propelled forage harvesters of series BiG X 800
and BiG X 1000 are equipped with 2 engines
connected to each other by means of a synchromesh
gear.
If more or less power is required in field mode, the
second engine can be turned on or off at any time
while the first engine remains in operation.
I
7.3.8.1 Pre-condition for Starting the
Second Engine
•
•
The first engine must already be started (refer to
chapter „Starting the Engine“)
The „Diesel engine II“ release switch must be in
Position (II) „Released“.
2
1
3
7.3.8.2 Starting / Switching off the Second
Engine before Cutting Operation
•
BX500102
6
1
ressing the (3) key on the operating console starts
the second engine.
5
1
The pilot lamp (2) remains lit until the
engine is started.
The display now shows the speed (4) and the bar
graph „Engine capacity as %“ (8) for the second
engine.
•
•
•
Pressing key "6" on the operating
console switches on the main
coupling. The second engine will be
switched on automatically for more
output if the release switch has been
activated.
Now the display shows the speed
(4) of the second engine and the
symbol (7) „Engine coupling on“.
Pressing key "8" on the operating
console switches off the main
coupling. The second engine will be
disengaged.(The second engine then
continues to run at idle speed.
8
1
BX500103
4
1
8
1
BX500104
4
1
7
1
8
1
BX500105
VII - 9
Start-up
7.3.8.3 Starting / Switching off the Second
Engine during Cutting Operation
Since the main coupling is already turned on in
cutting operation, pressing the (3) key on the
operating panel starts the second engine.
2
1
The pilot lamp (2) remains lit until the
engine is started.
3
The display now shows the speed (4) and the bar
graph „Engine capacity as %“ (8) for the second
engine. As soon as the speed of the second engine is
adjusted to match the speed of the first engine, the
system automatically engages the second motor for
more power.
•
•
Now the display shows the speed
(4) of the second engine and the
symbol (7) „Engine coupling on“.
Pressing the „8“ key on the operating
console turns the main coupling off
and disengages the second engine.
(The second engine then continues to
run at idle speed.)
6
1
5
1
8
1
4
1
8
1
7.3.8.4 Switching off the Second Engine
BX500104
Let the engine run without load for 1-2
minutes in the lower idling range to let
all important parts of the engine cool
down.
•
Pressing the „5“ key on the operating console
switches off the second engine.
BX500103
4
1
7
1
8
1
BX500105
VII - 10
Start-up
7.4 Driving
7.4.1 General aspects of driving
The following notes must be observed when driving the
forage harvester:
•
•
•
Handling the forage harvester requires a certain
amount of practice because of the rear steering.
Handling on the road and in the field differs.
In the case of an error message in the Info centre
immediately stop and remove the error.
If this is not possible, inform the Krone customer
service or your Krone dealer.
Handling characteristics
The handling characteristics of the forage harvester are
influenced e.g. by the roadway and by the fitted front
attachment.
Therefore the style of driving must be adapted to the
relevant ground and soil conditions.
Special care is required when working and turning on a
slope!
7.4.2 Steering
The forage harvester is easy to steer due to the
hydrostatic steering with the rear axle.
Take care when driving on roads and
tight corners, the forage harvester
swings out at the rear!
Emergency steering forces
The steering also operates when the engine has
stopped. However, considerably more force must be
applied.
BX000025
VII - 11
Start-up
7.4.3 Starting the engine
For details see section 7.3.3 Engine operation Starting the engine.
I
O
II
III
1
BX500005
7.4.4 Road/field mode
II
1
Road operating mode
•
Bring the lifting gear into the transport position.
When travelling on roads, the road/field
release switch (1) has to be set to the I
position.
This ensures that only the travelling
gear, the steering mechanism and the
brakes are active.
I
Field mode
•
Switch the road/field release switch into the II
position.
II
BX100042
1
7.4.5 Switching the travelling gear on
No persons may be present in the
direct hazardous area of the machine
when the travelling gear release switch
is actuated!
•
Set the travelling gear release switch (1) to position II.
I
7.4.6 Release holding brake
BX100150
1
II
Driving for an extended period of time
with the holding brake applied will
result in overheating of the brake.
•
Switch the holding brake release switch (1) into
position I.
The holding brake is applied automatically when the
ignition is switched off.
I
BX100051
VII - 12
Start-up
7.4.7 Operating brake
In road traffic
1
•
The hydrostat decelerates automatically when the
operating brake (1) is operated.
For reasons of traffic safety the brake
pedals must be coupled.
No single brake fitted.
Check the brake function before every
journey.
BX100111
7.4.8 Setting the acceleration behaviour
Four different acceleration stages can be selected
while driving with the selector switch acceleration ramp
(2) attached to the multi-function lever (1).
With unchanging operation of the multi-function lever
(1) in one direction and unchanging engine speed, the
travelling speed increases the slowest in the
acceleration stage I and the fastest in the acceleration
stage IV.
•
1
Switch the selector switch (2) into the desired
acceleration stage.
2
7.4.9 Driving forwards
Always adapt the travelling speed of the
forage harvester on road and field to the
given conditions.
Starting forwards from standstill
BX100801
0
1
2
After the engine is started and the travelling gear is
released, the gearbox is in the neutral position.
•
•
•
•
Press the activation button for the travelling gear (2)
and keep it pressed.
Move the multi-function lever (1) to the front, the
forage harvester starts to move forwards and
accelerates.
If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns
automatically to the mid position (0). The speed
remains constant.
If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear
while travelling, the forage harvester decelerates, it
is braked until is comes to a stop by friction.
BX100802
VII - 13
Start-up
7.4.10 Reversing
An acoustic warning signal sounds
when reversing.
Starting in reverse from standstill
0
1
2
After the engine is started and the travelling gear is
released, the gearbox is in the neutral position.
•
•
•
•
Press the activation button for the travelling gear (2)
and keep it pressed.
Move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear, the
forage harvester starts to move in reverse and
accelerates.
If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns
automatically to the mid position (0), the speed
remains constant.
If one moves the multi-function lever (1) to the front
while travelling, the forage harvester decelerates, it
is braked until is comes to a stop by friction.
BX100802
7.4.11 Quick stop
Activating quick stop
•
1
Move the multi-function lever (1) to the left while
driving.
The forage harvester decelerates to a standstill.
BX500035
7.4.12 Fast direction change (fast
reversing)
Fast reversing is possible only in the
field mode.
1
2
Activating fast reversing
•
While travelling press the activation button for the
travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed, move the
multi-function lever (1) to the left and back to the
middle position.
The forage harvester decelerates down to standstill and
accelerates in the opposite direction to approx. 70 % of
the previous travelling speed.
VII - 14
BX500036
Start-up
7.4.13 Cruise control
The cruise control can be activated only when
travelling forwards. When the cruise control is
activated, the forage harvester is accelerated or
decelerated with the set acceleration stage to the
speed stored for the cruise control mode.
2
1
Storing the speed for the cruise control mode
The speed is saved for the operating mode (road/field)
the machine is currently in.
One speed can be saved for road and field mode each.
BX500037
•
•
Accelerate the forage harvester to the desired
speed.
While travelling press the activation button for the
travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed, move the
multi-function lever (1) to the right and back to the
middle position.
I
The momentary travelling speed is stored.
II
IV
The stored speed (1) is displayed in the display of the
Info centre in the travelling gear data Info area.
V
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500004
Activating cruise control
•
Move the multi-function lever (1) to the right without
the activation key while travelling.
The forage harvester goes to the saved speed, the
symbol
1
in the display of the Info centre is
displayed for cruise control active.
BX500038
Deactivating cruise control
•
The cruise control is deactivated by overriding the
multi-function lever, operating the operating brake
and switching off the travelling gear.
If you switch into "Road/field" mode, the display
switches to the value that is saved for the currently
selected operating mode (field or road speed).
VII - 15
Start-up
7.4.14 Constant-Power load limit control
The load limit control is used for the automatic
acceleration or deceleration of the travelling gear in
order to ensure an almost constant diesel engine
speed.
If the load limit control has been deactivated in
parameter 33685, the menu „Settings of the load limit
control“ will not be displayed on the terminal.
Activating the load limit control
The load limit control is only
possible in field mode (see chapter
„Road/field mode“).
•
1
By briefly pressing the driving lever (1) twice to the
right, the load limit control „Constant Power“ will be
activated.
BX500038
•
The green Symbol
(1) on the display
indicates that the load limit control is active and
the travelling speed is automatically adjusted to
the speed reduction of the motor.
1
Deactivating the load limit control
The following operations will deactivate the load limit
control:
• Actuating the driving lever
• Road/field release switch must be in the road
mode position.
• Travelling gear release switch off
• Applying the brake pedal
BX500604
VII - 16
Start-up
7.4.15 Autopilot
The autopilot is only available in the
maize header mode with mounted
maize header EasyCollect and
autopilot equipment (optional).
Special safety instructions
When the autopilot is in operation, no
one must be within 50 m of the forage
harvester in any direction.
Autopilot must only be used for its
intended purpose. It must only be
used in open fields, off public and
semi-public roads, away from open
areas frequented by people and far
away from any persons that could be
endangered. They must only be used
for their intended purpose:
•
The operator is not permitted to leave
the driver’s cabin while the autopilot
is in operation.
While the autopilot is in operation, the
driver must regularly check the
direction in which the machine is
moving and its travel path to be able
to take over manual control of the
harvest forager immediately if
obstructions or interruptions come up
in the vehicle’s path.
Automatic forage harvester guiding
on a stalk-line row of plants.
Before placing the autopilot in service,
check the functionality of safety
elements that can be checked and
make a visual inspection of all the
components.
To do this, the user should proceed as
follows:
1. Check switching off of the autopilot
when the steering wheel is moved
and the door contact switch engages
(open the door).
2. Check for proper operating condition
- i.e. free of mechanical damages
and leaks – row tracers, wheel angle
transmitter as well as all visible
hoses and wiring.
After the autopilot has been in
operation and before leaving the field,
the autopilot must always be switched
off on the autopilot release switch on
the console.
Manipulating safety-related elements
of the autopilot is prohibited, as is
making changes to the hydraulic,
electrical or electronic components.
The autopilot should only be installed
by an authorised service centre.
Prerequisites for activating the autopilot:
•
The cab door must be closed.
•
The driver’s seat must be occupied.
•
Road/field release switch must be in the field mode
position.
•
Travelling gear release switch must be switched on.
•
The autopilot release switch (1) must be switched to
position II.
II
1
I
BX500031
VII - 17
Start-up
Chaffing should preferably be in row tracer mode left or
right.
Now, the following modes can be used:
• Row tracer automatic
• Row tracer mirrored, automatic
1
Setting the row tracer mode (see also Sect. 4.2.5)
Activating the autopilot
•
•
•
Move the forage harvester parallel to the rows of
plants. Autopilot can be activated after about 1 meter.
Activate the autopilot by pressing the button (1).
The lastly set icon is displayed in the Info-Center
BX500039
Autopilot now takes over the task of guiding the forage
harvester along the row of plants with the selected row
tracer on the maize header. In the case of short gaps
in the maize crop the autopilot ensures straight-ahead
travel of the forage harvester.
Deactivating the autopilot
•
If you move the steering wheel abruptly, the
autopilot will be deactivated.
The autopilot is also automatically deactivated if:
•
The driver leaves the driver’s seat.
•
The cab door is opened.
•
The autopilot button (1) is pressed again.
•
The autopilot release switch is switched off.
•
The travelling gear release switch is switched off.
•
Road/field release switch is switched to the road
mode.
•
One of the quick stop buttons is pressed.
•
If there is an error in the autopilot system
components.
After the autopilot is deactivated, take
control of the forage harvester with the
steering wheel.
The deactivation of the autopilot is
indicated by an audio warning tone.
VII - 18
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX500002
Start-up
7.4.15 All-wheel drive
2
II
II
1
All-wheel drive is possible only in the
field mode.
Prerequisites for activating the all-wheel drive:
•
•
Road/field release switch must be in the field mode
position.
The travelling gear release switch (2) must be
switched on and the forage harvester must be at a
standstill.
I
Switching in all-wheel drive
•
BX100160
Set the all-wheel drive release switch (1) to position II.
The symbol
(all-wheel drive active) appears in
the display of the Info centre.
Switching off all-wheel drive
•
Set the all-wheel drive release switch (1) to position I.
The symbol
(front wheel drive active) appears in
the display of the Info centre.
7.4.16 Axle separation
Prerequisites for activating the axle separation:
•
•
•
Road/field release switch must be in the field mode
position.
Travelling gear release switch must be switched on.
The all-wheel drive release switch (2) must be
switched on; the travelling speed must be below 10
km/h.
Switching on the axle separation
•
Actuate the axle separation button (1) – axle
separation is switched on.
The symbol
(axle separation active) appears in
2
1
the display of the Info centre.
Switching off the axle separation
•
Actuate the axle separation button (1) again.
The symbol
(all-wheel drive active) appears in
the display of the Info centre.
BX100161
VII - 19
Start-up
7.4.17 Hydrostat system
Avoid overheating of the Hydrostat system!
There is an acoustic warning signal if the Hydrostat
system is overheated. Switch the engine off and
determine the cause of overheating.
Driving speed is automatically reduced to about 25 km/h
for road driving.
The drive torque acting on the front
wheels depends on the oil pressure in
the hydrostatic drive system. If the
pressure requirement becomes higher
than the pressure in the hydrostatic
system, the pressure relief valve will
open and the forage harvester will not
move.
If appropriate, switch to all wheel
drive.
7.4.18 Towing
Tow only out of the danger area. Never
tow over longer distances.
For towing choose either the hitch coupling (1) or
according to fitted front attachment suitable towing
points at the front of the forage harvester.
1
If the machine no longer builds up the necessary oil
pressure for releasing the holding brake, then the
holding brake must be released manually.
It is also possible to use an external system (for
example the tractor hydraulics) to charge the
cylinders of the parking brake with sufficient pressure
until the parking brake is released.
A kit containing the parts required to do this can be
ordered under Order No. 20 021 334 0.
The parts in the same kit (20 021
334 0) can also be used to charge
the running gear accumulator.
VII - 20
BX500025
Start-up
Releasing the holding brake manually
Remove the ignition key and secure
the forage harvester from being placed
in operation or rolling away
unintentionally.
Fitting wheel chocks
•
•
•
1
Place wheel chocks (1) on both sides in front of or
behind (according to slope) the driving wheels (front
axle).
Always place the wheel chocks (1) so that the
forage harvester cannot roll away.
Fold the wheel chocks (1) open completely and
place them close up against the drive wheels.
BX100531
hand pump parts set install
For all machine types, the hand pump
parts set (1) for the manual release of
the hand brake is located in the
toolbox on the right side of the
machine.
1
BX500639
VII - 21
Start-up
•
•
•
•
•
•
Take the parts set hand pump (1) out of the toolbox.
Remove the protective cap from the screw coupling.
Screw the screw coupling to the respective
attachment point (2), which is dependent on the
machine type.
Close the drain valve (3) on the pump.
Connect the coupling head with the coupling sleeve
on the hydraulic tank.
By using the hand pump, vent the measuring line
until oil emerges from the line.
Big X 500
2
3
BX500640
Big X 650
2
BX500641
Big X 800/1000
2
BX500642
VII - 22
Start-up
Release parking brake
•
•
•
•
Screw the measuring line (4) to the measuring
coupling.
Make sure the lever (5) of the ball valve is in the
horizontal position and release the brake through
continuous pumping.
If the effort during pumping increases considerably,
check whether the brake has been released by
moving the machine.
Once the function of the brake has been restored,
relieve the pressure by opening the pressure relieve
valve and remove the parts set.
Place protective cap on the screw coupling.
When removing the parts set, move
the lever (5) of the ball valve
upwards into the upright position
again, as otherwise the parking
brake function will not work.
4
5
BX500643
Notes on towing
•
Switch on the ignition, so that the indicator (hazard
warning flasher) and brake lights function.
•
Switch the road/field release switch into the road
traffic position.
•
Increased steering and braking forces must be
applied with the engine switched off.
Transporting on a low loader
1
The forage harvester must be properly
secured in place to be transported on
a low loader.
2
1 - Lashing point left front
2 - Lashing point right front
3 - Lashing point left rear
4 - Lashing point right rear
3
4
BX201351
VII - 23
Start-up
7.5 Fitting attachments
Only attachments that are type tested by the
manufacturer and approved for the use may be fitted.
Fitting and operation of other attachments is
considered as use not as intended. The manufacturer
is not liable for damage resulting from this, the user
alone bears the risk for this.
The attachments must be fitted and
removed on a level surface with load
bearing ground.
Sufficient space on the side for
manoeuvring the forage harvester
must be available.
When a front attachment is operated the operating
instructions supplied with the front attachment must be
read before the use and the given instructions must be
complied with.
Special care is required when fitting
and detaching the attachment! The
accident prevention regulations must
be complied with absolutely.
The data in the operating instructions
of the attachment must be observed.
The forage harvester is equipped for
use with the grass pick-up.
The necessary conversion work on the
forage harvester for use with the maize
header is described in Section 7.6.
7.5.1 Adjusting the adapter frame
Only for first fitting of the attachment.
1
•
Measure the axle base "a" between holding claw (1)
and locking hook (2) on the pendulum frame of the
forage harvester.
a
2
BX201012
•
Check the axle base "a" between the holding bolt
(1, 3) of the adapter frame on the front attachment
and if necessary adapt it to the size of the
pendulum frame.
Make the adjustment equally on the
right and left of the adapter frame.
•
Loosen the screw connections (2) and shift the
reciprocal frame holders (3) to the correct distance.
•
Tighten the screw connections (2).
1
2
3
a
BX110020
VII - 24
Start-up
7.5.2 Pendulum frame
•
•
1
Lower fully the feed drive with pendulum frame (1)
of the forage harvester.
3
Align the pendulum frame (1) of the forage harvester
horizontally.
2
Open the locking hook (2)
•
Remove the spring cotter pin (4).
•
Pull the locking lever (3) off from the locking pin and
swing it to the front.
3
4
2
BX201920
7.5.3 Coupling
•
Drive the forage harvester up to the front
attachment so that the pendulum frame stands just
in front of the adapter frame (1) and the holding
bolts (3) are located against the stop surfaces of
the holding claws (2).
•
Raise the feed drive with pendulum frame with lifting
hydraulics until the locking hooks lie in the
pendulum frame holder on the adapter frame.
•
Stop the machine.
1
1
3
2
BX110040
VII - 25
Start-up
•
Swing the locking lever (3) to the rear and engage it
on the locking pin (4), secure with spring plug (2).
Check that the pendulum frame (1)
hooks correctly into the holding bolts
and the locking hooks on both sides.
3
2
1
4
BX201052
When attaching the grass pickup, unlock the
pendulum frame
•
I
Move the locking pin (1) from position I (locked) to
position II (unlocked).
I
II
1
II
1
EF000210
•
Push the joint fork (1) onto the drive journal (2) of
the main angular gear until the closure engages.
1
2
BX510030
VII - 26
Start-up
Connecting hydraulic hoses and electrical
connection cables
Prior to connecting the hydraulic hoses, depressurise
the system on both sides.
1
2
1
To do this:
• Press the keys (1) and (2) (red) simultaneously (the
first hydraulic circuit is depressurised).
• Press the keys (3) and (4) (blue) simultaneously
(the second hydraulic circuit is depressurised).
Make sure the plugs and couplings are
clean; clean them if necessary.
3
4
BX500610
Grass pick-up
I
II
IV
-
Extend roller feelers
Retract roller feelers
Roller-type crop guard
Maize header
III
IV
-
Folding out the maize header
Folding in the maize header
1
2
-
Maize header sensor connection
Lighting cable
The identification of hydraulic
connections (I - IV) is also on the
hydraulic hoses of the attachment
device.
I
1
II
III
IV
2
BX200761
VII - 27
Start-up
7.5.4 Adjusting hydraulics of the forage
harvester
Perform the adjusting work for the
hydraulics of the forage harvester only
with the machine at standstill and
attachment set down.
1
Grass pick-up
The shut-off valve (1) for the grain conditioner
tensioning roller must be in position I (closed).
•
If necessary close the shut-off valve (1) (I position).
Maize header
II
The shut-off valve for the grain conditioner tensioning
roller (1) must be in position II (open).
•
1
If necessary open the shut-off valve (1) (position II).
I
BX102000
Adjusting the lifting hydraulics
Operate only with the lifting gear
lowered.
1
I
II
III
-
Lifting hydraulics locked
Lifting hydraulics in grass pick-up position
Lifting hydraulics in maize header position
Grass pick-up
The three-way valve (1) for the lifting hydraulics must
be in position II.
•
If necessary turn the three-way valve (1) into
position II.
Maize header
The three-way valve (1) for the lifting hydraulics must
be in position III.
•
1
III
II
I
If necessary turn the three-way valve (1) to
position III.
BX200685
VII - 28
Start-up
7.5.5 Adjusting the lifting gear
The adjustment of the lifting gear
control EMR must be performed on the
first fitting of the attachment and on
changing the attachment, so that the
lifting gear bearing pressure control,
position control and distance control
function reliably.
Prerequisites for adjusting the lifting gear:
•
•
•
•
•
Engine is started.
Road/field release switch must be in the road mode
position.
Travelling gear off.
Maintenance release switch off.
Pendulum frame must be horizontal.
Adjusting
During adjustments, components may
move around, in particular the lifting
gear – danger of injury!
The first adjustment procedure to be covered is number 3.
Adjusting procedure 3 "Upper height"
Calibration of the upper height of the lifting gear.
1
2
The lifting gear is raised in the adjusting procedure.
•
Keep the lifting gear raising (1) button and memory
button for lifting gear adjusting procedure (2)
pressed simultaneously for approx. 7 seconds.
After successful adjustment the message "EMR
adjusting procedure 3 OK" appears in the status line
of the Info centre.
BX500040
Adjusting procedure 2 "Front attachment weight"
Calibration of the lifting gear pressure.
•
Press the lifting gear button (1) until the front
attachment unit is not touching the ground at all.
The lifting gear does not need to be raised to calibrate
the lifting gear pressure. It does not move during
calibration.
•
1
2
Keep the memory button for lifting gear adjusting
procedure (2) pressed for approx. 7 seconds.
After successful adjustment the message "EMR
adjusting procedure 2 OK" appears in the status line
of the Info centre.
BX500041
VII - 29
Start-up
Adjusting procedure 1 "Lower height"
Calibration of the lower height of the lifting gear.
•
Keep the lifting gear lowering (1) button and memory
button for lifting gear adjusting procedure (2)
pressed simultaneously for approx. 7 seconds.
2
1
After successful adjustment the mess ge "EMR
adjusting procedure 1 OK" appears in the status line
of the Info centre.
BX500041
After the lifting gear has been
adjusted, the actual lifting gear
pressure must be verified
in
Field 1.
To do this:
Call the „Diagnostics“ main menu.
• Select menu 4-1-5 „Lifting gear“ with the rotary
potentiometer.
• Press the rotary potentiometer.
„Lifting gear diagnostics“ appears.
pressure
in Field 1.
The actual lifting gear pressure
II
IV
A
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
C
D
BX500093
in Field 1 must
have a negative value. If it does not, repeat
adjustment process 2.
VII - 30
2
I
III
Swivel the lifting gear up and down at least twice.
Leave the lifting gear in a floating position (no ground
contact) and read the value of the actual lifting gear
1
Start-up
7.5.6 Converting the grass channel grain
conditioner
4
1
Conversion kit
1
-
Grain conditioner
2
-
V-belts
3
-
Cable roller guide
4
-
Transport frame for grain conditioner
3
2
BX500200
Preparations
•
Open the flap (1) to the machine compartment on
the right hand side.
•
Pull the catch (3) up, and swivel the tool box (2)
open.
1
2
3
BX500014
•
Disassemble the cover (1).
1
BX500015
VII - 31
Start-up
•
Unlock the locks (2) of the maintenance flap (1)
under the discharge accelerator and remove the
maintenance flap (1).
2
1
2
BX200220
Safety Instructions for Cable Winch
•
Before placing the cable winch (1) in operation, read
the following safety instructions. Follow the
instructions during operation.
•
•
•
•
•
•
The cable winch (1) may only be
used for installation and removal of
the grass channel and grain
conditioner.
Careless operation of the cable
winch (1) can result in severe
injuries and damage to the machine.
When working with the cable winch,
always wear protective gloves.
Each time before using the cable
winch, check to make certain the
mounting bolts are securely seated
on the winch attachment plate.
Check the wire rope of the cable
winch and the connecting cable for
remote control for damage each time
before using and replace if
necessary (to replace the wire rope,
see Chapter 9 "Replacing the Wire
Rope").
Connect the remote control (2) (comes with
delivery, in the document case) to the connection
(3) of the cable winch (1).
2
1
3
BX500668
2
Method of Operation of Remote Control
To let out the rope from the cable winch:
•
Activate the button on the remote control in
direction <OUT>.
To wind rope onto the cable winch:
•
Activate the button on the remote control in
direction <IN>.
VII - 32
BX500655
Start-up
•
Loosen the screw connection (2) on either side of
the grass channel (1)
3
1
2
BX500669
•
Let out cable from the cable winch. The grass
channel (1) swivels down.
2
1
BX200240
Do not step under the suspended load!
•
Activate the button on the remote control in
direction <OUT> to let the rope out. The grass
channel (1) swivels down.
1
Always leave five revolutions on the
winch drum for safety.
•
Unhook the hook from the cable winch.
BX500250
VII - 33
Start-up
•
Position the cable roller guide (1) as shown in the
graphic BX200290 and screw in place with the
screw connection (2) on the lower cross brace of
the rear wall of the discharge accelerator.
•
Activate the button on the remote control in
direction <OUT> to let the rope (3) out and guide it
around the deflector rollers as shown in diagram
BX200290.
2
1
3
2
1
3
BX200290
•
Engage the cable winch hook on the grass channel
(1)
•
Raise the grass channel (1) with the cable winch
until the grass channel receiving hooks (2) are
above the receiving bolts on the transfer channel.
1
2
•
2
Raise the grass channel (1) with the cable winch by
activating the button on the remote control in
direction IN> until the receiving hooks (2) of the
grass channel are above the receiving bolts on the
transfer channel.
Avoid wrapping the steel cable on one
side of the drum.
1
BX500251
VII - 34
Start-up
Always leave five revolutions on the
winch drum for safety.
2
Do not step under the suspended
load!
•
Activate the button on the remote control in
direction <OUT> to let the rope (2) out until the grass
channel (1) is resting on the ground.
•
Unhook the cable winch hook and set the grass
channel (1) to the side.
1
BX500252
Assembling the grass channel
•
•
Install the grass channel in reverse order to the
removal procedure.
After the installation, the position of the grass
channel can be readjusted with the adjusting screw
(1).
1
BX500637
Mounting the grain conditioner
Check the wire rope of the cable
winch and the connecting cable for
remote control for damage each time
before using and replace if
necessary (to replace the wire rope,
see Chapter 9 "Replacing the Wire
Rope").
•
Measure the spacing of the grain conditioner for
calibration after installation (see Section 4.2.8).
•
Push the grain conditioner with the transport frame
(3) half way to the side under the forage harvester.
•
Guide the cable (2) from the cable winch behind the
hook of the grain conditioner (1), between the grain
conditioner and the transport frame (3) and back to
the front.
•
1
2
3
1
4
Catch the hook (4) of the cable winch in the pivoted
lever of the grain conditioner (1).
Lay the cable in no case over the
axle (3) of the drive.
3
2
BX200270
VII - 35
Start-up
•
Lead cable corresponding to the description in the
graphic round the guide roller.
•
Align the grain conditioner with the transport frame
(1) under the forage harvester so that the receiving
hook of the corn conditioner (2) is in front of the
suspending holding bolts on the forage harvester.
•
2
1
Put the V-belt (3) in place as shown in the diagram.
3
Do not step under the suspended
load!
•
Avoid wrapping the steel cable on one
side of the drum.
•
BX200280
Raise the grain conditioner with the cable winch by
activating the button on the remote control in
direction <IN> until the receiving hooks (1) of the
grain conditioner are above the receiving bolts (2)
on the transfer channel.
Push the grain conditioner forward and let out rope
by activating the button on the remote control in
direction <OUT>. Make certain as you do this that
both receiving (1) (left/right) in engage in the
receiving bolts (2).
VII - 36
1
2
BX200300
Start-up
Always leave five revolutions on the
winch drum for safety.
Do not step under the suspended
load!
•
Let out the cable (2) again and loosen it from the
hook (3) of the grain conditioner (1).
•
Remove the cable roller guide.
•
Lead cable corresponding to the description in the
graphic round the guide roller.
•
Swivel the grain conditioner (1) all the way up with
the cable winch by activating the button on the
remote control in direction <IN>.
3
1
2
BX500310
•
•
•
Screw the grain conditioner (1) on both sides of the
forage harvester frame with screw connection (2, 3, 4).
Remove the transport frame, loosen the hook and
activate the button on the remote control in direction
<IN>to wind in the cable winch completely.
4
2,3
1
Remove the remote control connection from the
cable winch. Then remove the remote control.
To protect against activation of the
remote control by unauthorised
persons, keep it in a secure location.
BX200320
•
Place the V-belt (1) on to the drive roller (2).
1
2
BX200330
VII - 37
Start-up
•
Connect the central lubrication plug (2) of the grain
conditioner onto the central lubrication coupling (1).
1
2
BX200340
•
Connect the connection line (1) of the control motor
for roller spacing on the grain conditioner to the
electrical system of the forage harvester (2).
1
2
After dismantling the grain
conditioner, place the protective caps
back on the connections.
BX200350
•
Install the cover (1).
1
BX500015
•
Close the toolbox (2) and the flap (1) for the
machine compartment on the right hand side.
1
2
BX500016
VII - 38
Start-up
•
Close and lock the maintenance flap (1).
•
Loosen the wing nuts (3) and remove the covering
plates (2) of the additional venting slots.
For further measures for optimising
the crop route, see Section 8.2.4.
2
2
1
3
2
2
BX500221
•
Open the shut-off valve for the grain conditioner
tensioning roller (1) (position II).
1
II
1
I
BX102000
VII - 39
Start-up
Refitting the pendulum frame cylinder
The compression spring (1) on the pendulum frame on
the right must be exchanged for the hydraulic cylinder
(2) for field operation with maize header.
•
Release the tension on the compression spring (1)
and remove it.
1
BX202010
•
Dismount the hydraulic cylinder (2).
2
BX202020
•
Connect the hydraulic cylinder of the pendulum
frame to the hydraulic connections (1, 2) according
to the colour-coded hydraulic plugs.
For further hydraulic adjustments of
the forage harvester for field operation
with maize header, see Section 7.5.4
1
2
BX500094
Perform the following refitting jobs and make these
settings:
•
Refitting the cutting blade - see Section 9.
•
Refitting the conveyor bars on the front baling
rollers - see Sect. 9.
•
Adjusting the maize header mode - see Sect. 4.
•
Adjusting the working width - see Sect. 4.
•
Adjusting the lifting gear - see Sect. 4.
VII - 40
Start-up
•
For changing between driving headlights on the
guardrail (1) and the lamp carrier (2) on the EC 753/
903/1053, use the switch (3) on the operating
console.
•
Grain conditioner – Adjusting the distance - see
Sect. 4.
•
Calibrate the pendulum frame and absolute lifting
gear height - see Sect. 4.
•
Mount the upper discharge chute extension (EC
7500/EC9000 only)
•
Adjust the rear wall of the discharge accelerator to a
gap dimension of 2-4 mm
•
Reset the shut-off valves to maize header mode
(see Sect. 7)
•
Place an allround light in the middle for maize
header EC7500 (see Sect. 6)
•
Adjust the tyres to the correct pressure
1
2
BX500647
3
BX500646
7.6 Trailer operation
The forage harvester is equipped as standard with a
hitch coupling (1).
Trailers without their own brakes are
not approved.
For trailers with supported load, make
certain the approved rear axle load is
not exceeded.
Attach trailers only to the intended
mechanism.
Observe the data of the operating
permission of the forage harvester.
Special care is required when
coupling a trailer!
1
2
3
-
2
1
3
BX500027
Hitch coupling
Power socket for lighting
Compressed air connection (optional)
In road traffic connect the lighting of the trailer to the
power socket (2) and check it for functioning.
VII - 41
Start-up
Druckluftanschluß
There is a risk of accident caused by
the use of defective compressed air
couplings.
Worn or damaged compressed air
couplings have a negative effect on
how the brakes work.
Make certain the couplings are
working properly and there are no
leaks. Replace defective rubber seals
immediately.
Replace the coupling heads regularly
depending on frequency of coupling,
but in any case once or twice a year.
Make certain all compressed air
connections are properly seated.
1
7.7 Registration plates
2
Set the front registration plate (3) in place by installing
the two support brackets (1) on the front skirt (2) of the
driver’s cab.
3
BX500042
To set the rear registration plates in place, use the
recess (1) on the tailgate designed for that purpose
1
BX500072
VII - 42
Start-up
7.8 Connecting an Additional Silage Agent Dosing Unit
BiG X 500 - 1000 offers the option of
connecting an additional silage agent
dosing unit.
When this unit is in operation, the
electronics controls the dosing unit
completely automatically.
2
The electrical connection (1) for the dosing unit is
located above the right front wheel under the platform
or in the right lamp carrier (2). It is a 3-pin plug
identified as XY60.
The matching connection cable (Material No. 303-558-1, length about 3 m) is
included with the machine.
1
Connection assignment of the cable
BX500653
BX500652
•
XY 60 contact 1:
•
•
XY60 contact 2:
XY60 contact 3:
+12 volts switched max. 15
amps through fuse 22-F74
Earth
+12 volts continuous voltage,
max. 15 amps through fuse 22F74
There is another connection plug
above the right front wheel identified
as XB60.
This plug is intended for an additional
sensor for silage agent.
For information on operating the silage agent
equipment, see Chapter 4 "Silage Fodder Addition"
VII - 43
Start-up
VII - 44
Operation
8
Operation
8.1 Road travel
The driving speed of the forage
harvester must to be adapted to local
conditions.
When driving on roads, the general
requirements or special conditions of
the Road Traffic Type Approval Law
(StVZO) and the Road Traffic Law
(StVO) must be observed.
8.1.1 Transport position
1
In road traffic, the upper discharge chute (1) and the
front attachment fitted must be in transport position.
•
Moving the front attachment (2) into the transport
position – cf. operating instructions of the front
attachment.
2
BX500073
Feed drive/front attachment in transport position
-
Engine is started.
Road/field release switch must be in the field mode
position.
•
•
Press the "Lower lifting gear" (1) push-button.
Press the "Lift lifting gear" (2) push-button.
1
2
The lifting gear is lowered or lifted. During the first
second of the actuation the lifting/lowering speed is
very slow, but subsequently it will increase in speed.
When the maize header is retracted, the lifting height is
limited to 60 % of the maximum lifting height; there is
no limitation when the grass pick-up has been fitted.
BX500043
If no control button is active, the position controller will
keep the lifting gear on the current lifting height.
A vibration absorber is permanently active in road
traffic. It is also active, if the push-button has not been
pressed after the diesel engine has been switched on.
VIII - 1
Operation
Swivelling the upper discharge chute into transport
position
Pre-requisites:
•
The driver’s seat must be occupied.
Engine is started.
Road/field release switch must be in the field mode
position.
Main coupling off.
1
Press the "Upper discharge chute in transport
position" (1) push-button.
BX500044
The upper discharge chute travels automatically into
the transport position.
•
•
Visually check the correct position of the upper
discharge chute (1) on the support (2).
If and when necessary, use the manual control to
move the upper discharge chute into the correct
position (cf. chapter on operating the upper
discharge chute).
1
2
BX100600
8.1.2 Prior to travel
•
Prior to travelling on traffic routes, please ensure
that the warning boards (1, 2) have been fitted and
are located on the outermost positions.
•
Check the brake and light functions.
1
1
BX500045
VIII - 2
Operation
•
Check whether the fire extinguisher (1) is in a readyto-use condition in the holder provided on the
machine roof.
1
Have the operational readiness of the
fire extinguisher checked annually, at
the latest every two years. The
manufacturing date or the date of the
final inspection of the fire extinguisher
shall be decisive. The testing intervals
may vary from country to country. In
this case, the instructions on the fire
extinguisher of the respective
countries shall be applicable.
BX100450
Two wheel chocks have to be ready to hand at all
times.
•
Check whether the wheel chocks (1) are in a readyto-use condition in the holder provided on the left
side of the machine.
1
BX200531
8.1.3 Travel
II
1
When travelling on roads, the road/field
release switch (1) has to be set to
position I.
This ensures that only the travelling
gear, the steering mechanism and the
brakes are active.
For more information on road travel, please refer to
chapter titled "Initial operation – road travel".
I
BX100042
VIII - 3
Operation
8.2 Field operation
For special instructions on the use of the respective
front attachment fitted, please refer to the operating
instructions of the front attachment.
Please refer to the chapter titled "Info Centre" for
settings, such as mode of operation, working width,
front attachment/feed drive, silage attachment, lifting
gear, grain conditioner and customer data.
For information on drive operation, please refer to the
chapter titled "Initial operation – drive operation".
Pre-requisites for field operation
-
The engine is started.
The road/field release switch (1) must be in field
operation position.
The maintenance release switch (2) must be set to
off.
1
2
BX500028
8.2.1 Lifting gear
Please refer to the chapter titled "Info Centre –
Settings Lifting Gear" for settings of the lifting gear
control and setpoint pressure or height.
Activating the lifting gear position control
When the lifting gear position control is active, the
control sets the height constant relative to the
machine.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pre-requisites:
A
-
The Info Centre is used to set the lifting gear
position control; the
icon along with the
setpoint height in cm is displayed.
-
The lifting gear position control is currently inactive.
The lifting gear position control is currently inactive.
VIII - 4
B
C
D
BX500008
Operation
•
•
Press the "Lower lifting gear" (1) push-button.
Press the "Lift lifting gear" (2) push-button.
The lifting gear is lowered or lifted. During the first
second of the actuation the lifting/lowering speed is very
slow, but subsequently it will increase in speed.
3
1
2
When the keys (1 or 2) are released, the current lifting
height is measured and kept constant relative to the
machine by the lifting gear position control until the lifting
gear height is manually overdriven.
Modifying and saving the setpoint height at the multifunction lever
• Use the "Lift lifting gear" (2) or "Lower lifting gear" (1)
push-buttons to move the unit to the new setpoint
height.
• Keep the "Automatic adapting to ground contours" (3)
push-button pressed for about 3 seconds.
BX500046
The new setpoint height is saved and a corresponding
information message will appear in the display of the Info
Centre.
Activating the setpoint height adjusted
• Press the "Automatic adapting to ground contours" (3)
push-button.
The lifting gear is lifted or lowered to the setpoint height
set. The
icon is used in the Info Centre to display
the setpoint height set in cm. The lifting gear position
control is active.
Deactivating the lifting gear position control
The lifting gear position control will be deactivated in
case of:
- Fault detection
- Manual control of the lifting gear with keys (1) and (2).
Deactivating the lifting gear position control
The lifting gear position control will be deactivated in
case of:
• Fault detection
• Manual control of the lifting gear with keys (1)and(2)
4
1
2
Setting and saving the lifting height for the headland
•
•
Use the "Lift lifting gear" (2) or "Lower lifting gear" (1)
push-buttons to move the unit to the lifting height.
Keep the "Lift lifting gear to top" (4) push-button
pressed for approx. 3 seconds.
BX500047
The new lifting height is saved and a corresponding
information message will appear in the display of the Info
Centre.
Change the lifting height by new setting and saving.
Lifting the lifting gear right up – headland setting
By pressing the "Lift lifting gear to top" (4) push-button,
the lifting gear is lifted to the saved value (headland
setting).
•
Press the "Lift lifting gear to top" (4) push-button.
The lifting gear is lifted to the lifting height set.
VIII - 5
Operation
Activating the lifting gear top pressure control
When the lifting gear top pressure control is active, the
control sets the pressure of the lifting gear on the
ground to a constant value.
The control is activated as follows: activate the
setpoint pressure; use the multi-function lever to
change the setpoint pressure; the saving process
corresponds to the procedure used in the lifting gear
position control.
A
B
Lifting and lowering the lifting gear in case of
lifting gear top pressure control
•
Use the "Lift lifting gear" (2) or "Lower lifting gear"
(1) push-buttons to move the unit.
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BX500011
3
1
2
After the key is released (1 or 2), a position controller
will keep the lifting gear at a constant lifting height. In
order to activate the lifting gear top pressure control
press the "Automatic adapting to ground contours" (3)
push-button.
•
Press the "Automatic adapting to ground contours"
(3) push-button.
BX500046
The lifting gear is lowered to the ground and is
automatically set to the lifting gear top pressure
control.
Activating the lifting gear spacing control (optional)
The lifting gear spacing control can be activated only if
spacing sensor have been fitted on the maize header.
When the lifting gear spacing control is active, the
control sets the height constant relative to the
machine.
The control is activated as follows: activate the
setpoint height; use the multi-function lever to change
the setpoint height; the saving process corresponds to
the procedure used in the lifting gear position control.
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500141
VIII - 6
Operation
8.2.2 Feed drive/front attachment
3
For setting the setpoint speed of the feed drive and the
cutting length, please refer to the chapter titled "Info
Centre settings – feed drive/front attachment".
Switching the feed drive/front attachment on
•
•
2
The driver’s seat must be occupied.
The engine is started.
The road/field release switch (1) must be in field
operation position.
The maintenance release switch (2) must be set to off.
The feed drive/front attachment release switch (4)
must be set to on.
Switch on the main coupling (3).
Press the "Reverse feed drive/front attachment"
button (2) briefly.
Press the "Feed drive/front attachment on – off" (1)
push-button.
4
1
In order to be able to switch on the feed drive/front
attachment, the following conditions must be met:
BX500029
2
1
The front attachment units and the feed drive rollers are
switched on.
When the feed drive/front attachment is
switched on for the first time, the infeed
rollers and the front attachment will
reverse for a short time to remove any
potential soiling.
BX500048
Switching the feed drive/front attachment off
•
Press the "Feed drive/front attachment on – off"
push-button (1) again.
The front attachment units and the feed drive rollers are
switched off.
Reversing the feed drive/front attachment
When clogged and when faults are released by the
metal detectors, the feed drive/front attachment can be
reversed. If the (1) key is used, the travelling gear
release switch must be off.
•
1
Press the "Reverse feed drive/front attachment"
key (2) on the multifunction lever and hold it down
or press the manual mode key (1) on the platform.
The front attachment units and the drive feed rollers
will reverse for as long as the "Reversing the feed
drive/front attachment" (2/1) push-button is pressed.
The "Reversing the feed drive/front attachment" (2) pushbutton can be pressed also, even if the feed drive/front
attachment is switched on.
Subsequently the feed drive/front attachment must be
switched on again.
1
BX500030
Metal detection
When metal is detected, the feed drive/front
attachment stops instantaneously.
• Acknowledge the fault message.
• Permit the feed drive/front attachment to reverse.
• Stop the machine. Remove the metal.
VIII - 7
Operation
8.2.3 Cutting length and upper discharge
chute
1
Two cutter lengths can be saved and brought up on the
multifunction lever.
The shape and swivelling range of the upper discharge
chute (1) have been designed in such a way that
operation is possible with towing trailer as well as with
forage trailers to the left and right.
The operation is controlled by the multi-function lever.
The ejector flap can also be set hydraulically.
BX500050
2
J
H
G
K
4
L
M
1
3
6
5
BX500003
1
-
Rotate discharge chute left
2
-
Rotate discharge chute right
3
-
Ejector flap down
4
-
5
6
G
-
Bring up cutting length value 1
If the button 6 is pressed and is past the
action point, the cutting length is saved in the
Info Centre (value 1)
Ejector flap up
H
-
Central position
-
Mirror upper discharge chute (with main
coupling switched on)
J
-
-
Upper discharge chute in transport position
(with main coupling switched off)
Bring up cutting length value 2
If the 6 button is pressed and is past the
action point, the cutting length is saved in the
Info Centre (value 2)
-
Save the cutting length
K
-
Lower upper discharge chute
L
-
Central position
M
-
Lift upper discharge chute
VIII - 8
Operation
8.2.4 Tips for optimising crop flow
1. How attachment speed depends on cutting length
Long cutting lengths require a higher speed for the front
attachment. If the speed is too low, the feed drive
rollers will pull the crop in in clumps from the front
attachment and the crop flow will separate off.
Short cutting lengths require a slower speed for the
front attachment. If the speed is too high, the paddles
of the grass pick-up will move the crop too far forward
and there may be jams in the maize header.
Reduce the driving speed for the maize header if
necessary.
Basic setting:
•
•
Grass
maize
Attachment speed 500 RPM at 10 mm
cutting length
Attachment speed 600 RPM at 18 mm
cutting length
Attachment speed 450 RPM at 6 mm
cutting length
Attachment speed 550 RPM at 10 mm
cutting length
B
A
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500006
2. Discharge capacity of the machine
1
The cutting drum determines mainly the discharge
capacity of the machine.
Depending on how far the cutter (1) extends beyond the
blade carrier (3) there will be correspondingly more or
less wind = discharge output.
Grinding off the cutters as well as dirt under the blades
reduces the volume for which the discharge capacity is
responsible.
3
Sharp tools – risk of injury!
Always wear gloves when working
with the blade drum.
•
•
Move the cutter (1) to its greatest possible
overhang. The max. overhang is about
82 mm (2).
Readjust the cutting blade frequently (refer to the
section on Maintenance – Adjusting or replacing
the cutting blade).
1
2
Keep the open area under the cutter (1) and blade
carrier (3) clean.
BX200490
VIII - 9
Operation
Base sheet setting
5
Another way to improve the discharge capacity is to
fine-tune the setting of the base plate (1).
The base plate is factory-set. The condition of the crop
(e.g. dry crop) can require a re-setting of the base
plate. The base plate is set with spindles (2,3).
2
5
4
In addition:
• Loosen screws (4)
• Loosen counternuts (5) on spindles (2,3)
• Set base plate (1) by lengthening or shortening the
spindle length.
- For spindle 2, adjust the gap in front between the
ground and the blade to approximately 1 mm.
- For spindle 3, adjust the gap in the rear between
the ground and the blade to approximately
4 mm.
3
4
1
BX500070
1
The blades must be visibly set above
the belt drive.
•
•
Fasten counternuts (5)
Fasten screws (4)
Optimising the distance between the discharge
scoop and the rear wall
BX500742
Reducing or increasing the distance (a) between the
discharge scoops (2) and the rear wall (1) may improve
or reduce the discharge capacity depending on the
crop.
Basic factory setting:
•
grass
4 - 5 mm
•
maize
2 - 4 mm
Setting the distance between the discharge scoop and
the rear wall
Make the setting while switching from
grass channel to grain conditioner.
•
•
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage
harvester against being placed in operation
unexpectedly or rolling away.
Wait until all units have come to a standstill.
2
a
Measure the distance "a" between the rear wall (1)
and the discharge scoop (2).
1
BX500500
VIII - 10
Operation
•
•
Loosen the screws (2) on either side and adjust the
discharge accelerator rear wall (1) to the desired
distance using a suitable tool as a lever (for
example a screw driver).
The setting must be made evenly.
Check to make certain dimensions "a" and "b" are
parallel left and right.
1
2
Tighten the screws (2).
a
b
BX500510
Adjusting the additional venting slots of the
discharge accelerator
Additional air can be supplied to the crop flow through
the two additional venting slots next to the rear wall of
the discharge accelerator.
Basic factory setting:
•
grass
maize
1
2
completely closed
Max. 25 % open left and right. (When the additional air
slots are wide open, too much air is directed against
the flow of air in the cutting drum and the discharge
output is reduced.)
•
1
BX500520
completely open
(no air comes up through the grain conditioner to the
discharge accelerator for maize)
Opening the additional venting slots
•
Loosen the wing nuts (2), pull the covering sheets
(1) up to the desired position or remove completely.
•
Tighten the wing nuts (2).
VIII - 11
Operation
8.2.5 Grinding the cutting blade
Sharp tools - risk of injury!
Always wear gloves when working
with the blade drum.
Dull cutting blades (1) and too great a
distance between the cutting blades (1)
and the counterblade (2) will result in
an unnecessarily high requirement of
force, poor chop quality and high wear
and tear on the cutting elements.
Sharpening does not do any good
unless the counterblade is readjusted
as well.
The maize cutters sharpen themselves
very effectively, so there is no need to
"sharpen them till they shine" at every
grinding interval.
Short grinding intervals with a brief
grinding duration combined with
readjusting the counterblades work
better than long grinding intervals with
long grinding times.
1
2
BX101241
Checking and cleaning the grinding stone and
grinding channel
Before the cutting blades are ground,
the automatic readjustment of the
grinding stone must be checked and
all dirt and residue must be removed
from the grinding channel.
A build-up of dust, grass and chaff in
the grinding channel is combustible
and poses an increased fire hazard. In
addition, the accumulation prevents
the grinding stone from working as
effectively as possible.
•
1
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage
harvester from being placed in operation or rolling
away unintentionally.
Before opening the covering hood (1)
the blade drum must come to a
complete stop.
•
Open the covering hood (1) of the grinding
mechanism (2).
•
Clear out dirt and residue in the grinding channel
(for example blow it out using compressed air)
•
The visible length of threading on the grinding
mechanism (dimension "a") must be at least 5 mm.
If dimension "a" is less than 5 mm, the grinding
stone must be readjusted or replaced (refer to
section on Maintenance – Adjusting or replacing
the grinding stone).
•
Close the covering hood (1) of the grinding
mechanism (2).
VIII - 12
2
a
BX501360
Operation
The "Grind cutting blade" process can
only be performed with the engine
turned on and the blade drum
running.
Because of the nature of the process,
not all moving parts of the blade drum
and drive can be completely covered,
especially during the grinding
process.
Especially after opening the grinding
flap, there is danger of touching sharp
or rapidly rotating parts of the blade
drum and drum drive.
Since the blade drum and following
parts assigned to it may take longer to
coast down to a stop, after switching
off, do not open or remove any
protective devices until the blade
drum has come to a complete stop.
Observe the warning signal!
The forage harvester is equipped with
an acoustic signalling device that
continues to emit a warning signal
after the main coupling (drum drive) is
switched off as long as the blade
drum is turning.
To prevent serious injuries, all
protective devices and maintenance
openings must be closed during the
grinding process.
In addition, there must be no one in
the area of the blade drum. Do not
reach into this area!
The audio coast-down alarm, which is
sounded after the main coupling is
switched off, does not relieve the
operator of the obligation to make
certain the machine is at an absolute
standstill before working on it.
Operators should be inside the cab on
the driver’s seat or at the front left
side next to the machine in the
manual operation area on the platform
while the grinding process is taking
place!
To reduce the amount of time it takes
the blade drum to coast down, cut the
engine speed to lower idle before
switching off the main coupling.
Activation of manual operation on the platform
•
The forage harvester has been secured against
rolling away with wheel chocks
•
Engine started and running at idle
•
Release switch for travelling gear (2) in the "Off"
position
•
Release switch for parking brake (3) in the
"Applied" position.
•
The road/field release switch (1) must be in "field
operation" position.
•
Front attachment unit lowered to the ground. Main
coupling (5) switched on.
•
Release switch - maintenance (4) in the "On"
position.
F3 Maintenance main menu appears in the Info
centre display.
•
Adjust the idle speed to 1100 rpms with the full
number of blades or to 1300 rpms with half the
number.
5
1
3
4
2
BX500051
VIII - 13
Operation
Adjusting the numbers of grinding circles
(Factory setting 20)
see Info-Center Menu 3-1 „Adjusting the numbers of
grinding circles“
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500173
Grinding operation
•
4
5
3
1
Activate the "Open grinding flap" key (1)
The grinding flap opens.
•
Activate the "Automatic grinding operation" key (2).
The number of grinding cycles that was set is
performed. After the end of the grinding process, the
grinding stone moves to its parking position (the right
side of the grinding mechanism).
•
Activate the "Close grinding flap" key (3).
The grinding flap closes.
Blocking the counterblade
Once the grinding process is complete, the counterblade must be blocked while the blade drum is running.
•
Press the "Move counterblade right to blade drum"
key (4) and then the "Move counterblade left to the
blade drum" key (5), holding each one down for
about 1 second.
•
If there is a noise when you are adjusting one of
the sides (right/left) (cutter hitting up against the
counter blade!) let go of the key immediately and
press the appropriate key "Move counterblade
away from blade drum" (4a or 5a) for about 1
second.
•
Block the counterblade on the other side using the
same procedure.
After you have blocked the counterblade, the blade drum must run
without making any noise.
If there is no noise while the counterblade is being
blocked, the cutters must be readjusted, or else worn
cutters and cutters that can no longer be used must be
replaced (refer to section on Maintenance - Adjusting
or replacing cutters)
VIII - 14
4a
5a
2
BX500052
Operation
8.2.6 Measuring the humidity of the crop
with the humidity-measuring device
Switching ON
By activating the ON/OFF key (2), the humiditymeasuring device will be turned on or off. When
switching on, all information and the display will be
shown for approximately 3 seconds.
Selecting the crop
With regards to the crop, it is possible to select
between „Alfalfa“ and „Maize“.
• The setting Alfalfa is used for the harvesting of
grass, grain and Lucerne.
• The setting Maize is used for the harvesting of
sorghum and maize.
• Press the SELECT key (4) to select the desired
setting.
The selected crop is indicated by the illumination of the
respective LED (5).
6
1
5
2
3
4
BX500603
After the activation of the SELECT key
(4), it takes approximately 5 seconds
for the display (5) to change between
the types of crop.
If the setting of the crop is changed,
the average load value will be reset.
Starting the measuring
After the selection of the crop, the
measuring of the humidity is started
via light beam sensors.
•
•
The current humidity value of the crop will appear
on the display (1) of the control unit.
The illumination of a red LED in the lower right
corner of the display indicates that the recorded
values will be included in the two following average
values.
1. Average load value:
The average load value is the average value of the
currently measured humidity. Via this value, it is
possible, for instance, to display the average value of
an individual trailer.
After pressing the AVERAGE key (3), the average load
value will be reset.
2. Average field value:
All recorded humidity values will be included in the
average field value. This allows the display of the
average daily value or the average field value.
After pressing the AVERAGE key (3) and the SELECT
key (4), the average field value will be reset.
VIII - 15
Operation
Displaying the average load values
•
•
•
•
•
Press the AVERAGE key (3).
On the display (1) of the control unit, the LA will
appear for approximately two seconds.
LA is followed by a numerical value. (Example 68)
This is the average load value in percent. (68%)
The value disappears automatically and the
following appears on the display ( — ). This means
that the average value will be reset.
Then, new values will be recorded.
6
1
5
Displaying the average field values
•
•
•
•
•
Hold down the AVERAGE key (3).
On the display (1) of the control unit, the FA will
appear for approximately two seconds.
FA is followed by a numerical value. (Example 68)
This is average field value in percent. (68%)
As soon as the key is released, the value
disappears and the measuring will continue.
By pressing the AVERAGE key (3) and the
SELECT key (4) simultaneously, the average field
value will be reset.
VIII - 16
2
3
4
BX500603
Operation
8.3 Blowing device on the feed
attachment
Right-hand side
1
The blowing device (1) cleans areas around the feed
drive on the feed attachment (2) and grinding device
(3).
This increases functional safety.
8.3.1 Adjusting blowing times
In menu 1-1 „Parameters“ (driver’s level), in submenu
1-1-15 „Work“
2
, you can set parameter 33651
(cycle time) and parameter 33652 (duty cycle) for the
blowing device (for additional information see Chap. 4):
Recommended settings:
•
•
BX500711
Left-hand side
Parameter 33651 (cycle time) = 30 s.
Parameter 33652 (duty cycle) = 3 s.
1
When the duty cycle is set to the same
value as the cycle time, the valve is
switched on continuously!
2
8.3.2 Performing a functional test and
monitoring set times
Switching conditions:
•
•
•
Diesel engine running (to generate compressed air).
Road/field release switch on the operating panel
must be switched on.
Quick stop switch must not be activated.
BX500712
Grinding device
3
1
BX500713
VIII - 17
Operation
VIII - 18
Maintenance
9
Maintenance
9.1 Special safety instructions
Repair, maintenance and cleaning
tasks must only be performed while
the engine is stopped!
Remove the ignition key and secure
the forage harvester from being placed
in operation or rolling away
unintentionally.
The audio coastdown alarm, which is
sounded after the main drive is
switched off, does not relieve the
operator of the obligation to make
certain the machine is at an absolute
standstill before working on it.
Only perform tasks on the hydraulic
system when all excess pressure has
been released.
Liquid escaping under high pressure
can penetrate through the skin and
cause severe injuries! In the event of
injuries, find a physician immediately.
There is danger of infection.
After all repair, maintenance and
cleaning tasks are complete, all
protective coverings and safety devices
must be put in place again.
9.2 General Aspects
•
For repair, maintenance and cleaning
jobs on a folded down or raised front
attachment always secure it with
suitable supporting pieces and close
the shut-off valve (page IX - 7)!
Test nuts and screws regularly (about every 50
hours) for firm seat and tighten them according to
the tightening torque tables if necessary! Deviating
tightening torques are indicated separately in the
text.
Self-locking nuts must always be
replaced.
A = thread size
(stability class can be seen on the head of the screw).
6.8
2,2
4,5
7,6
18
37
64
100
160
8.8 10.9 12.9
M A (Nm)
4,4
3,0
5,1
8,7
5,9
10
15
10
18
36
25
43
72
49
84
125
85
145
135 200 235
145 215 255
210 310 365
225 330 390
425 610 710
730 1050 1220
800
1100
1150
1450
1150
1550
1650
2100
A
8.8
0.
1
5.6
A
O
/
M4
M5
M6
M8
M 10
29
M 12
42
M 14
M 14x1,5
M 16
M 16x1,5
M 20
M 24
M 24x1,5 350
M 24x2
M 27
M 27x2
M 30
9
Tightening torque MA
BP380-7-073
1350
1800
1950
2450
IX - 1
Maintenance
For all maintenance tasks:
•
•
•
1
3
The road/field release switch (1) must be in "field
operation" position.
Release switch for travelling gear (2) in the "Off"
position.
Release switch for the holding brake (3) in the
"Applied" position.
9.3 Maintenance of the supply
system
9.3.1 Detaching the feed drive housing
2
BX500053
You can detach the feed drive housing with the front
attachment connected. The maize header must be
folded down as you do this.
You should attach and detach the feed
drive housing on a level surface with a
sub-surface capable of bearing the
load.
There must be sufficient space
available for laying out the forage
harvester.
•
•
1
Set down the feed drive housing (1) with the front
attachment on the ground.
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage
harvester from being placed in operation or rolling
away unintentionally.
BX500074
1
2
1
Front attachment connection lines
Left-hand side of the machine
Prior to disconnecting the hydraulic hoses,
depressurise the system on both sides.
To do this:
•
•
Press the keys (1) and (2) (red) simultaneously (the
first hydraulic circuit is depressurised).
Press the keys (3) and (4) (blue) simultaneously
(the second hydraulic circuit is depressurised).
3
4
BX500610
1
•
•
Disconnect the hydraulic lines (1) at the hydraulic
couplings and close off with dust caps (2).
Disconnect the lighting cable and connection line for
the sensors (maize header front attachment).
2
BX200961
IX - 2
Maintenance
Front attachment for PTO shaft
Left-hand side of the machine
•
Completely dismount the PTO shaft (3) for the front
attachment drive.
3
BX500970
Feed drive PTO shaft
Left-hand side of the machine
•
Completely dismount the PTO shaft (1) for the feed
drive.
1
BX100980
Connection of metal detection sensor and pendulum
frame
right-hand side of the machine
•
Remove the connection cable plug (1, 2) for the
metal detection plug and pendulum frame.
1
2
BX100990
Connection line for central lubrication
right-hand side of the machine
•
Loosen the connection line to the lubricant
distributor (1).
1
BX101000
IX - 3
Maintenance
Coupling rods
Right and left side of the machine
•
•
Loosen the hinged cotter pin (2) and dismount the
bolts (3).
Lift the coupling rod (1) out of the bearing and rotate
it downward.
1
3
2
BX201020
Interlocking claws up
Right and left side of the machine
•
•
Loosen the counter nut (2) and turn back the
hexagonal screw (3).
Swivel open the interlocking claws (1).
3
2
1
BX101030
IX - 4
Maintenance
Support base
•
•
Raise the lifting gear until the distance between the
feed drive housing and the cutter drum housing is
about 200 mm (see Section 9.3.4 Folding down the
feed drive housing).
Disassemble the locking bolts (2) of the support
base (1), pull out the support base (1) to the ground
and secure in place with locking bolts (2).
1
2
2
1
BX201051
Interlocking down
Left side of the machine
•
1
Screw out the hexagonal screw (2) and swivel the
interlocking (1) back.
2
1
BX501070
IX - 5
Maintenance
•
•
•
•
Rotate the three-way valve to operating
position III = maize header (see Section 9.3.4).
Remove the wheel chocks on the forage harvester.
Raise the lifting gear until the receiving claws (1) of
the lifting mechanism are free under the receiving
mechanism (2) of the feed drive housing.
Carefully move the forage harvester back.
2
1
BX101090
9.3.2 Attaching the feed drive housing
•
Move the forage harvester onto the feed drive
housing and lower the lifting mechanism until the
receiving claws (1) of the lifting gear are parallel to
the receiving mechanism (2) and are resting under
the receiving mechanism (2) of the feed drive
housing.
The procedure for attaching the feed drive housing is in
the opposite order to detaching it.
1
2
BX101100
IX - 6
Maintenance
9.3.3 Fold down the feed drive housing
The feed drive housing (1) can be folded down for
maintenance tasks (such as checking the sharpness of
the blade, the condition of the counterblade and
scraper).
1
Perform the following dismounting steps (for specific
details see the section on Maintenance - Detaching the
feed drive housing):
•
Front attachment connection lines
Connection of metal detector sensor/pendulum
frame
Connection line for central lubrication
Coupling rods
Interlocking claws up
Close the shut-off valve and three-way valve.
(refer to Section 9.3.4 on Maintenance jobs on the
lifting gear while it is folded down or raised).
The procedure for closing the feed drive housing is in
the opposite order to folding it down.
BX101700
9.3.4 Maintenance jobs on the lifting gear
while it is folded down or raised
The shut-off valve (1) and the threeway valve (2) must be in position II
(closed) for all maintenance tasks on
the lifting gear when it is folded down
and raised.
Open the tool box and make the
changeover from behind.
2
1
Shut-off valve (1)
Operating position - position I = open
Maintenance jobs - position II = closed
Three-way valve (2)
Operating position - position I = grass pick-up
Maintenance jobs - position II = closed
Operating position - position III = maize header
•
•
•
Close the shut-off valve (1) and three-way valve (2)
before performing maintenance tasks on the lifting
gear when it is raised (position II).
Open the shut-off valve (1) after completing
maintenance tasks on the raised lifting gear
(position I).
Rotate the three-way valve (2) back to the
appropriate operating mode after the maintenance
work on the raised lifting gear is complete.
I
III
II
I
II
BX500962
IX - 7
Maintenance
9.3.5 Adjusting or replacing the
grindstone
The grindstone must be adjusted if there will be no
more automatic adjustment during the grinding
process.
The grindstone can be adjusted approximately twice.
After that the grindstone must be replaced.
•
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage
harvester from being placed in operation or rolling
away unintentionally.
Before opening the covering hood (1)
the blade drum must come to a
complete stop.
•
Open the covering hood (1) of the grinding
mechanism (2).
•
Clear out dirt and residue in the grinding channel
(for example blow it out using compressed air).
•
The visible length of threading on the grinding
mechanism (dimension "a") must be at least 5 mm.
If dimension "a" is less than 5 mm, the grinding
stone must be adjusted or replaced.
•
1
2
a
BX501360
Determine the distance "a" from the lower edge of
the grindstone (1) to the upper edge of the grinding
housing.
1
a
BX101391
•
•
Loosen the catch lock (1).
Turn back the catch wheel (2) with an SW30 open
face wrench.
1
2
BX101370
IX - 8
Maintenance
•
•
•
Allow the locking bolt (1) to lock into place in the
lower area by turning it 90°.
Turn the catch wheel further back until the locking
bolt (1) has completely engaged and the grindstone
adjustment is locked in place.
Loosen the grindstone clamp by turning the catch
wheel further.
1
1
BX101390
•
Measure the distance "z" from the upper edge of
the grindstone to the upper edge of the hexagonal
nut on the catch wheel (1).
1
z
After the grindstone is adjusted the
dimension must be "z < 100 mm".
Otherwise replace the grindstone.
•
•
•
•
•
To replace the grindstone, push the old grindstone
down and out, completely unscrew the catch wheel
(1) and place the new grindstone on from above.
Then screw on the catch wheel.
Push the grindstone down through the drill hole
(d > 30 mm) in the catch wheel (1).
BX101371
Adjust the grindstone to the previously determined
dimension "a - 0.5 mm".
Tighten the grindstone clamping with the torque
wrench.
Tightening torque 170 Nm.
Unscrew the locking bolt (2), rotate it 90° and lock it
in this position.
2
1
a-0,5 mm
BX101392
•
Fasten the catch lock (1).
•
Close the grinding mechanism flap protection.
1
BX101372
IX - 9
Maintenance
9.3.6 Adjusting or replacing the cutting
blade
If the adjustment capabilities of the counterblade are
no longer sufficient, the cutting blade must be
readjusted.
Worn cutting blades and cutting blades that cannot be
adjusted any further must be replaced.
To avoid imbalances in the cutting
drum, cutting blades must always be
replaced in pairs. The two cutters that
go together are offset by 180° to each
other on the cutting drum (for example
blade 1 and blade 7, blade 1 and blade
5, blade 1 and blade 10).
•
•
•
Detach or fold down the feed drive housing.
Move the counterblade (1) away from the blade
drum on both sides, using manual operation on the
platform (see the section Maintenance - Grinding
cutting blades).
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage
harvester from being placed in operation or rolling
away unintentionally.
1
BX101240
Since the discharge capacity of the machine depends
primarily on the distance between the cutter (1) and the
blade carrier, readjust the cutter to the max. overhang
of about 82 mm.
As you do so, move the counterblade away parallel to
the body of the cutting drum.
The measured dimension (2) must be the same on the
left and right.
Readjusting the cutting blade
1
2
BX201251
Turning the blade drum
When working on the blade drum,
wear gloves.
Do not turn the blade drum directly.
Danger of injury!
•
1
Turn the blade drum (1) by turning the pulley (2)
clockwise.
2
BX101250
IX - 10
Maintenance
Fixing the blade drum in place
The locking mechanism is located on the right-hand
side of the machine.
1
Lock the blade drum in place for all
jobs on the blade drum.
•
Rotate the blade drum (3) to the desired working
position, push the fastening bolts (2) into the drill
hole of the blade drum (3) and secure it in position
by turning the fastening bolt (1) with the clamping
sleeve (1).
1
2
3
BX201261
Adjusting the cutting blade
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unscrew all hexagonal screws (2).
Adjust the cutter (1) evenly to the counterblade (3)
and check on both sides with the sensor gauge (4).
Tighten all hexagonal screws (2) with the torque
wrench
(tightening torque min. 270 Nm).
Loosen the blade drum locking, turn the blade drum
one blade row further and lock it in place again.
Adjust the next blade row.
Continue in this manner until all blade rows of the
blade drum are adjusted evenly.
Loosen the locking of the blade drum.
2
1
3
Adjust the grindstone so that the dimension "a = 20
mm" (20 mm = basic setting of the grindstone).
See the section entitled Maintenance - Adjusting or
replacing the grindstone.
4
1
Attach the feed drive housing and fold it in.
Grind the cutting blade.
Adjust the counterblade.
3
BX101280
IX - 11
Maintenance
Replace the cutting blade
2
To avoid imbalances in the cutting
drum, cutting blades must always be
replaced in pairs. Two cutters that are
on the cutting drum offset from each
other by 180° (for example blade 1 and
blade 7, blade 1 and blade 5, blade 1
and blade 10).
The blade drum must always be fitted
with the same blades. Note the item
number on the replacement blades
(see also the spare parts list)!
Do not mount the new cutters on the
blade holding surfaces and pressure
plates until they are cleaned
•
•
•
•
•
Unscrew the three hexagonal screws (3).
Unscrew the two outer hexagonal screws (2).
Remove the cutting blade (1) towards the front.
Clean the blade holding surface and pressure plate
and set a new cutting blade in place.
The remaining procedure is as described under the
section on adjusting the cutting blade.
3
2
1
1
BX101281
9.3.7 Working with half the number of
cutting blades
The feed drive speed and number of cutting blades
determine the cutting length.
If the cutting length is still too short because of the
speed adjustment for the feed drive rollers, the number
of cutting blades can be reduced to half.
•
For use with half the number of cutting blades on
the two sides of the cutting drum, remove every
other blade. In place of the cutters that have been
removed, blind cutters included with delivery should
be mounted to protect the blade carriers.
The tightening torque of the hexagonal headed
screws is min. 270 Nm.
•
Set the appropriate number of blades in the Info
Centre (see Info-Center chapter 4.6.2.4 „Setting
the number of blades“).
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
BX500022
IX - 12
Maintenance
9.3.8 Turning or replacing the counterblade
The counterblade should not be
turned or replaced until the
satisfactory cutting quality can no
longer be achieved even with the
cutting gap correctly adjusted and
with the blades intact.
The counterblade must not be
mounted until the holding surface is
cleaned. The holding surface must be
flat. If necessary rework it or replace it
to ensure that it is.
When turning the counterblade, clean
the underside of the counterblade.
1
1b
1a
BX501341
Both sides of the counterblade (1) can be used. If one
or both sides (1a, 1b) of the counterblade (1) are worn,
the counterblade must be turned or replaced.
•
•
•
Disconnect the feed drive housing.
Move the counterblade (1) away from the blade
drum on both sides, using manual operation on the
platform (Refer to the section on Operation –
grinding the cutting blade).
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage
harvester from being placed in operation or rolling
away unintentionally.
1
2,3
2,3
2,3,4 425Nm
425Nm
•
•
Replace the self-locking nuts (2) and remove the
washers.
Remove the attachment bolts (4).
Dismount the holder (5) on one side by loosening
the counter nuts (6) and unscrewing the screws (7).
Remove the counterblade (1) from the other support
on the side first.
Rotate the support (5) back.
Pull the counterblade to the side out of the second
support.
Clean the holding surface and underside of the
counterblade.
Turn or replace the counterblade.
•
Installation is in the reverse order to removal.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use only new self-locking nuts.
•
•
210Nm
BX201341
6,7
1
5
4
1
Attach the feed drive housing.
Adjust the counterblade. (Refer to the section on
Operation – grinding the cutting blade).
BX201351
IX - 13
Maintenance
9.3.9 Conveyor bars of the front baling
roller
The front baling roller (1) is equipped with conveyor
bars that can be used on alternating sides.
One of the sides of the conveyor bar is smooth, while
the other is designed with teeth.
1
Experience shows that the smooth side works well for
use in grass silage while the toothed side works well
with maize.
Turning the conveyor bars around
•
•
•
•
Disconnect the front attachment.
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage
harvester from being placed in operation or rolling
away unintentionally.
Unscrew the fastening screws (3) on the conveyor
bar (2).
Turn the conveyor bar (2) around and mount it.
(Tightening torque 35 Nm)
2
3
Because of metal detection, only
fastening materials made of antimagnetic steel can be used.
The screws should not be tightened
with an impact wrench (magnetising
effect).
BX100940
9.3.10 Adjusting the scraper - smooth
roller
The adjustment should be made when the feed drive
housing is folded down or disconnected.
2
The scraper should be adjusted as gap-free as possible
over the entire width of the smooth roller.
Distance from scraper to smooth roller = 0 - 0.3 mm.
Adjust the scraper so that in is not
exerting any pressure on the smooth
roller.
Otherwise the scraper may overheat,
which will result in damage to the
scraper and the smooth roller.
•
1
Release the tension on the compression springs (1)
on both sides of the feed drive housing by loosening
the counter nuts (2).
BX101121
IX - 14
Maintenance
Adjust the distance from the scraper to the smooth
roller
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unscrew all hexagonal nuts (4).
Press the baling roller (2) upward with the mounting
lever (1).
Check the distance (nominal dimension 0 - 0.3 mm)
between the scraper (3) and the smooth roller (5)
using a sensor gauge (6).
If necessary, adjust the scraper (3) evenly along the
entire width.
Tighten all hexagonal screws (4).
Pre-tension the compression springs on both sides
(see section Maintenance - Adjusting the feed drive
housing compression springs)
5
2
3
1
3
6
4
BX101150
9.3.11 Adjusting the baling roller - scraper
The adjustment should be made when the feed drive
housing is folded down or disconnected.
•
2
Release the tension on the compression springs (1)
on both sides of the feed drive housing by loosening
the counter nuts (2).
1
Adjusting the distance from the baling roller to the
scraper
•
•
•
The distance between the baling roller (1) and the
scraper (2) should be "a = 2 - 5 mm".
If necessary, adjust the distance evenly along the
entire width by placing disks under the stopper pads
(3) on the feed drive housing.
BX101120
3
Pre-tension the compression springs on both sides
(see section Maintenance - Adjusting the feed drive
housing compression springs)
1
Measure the thickness (b) of the
scraper (2) at regular intervals. If the
scraper is less than 5 mm, it has to be
replaced.
2
a
BX101140
IX - 15
Maintenance
9.3.12 Adjusting the feed drive housing
compression springs
The compression springs (1, 2) must be pretensioned on both sides of the feed drive housing.
Adjusting the pretension
•
•
Adjust the two rear compression springs (1) to a
distance of „a = 490+5 mm“.
Adjust the two front compression springs (2) to a
distance of „b = 530+5 mm“.
b
a
2
1
BX201122
9.4 Crop track
9.4.1 Access points to the crop track
The maintenance flaps can be used to clear blockages
in the crop track.
Before opening the maintenance flaps
•
2
2
1
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage
harvester from being placed in operation or rolling
away unintentionally.
After the main drive is switched off,
the blade drum and blower continue to
coast down and an audio alarm is
sounded!
For all tasks and when eliminating
malfunctions, always be absolutely
certain to wait until the units have
come to a complete stop - danger of
accident!
1
Maintenance flap in the transfer channel
•
•
Unscrew the wing nut (2).
Fold down the maintenance flap (1).
BX100680
IX - 16
Maintenance
Rear wall in the output shaft of the blower
•
•
1
Unscrew all 6 side fastening nuts.
Remove the rear wall (1).
BX500742
Maintenance flap in the impact area of the tower
•
•
2
Unscrew the hexagonal nut (2).
Dismount the maintenance flap (1).
1
2
BX500058
Maintenance flaps in the upper discharge chute
•
•
1
Unscrew the hexagonal nut (2).
Dismount the maintenance flap (1).
2
1
2
2
1
BX100700
IX - 17
Maintenance
IX - 18
Maintenance
9.5 Engine maintenance
9.5.1 Overview of maintenance (DaimlerChrysler) Excerpt
This maintenance overview is intended to provide a quick orientation. Information in it is non-binding.
For definitive information, please refer to the specifications in the operating instructions and maintenance manuals.
Only operating materials approved in the DaimlerChrysler materials operating specifications may be used.
The scope and frequency of maintenance tasks is based first of all on differing operating conditions and the quality of
the oil that is used. The DaimlerChrysler maintenance system offers a choice of three maintenance groups with
different maintenance intervals for engines of the 900, 450, 400 and 500 model lines.
Maintenance groups
Maintenance group A
Intermittent operation with low load.
Maintenance group B
Intermittent operation, primarily in the medium speed
and load range.
Maintenance group C
Operation primarily in the upper speed and load range.
Application examples (maintenance group C):
Vehicles:
Machine carrying heavy load
Agricultural devices:
harvester threshers, maize threshers, forage harvesters, sugar cane
harvester, beet root harvesters, potato harvesters
Construction machines:
bulldozers, gripper-ditchers, dump lorries, road milling machines
Work machines:
Drilling equipment, compressor units, pulverisers, snowplough built-in engines,
rock crushers, road sweeper built-in engines
Oil change intervals BR 500/OM 460
LA Euro 3a
Maintenance group C Oil qualities
250 h
200 h
200 h
228.5
228.2/3
228.0/1
Oil change intervals BR 900
Maintenance group C
500 h
400 h
300 h
Oil qualities
228.5
228.2/3
228.0/1
Maintenance services
General determinations:
The maintenance service must be performed at least once a year.
If the sulphur content of the fuel is higher than 0.3 % by weight, all maintenance intervals should be reduced by half.
If another oil quality is used to correct the filling level of the engine oil, the lesser quality applies to the
maintenance interval.
IX - 19
Maintenance
9.5.2 Important maintenance instructions
Repair, maintenance, and cleaning
jobs or eliminating malfunction must
always be performed with the drive
turned off and the engine completely
stopped- remove the ignition key!
For jobs on the engine, always switch
off the main battery switch!
Cooling water and air intake hoses
Check the condition and fastening of cooling water and
air intake hoses every 50 operating hours. Replace
cooling water hoses and non-metallic parts on the air
intake system every 2 years.
Check the engine, water cooler and exhaust system
daily to ensure it is clean. Clean it if necessary.
Coolant
The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture of
corrosion protection fluid and antifreeze in the factory.
The coolant consists of 50 % corrosion protection and
antifreeze and 50 % water.
Protection against freezing is ensured to approximately
-37 °C. See also the engine manufacturer’s
specifications.
Belts
All belts must be kept continuously under the proper
tension.
For new belts, check the tension after the first 2 to 3
operating hours. If necessary, retighten.
Cleanliness
To protect against the danger of fire, clean the engine
area and especially the exhaust system as well as the
areas surrounding the brakes and gearbox, etc.
If the material being harvested is very dry and there is
a lot of dust, check the spots listed above more
frequently for accumulations of dirt and clean if
necessary.
IX - 20
Store lubricants and fuels in suitable
containers and ensure they are
disposed of properly.
Exercise caution when draining hot
oil - danger of burns!
Maintenance
9.5.3 Fuel system
Fuel
Exercise caution when working with
fuel.
Only add fuel outdoors and with the
engine turned off.
Do not smoke.
The quality and cleanliness of the fuel are of critical
importance for consistently good performance and a
long service life for the engine.
Follow the specifications in the
engine operating instructions in the
section on fuels (Daimler
Chrysler) and requirements for
operating materials
(DaimlerChrysler).
For temperatures under 10 °C (50 °F), always use
winter fuel.
Tanks
•
•
•
•
•
Switch off the engine.
Clean grass and dust from the area around the filler
neck (1).
Use only clean fuel in the tank. If necessary, filter
the fuel before adding it to the tank.
Close and seal the tank after filling it.
Dispose of spilled fuel.
1
Fuel tank
•
•
•
•
For the filling quantity of the fuel tank, see the
section entitled GeneralAspects- Technical Data.
Monitor tank filling on the fuel gauge in the Info
Centre display.
Close and seal the fuel tank each time after filling it.
Fuel drain screw (2). Tightening torque 30 Nm.
Fill the fuel tank daily after finishing
operation to prevent condensation
water from forming in the tank and
freezing in cold weather.
Venting the fuel system
After the engine has not been operated for a long time,
the fuel system may need to be vented.
For more information, please refer to the operating
instructions of the engine in the chapter titled
"Maintenance" (DaimlerChrysler).
2
BX500771
IX - 21
Maintenance
9.5.4 Fuel filter/water separator
Replacing the fuel filter
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Open the fuel supply valve (2) (turn to the right). .
Unscrew the filter pan (1).
Clean the filter pan and filter insert, if there is a
heavy accumulation of dirt or damage, replace the
filter insert.
Check the seal ring for the filter pan and replace it if
necessary.
Wet the seal ring with diesel fuel and set it in place.
Place the filter insert in the filter pan and screw the
filter pan (1) on the filter housing.
Close the fuel supply valve (2) (turn to the left).
Empty the water separator
•
•
•
2
1
3
The water that is present in the fuel is collected in
the inspection glass (3).
Drain the collected water by loosening the drain
screw (4) and capture it in a container.
Dispose of used filters and remaining fuel properly.
4
BX101410
9.5.5 Fuel filter
1
The fuel filter (1) removes even the finest pieces of dirt
from the fuel.
1 fuel filter
Replacing the fuel filter insert
•
•
•
•
•
•
Open the cover to prevent excess pressure from
forming in the fuel tank.
Unscrew the screw cover with filter insert (1) and
unscrew a piece from the filter housing. Allow the
fuel to run out.
Remove the screw cover with the filter insert.
Replace the filter insert and seal ring.
Wet the seal ring with diesel fuel and set it in place.
Screw on the screw cover with the filter insert and
tighten it; tightening torque 25 Nm.
Vent the fuel system.
For more information, please refer to the operating
instructions of the engine in the chapter titled
"Maintenance" (DaimlerChrysler).
IX - 22
BX500059
Maintenance
9.5.6 Engine oil
The specifications in the operating
instructions of the engine
manufacturer (DaimlerChrysler) must
be observed.
Engine - oil level check
•
Check the engine oil level daily about 5 minutes
after shutting off the engine.
See the Section on Commissioning – Engine oil
check.
1
Changing the engine oil
Exercise caution when draining hot
oil - danger of burns!
Dispose of drained oil properly.
For the specified types of oil and changing intervals,
please refer to the maintenance table.
•
•
•
•
•
Remove the oil filter (see Replacing the oil filter).
Only change the engine oil when it is hot.
Insert a suitable hose on the drain pipe (1). Loosen
the nut somewhat and capture the old oil in a
sufficiently large container.
Screw on the oil filter (see Replacing the oil filter).
Tighten the nut on the drain pipe (1) securely.
Remove the hose.
Replacing the oil filter
BX500920
1
Replace the filter insert and seals each time you
change the oil.
•
•
•
•
•
Unscrew the screw cover on the oil filter (1) and
allow the oil to flow out of the filter housing.
Take off the screw cover with filter insert and
remove the filter insert and seal.
Wet the new seal with oil.
Insert a seal and filter insert in the screw
cover.
Screw on the screw cover on the oil filter housing
and tighten it; tightening torque 40 Nm.
BX500060
IX - 23
Maintenance
Filling with engine oil
•
•
•
•
•
1
Lift the cover (1) off the oil filling pipe.
Fill with engine oil up to the maximum mark of the
oil dip stick.
Unscrew the cover (1) off the oil filling pipe.
Allow the engine to run at low idle for a short time.
Switch off the engine and check it, including the oil
filter to make sure there are no leaks.
After about 5 minutes, check the oil level in the
engine again and fill up with engine oil to the
maximum mark if necessary.
BX100810
9.5.7 Cooling system
Coolant
The specifications in the operating
instructions of the engine
manufacturer (DaimlerChrysler) must
be observed.
The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture of
corrosion protection fluid and antifreeze in the factory.
The coolant consists of 50 % corrosion protection and
antifreeze and 50 % water.
Protection against freezing is ensured to approximately
-37 °C.
•
Before the beginning of winter, always check the
capacity of the antifreeze.
If coolant is not available, no matter what time of year
it is, a mixture consisting of 50 % ethylene glycol
antifreeze/corrosion protectant and 50 % clear soft
water must be used. This mixture also offers corrosion
protection and protection against freezing to -37 °C.
No cooling system sealing additives
may be used.
•
Replace all cooling water hoses on the engine every
two years.
Checking the coolant level and engine
•
Check the coolant level daily.
•
Check the coolant level in the overflow container (1)
in the viewing pane (2).
The coolant level must reach up to the middle of the
control eye (2).
•
Top off with coolant if necessary.
2
1
BX500057
IX - 24
Maintenance
Filling with coolant
1
Never open the cover (2) of the
overflow container while the engine
is hot. Switch off the engine and wait
until the engine has cooled off danger of burns!
•
•
•
Turn the cover (2) on the overflow container to the
right catch point and allow residual pressure to
escape slowly.
Open the cover (2) completely and fill with engine
coolant up to the middle of the viewing pane.
Close the cover again.
2
BX500061
Draining off coolant
The drain screw (2) for coolant is located on the cooling
water pipe in the back of the engine compartment.
1
2
BX500071
Water cooler, oil cooler and charging air cooler
The water cooler, oil cooler and charging air cooler are
located behind the radiator sieve (1) in the engine
compartment.
1
2
If possible, clean the radiator cooler while the engine is
cold.
•
Check all cooler units regularly to ensure they are
clean and blow them off with compressed air if
necessary. Do not damage the blades!
•
Blow out radiators with compressed air from the
outside to the inside.
BX500024
IX - 25
Maintenance
9.5.8 Air filter
Perform air filter maintenance regularly, but at least
when the error message
1
for a dirty air filter
appears in the Info Centre Display.
Cleaning the air filter
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2
Unscrew the nut (2) and remove the cover (1).
Unscrew the nut (4) and carefully remove the filter
insert (3).
Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the
filter housing.
Blow out the filter insert with compressed air (max.
5 bar) from the inside to the outside.
Replace filter inserts that are excessively dirty or
damaged. Filter inserts that were installed more
than 4 years ago must also be replaced.
Install the filter insert again.
Mount the cover (1).
Close the air filter intake sieve.
3
4
BX500066
IX - 26
Maintenance
9.6 Hydraulics maintenance
9.6.1 Special safety instructions
Use suitable aids when searching for
leaks because of the risk of injury and
wear safety goggles.
Liquids escaping under high pressure
can penetrate the skin and cause
severe injuries. Therefore, you must
depressurise the system before
disconnecting lines. Ensure that all
line connections are tight before the
pressure in the system builds up
again.
Hydraulic oil escaping from a small
opening can barely be seen. Because
of this you should use a piece of
cardboard or something similar when
searching for leaks. Protect your
hands and body.
If any fluid penetrates the skin, it must
be removed immediately by a doctor
who is familiar with this kind of
injury; serious infections could
otherwise result. Physicians who are
not familiar with this area should
consult appropriate information from
a competent medical source.
Check hydraulic hose lines regularly
and replace them if they are
damaged or show signs of ageing!
Replacement lines must meet the
technical requirements of the device
manufacturer.
9.6.2 System layout of work and brake
hydraulics
1
For the hydraulics circuit diagram, refer to section on
"Maintenance" (explanation of the hydraulics circuit
diagram).
The main valve block (1) is located behind the access
flap on the right-hand side of the machine.
BX201451
IX - 27
Maintenance
Main valve block
Y40
Y30
Y37
Y39
Y28
Y31
Y26
Y38
Y24
Y29
Y27
Y66
Y25
Y67
Y23
Y21
Y20
Y20
Y21
Y22
Y23
Y24
Y25
Y26
Y27
Y28
-
Y29 Y30 -
Turn discharge "left"
Turn discharge "right"
"Raise" ejector flap
"Lower" ejector flap
"Raise" upper discharge chute
"Lower" upper discharge chute
Fold in front attachment "Transport"
Fold out front attachment "Work"
Retract supporting wheels/swivel in feed
drive
Extend supporting wheels/swing out feed
drive
Grinding device "Cylinder in"
Pressure control valve
The valve blocks have been equipped
with pressure control valves. These
valves were set at the factory and
must not be changed.
Work on the over-pressure valve must be carried out
only by the customer service department.
IX - 28
Y22
Y31
Y37
Y38
Y39
Y40
Y66
Y67
-
BX202080
Grinding device "Cylinder out"
Pendulum frame "rotate left"
Pendulum frame "rotate right"
Auto-steering left
Auto-steering right
arrest steering left
arrest steering right
Maintenance
Pumps
Big X 500/650
1
-
Steering pump
2
-
Work hydraulics
2
1
BX500077
Big X 800/1000
2
1
BX500638
IX - 29
Maintenance
9.6.3 Hydraulic tank
Hydraulic oil
Caution, never mix different types of
fluid.
Before changing the type of fluid,
consult with our customer service
department .
Never use engine oil.
List of mineral oils of quality class HLP (HM) and
environmentally friendly HEPG pressure fluids that
decompose quickly.
ISO viscosity
Class
Manufacturer
ADDINOL
HEPG VG 46
HLP VG 46
Hydraulic oil HLP
46
OSO 46
AGIP
ISO viscosity HEPG VG 46
Class
Manufacturer
FRAGOL
Hydraulic
TR 46
FUCHS
Renolin
PGE 46
ARAL
ASEOL
AVIA
BAF-46Vitam
Aral Vitam GF 46
Aqua VG 46
Avia Hydrosynth AVILUB RSL 46
46
Avia Fluid ZAD 46
Houghton
KLÜBER
KUWAIT
BECHEM
Hydrostar
UWF 46
Biohyd PEG 46 Energol HLP 46
LIQUI
MOLY
MOBIL
BP
LAMORA HLP 46
Q8
Haydn 46
Holst 46
Hydraulic S46
HYSPIN AWS 46
SHELL
Fluid BD 46
COFRAN
Cofraline
extra 46 S
Astron HLP 46
ELFOLNA 46
ELFOLNA DS 46
StuartTheunissen
TOTAL
TRIBOL
Hydrocor E 46
ISOCOR E46
Engen
TQH 20/46
VALVOLINE
Ultrasyn PG 46
NUTO H 46
VERKOL
WINTERSHALL
Econa PG 46
ENGEN
ESSO
FINA
IX - 30
Hydraulic oil
PGK 46
Hydraulic oil
D3031.46
HYDRAN 46
RENOLIN
MR 15
VG 46
RENOLIN
B15
VG 46
Syntolubric 46
CASTROL
DEA
ELF
HLP VG 46
HLP 46 ISO
Mobil DTE 25
Mobil
Hydraulic
Oil Medium
Shell Tellus
Oil 46
Shell Hydrol
DO 46
Cofraline
extra 46 S
Azolla ZS 46
Tribol 772
Tribol ET 1140-46
Tribol 943 AW 46
Vesta HLP 46
WIOLAN HS 46
WIOLAN HX 4
Maintenance
Checking the hydraulic fluid level
2
Check the hydraulic fluid level every 50 operating
hours.
•
Lower the lifting gear and switch off the engine.
•
Check the hydraulic fluid level in the viewing glass
(2) of the hydraulic fluid tank (1).
1
The hydraulic fluid must be visible in the viewing glass
(2).
•
Top off with hydraulic fluid if necessary.
BX500055
Changing the hydraulic fluid
Exercise caution when draining hot
oil or fluid - danger of burns!
Dispose of drained fluid properly.
Before changing fluid, consult with
the KRONE customer service
department.
3
Change hydraulic fluid after 500 h.
•
•
•
•
Connect a suitable hose with a clamping connector
on the discharge pipe (2) of the hydraulic fluid tank
(1) and capture the old oil in a suitably large
container.
Remove the hose.
Fill with hydraulic oil through the filling pipe (3) on
the hydraulic fluid tank (1) until it is visible in the
viewing glass of the hydraulic fluid tank.
Allow the engine to run at low idle speed for about
10 seconds.
Turn off the engine.
Check the hydraulic fluid level and top off with
hydraulic fluid as necessary.
Repeat the procedure until the fluid level no longer
goes down.
1
2
BX500089
IX - 31
Maintenance
Replacing the hydraulic fluid filter
1
Change the hydraulic fluid filter if the error message
Suction return filter 1 or filter 2 appears in the Info
Centre display, but at least once after each season.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unscrew the screw cover (1).
Lift the filter insert (2) and allow hydraulic fluid to
drip out.
Remove the filter insert and dispose of it properly.
Moisten the seal surface of the new filter insert with
fluid and set it in place.
Screw on the screw cover manually. Do not fasten
it too tightly.
Allow the engine to run at low idle speed for about
10 seconds.
Turn off the engine.
Check the hydraulic fluid filter to make sure there
are no leaks.
2
BX100901
IX - 32
Maintenance
9.7 Gearbox maintenance
•
•
•
Unless there is some indication to the contrary, after
1000 operating hours for all gear, but at least after
the end of every season.
Check the oil level before the beginning of the
season and then every 100 operating hours.
Check all gears daily for any leaks and check the
oil level if necessary.
1
2
9.7.1 Checking the oil level and changing
oil on the gearbox engine power
drive
4
Checking the oil level
•
The oil level must reach up to 3/4 the control eye
(1) for continuous operation. If necessary top off
with (see Changing oil).
3
Changing the oil
•
•
•
•
•
Unscrew the oil drain screw (4) on the engine drive
(2) gearbox. Collect the oil in a suitable container.
Screw on the oil drain screw (4) again.
Unscrew the cover screw (3) on the engine drive (2)
gearbox.
Add oil.
Screw in the cover screw (1) again.
2
BX500078
Perform oil level checks and change
the oil while the forage harvester is in
a horizontal position!
Dispose of old oil properly!
For filling quantities and descriptions
of lubricants for gearboxes, see the
section entitled "General Aspects –
Technical Data").
4
Oil filter (4) for the circulating oil lubrication of the
transmission
BX500644
An oil filter (4) for the circulating oil
lubrication of the transmission is only
installed on Big X 650, 800, 1000.
Always perform the filter replacement together with
the change of the transmission oil after 1000
operating hours or at the end of the season.
•
•
•
Unscrew the filter housing (5) on the welded nut (6)
by using a wrench (W/F 32).
Replace the old filter with a new one.
Screw the filter housing (5) back into position by
using a wrench (W/F 32).
5
6
BX500645
IX - 33
Maintenance
IX - 34
Maintenance
9.7.2 Checking the oil level and changing
the oil on the distributor gearbox
2
3
Checking the oil level
•
Unscrew the oil level control screw (2) on the
distributor gearbox (1).
•
The oil level must reach up to the control hole. If
necessary, top off the oil (see Changing the oil).
•
Screw on the oil level cover screw (2) again.
1
Changing the oil
•
Unscrew the oil drain screw (4) on the transfer
gearbox (1). Collect the oil in a suitable container.
•
Screw on the oil drain screw (4) again.
•
Unscrew the cover screw with the ventilation filter
(3) on the distributor gearbox (1).
•
Add oil.
•
Screw in the cover screw (3) again.
9.7.3 Checking the oil level and changing
the oil on the OM 460 fan gearbox
4
BX101490
3
4
Checking the oil level
•
Unscrew the oil level control screw (2) on the fan
gearbox (1).
•
The oil level must reach up to the control hole. If
necessary, top off the oil (see Changing the oil).
•
Screw on the oil level cover screw (2) again.
Changing the oil
•
Unscrew the oil drain screw (4) on the fan gearbox (1).
Collect the oil in a suitable container.
•
Screw on the oil drain screw (4) again.
•
Unscrew the cover screw with the ventilation filter
(3) on the distributor gearbox (1).
•
Add oil.
•
Screw in the cover screw (3) again.
1
2
BX101470
IX - 35
Maintenance
9.7.4 Checking the oil level and changing
the oil on the lower roller gearbox
1
Perform oil level check and change
the oil while the forage harvester is in
a horizontal position!
The roller gearbox on the left side of the feed drive
housing is divided into two parts.
1
-
Roller gearbox below, tower above
2
-
Lower roller gear
Checking the oil level
•
Unscrew the oil level control screw (3) on the lower
roller gearbox, upper tower (1) or oil level control
screw (7) lower roller gearbox (2).
•
The oil level must reach up to the control hole. If
necessary, top off the oil (see Changing the oil).
•
Screw on the oil level cover screw (3 or 7) again.
2
BX101220
Changing the oil
•
Unscrew the oil drain screw (5) on the lower roller
gearbox, upper tower (1) or oil drain screw (8) on the
lower roller gearbox (2).
Capture old oil in a suitable container.
•
Screw on the oil drain screw (5 or 8) again.
•
Screw off the cover screw with ventilation filter (4 or
6) on the appropriate gearbox.
•
Add oil.
•
Screw on the cover screw (4 or 6) again.
4
1
3
5
6
7
8
BX101210
IX - 36
Maintenance
9.7.5 Checking the oil level and changing
the oil on the upper roller gearbox
2
1
Perform oil level check and change
the oil while the forage harvester is in
a horizontal position!
Checking the oil level
•
Unscrew the oil level control screw (3) on the upper
roller gearbox (1).
•
The oil level must reach up to the control hole. If
necessary, top off the oil (see Changing the oil).
•
Screw on the oil level cover screw (3) again.
1
Changing the oil
•
Unscrew the oil drain screw (4) on the upper roller
gearbox (1). Collect the oil in a suitable container.
•
Screw on the oil drain screw (4) again.
•
Unscrew the cover screw with the ventilation filter
(2) on the upper roller gearbox (1).
•
Add oil.
•
Screw in the cover screw (2) again.
3
4
BX101190
9.7.6 Oil level check and oil change on the
tower gearbox of the upper
discharge chute
Oil level check
•
Unscrew the oil level control screw (6) on the
tower gearbox (5).
•
The oil level must reach up to the control hole. If
necessary, top up the oil (see Oil change).
•
Screw on the oil level control screw (6) again.
7
5
8
Oil change
•
Remove the protective cover and unscrew the
ventilation filter (7).
•
Unscrew the oil drain plug (8). Collect the used oil
in a suitable container.
•
Screw in the oil drain plug (8) again.
•
Fill in oil. The oil level must reach up to the control
hole (6).
•
Screw in the ventilation filter (8) again and
reinstall the protective guard.
6
BX550400
IX - 37
Maintenance
9.8 Maintenance - Belt drives
Check the tension and condition of
drive belts for all belt drives after the
first 10 operating hours, and after that
every 100 operating hours.
Replace damaged or worn drive
belts.
1
Check the drive belt tension
•
Check the belt tension in the middle by pressing in
(pressing force about 50 N) on the belt. If the depth
of pressing in is "a ≥ approx. 20 mm", the tension is
correct. Otherwise correct.
a
Correcting the belt tension
•
To increase or reduce the tension of the tension
spring (1), reduce or increase the distance "b"
accordingly on the adjustment spindle.
b
BX500079
9.8.1 Main belt drive
Belt tension over the hydraulic cylinder.
Correcting belt motion
•
Check to make certain the belt is running in the
guides of the v-notch pulley (1) with no problems.
•
If necessary, correct the belt motion by changing
the position of the tension roller (2).
•
Loosen the counter nut (3) and loosen the hexagonal nut (4) somewhat.
•
Loosen the counter nut (5) and adjust the change of
position with the hexagonal headed screw (6).
•
Tighten the counter nut (5) again.
•
Tighten the hexagonal nut (4) and counter nut (3)
again.
2
1
6
5
4
2
a
a
3
BX101780
IX - 38
Maintenance
9.8.2 Screen drum drive
1
3
-
2
Power take-off – screen drum
Screen drum
Belt tension of the screen drum drive via spring-loaded
tensioning roller (2).
1
3
BX101820
IX - 39
Maintenance
9.9 Windscreen washer system
The tank (1) for the water of the windscreen washer
system is located in the machine compartment.
•
Open the lid (2) to fill the tank (1).
•
In order to obtain a better cleaning action, add some
detergent for washer systems to the water.
2
1
Empty the windscreen washer system
in winter or fill a special anti-freeze
agent.
BX100610
9.10 Fire extinguisher
Have the operational readiness of the fire extinguisher
(1) checked annually, at the latest every two years.
The manufacturing date or the date of the final
inspection of the fire extinguisher (1) shall be decisive.
1
The inspection intervals may differ from one country to
another. In this case, the instructions on the fire
extinguisher (1) of the respective countries shall be
applicable.
BX100450
IX - 40
Maintenance
9.11 Tyres
9.11.1 Checking and servicing the tyres
•
•
•
1
BX500034
Reifenluftdruck
tyre pressure
Big X 500
Bereifungstyp
wheel type
km/h mp/h
Big X V12
mit / with
Easyflow 3000
oder / or
Solomaschine
solo machine
(bar)
BigX 650
mit / with
mit / with
mit / with
EasyCollect EasyCollect EasyCollect
6000
7500
9000 *
(bar)
(bar)
(bar)
40
25
2,4
3,2
3,2
2,4
10
6
1,4
1,7
1,9
1,4
40
25
1,6
2,4
2,4
1,6
10
6
1,0
1,2
1,4
1,0
40
25
1,6
2,4
2,4
1,6
10
6
1,0
1,2
1,4
1,6
40
25
1,4
1,8
2,0
1,4
10
6
1,0
1,0
1,2
1,0
40
25
3,2
3,2 **
3,2 **
3,2
10
6
1,7
1,9
1,9
1,7
40
25
2,4
2,4
2,4 **
2,4
10
6
1,4
1,4
1,4
1,4
40
25
1,6
2,4
2,4
1,6
10
6
1,2
1,4
1,4
1,2
40
25
1,6
1,6
1,6 **
1,6
10
6
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
Achse
axle
3,2
650/75 R 32 172A8
2,4
710/75 R 34 178A8
2,4
800/65 R 32 172A8
2,0
900/60 R 32 176A8
3,2
18.4 R 30 155A8
2,4
600/65 R 28 154A8
2,4
600/70 R 28 157A8
1,6
710/55 R 30 153A8
942-529-1
max.
(bar)
Vorderachse
front axle
•
Check the tyres for damage and air pressure every day
as the service life of tyres depends on the air pressure.
Repair any cuts or tears in the tyres as soon as
possible or change the tyres.
Do not expose tyres to oil, grease, fuel, or
chemicals; nor should you let them stand in the
sunlight for long periods.
Drive carefully; avoid driving over sharp stones or
edges.
Check the tyre pressure at least once per week
with an accurate instrument.
Hinterachse
rear axle
•
* = Strassenfahrt ohne EasyCollect 9000
* = Transport on road without EasyCollect 9000
** = Vmax: 25km/h / 15mp/h
IX - 41
Maintenance
Reifenluftdruck
tyre pressure
Big X 800
Big X 1000
mit / with
Easyflow 3001
mit / with
mit / with
mit / with
oder / or
EasyCollect EasyCollect EasyCollect max.
km/h mp/h
Solomaschine 6000 / 753
7500 / 903 9000 * / 1053 * (bar)
solo machine
(bar)
(bar)
(bar)
(bar)
40
25
1,8
2,4
2,4
1,8
10
6
1,0
1,4
1,4
1,4
40
25
1,6
2,4
2,4
1,6
10
6
1,0
1,4
1,4
1,4
40
25
1,4
2,0
2,0
1,4
10
6
1,0
1,2
1,2
1,2
600/70 R 28 157A8
TM 900 HP
(Trelleborg)
40
25
2,9
2,9
2,9
2,9
10
6
1,7
1,7
1,7
1,7
710/55-34 155A8
T 414
(Trelleborg)
40
25
1,6
1,6
1,6
1,6
10
6
1,4
1,4
1,4
1,4
2,4
800/65 R 32 172A8
2,0
900/60 R 32 176A8
IX - 42
Vorderachse
front axle
2,4
710/75 R 34 178A8
270 022 780
Achse
axle
2,9
1,6
Hinterachse
rear axle
Bereifungstyp
wheel type
/
* = Strassenfahrt ohne EasyCollect 9000 / 1053
* = Transport on road without EasyCollect 9000 / 1053
Maintenance
9.11.2 Fitting tyres
Fitting the tyres requires sufficient knowledge and suitable mounting tools. If tyres are not
correctly fitted, it could explode when pumped up. This can cause serious injury. If you do not
have sufficient experience of fitting tyres, have tyres fitted by the KRONE dealer or a qualified
tyre specialist.
When mounting the tyre on the wheel rim never exceed the highest permissible pressure stated
by the tyre manufacturer, otherwise the tyre or even the wheel rim may explode.
If the tyre bead is not located properly when the highest permissible pressure is achieved,
deflate the tyre, align the tyre, grease the tyre bead, and inflate the tyre again.
The tyre manufacturers can provide extensive informative material on how to fit tyres on
agricultural vehicles.
Never operate the forage harvester at
the tyre pressure usual for transport of
the tyres. Keep the valve caps fitted on
the valves to keep dirt out.
Check the tyre pressure frequently!
BX110001
9.11.3 Wheel mounting
•
After the first and then after 20 to 25 hours of
operation, retighten the wheel lug nuts.
Tightening torque of the drive axle wheel lug nuts =
485 Nm
Tightening torque of the steering axle wheel lug nuts
= 485 Nm
Nm
9.11.4 Fitting different tyres
When the tyre size is changed, the
software of the Info Centre has to be
adapted correspondingly.
BX202245
IX - 43
Maintenance
9.12 Maintenance – electrical
system
9.12.1 Electrical equipment – technical
data
Performance of the generator ................ 12 V/180 A
Number of batteries ........................................... 2
Battery voltage ................................................ 12 V
Battery capacity ......................................(2x) 135 Ah
9.12.2 Batteries
The battery compartment is located on the left-hand
side of the machine behind the cover (1).
2
Opening the battery compartment
•
Unscrew the hexagon head cap screws (2) of the
cover (1) and remove it.
•
Open the bracket (4) and swing the battery cover (3)
aside.
1
3
4
BX201721
The forage harvester has been fitted with two batteries
(1) of 12 V (135 Ah) each.which are connected in
series (24 V) for starting.
1
A switching relay (2) is used to switch.
The operating voltage is only 12 V!
When jump-starting the battery,
make certain that only a voltage of
12 V is connected to each battery!
2
Before wintering the forage harvester, charge the
batteries and re-charge them every six weeks or have
them serviced at a battery service station.
BX500086
IX - 44
Maintenance
9.12.3 Main battery switch
The main battery switch (1) is located on the battery
cover.
1
The main battery switch (1) can be used to separate
the positive pole of the batteries.
-
Main battery switch (1) in vertical position – electric
circuit closed.
Main battery switch (1) in horizontal position –
electric circuit open.
Do not switch off the main battery
switch (1) with the engine running.
BX200621
For repairs, in emergencies and at the end of use, set
the main battery switch (1) into the open position.
•
•
Switch off the engine
Set the main battery switch (1) to off by turning to
the left into horizontal position.
The battery is discharged, when the
ignition is set to step I or step II, even
when the main battery switch (1) has
been switched off.
Always switch off the engine during
repair work (welding work); set the
main battery switch to the open
position (horizontal to left), and
remove the socket connector (1) from
the control unit (MR control device).
Removing the socket connector (1) from the control
unit (MR control device).
•
•
•
•
Switch off the engine
Set the main battery switch to off by turning to the
left into horizontal position.
Release the safety and disconnect the socket
connector (1) on the MR control device by
swivelling.
When fitting the socket connector (1) swivel the
safety bracket upwards and lock into place.
On Big X 800/1000, the socket
connector (1) on the MR control unit is
provided twice.
1
BX500099
IX - 45
Maintenance
9.12.4 Battery – hazards when handling
General aspects:
Keep the battery clean of dust and
chaff.
Batteries develop a highly explosive electrolytic gas.
Avoid sparks or open flames in the vicinity of batteries.
When working on the electric system or on the engine,
always disconnect the earth cable or open the main
battery switch.
BX110004
Quick charge:
When carrying out a quick charge, disconnect the minus
cable from the battery and open all battery cells in order
to prevent damage to the electric system.
Remove the plastic covers of the
battery in order to prevent highly
explosive gas from gathering.
Removing the battery:
When removing the battery, first of all disconnect the
earth cable, and then remove the positive cable from
the battery.
9.12.5 Cleaning the battery
•
•
•
•
Wipe the battery clean as and when necessary.
Use a brush to remove any oxidation on the pole
terminals.
Use pole grease on the battery poles and the pole
terminals.
Keep the venting holes of the plugs open.
9.12.6 Battery – checking the acid level
If you top up the distilled water during
the winter, allow the engine to run for
about 30 minutes to ensure a better
mixture of water and acid.
•
Check the acid level every 250 operating hours. The
acid level should be at the mark above the upper
plate edge.
Use distilled water only.
BX110004
IX - 46
Maintenance
9.12.7 Battery – measuring the acid
density
OK
1,20 kg/l
•
Use an acid tester to measure the acid density of
each battery cell.
Under normal climatic conditions, a fully charged
battery should have an acid density of 1.28.
•
Recharge the battery, if the density drops below
1.20.
BX110005
9.12.8 Installing Batteries and Connecting
Poles Correctly
3
Always connect the battery poles
correctly:
1
To do this:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connect the positive cable from the starter (3) to the
positive pole of the battery (1).
Connect the positive cable of the battery (1) with the
positive pole (30a) of the battery changeover relay (4).
Connect the negative cable of the battery (1) with the
negative pole (31a) of the battery changeover relay (4).
Connect the negative cable from the starter (3) to the
negative pole of the battery (2).
Connect the negative cable of the battery (2) with the
negative pole (31) of the battery changeover relay (4).
Connect the positive cable of the battery (2) with the
positive pole (30) of the battery changeover relay (4).
12
V
3
1a
30
a
30
31
4
12
Not observing the correct polarity
between the batteries and alternators
can cause serious damage to the
electrical system.
V
2
BMII-339
9.12.9 Three-phase generator
When working on the electrical
system, always remove the positive
cables from the batteries to avoid
damage.
The cable contacts of the positive
cables have to be protected against
unintentional contact to the battery
contacts.
For more information, please refer to the operating
instructions of the engine in the Section on
"Maintenance" (DaimlerChrysler).
•
Have a specialist workshop check the three-phase
generator (1) once a year.
1
BX101680
IX - 47
Maintenance
9.12.10 Starter
When working on the electrical
system, always remove the positive
cables from the batteries and switch
off the main battery switch to avoid
damage.
The cable contacts of the positive
cables must be protected against
unintentional contact to the battery
contacts.
•
1
If the starter (1) fails or does not work satisfactorily,
determine the reason for the damage.
BX101690
If the suggestions listed below do not remove the
damage, please seek the advice of your KRONE
dealer. Have a specialist workshop check the starter
(1) thoroughly once a year.
Loose, soiled or corroded cable connections:
•
•
Clean the cable connections on the starter and
tighten the connections.
Clean the earth cable on the engine and tighten the
connection to the engine.
Battery performance too low:
•
Check the electrolyte as well as acid density, and
recharge the battery, if and when necessary.
Discharged battery:
•
Charge the battery.
Use of a wrong engine oil viscosity:
•
Always use the right engine oil according to the
specification.
Starter safety relay is defective:
•
Replace the relay.
9.12.11 Lights
Lamp overview (voltage/capacity and type of lamp):
licence plate lamp
rear lamps
rear lamps - fender
clearance lamps - front
rear wheel light
lamps - tyres
rear lamp – upper discharge chute
dipped/high beam
IX - 48
12 V/5 W
12 V/10 W
12 V/5 W
12 V/5 W
12 V/5 W
12 V/5 W
12 V/10 W
12 V/55/60 W H4
cab roof floodlights
floodlights - upper discharge chute
cab roof working floodlights
working floodlights – front lamp carrier
rear working floodlights
12 V/55 W
12 V/55 W
12 V/55 W
12 V/55 W
12 V/55 W
H3
H3
H3
H3
H3
lighting – grinding device
indicator – fender/rear/front
reversing lights
brake lights – rear/upper discharge chute
allround lights
12 V/55 W H3
12 V/21 W
12 V/21 W
12 V/21 W
12 V/55 W H1
Maintenance
9.12.12 Control units and fuses
Have work on the electronic system
carried out by KRONE after-sales
service or KRONE dealer only!
The following listed control units are located behind the
cover (1) of the operator console of the driver’s cab.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BEK-Control unit console
ADM-engine control
SmartDrive (travelling gear)
KMC2 Krone-machine-controller
KMC3 Krone-machine-controller
Teleservice (optional)
Autopilot (optional)
DIOM-output module
Switchbox Video camera
1
4
5
3
2
9
8
7
BX500090
The designations of the fuses, relays, as well as the
LEDs for the control units mentioned above are located
on the console board.
The console board is located behind the cover (1) of
the operator console of the driver’s cab.
For console board overview see page IX-51.
1
BX500093
PLD-engine control
The PLD-engine control (1) is located in driving
direction left front of the motor.
PLD engine control (1). For more information, please
refer to the operating instructions of the engine
(DaimlerChrysler).
The designations of the fuses, relays, as well as the
LEDs for the PLD-engine control are located on the
console board.
The console board is located behind the cover (1) of
the operator console of the driver’s cab.
For console board overview see page IX-51.
1
BX500092
IX - 49
Maintenance
EMR lifting gear control
The EMR lifting gear control (1) is located above the
main valve block.
The designations of the fuses, relays, as well as the
LEDs for the EMR-lifting gear control are located on
the console board.
The console board is located behind the cover (1) of
the operator console of the driver’s cab.
For console board overview see page IX-51.
1
BX500091
Manual operation on the platform
The manual operation (1) is located in driving direction
left front on the platform.
1
The designations of the fuses, relays, as well as the
LEDs for the manual operation are located on the
console board.
The console board is located behind the cover (1) of
the operator console of the driver’s cab.
For console board overview see page IX-51.
BX500085
Cabin-relay board
1
The designations of the fuses, relays, as well as the
LEDs for the cabin are located on the cabin-relay
board.
The cabin-relay board is located behind the cover (1)
on the cabin rear panel.
For cabin-board overview see page IX-50.
BX500088
IX - 50
Maintenance
IX - 51
Maintenance
IX - 52
Maintenance
IX - 53
Maintenance
9.13 Maintenance – compressed
air system
9.13.2 Compressed air storage tank
1
Condensation water settles in the compressed air
storage tank (1). The condensation water may cause
malfunctions.
Drain the condensation water once a week.
•
2
Use the drain valve (2) to drain the condensation
water collected in the compressed air storage tank
(1) into a container.
BX101840
9.14 Maintenance – Air conditioning
system and heating
9.14.1 Special warnings
Carry out repair, maintenance and
cleaning work only when the machine
is at a standstill. Switch off the engine.
Remove the ignition key. Secure the
machine against the possibility of
rolling back.
It is imperative that you seek medical
advice in case of refrigerant burns;
take the data sheet (cf. page IX - 53)
along.
Ensure sufficient ventilation when
working on the refrigerating system.
Repair, maintenance and cleaning
work may be carried out by authorised
specialists only.
Do not permit the refrigerant to escape
during filling or repair work; use a
recycling container for disposal.
In case of repair, maintenance and
cleaning work on the refrigerant
circuit, refrigerant emissions may
occur; these emissions may be liquid
or gaseous and are a hazard for man
and the environment. Take suitable
protective measures (wear protective
goggles and protective gloves).
The spare parts used have to meet the
technical requirements defined by the
machine manufacturer. For this
reason, use KRONE original spare
parts only.
9.14.2 Components of the air conditioning
system
A Compressor
on the right-hand side on the engine in direction of
travel, driven by V belt
B Capacitor
behind the radiator screen in the machine
compartment
C drier/collector
behind the radiator screen in the machine
compartment – bottom right
D Evaporator
in the cab roof
IX - 54
E Manometric switch
on drier
F Expansion valve
at the evaporator inlet
G Air conditioning/heating rotary switch
in cab, roof panel
Maintenance
9.14.3 Data sheet of refrigerant R134a (extract)
Refrigerant R 134a:
Chemical designation:
Chemical formula:
Molecular weight:
Boiling point (at 1.013 bar):
Freezing point:
Critical temperature:
Critical pressure:
Density (liquid at +25 ° Celsius):
Flammability limits in air:
1,1,1,2-tetrafluorethane
CH2F CF3
102.0 g/mol
-26.1°C
-101.0°C
-101.1°C
40.60 bar
1,206 kg/m3
not flammable
Environmental data
FKW 134a:
ODP - ozonolysis potential
CLP
- chlorine load potential
HGWP - greenhouse effect
PCR - photo-chemical reactivity
ODP = 0
CLP = 0
HGWP = 0.26
PCR = 0.5
9.14.4 Technical Data
Technical Data
Component
Evaporator
Heater
Fan
Voltage
Current consumption
Refrigerant
Performance data
refrigerating capacity* 5,200 Watt*
heating capacity 4,000 Watt
1000 m3/h free blowing
12 Volt
15 ampères
R 134a (CFC free)
*measured at +30 ° Celsius ambient temperature
(data rendered by the manufacturer)
IX - 55
Maintenance
9.14.5 Air intake and distribution
BMII-217
BMII-216
IX - 56
Maintenance
9.14.6 Refrigerant
Nonetheless, the refrigerant must not
be drained; it must be collected at a
recycling plant. For this reason do not
sever any connecting pipes. Have
maintenance and repair work on the
air conditioning system carried out
only by your Krone dealer with a
suitable disposal and recycling
equipment.
The air conditioning system is
operated with 2200 g of refrigerant
R134a (tetrafluoroethane). This
substance does not contain any
chlorine atoms, and thus is inoffensive to the ozone in the atmosphere of
the environment.
9.14.7 Manometric switch
When the fan speed is at the highest
still pleasant performance, set the
cooling performance of the air
conditioning system to an average
value. Let the air conditioning system
not operate at the lowest fan speed
and highest cooling performance.
2
1
The air conditioning system has been fitted with a
manometric switch (2) which shuts down the system in
case of over or under pressure (on the collector/drier
(1) behind the combined radiator on the left hand side
in direction of travel).
Indikatorperle
im Schauglas
indicator pearl
in sight glass
blau = trocken
blue = dry
Rosa=feucht
Kundendienst
anrufen
pink=wet
call service
BX500080
9.14.8 Fresh air fan and circulation mode
(cabin)
Fresh air fan
1
A fresh air filter (3) in the form of a wedge filter cell is
located in the upper cab area behind the gill screen (2)
on the left hand side in direction of travel. This filter (3)
protects the driver in the cab against dust or airborne
dirt, which is outside the cab.
Check the filter for soiling prior to any operation.
If filters are not properly maintained
they may become very soiled, no
longer ensuring that sufficient fresh
air is passed into the cab.
•
•
•
Open the closing device (1) by turning 90°
clockwise.
Pull the gill screen (2) out; check the wedge filter
cell (3) for soiling and clean, if and when necessary.
Shake out the filter (3); never use compressed air.
In case of severe soiling, the filter (3) has to be
replaced.
2
3
BX100560
IX - 57
Maintenance
Circulation filter
1
If the circulating air filter (1) is very
dirty, the output of the air conditioning
system may be reduced and it may
heat up.
•
Clean the circulating air filter (1) regularly.
BX200550
9.14.9 Collector/Drier
The ambient temperature must exceed
the temperature set at the thermostat
(generally +1 ° Celsius) for the
compressor to switch on.
Since the refrigerant collector is pressurised, it is
subject to the pressurised container regulations during
production and testing.
According to this regulation the pressurised tank is
classified as test group II in accordance with the
permissible overpressure p in bar, the volume l in litres
and the pressure product p x l.
In keeping with section 10 of the Pressure Vessel
Regulations these pressure tanks have to be subjected
to recurrent tests by an expert in keeping with section
32. In this case the recurring tests consist, as a rule,
of external inspections of the tank in use. In
combination with the inspection the refrigerant collector
must be subjected to a visual inspection twice a year.
Special attention shall be given to corrosion and
mechanical damage. If the container is not in a correct
state, for safety reasons it must be replaced to ensure
sufficient protection to the user and third parties due to
the hazard which may be caused in handling or
operating pressurised containers.
IX - 58
1
Indikatorperle
im Schauglas
indicator pearl
in sight glass
blau = trocken
blue = dry
Rosa=feucht
Kundendienst
anrufen
pink=wet
call service
BX500081
Maintenance
9.14.10 Checking the state of the
refrigerant and the fill
2
Checking the refrigerant volume
3
Loss of refrigerant through hoses in the air conditioning
system is unavoidable. Check the level of the
refrigerant every 100 hours.
•
•
•
Check the window (2) of the drier (1) with the engine
running and with the air conditioning system
switched on (set to highest cooling action).
If the white float (3) is at the top, the volume of
refrigerant is okay.
If the white float (3) is at the bottom, the refrigerant
must be topped up (specialist workshop).
4
Checking the moisture saturation
The moisture in the refrigerant circuit is collected in the
filter drier (1).
1
2
Observe the notice on the sticker (5)
on the dryer (1).
Indikatorperle
im Schauglas
indicator pearl
in sight glass
blau = trocken
blue = dry
Rosa=feucht
Kundendienst
anrufen
pink=wet
call service
5
Dryer with sticker (6):
•
•
If the indicator pearl (3) is blue, the degree of
moisture is okay.
If the indicator pearl (3) has turned pink, the
collector unit of the dryer must be replaced (specialist workshop)
Dryer with sticker (7):
•
•
If the indicator pearl (3) is orange, the degree of
moisture is okay.
If the indicator pearl (3) has turned colourless, the
collector unit of the dryer must be replaced (specialist workshop)
Indikatorperle
im Schauglas
indicator pearl
in sight glass
Indikatorperle
im Schauglas
indicator pearl
in sight glass
blau = trocken blue = dry
orange=trocken orange = dry
Rosa=feucht
Kundendienst
anrufen
farblos=feucht
Kundendienst
anrufen
pink=wet
call service
6
colourless=wet
call service
7
BX500082
IX - 59
Maintenance
9.14.11 Capacitor
The capacitor is located in the engine compartment
behind the radiator screen (1).
Regularly check the capacitor for cleanliness; clean the
unit depending on the degree of soiling, however, at
least once a month.
Opening the radiator screen
•
2
1
Open the catch (2) and swing the radiator screen (1)
aside.
BX101560
Cleaning the capacitor
•
Blow the capacitor (1) out from the inside to the
outside with compressed air. Do not damage the
blades.
1
BX500083
IX - 60
Maintenance
9.15 Maintenance – central
lubrication system (Vogel)
(Machine under machine number 773 000)
Lubricant fill
Hydraulic-type lubricating nipple
The lubricant is filled through the hydraulic-type
lubricating nipple DIN 71412-AM10x1 by means of a
commercially available grease gun.
1 - Hydraulic-type lubricating nipple
2 - Mounting connection
1
2
BX110007
The hydraulic-type lubricating nipple can be screwed to
position 2. As an alternative, connection 2 can be used
to mount potential lubricant return systems.
3
Fill coupling
•
•
2
1
Remove the lubricating nipple (3) and replace by
filler neck 995-000-705 (4).
The coupling box 995-001-500 (2) must be fitted to
the filling pump (1).
4
BX110008
Filling cylinder
•
•
Remove the M20x1.5 closure screw (3) and replace
by filler socket (2).
For filling remove the protective cap on the socket
(2) and the filling cylinder (1).
M20x1,5
3
2
1
BX110009
Hinged lid
For the KFG3-5, KFG5, KFG3-5 and KFGS5-5 series,
a lubricant filling method has been provided through a
special hinged lid as an optional feature.
Use clean lubricant with a suitable tool
only! Soiled lubricants will lead to
severe system failures!
KFG3-5
KFGS3-5
KFG5-5
KFGS5-5
BX110010
IX - 61
Maintenance
Checking the fill level
Visual
1
The transparent lubricant tank permits a visual
inspection of the fill. For safety reason, this inspection
should take place in regular intervals.
min
If the tank level has dropped to below
the "min." mark, the entire system
must be deaerated.
BX101960
Switching conditions for central lubrication
Central lubrication is only turned on is the feed drive
rollers are turning.
To reprogram the central lubrication system (lubrication
intervals) and start central lubrication, make the
following required setting manually:
•
Turn on the ignition (ignition key position II)
•
Bring up in the "Calibrate feed drive" in the info
centre.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Central lubrication is switched on.
The icon
appears in the status line while
A
•
•
•
Dismount the main pipes on the unit.
Pump until bubble-free lubricant penetrates from the
screw top.
Mount the main pipes again.
•
Dismount the main pipe on the main distributor.
Pump until no air is trapped in the pipe anymore.
Mount the main pipe again.
•
•
Dismount the side pipe on the main distributor.
Pump until bubble-free lubricant penetrates from all
connections of the main distributor. Mount the side
pipes again.
IX - 62
C
D
BX500071
lubrication is in progress.
Deaerating the system
B
•
Subsequently deaerate the side lines, side
distributors, lubricating pipes and lubricating nipples
and check for correct function.
Maintenance
Changing the times of the lubricating interval
•
Carry out step 1 to 9.
Basic setting upon delivery:
Pause time: 0,5 h = 30 min
Lubrication time: 14 min
Note on step 2:
If the works code 000 has been changed already, use
the
keys to select the changed code, and
key to acknowledge.
use the
Key
Step
Display
1
000 flashing
(code 000 = factory adjustment)
Press more than 2 sec
2
Automatic display of 1st parameter
"stop period in timer mode"
Stop LED flashing
Press briefly to
acknowledge the code
Stop period 0,5 h
(factory adjustment)
3
Press briefly
4
Set new value
Example: 6.8 h = 6 hours 48 minutes
5
Display of next parameter
"pump running period in timer mode"
Contact LED flashing
Press briefly to acknowledge
the new value
Pump running period: 14 min
(factory adjustment)
6
Press briefly
7
Set new value
Example: 3 min
8
Press briefly to acknowledge the new value
9
Press more
than 2 sec
Modified values are stored
and the display goes out.
For more information on the
maintenance of the central lubricating
system, please refer to the operating
instructions on the central lubricating
system (Vogel).
IX - 63
Maintenance
Overview of central lubrication
dose / h.
cm 3 *
Lubrication point
Use only high-pressure grease with EP* additive
up to NLGI-class 2
* Exteme Pressure-Additive
VPKM 9-146
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Slewing ring
Slewing ring
Discharge bearing
Discharge bearing
Blower left
Blower right
Main belt drive tension arm
Cracker drive tension roller
Main belt drive tension roller
Cracker tension arm
Flange bearing
Flange bearing
VPKM-6-298
Steering knuckle bolt
Steering knuckle bolt
Steering knuckle bolt
Steering knuckle bolt
Receiving bolt
Receiving bolt
Rocker bearing
Cylinder
Cylinder plunger rod
VPKM-5-371
Bearing
Upper roller system
Bearing
Upper roller system
Bearing
Upper roller system
Rocker right
Rocker left
Rocker left
VPKM-5-394
Counterblade bearing
Counterblade bearing
Drum bearing
Frame bearing
Frame bearing
Drum bearing
VPKM-3-415
Drum bearing
Drum bearing
Drum bearing
Drum bearing
Suction fan
Drum bearing top
Drum bearing top
3,12
3,12
0,35
0,35
3,12
3,12
0,69
0,69
1,04
0,35
1,56
1,56
0,70
0,70
0,70
0,70
0,70
0,70
1,39
0,20
0,20
3,52
3,52
3,52
3,52
3,52
3,52
1,56
1,56
1,56
Foraging unit right
Supply system
Rocker right
Bearing
Bearing
Bearing
Drum bearing
Drum bearing
Frame bearing
KFG1.U1
406-413
SLH63-490-S9
406-054-VS
995-001-500
995-000-705
995-001-500
KFG1.U1
161-210-012
Drum bearing
Frame bearing
Drum bearing
Counterbl. bearing
Counterbl. bearing
Pump KFGS3-5-S12+912
995-000-705
Return
186-901.51+912
406-004-VS
506-510-VS
995-001-620
Pump and main distributor
22,27 ccm/h A
5,24
5,90
5,90
5,24
0,40
3,01
3,01
Optional
Drum bearing
Drum bearing
186-903.01
VPKM-5-394
Rocker left
Rocker left
Upper roller system
Upper roller system
Upper roller system
0,67
0,67
6,03
3,01
3,01
6,03
1S
3T
1S
186-686.04
VPKM-5-371
Drum bearing
Drum bearing
22,27 ccm/h
25,45 ccm/h
19,09 ccm/h
B
C
D
E
VPKM-4-144
Main distributor
with cycle switch
177-300-092
Slewing ring
996-001-890+898-210-050
Discharge bearing
Blower left
996-001-890+898-210-050
Main belt drive tension arm
Tension roller grain conditioner drive
Arm tension roller of same
Flange bearing
996-001-890+898-210-050
Slewing ring
Disacharge bearing
996-001-890+898-210-050
Blower right
Tension roller main belt drive
Flange bearing
VPKM-9-146
Discharge system
and drive
6,36 ccm/h
Steering knuckle bolt
Steering knuckle bolt
Receiving bolt
Rocker bearing
Cylinder
Suction fan
VPKM-3-415
Grain conditioner extension: 186-682.02
Steering knuckle bolt
Steering knuckle bolt
Receiving bolt
186-684.06
Cylinder
VPKM-6-298
Steering axle
186-902-1
136-952.51
BX500054
Jam in the system or at a connected lubricating
point
Troubleshooting
-
-
Unscrew the outlet screw connections from the
main distributor to the subdistributor one after the
other.
If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when
loosening one of the outlet screw connections, the
connected subdistributor is blocked.
If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet
screw connections, the main distributor is blocked.
Clean the main distributor or replace it.
Reinstall the outlet screw connections.
-
Unscrew the outlet screw connections of the
blocked subdistributor.
If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when
unscrewing one of the outlet screw connections, the
connected lubricating point is blocked.
If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet
screw connections, the main distributor is blocked.
Clean the blocked subdistributor or replace it.
-
Remove the blockage at the lubricating point.
IX - 64
Maintenance
Main distributor (1)
1
BX200380
Auxiliary distributor, left steering axle (1)
1
BX500087
Auxiliary distributor for discharge system and drive (1)
1
BX200390
Auxiliary distributor, right foraging unit (1)
1
BX200410
IX - 65
Maintenance
Auxiliary distributor, supply system (1)
1
BX200400
Auxiliary distributor, grain conditioner (1)
1
BX200360
Emergency lubricating points for use if the central
lubricating system fails
1
Auxiliary distributor, discharge system (1)
1
-
Discharge accelerator – right bearing
2
-
Discharge accelerator – left bearing
3
-
Discharge accelerator – cutting drum
4
-
Cutting drum – left bearing
3
2
and
4
5
BX200420
IX - 66
Maintenance
9.16 Maintenance – central
lubrication system
(BEKA-MAX)
USA
Lubricant fill
1
Hydraulic-type lubricating nipple
2
The lubricant is filled through the hydraulic-type
lubricating nipple (1) by means of a commercially
available grease gun.
1 - Hydraulic-type lubricating nipple
2 - Additional Mounting Connection
BX500666
Fill coupling
•
•
3
Remove the lubricating nipple (3) and replace by
filler neck 995-000-705 (4).
The coupling box 995-001-500 (2) must be fitted to
the filling pump (1).
4
BX110008
Filling cylinder
•
•
Remove the M20x1.5 closure screw (3) and replace
by filler socket 940 392-0 (2).
For filling remove the protective cap on the socket
(2) and the filling cylinder 940 393-0 (1).
M20x1,5
3
Use clean lubricant with a suitable tool
only!
Soiled lubricants will lead to severe
system failures!
2
1
Operational sequence
•
Switch on the ignition.
The green (4) and red (5) LEDs light up for
approx. 1.5 s (independently of the set program)
and indicate that the control of the lubrication
system is operational.
If the ignition is interrupted during a
lubrication sequence or in the course of
the cycle time, the time will be stopped
and stored in the data memory.
When the ignition is turned on again, the
remaining lubrication or cycle time
stored in the memory will be re-activated
and the sequence of operations will be
continued at that point where it was
interrupted before.
2
1
BX110009
4
5
3
Malfunction
•
By pressing the interim lubrication button (3), the
pump will restart a lubrication sequence.
BX500667
IX - 67
Maintenance
Signal displays
The function of the pump is displayed via two control
LEDs (green (4)/red (5)) in the viewing window (6) for
the motor half shell of the pump.
6
The red LED always displays a
malfunction in the program sequence.
5
4
BX500649
Description of the signal displays
LED
Red
green
Red
green
Signal display
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Red
ON
OFF
green
ON
OFF
Red
green
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Red
ON
OFF
green
ON
OFF
Red
ON
OFF
Ready for operation: 1.5 sec.
Display of functional
readiness
During the entire lubrication process
IX - 68
ON
OFF
Program run of a
lubrication process
1 sec.
Cycle error on the
progressive distributor
1 sec.
Until the lubricant reservoir is re-filled
Error grease level;
grease level too low
1 sec.
Error pump motor
speed
1 sec.
0,5 sec.
0,5 sec.
green
Description
Error CPU/ accumulator
Maintenance
Setting of the parameters
•
•
•
•
•
Use a flat screw driver to remove the red frame (7)
on the protective motor housing of the pump.
Unscrew the four cross-head screws and lift off the
transparent protective cover.
Use a flat screwdriver to set the cycle time (8) /
lubrication duration (9).
Reposition the transparent protective cover and
secure it with the four cross-head screws.
Securely attach the red frame (7) to the protective
motor housing of the pump.
9
8
7
If the cover is not properly closed,
water can penetrate the system,
which then may be destroyed. In this
case, the warranty will be void.
BX500650
Cycles:
33 to 48 cycles (16 notches at 1 cycle each)
Factory settings:
Cycle time:
Lubrication duration:
10 min
37 cycles
Before making any changes to settings, note the
following instructions:
•
•
•
One cycle more or less on the grid switch (9)
corresponds to 0.5% lubricant.
Two minutes of cycle time more on the grid switch (8)
corresponds to 20% less lubricant.
Two minutes of cycle time less on the grid switch (8)
corresponds to 20% more lubricant.
An increase in the grease quantity can
be achieved by an increase in the
cycles or a reduction in the cycle time.
If the cycle time is set to 6 min or less,
the system is permanently in
operation.
EA/PA Controller
Typ EP-tronic
Sonderausführung K
Takte
Zykluszeit (min.)
Service
33
2
48
32
9
8
BX500651
Grease level control
As long as enough grease is available
in the reservoir of the pump, the
proximity switch that is installed in the
reservoir transmits a signal to the
control system. If the grease level
drops below minimum, the proximity
switch will turn off the signal.
If the grease level drops below the minimum:
• the control system will switch off the pump.
• the red LED in the viewing window of the control
system on the protective motor housing of the pump
or a possibly installed red signal lamp lights up.
• Top up grease (refer to "Lubricant fill").
Once a sufficient grease level has been
established, the control system automatically starts
to work again.
IX - 69
IX - 70
4010.6732
Cycle time: 8 min.
Clock impulses: 46
Controlling time: 30 min.
Drum bearing
Drum bearing
Steering knuckle bolts
Steering knuckle bolts
Steering knuckle bolts
Rocker bearing
Cylinder
Suction Fan
Cracker
45*
105
45*
Setting of the pump
Drum bearing
Drum bearing
Main distributor
4010.6727
105
45*
25
45*
Cylinder
Steering knuckle bolts
Steering knuckle bolts
Receiving bolts
Steering axle
75
75
75
75*
25
25*
4010.6731
High-pressure coupling
Electric pump EP-1
12V, 8kg, 1 PE-170
Rocker left
Rocker left
Upper roller system
Upper roller system
Upper roller system
Slewing ring
Voltage Main belt drive
Tension roller Cracker drive
Tension roller arm
Flange bearing
Flange bearing
43 Lubrication points
Voltage Main belt drive
Blower, right
Slewing ring
Discharge bearing
Drum bearing
Drum bearing
Frame bearing
Counterblade bearing
Foraging unit, right
4010.6729
25
105*
105
105
105*
Discharge system and drive
4010.6730
105*
105*
25
105*
105*
25*
45
25
105
Counterblade bearing
Drum bearing
Frame bearing
Drum bearing
Supply system
4010.6728
105
105
105
45
25*
Discharge bearing
Blower, left
Storage
Storage
Storage
Rocker right
Maintenance
Overview lubrication system BEKA-MAX
Maintenance
9.17
Lubricant
Grease can be changed from conventional grease to
bio-degradable greases (and vice-versa) for the
products listed here without resulting disadvantage.
To ensure continuous problem-free operation of the
central lubrication system, we recommend using the
following greases that we have tested. (Greases with
sodium soap must not be used in either the on-road or
off-road area because they are soluble in water.)
Standard commercial greases or greases
recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or
grease should be used as lubricants. Greases should
still exhibit adequate suction and flowing behaviour at
–25 °C (max. flow pressure 700 mb).
To ensure the system works properly,
be careful no impurities enter the
system when refilling lubricant.
Dirt will cause malfunctions in the
central lubrication system and will
damage or destroy parts an friction
points.
They must not have a tendency to bleed out, since
this can result in blockages during extended operation.
MoS2 greases (up to 5 % molybdenum disulphide) can
be distributed and pumped with VOGEL progressive
pumps.
Warning!
Use of incorrect lubricants - effect: Bearing damage to the machine. Use only the lubricants
listed here. The central lubrication must never under any circumstances be filled with fluid
grease.
Grease types, NLGIClass 2
Manufacturer
Type designation
AGIP
ARAL
BECHEM
BP
Autol Top 2000
Long-term grease H
High–Lub L4742
Energrease LS EP 9346
Energrease LS EP2
CASTROL
Spheerol EP L2
ESSO
ExxonMulti-purposegrease
ELF
ELF Multi 2
FINA
Multi-purpose grease EP
FUCHS
LZR 2
KROON OIL
Lithep Grease
MOBIL
Mobilux EP 2
Mobilgrease
MB 2
MOGUL
LV 1 EP
ÖMV
ÖMV Signum M283
OPTIMOL
Olit EP 2
SHELL
Retinax EP L2
TEXACO
Multifak EP2
TOTAL
Multis EP2
Zeller &Gmelin DivinolMulti-purposegrease2
With soap Minimum operating
temperature [°C]
Spez. Ca
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li/Ca
Li
Li
Li
Li
Li
–10
–25
–20
–25
–20
–20
–20
–20
–20
–25
–10
–15
–20
–25
–25
–25
–20
–15
–20
–20
Lubrication greases with fast bio-degradable times
ARAL
AVIA
BECHEM
DEA
FINA
FUCHS
LUBRITECH
ÖMV
TEXACO
Zeller & Gmelin
BAB EP 2
Syntogrease
UWS VE 42
Dolon E EP2
Biolical EP S2
Plantogel 0120S
Stabyl Eco EP2
ÖMV ecodur EP2
Starfak 2
Divinol E2
Li/Ca
Li
Li/Ca
Li/Ca
Li/Ca
Li
Li/Ca
Ca
Ca
Li
–20
–25
–25
–20
–25
–25
–20
–25
–20
–25
IX - 71
Maintenance
9.18 Lubrication chart
250 h
100
250 h
250 h
250
10 hh
250 h
250 h
250 h
100
250 h
250 h
500 h
250 h
10 h
BX500084
Lubricating points
PTO shafts
•
•
The lubricating points mentioned must be lubricated
according to specified number of operating hours.
All propeller shafts have to be lubricated after 250
operating hours in keeping with the data in the operating
instructions of the manufacturer of the propeller shaft.
Components
Subgroup/Part
Drive system
PTO shaft W 2500 (VS)
PTO shaft W 2500 (ZW)
3
3
10
10
Cooling system
Screen drum
Supply system
Flange bearing
Flange bearing
PTO shaft
Remote cylinder
Pendulum frame
Tension springs, bottom left
Tension anchor
Point of rotation of swinging arm
Coupling rods
Slide
Grinding stone
1
1
3
4
1
2
2
2
4
2
1
1
250
250
10
100
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
500
Counterblade
adjustment
Grinding device
Hitch coupling
IX - 72
Number of
Lubrication intervals
lubrication points Operating hours
Maintenance
9.19
Periodic maintenance
9.19.1 Maintenance during the running-in
period
During the first 100 operating hours
•
•
•
•
Carry out maintenance daily or after every ten
operating hours (please refer to this chapter and to
"Consumables and filling quantities").
Do not unnecessarily operate the engine in idle run.
Make continuous checks on the temperature of the
refrigerant.
Check the engine oil and refrigerant frequently.
Watch for signs of leaks.
•
•
•
If and when it is necessary to top up the engine oil
during the running-in period, the oil viscosity has to
be selected according to the annual requirements
and the instructions rendered in the chapter titled
"Consumables and fill quantities" of
DaimlerChrysler.
Check that the hoses and hose clamps in the air
suction system are tightly fitting.
Check the drive belts and adjust as and when
necessary.
9.19.2 Every 10 operating hours
•
•
•
•
•
•
engine oil level check
hydraulic system level check
tyres
check of the pilot lamps
light functions
lubrication in keeping with the lubricating chart (fill
lubricating grease until it penetrates at the
lubricating point).
9.19.3 After the first ten operating hours
only
•
•
•
Tighten the fastening screws of the guide cylinder
anchor on the rear axle.
Tighten the fastening screws of the guide cylinder
anchor on the wheel hubs.
Tighten the fastening screws of the track rod.
9.19.4 Up to the first fifty operating hours
•
Retighten the wheel lug nuts.
Tightening torque for wheel lug nuts of the drive
axle = 485 Nm
Tightening torque for wheel lug nuts of the steering
axle = 485 Nm
IX - 73
Maintenance
9.19.5 After the first 100 operating hours
Carry out all maintenance work listed in the chapter
titled "Every ten operating hours".
•
•
•
•
Other intervals, please refer to the operating
instructions for the engine.
Check and/or set the tension of the drive belt.
Check hoses and hose clamps of the air suction
and cooling system for tight fit.
Check the coolant level.
•
•
Check the fuel injection pipe for loose connections.
Change the gear oil of the central gear.
•
Check the anti-freeze in the radiator; top up with
anti-freeze, if and when necessary.
Check the foot brake setting.
Check the turbo charger screw connections and
hose connections for tight fit.
Clean the paper filter elements in the cab.
Check the oil level of the central gear.
9.19.6 Every 250 operating hours
Includes the work listed under "Every ten operating
hours".
•
•
•
•
•
Retighten the wheel lug nuts.
Tightening torque for wheel lug nuts of the drive
axle = 485 Nm
Tightening torque for wheel lug nuts of the steering
axle = 485 Nm
Tighten the fastening screws of the steering
cylinder.
Tighten the fastening screws on the track rod.
Check the acid density of the battery; charge the
battery, if and when necessary, and top up with
distilled water.
Clean the valve lid vents.
9.19.7 Every 400 operating hours
•
•
•
•
Replace the fuel filter.
Drain the engine oil from the crankcase, and fill new
engine oil.
Replace the engine oil filter.
Replace the oil separator of the engine.
For detailed maintenance instructions,
please refer to the operating
instructions rendered in the
"DaimlerChrysler Maintenance Manual"
(chapter on maintenance work).
9.19.8 Every 500 operating hours
Includes the work listed under "Every ten operating
hours".
•
•
•
Drain the fluid of the hydraulic system and replace
with new fluid.
Replace the hydraulic fluid filter.
Clean the mechanical fuel delivery pump.
IX - 74
•
•
•
•
Maintenance
9.19.9 Every 1500 operating hours
•
Replace the dry air filter insert and the safety element
of the air filter.
9.19.10 As required
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace both air filter elements.
Replace the cab air filter.
Clean the preliminary filter.
Replace the hydraulic fluid filter.
Replace the fuel filter.
Clean the batteries.
9.19.11 Annually
•
•
•
•
Have the starter checked.
Have the three-phase generator checked.
Check the hose connections on the air suction
system.
Check the air conditioning system.
9.19.12 Every two years
•
Have the coupling elements of the main drive train
checked.
IX - 75
Maintenance
9.20
Silage Agent System
(Optional)
9.20.1 Special Instructions for Using Silage Agents
The silage agent system cannot be
used for all silage agents without
restrictions.
The following instructions must be observed for
the silage agent that is used.
Water-based silage agent solutions
with bacterial additives can be used in
the system without any restrictions if
cleaning is performed according to
specifications (see Section 9.18.2).
Silage agent solutions containing acid
can be used in a pH-value range
between 6 and 10 if cleaning is
performed according to specifications
(see Section 9.18.2).
Silage agent solutions containing fine
particles can be used conditionally in
the system if cleaning is performed
according to specifications (see
Section 9.18.2).
9.20.2 Cleaning Work on the Silage Agent
System
Whenever the silage agent system is cleaned, rinse it
with potable water until the water that emerges is
colourless.
The following cleaning intervals must
be strictly observed to prevent damage
to the silage agent system.
Silage agent
Cleaning interval
Water-based silage agent
solutions with bacterial
additives
monthly
Solution containing acid
weekly
Solution containing fine
particles
after each use
IX - 76
Maintenance
9.21
Cable Winch
9.21.1 Replacing the Cable Winch
Before working on the cable winch,
disconnect the electrical power circuit
with the main battery switch.
•
•
•
•
Unroll the old rope to within about two remaining
revolutions.
Loosen the hexagonal socket head screw.
Remove the old rope (1).
Guide in the new rope, which must be of
comparable quality, and secure with hexagonal
socket head screw.
Recommended rope:
• Diameter:
• Calculated Breaking force:
• Max. length:
4.8 mm
15.8 kN
7.6 m
Recommended rope construction:
• 16 x 9 FE, 1960 N/mm2
1
BX500654
The rope must be mounted so that it
coils and uncoils between the rope
coil and the base plate. Otherwise the
winch will not work.
Never coil or uncoil from the upper
side of the rope coil!
When using a rope with reduced
breaking force, there is risk of injury.
IX - 77
IX - 78
engine crankshaft housing
2
transfer gearbo
fan gear
5
6
lower roller gearbox, upper tower
upper roller gear
tower gearbox on the upper discharge chute
9
10
11
Quantitieslubrication oil Diesel Engine
see Sect. 9.6
2
transfer gearbox
fan gear
5
6
upper roller gear
tower gearbox
10
11
Engine cooling system
Coolant change
Engine cooling system
Coolant check
lower roller gearbox, upper tower
9
1
lower roller gear
8
7
gear of power take-off
4
3
hydraulic oil tank
1
Changing the oil
lower roller gear
8
7
gear of power take-off
4
3
oil tank
Check oil level
Name
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Before
beginning of
harvest
x
x
x
After 10 h
or daily
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
After
100 h
x
After
500 h
Maintenance interval
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
After the
harvest or
1000 h
x
After
every 3 rd
season
As needed
As needed
approx. 1,0 l
approx. 3,6 l
approx. 1,6 l
approx. 5,0 l
approx. 1,7 l
approx. 8,0 l
approx. 13,5 l /23 l
Measuring rod
Inspection glass
Check point
Hydraulic oil HLP 46
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
Anti-freeze/water
Mixing ratio 50:50
Anti-freeze/water
Mixing ratio 50:50
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
Gear oil API-GL5-SAE85W-90
Gear oil PGLP DIN 51502
Gear oil PGLP DIN 51502
overflow container
Viewing glass, overflow
container, on-board computer
Filling level screw
Filling level screw
Filling level screw
Filling level screw
Filling level screw
Filling level screw
Viewing glass
Measuring rod
Viewing glass
Filling level screw
Filling level screw
Filling level screw
Filling level screw
Filling level screw
as needed, transmission oil PGLP DIN 51502 Filling level screw
as needed, transmission oil PGLP DIN 51502 Viewing glass
Follow the operating instructions of
the engine manufacturer
Hydraulic oil HLP 46
Designation
See accompanying documents (DaimlerChrysler)
approx. 150 l
As needed
As needed
As needed
As needed
As needed
As needed
As needed
As needed
As needed
Quantity of
consumables
9.21
1
Seq.
No.
Maintenance
Maintenance schedule
coolant change
2
screen drum drive
drive air conditioning system
2
3
Clean main cartridge
Replace main cartridge
Replace safety cartridge
3
4
5
Drain out water from condensation
Clean air filters
1
2
Compressed air system
check voltage, recharge if necessary
Battery
Clean air intake screen
2
1
Replace all non-metal parts
in the suction system and
charge cooling
1
Air filter system
fan drive
1
Drives
coolant check
Air conditioning system
Name
1
Seq.
No.
x
x
x
Before
beginning of
harvest
After 10 h
or daily
x
x
x
x
After
100 h
After
500 h
Maintenance interval
x
x
After the
harvest or
1000 h
x
x
x
After
every 3 rd
season
as needed
as needed
According to sep. requirement
Quantity of
consumables
after the main cartridge has been
cleaned 5 times
if the warning system engages
check belt tension
check belt tension
check belt tension
To be changed by specialist centre
Refilling by specialist workshop
Designation
water discharge valve
viewing glass on the drier
Check point
Maintenance
IX - 79
Maintenance
IX - 80
0
0
m
s
25478 Header speed dynamic active
25626 Maize reduce dist. (into)
25627 Maize reduce time (outof)
0
1
0
0
Min
25634 Frt att forward only XDisc
RPM
25477 Delta Header speed/km/h dyn
Unit
RPM
Designation
25634 Min. Header speed dynamic
Nr.
60
100
3
2
750
1000
Max
recomm
end
Step
consequence if
Value enlarge
2008-03-11
3
0
1
2
50
100
The attachment speed
decreases if speed >
set speed in the
terminal
consequence if
Value reduce
Description
The speed will be
reduced more.
The speed will be
reduced more.
The speed will be
reduced less.
The speed will be
reduced less.
Page 1 of 9
Reduced speed for lifted maize front attachment.
0 = dynamic attachment speed is deactivated
1 = dynamic attachment speed for Mais active
2 = dynamic attachment speed for Gras/XDisc
active
3 = dynamic attachment speed for Gras/XDisc
and Mais active.
Reduced speed for lifted grass pickup.
The dynamic attachment speed actuation
function can be activated/deactivated. If dynamic
attachment is deactivated the speed set by
terminal will be used.
The "Front attachment reverse" function is only
possible if the front attachment is moving forward.
1 = The "Front attachment reverse" function is not
possible
2 = Normal operation.
The attachment speed is adjusted to the driving
speed. “Min Spd. Dynamic Attachment” is the
speed of the attachment at 0 km/h. If the set
speed on the terminal is greater than this, the set
speed is actuated on the terminal.
The speed change
The speed change
For every 1 km/h the attachment speed increases
per km/h is increased per km/h is decreased by the set value. If the speed set in the terminal is
if speed > set speed if speed > set speed greater, the speed set at the terminal is actuated.
in the terminal
in the terminal
The attachment speed
increases if speed >
set speed in the
terminal
Parameter group Intake/Header
default
dated:
BiG X 500, 800, 650/I, 1000
150 200 104-08
10
parameter
terminal version:
List of parameters, Error messages
List of parameters BiG X 500
X-1
X-2
Designation
1
1
33657 Grinding stone adaption
34014 Grindstone adaption pulses
50
Min
0
%
Unit
33480 UDC check park. pos. active
25628 Maize reduce value
Nr.
100
2
2
100
Max
The speed will be
reduced more.
consequence if
Value enlarge
Parameter group Grinding
Parameter group Cracker
Parameter group Chute
recomm
end
Step
Parameter group "Shearbar"
36
1
1
100
default
The speed will be
reduced less.
consequence if
Value reduce
Page 2 of 9
The number of tooths from the grinding stone
adaption:
24 tooths ==> Year of Manufactory till 2007
36 tooths ==> Year of Manufactory from 2007
The number how much the ginding stone in the
complete grinding cycle with the adaption
readjusted. A grinding cycle means the complete
moving to the left side and return to te right side
to the beginning.
1 = only one Grinding stone adaption (left or righ
The check as to whether the upper discharge
chute is in the park position when switching to
road operation.
0 = no check
1=check, only in Road-mode
2=check, when main clutch is switching off
3=check, when main clutch OFF and machine is
driving (independent of release switch Field and
Transmission).
Reduced speed for lifted XDisc.
Description
List of parameters, Error messages
0,10%
0,10%
0,10%
0,10%
RPM
RPM
33616 PWM Shearbar motor IN Left
33617 PWM Shearbar motor ON Left
33618 PWM Shearbar motor IN Right
33619 PWM Shearbar motor ON Right
33543 Increment RPM Field Grass
33573 Increment RPM Field Maize
Unit
s
Designation
33614 Mot. Shearbar Time 2. Speed
Nr.
1
1
200
200
200
200
0
Min
200
200
1000
1000
1000
1000
200
Max
recomm
end
Step
The speed of the
shear bar in the 1st
stage is increased.
The speed of the
shear bar in the 1st
stage is increased.
The speed of the
shear bar in the 1st
stage is increased.
The speed of the
shear bar in the 1st
stage is increased.
The time when the
shear bar changes
into the 2nd speed
stage is lengthened.
consequence if
Value enlarge
50
50
25
25
The step width is
increased
The step width is
increased
Parameter group Diesel Engine
Parameter group Attachment
Parameter group "AutoScan"
1000
1000
1000
1000
2
default
The step width is
decreased.
The step width is
decreased.
The speed of the
shear bar in the 1st
stage is reduced.
The speed of the
shear bar in the 1st
stage is reduced.
The speed of the
shear bar in the 1st
stage is reduced.
The speed of the
shear bar in the 1st
stage is reduced.
The time when the
shear bar changes
into the 2nd speed
stage is shortened.
consequence if
Value reduce
Page 3 of 9
The change to RPM in the diesel engine when
the RPM- or RPM+ buttons are pressed in field
operation grass.
The change to RPM in the diesel engine when
the RPM- or RPM+ buttons are pressed in field
operation maize.
Setting of the time in seconds after which the
shear bar motor changes from the reduced speed
into the 2nd speed stage ( 100% ). The speed of
the 2nd stage cannot be adjusted currently. The
speed of the 1st stage is set with the parameters
7616 - 7619.
Setting of the speed with which the shear bar
motor should be driven in the 1st stage.
0% ==> 0 V
100 % ==> 12-14 V (Max speed)
Setting of the speed with which the shear bar
motor should be driven in the 1st stage.
0% ==> 0 V
100 % ==> 12-14 V (Max. speed)
Setting of the speed with which the shear bar
motor should be driven in the 1st stage.
0% ==> 0 V
100 % ==> 12-14 V (Max. speed)
Setting of the speed with which the shear bar
motor should be driven in the 1st stage.
0% ==> 0 V
100 % ==> 12-14 V (Max. speed)
Description
List of parameters, Error messages
X-3
X-4
0
3
km/h
km/h
0,10%
%
s
s
33446 Offset corr. speed road
33681 Max. Speed Power limitcon.
33682 Min. Speed Power limitcon.
33686 Setpoint power limiting
33687 Setpoint torque limiting
33651 blow valve on time
33652 blow valve interval time
0
1
65
50
2
0
Min
33443 Offset corr. speed 4whl
Unit
0
Designation
33440 Offset corr. speed 2whl
Nr.
80
100
2
8
0
1
4
recomm
end
Step
consequence if
Value enlarge
consequence if
Value reduce
600
3600
0
600
Description
Page 4 of 9
The time interval in which the blow valve Y73
(engine space cleaning compressed air) is
activated.
The duration how long the valve Y73 (engine
space cleaning compressed air) is activated.
Correction of travelling speed. The specified
offset is deducted from the calculated travelling
speed (efficiency level extrapolated) of the
SmartDrive. Valid in 2-wheel field mode
Correction of travelling speed. The specified
offset is deducted from the calculated travelling
speed (efficiency level extrapolated) of the
SmartDrive. Valid in 4-wheel field mode
Correction of travelling speed. The specified
offset is deducted from the calculated travelling
speed (efficiency level extrapolated) of the
SmartDrive. Valid in road operation.
The maximum speed The maximum speed Max. possible speed, how fast the machine
is increased, if the
is decreased, if the
running with ConstandPower in On.
ConstantPower
ConstantPower
active.
active.
The minimum speed The minimum speed Min. possible speed, how slow the machine
is increased, if the
is decreased, if the
running with ConstandPower in On.
ConstantPower
ConstantPower
active.
active.
The engine
The engine
Setpoint for the engine overload. This is the same
overloading is going overloading is less.
value, as in the terminal.
higher.
The engine load is
The engine load is
Setpoint for the torque limiting. This is the same
going higher.
less.
value, as in the teminal.
Parameter group Main Drive
default
Parameter group Common working functions
95
150
19
20
20
20
20
Max
List of parameters, Error messages
1
0
33611 Time Metal horn
33482 Crop Feed Roller-Auto
0
26026 sen. value RowTracer invers
s
0
Min
26009 Detecting GAP ON (only for 2
Tracers)
Unit
1
Designation
34005 Info Messages
Nr.
1
2
20
1
consequence if
Value enlarge
consequence if
Value reduce
1
5
Up to SW version 150200029-0
The automatic switching from the Row-tracer,
when it detect a hole in the plant row, is activ
0 = automatic switching in deactiv
1= automatic switching in activ
As from SW version 150200029-07 of the
autopilot:
"sen. value RowTracer invers" ==> The Logic
from the Sensorvalue are inverted (0 = normal
operation)
Setting, which infomessages are displayed in the
terrminal.
1 = all infos are displayed. (Errors, instruction etc.
2 = unimportant instructions are not displayed.
3= only the important instructions are displayed
(eg. the Infos for the Header Calibration)
Description
Page 5 of 9
The automatic lift setting for the hold-down device
on the pickup when reversing the feed drive and
attachment:
1=automatic switched on
2= automatic switched off
The actuation of the The actuation of the The time in seconds that the horn is actuated
horn on metal alarm is horn on metal alarm is when the metal detection system locates metal in
lengthened
shortened
the feed drive.
Parameter group EasyFlow
1
Parameter group Metal detection
0
recomm
end
Step
Parameter group Autopilot
default
10000 1
3
Max
List of parameters, Error messages
X-5
X-6
0
0
0
0
0
0
34066 Man. lift fast speed
34067 Man. lower slow speed
34068 Man. lower fast speed
34075 Raise lifting gear Auto
34076 Header Frame automatic
34077 Header Frame autom. horiz
20
0
%
34051 Header Pos. Work
0
0
Min
34065 Man. lift slow speed
s
33501 Reduce hold-down time
Unit
s
Designation
33500 Reduce hold-down offset time
Nr.
1
1
1
20
20
20
20
70
30
30
Max
0
1
0
9
5
20
5
40
10
0
default
1
1
1
1
5
1
1
recomm
end
Step
consequence if
Value reduce
Description
Page 6 of 9
Setting as to whether the pendulum frame is
automatically enabled when the “adapt to ground
contours” function is active. (Switched on and off
by pressing the “cross-adapt to ground contours”
right and left buttons at the same time, or by
manual override.
Setting as to whether the pendulum frame is
automatically set to horizontal position when the
“lifting gear to up” function is triggered.
The duration of
The duration of
The time during which the holding-down device
lowering is increased. lowering is decreased. will be controlled during automatic lowering. 0 =
Automatic deactivated.
The nominal height in The nominal height in Set-point position for position control and
the distance control
the distance control
distance control. The saved position at which the
and in the position
and in the position
lifting gear should actuate under position
control of the lifting
control of the lifting
control/distance control. The value can also be
gear is increased.
gear is decreased.
set using the driving lever and in the information
panel.
The speed of the
Speed to raise lifting gear 1st stage in grass
The speed of the
lifting gear becomes lifting gear becomes mode
greater
less
The speed of the
The speed of the
Speed to raise lifting gear 2nd stage in grass
lifting gear becomes lifting gear becomes mode
greater
less
The speed of the
The speed of the
Speed to lower lifting gear 1st stage in grass
lifting gear becomes lifting gear becomes mode
greater
less
The speed of the
The speed of the
Speed to lower lifting gear 2nd stage in grass
lifting gear becomes lifting gear becomes mode
greater
less
Setting whether the lifting gear should be lifted up
automatically when reversing the travelling gear.
1 = lifting gear is lifted up automatically on
reversing
0 = lifting gear is not lifted up automatically on
reversing
The time up to
The time up to
Delay time of the holding-down device before it is
lowering is increased. lowering is decreased. automatically lowered after the travel drive is
started.
consequence if
Value enlarge
List of parameters, Error messages
0
0
0
0
34275 Raise lifting gear Auto
34276 Header Frame automatic
34277 Header Frame autom. horiz
34278 Header fold automatic
20
34251 Header Pos. Work
%
1
Min
34079 Lateral levelling deact.
Unit
0
Designation
34078 Header fold automatic
Nr.
1
1
1
1
70
2
1
Max
recomm
end
Step
consequence if
Value enlarge
1
1
1
0
40
5
The nominal height in
the distance control
and in the position
control of the lifting
gear is increased.
Parameter group EasyCollect
1
0
default
The nominal height in
the distance control
and in the position
control of the lifting
gear is decreased.
consequence if
Value reduce
Page 7 of 9
Setting as to whether the pendulum frame is
automatically enabled when the “adapt to ground
contours” function is active. (Switched on and off
by pressing the “cross-adapt to ground contours”
right and left buttons at the same time, or by
manual override.
Setting as to whether the pendulum frame is
automatically set to horizontal position when the
“lifting gear to up” function is triggered.
Setting as to whether the attachment can be
retracted automatically or not.
1=automatic possible
2=automatic not possible
Set-point position for position control and
distance control. The saved position at which the
lifting gear should actuate under position
control/distance control. The value can also be
set using the driving lever and in the information
panel.
Setting whether the lifting gear should be lifted up
automatically when reversing the travelling gear.
1 = lifting gear is lifted up automatically on
reversing
0 = lifting gear is not lifted up automatically on
reversing
Setting as to whether the attachment can be
retracted automatically or not.
1=automatic possible
2=automatic not possible
Setting as to whether active “adapt to ground
contours” is active when sensor hooks are
attached.
1= Adapt to ground contours not active (passive
adaptation with the float setting)
2= Adapt to ground contours active (sensor
hooks actuate adaptation to gr
Description
List of parameters, Error messages
X-7
X-8
0
0
0
0
1
34475 Raise lifting gear Auto
34476 Header Frame automatic
34477 Header Frame autom. horiz
34478 Header fold automatic
34479 Lateral levelling deact.
20
%
Min
34451 Header Pos. Work
Unit
1
Designation
34279 Lateral levelling deact.
Nr.
2
1
1
1
1
70
2
Max
2
0
0
1
0
40
2
recomm
end
Step
consequence if
Value enlarge
5
The nominal height in
the distance control
and in the position
control of the lifting
Parameter group XDisc
default
The nominal height in
the distance control
and in the position
control of the lifting
consequence if
Value reduce
Page 8 of 9
Setting as to whether the pendulum frame is
automatically enabled when the “adapt to ground
contours” function is active. (Switched on and off
by pressing the “cross-adapt to ground contours”
right and left buttons at the same time, or by
manual override.
Setting as to whether the pendulum frame is
automatically set to horizontal position when the
“lifting gear to up” function is triggered.
Setting as to whether the attachment can be
retracted automatically or not.
1=automatic possible
0=automatic not possible
Setting as to whether active “adapt to ground
contours” is active when sensor hooks are
attached.
1= Adapt to ground contours not active (passive
adaptation with the float setting)
2= Adapt to ground contours active (sensor
hooks actuate adaptation to gr
Set-point position for position control and
distance control. The saved position at which the
lifting gear should actuate under position
control/distance control. The value can also be
Setting whether the lifting gear should be lifted up
automatically when reversing the travelling gear.
1 = lifting gear is lifted up automatically on
reversing
0 = lifting gear is not lifted up automatically on
reversing
Setting as to whether active “adapt to ground
contours” is active when sensor hooks are
attached.
1= Adapt to ground contours not active (passive
adaptation with the float setting)
2= Adapt to ground contours active (sensor
hooks actuate adaptation to gr
Description
List of parameters, Error messages
Nr.
Designation
Unit
Min
Max
recomm
end
Step
consequence if
Value enlarge
Parametergruppe CropControl
Parametergruppe RockProtect
Parametergruppe Joystick
default
consequence if
Value reduce
Description
Page 9 of 9
List of parameters, Error messages
X-9
List of parameters, Error messages
11
X - 10
Error messages
2. SmartDrive undervoltage!
2
Status: 17.12.2008
1 SmartDrive overvoltage!
Description
Error: SmartDrive power supply
voltage too low
Error: SmartDrive supply voltage
too high.
Meaning
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal SmartDrive error
Measure battery voltage
Battery dead
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check charge indicator lamp
Dynamo defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Check battery acid
Check the cables.
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Turn Page please!
Change charge indicator lamp
Replace the dynamo
Charge battery, change battery
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F77
LED +22-LD31 not lit
SmartDrive power supply voltage
too low
Replace SmartDrive
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Check the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Remedial measure
While engine is running, measure Replace the dynamo
on batteries. Voltage must not be
over 14.8V
Recommend Check
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
1
Error No.
Page No. 1/136
Status: 17.12.2008
4. SmartDrive voltage 5V sensors Error: 5 V sensor supply voltage
too low
4
Internal SmartDrive error
Possible Reason
Charge battery
Change battery
Check the cables.
Measure battery voltage
Check battery acid
Wiring defective
Battery dead
LED +22-LD31 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
5-sensors power supply too low
Change 12V sensor
Check 12V sensors
Short circuit in a 12V sensor
Turn Page please!
Check and, if required, change
fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F77
Replace SmartDrive
Replace cabling
Short circuit in the wiring to a 12V Check wiring to the 12V sensors
sensor
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F77
Replace SmartDrive
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD63 not lit
LED +22-LD31 not lit
See Remedial action
Check the cables.
Recommend Check
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Error: 12 V sensor supply voltage 12-sensors power supply too low
too low
Meaning
3. SmartDrive voltage 12 V
sensors
Description
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3
Error No.
Page No. 2/136
17 SmartDrive parameter
min/max
17
Status: 17.12.2008
16 SmartDrive CS parameters
Description
Error: MIN/MAX parameters
Error: EEPROM checksum
Meaning
Check parameters
Incorrect values in EEPROM
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check parameter file
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
Incorrect parameter file
downloaded
Check parameters
Incorrect values in EEPROM
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check software version
Check 5V sensors
Short circuit in a 5V sensor
No update of new parameters
performed
Check wiring to the 5V sensors
Turn Page please!
Transfer parameter file onto
Smart Drive
Transfer parameter file onto
Smart Drive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Load parameter file in SmartDrive
Load parameter file in SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Change 5V sensors
Replace wiring to the 5V sensors
Change battery
Check battery acid
Short circuit in the wiring to a 5V
sensor
Charge battery
Measure battery voltage
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Check and, if required, change
fuse +22-F92
Remedial measure
Check the cables.
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
16
Error No.
Page No. 3/136
19 SmartDrive digital
potentiometer
20 SmartDrive EV DAC
21 SmartDrive I2C error
30 SmartDrive pump 1 control
loop
19
20
21
30
Status: 17.12.2008
18 SmartDrive EEPROM
Description
Error: Control loop drive pump 1
front axle
Error: I2C Bus
Error: EV DAC
Error: Digital Pot
Error: EEPROM
Meaning
Test coil
See Remedial action
Check charge pressure
Adjusting unit defective
The charge pressure is too low
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
Check wiring to pump valves
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valves defective
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pump valves
Internal SmartDrive error
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
EEPROM defective
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
EEPROM defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
18
Error No.
Page No. 4/136
Turn Page please!
Change charge pressure valve
(30+/-3bar)
Change adjusting unit
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Remedial measure
32 SmartDrive feedback sensor
1(B38)
32
Status: 17.12.2008
31 SmartDrive pump 2 control
loop
Description
Check valve plug
Test coil
See Remedial action
Check charge pressure
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valves defective
Solenoid valve defective
The charge pressure is too low
The drive pump 2 is defective
Internal SmartDrive error
Remeasure voltage in neutral
position
Check the wiring to the sensors
for the pivoting angle
Calibration of the pivoting angle
sensor not correct
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pivoting angle sensors
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check wiring to pump valves
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pump valves
Test function of drive pump
Recommend Check
The drive pump 1 is defective
Possible Reason
Error: Pivoting angle drive pump 1 Values incorrectly set
front axle - signal out of range
Error: Control loop drive pump 2
rear axle
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
31
Error No.
Page No. 5/136
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to the pivoting
angle sensors
Set the sensor pivoting angle.
There must be a signal of approx.
2.5 volts present in neutral
position
Correctly set voltage values
Replace SmartDrive
Replace the drive pump 2
Change charge pressure valve
(30+/-3bar)
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to pump valves
Replace SmartDrive
Replace the drive pump 1
Remedial measure
Status: 17.12.2008
Calibration of the pivoting angle
sensor not correct
Measure voltage in neutral
position
Turn Page please!
Set the sensor pivoting angle.
There must be a signal of approx.
2.5 volts present in neutral
position
Remove dirt
Replace and adjust the sensor
pivoting angle. There must be a
signal of approx. 2.5 volts present
in neutral position
Check hydraulics for
contamination
Measure voltage on the sensor
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Replace sensor plug
Correctly set voltage values
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug for pivoting angle
defective
Replace wiring to the pivoting
angle sensors
Set the sensor pivoting angle.
There must be a signal of approx.
2.5 volts present in neutral
position
Correctly set voltage values
Replace and adjust the sensor
pivoting angle. There must be a
signal of approx. 2.5 volts present
in neutral position
Replace sensor plug
Remedial measure
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check the wiring to the sensors
for the pivoting angle
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pivoting angle sensors
34 SmartDrive feedback sensor 1 Error: Pivoting angle drive pump 1 Values incorrectly set
(B38) drift too high
front axle - pivoting angle
changes too quickly
Dirt in the hydraulics (actuator
valves, for example)
Measure voltage on the sensor
Calibration of the pivoting angle
sensor not correct
34
Test voltage on the sensor
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check sensor plugs
Recommend Check
Sensor plug for pivoting angle
defective
Possible Reason
Error: Pivoting angle drive pump 2 Values incorrectly set
rear axle - signal out of range
Meaning
33 SmartDrive feedback sensor
2(B39)
Description
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
33
Error No.
Page No. 6/136
Status: 17.12.2008
35
Error No.
Page No. 7/136
Meaning
Sensorstecker ueberpruefen
Spannung am Sensor messen
\"Sensorstecker Schwenkwinkel
defekt\"
Schwenkwinkelsensor defekt
Sensor Schwenkwinkel tauschen
und einstellen; in Neutralstellung
muss ein Signal von ca. 2,5 Volt
anliegen
Sensorstecker tauschen
Verdrahtung zu den Sensoren
Schwenkwinkel erneuern
Measure voltage in neutral
position
Check the wiring to the sensors
for the pivoting angle
Calibration of the pivoting angle
sensor not correct
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pivoting angle sensors
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to the pivoting
angle sensors
Set the sensor pivoting angle.
There must be a signal of approx.
2.5 volts present in neutral
position
Remove dirt
Verdrahtung zu den Sensoren
Schwenkwinkel ueberpruefen
Kurzschluss/Kabelbruch in der
Verdrahtung Schwenkwinkel
Sensoren
Replace and adjust the sensor
pivoting angle. There must be a
signal of approx. 2.5 volts present
in neutral position
Check hydraulics (e.g. actuator
valves) for contamination
Measure voltage on the sensor
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Replace sensor plug
Correctly set voltage values
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug for pivoting angle
defective
Replace wiring to the pivoting
angle sensors
Remedial measure
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check the wiring to the sensors
for the pivoting angle
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pivoting angle sensors
Possible Reason
35 SmartDrive feedback sensor 2 Error: Pivoting angle drive pump 2 Values incorrectly set
(B39) drift too high
rear axle - pivoting angle changes
too quickly
Dirt in the hydraulics (actuator
valves, for example)
Description
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
36
Error No.
Page No. 8/136
36 SmartDrive brake pressure
sensor (B16/B40)
Description
Error: Brake pressure sensor
Meaning
Run travelling gear diagnostics
See Remedial action
Check the wiring to the sensors
for the brake pedal sensor and
brake pedal switch
Check sensor plugs
See Remedial action
Test function of sensor
Brake pedal switch not adjusted
Short circuit / broken cable in
wiring for brake pressure sensor,
brake pedal switch
Sensor plug for brake pressure
sensor, brake pedal switch
defective
Brake pedal switch defective
Brake pressure sensor defective
Measure voltage on the sensor
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Values incorrectly set
Check sensor plugs
Recommend Check
Sensor plug for pivoting angle
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Turn Page please!
Replace the brake pressure
sensor
Change and adjust brake pedal
switch so that the switching of the
brake pedal switch is within a
range of 70 - 90 bar brake
pressure; observe installation
distance!
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensors for
the brake pressure sensor and
brake pedal switch
Adjust brake pedal switch so that
the switching of the brake pedal
switch is within a range of 70 - 90
bar brake pressure; observe
installation distance!
Correctly set voltage values
Replace and adjust the sensor
pivoting angle. There must be a
signal of approx. 2.5 volts present
in neutral position
Replace sensor plug
Remedial measure
38 SmartDrive brake tank
pressure (B18)
38
Status: 17.12.2008
37 SmartDrive pump speed too
low (B11)
Description
Pump speed too slow
Error: The brake tank pressure is
too low
Error:
Meaning
Check valve
See Remedial action
Check the wiring to the brake tank Replace wiring to the brake tank
pressure sensor
pressure sensor
Check sensor plugs
See Remedial action
Accumulator charging valve
defective
Accumulator defective
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for brake tank pressure
sensor
Sensor plug for brake tank
pressure defective
Sensor for brake tank pressure
defective
Turn Page please!
Replace brake tank pressure
sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace accumulator
Replace accumulator charging
valve
Correctly set voltage values
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Start diesel engine so that the
accumulator is filled
Replace SmartDrive
Values incorrectly set
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace the KMC3
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Set engine speed
Replace SmartDrive
Set brake pressure
Remedial measure
The brake tank pressure is too
low
Check engine speed
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Engine speed too low
Check brake pressure
Recommend Check
Brake pressure defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
37
Error No.
Page No. 9/136
Status: 17.12.2008
39
Error No.
Page No. 10/136
39 SmartDrive CAN error
Description
Error: CAN bus communication
Meaning
LED +22-LD62 not lit
LED +22-LD11 not lit
LED +22-LD44 not lit
KMC3 power supply defective
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Internal SmartDrive error
Check fuse +22-F44
Check fuse +22-F65
Joystick power supply defective
See Remedial action
Check fuse +22-F92
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Internal error KMC3
Check fuse +22-F62
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Replace SmartDrive
Replace the KMC3
Replace joystick
Replace fuse +22-F65
Replace terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F77
Replace SmartDrive
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD31 not lit
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
SmartDrive power supply
defective
Internal SmartDrive error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
42 SmartDrive parking brk. act.
43 SmartDrive charge pressure
too low
42
43
Status: 17.12.2008
40 SmartDrive high pressure
sensor (B13)
Description
Error: The charge pressure is too
low
Error: Attempt to move against
the parking brake
Error: High pressure sensor signal out of range
Meaning
Replace SmartDrive
Check engine speed
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
No engine speed or speed too
slow
Check wiring bridge at the parking Replace wiring bridge at the
brake pressure input
parking brake pressure input
Broken cable in the wiring bridge
of the parking brake pressure
input at the SmartDrive
Turn Page please!
Start engine or increase speed
Replace SmartDrive
Replace parking brake switch
Remeasure whether switch
actuates
Parking brake switch defective
Replace wiring to the parking
brake switch
Check the wiring to the parking
brake switch
Short circuit in the wiring of the
switch
Replace fuse +22-F72.1
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
If required, re-adjust high
pressure
Check fuse +22-F72.1
Check high pressure (420 bar)
High pressure incorrect
Replace high-pressure sensor
Switch off the parking brake
switch
Measure voltage on the sensor
High pressure sensor defective
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to high pressure
sensor
Remedial measure
Check whether parking brake is
actuated
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug, high pressure defective
Parking brake switch is actuated
Check wiring to high pressure
sensor
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the high pressure
sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
40
Error No.
Page No. 11/136
Status: 17.12.2008
Error: Attempt to move without
release travelling gear
45 Release travelling gear (S3)
not actuated
45
Meaning
44 SmartDrive oil temperature too Error: Oil temperature too high
high (B14)
Description
Check travelling gear release
switch
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Release travelling gear switch is
not actuated
Check flush valve temperature
sensor
Flush valve temperature sensor
defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check the wiring for the
temperature sensor flush valve
Check the wiring for the
temperature sensor flush valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the supply pressure
sensor
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for the temperature sensor
flush valve
Test function of charge pressure
valve
Supply pressure valve defective
Check that radiator is clean
Test charge pressure
Supply pump defective
Hydraulic oil too hot
Check hydraulics for leaks
Recommend Check
Hydraulic leakage
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
44
Error No.
Page No. 12/136
Turn Page please!
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Switch on the travelling gear
switch
Replace SmartDrive
Replace the temperature sensor
flush valve
Replace wiring for the flush valve
temperature sensor
Clean the radiator
Replace SmartDrive
Replace wiring for the flush valve
temperature sensor
Replace the supply pressure
valve
Change charge pump (30+/-3bar)
Repair the leakage
Remedial measure
48 SmartDrive pump 2 coil 1 (Y3) Error: Coil 1, pump 2
49 SmartDrive pump 2 coil 2 (Y4) Error: Coil 2, pump 2
48
49
Status: 17.12.2008
47 SmartDrive pump 1 coil 2 (Y2) Error: Coil 1, pump 2
47
Meaning
46 SmartDrive pump 1 coil 1 (Y1) Error: Coil 1, pump 1
Description
Check wiring to valve
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for coil
Test coil
Coil defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check the cables.
Test coil
Coil defective
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for coil
Check wiring to valve
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for coil
Check coil
Coil defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check wiring to valve
Check the LED +22-LD43 on the
relay board
Release travelling gear switch
defective
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for coil
Check the wiring to the release
travelling gear switch
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring of the switch
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
46
Error No.
Page No. 13/136
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to valve
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace SmartDrive
Replace release travelling gear
switch
Replace wiring to the travelling
gear release switch
Remedial measure
60 SmartDrive current pump 1
coil 1 (Y1)
61 SmartDrive current pump 1
coil 2 (Y2)
60
61
Status: 17.12.2008
50 SmartDrive joystick error
Description
Error: Actuator valve 2 drive
pump 1 - front axle backward
Error: Actuator valve 1 drive
pump 1 - front axle forward
Error: Driving lever - signal
incorrect/faulty
Meaning
Test coil
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valves defective
Internal SmartDrive error
Short circuit/broken cable in the
Check wiring to actuator valve 2
wiring for actuator valve 2 pump 1 pump 1
Replace valve plug
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to actuator valve 2
pump 1
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace wiring to actuator valve 1
pump 1
Replace SmartDrive
Short circuit/broken cable in the
Check wiring to actuator valve 1
wiring for actuator valve 1 pump 1 pump 1
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace driving lever
Replace fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F92
Test functions of the driving lever
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Replace fuse +22-F65
Check fuse +22-F65
Driving lever defective
Central electrical power supply
defective.
Replace fuse +22-F57
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F57
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Joystick power supply defective
Test coil
Recommend Check
Coil defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
50
Error No.
Page No. 14/136
63 SmartDrive current pump 2
coil 1 (Y1)
64 SmartDrive current pump 2
coil 2 (Y2)
63
64
Status: 17.12.2008
62 SmartDrive cabling pump 1
coil 3 (Y69)
Description
Error: Actuator valve 2 drive
pump 2 - rear axle backward
Error: Actuator valve 1 drive
pump 2 - rear axle forward
Error: Stop valve drive pump 1 front axle
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Short circuit/broken cable in the
Check wiring to actuator valve 2
wiring for actuator valve 2 pump 2 pump 2
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valves defective
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to actuator valve 2
pump 2
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plug
Replace SmartDrive
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace coil
Replace wiring to actuator valve 1
pump 2
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to stop valve for
pump 1
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Remedial measure
Short circuit/broken cable in the
Check wiring to actuator valve 1
wiring for actuator valve 1 pump 2 pump 2
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check wiring to stop valve for
pump 1
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valves defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for stop valve pump 1
Check valve plug
Recommend Check
Valve plug defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
62
Error No.
Page No. 15/136
95 Brake valve fault
96 CAN to SmartDrive
95
96
Status: 17.12.2008
65 SmartDrive cabling pump 2
coil 3 (Y70)
Description
Error: CAN bus communication SmartDrive to terminal.
Error: Brake valve
Error: Stop valve drive pump 2 rear axle
Meaning
Perform CAN diagnostics.
LED +22-LD31 not lit
SmartDrive power supply
defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Determine via the terminal
Check brake valve
Brake valve defective or jammed
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Brake was applied continuously
(for example braking pressure
greater than 10 bar and longer
than 3 min.)
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check wiring to stop valve for
pump 2
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valves defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for stop valve pump 2
Check valve plug
Recommend Check
Valve plug defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
65
Error No.
Page No. 16/136
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F77
Replace SmartDrive
Replacing the Brake Valve
Remove foot from the brake
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to stop valve for
pump 2
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Remedial measure
Status: 17.12.2008
113
Error No.
Page No. 17/136
113 Joystick undervoltage 12V
Description
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Internal SmartDrive error
Joystick power supply voltage too Check fuse +22-F57
low
Perform joystick diagnostics
Turn Page please!
Replace fuse +22-F57
Alte Software-Version auf KMC3. Software-Versionen im Terminal Aktuelle Software-Version
Bis zur KMC3-Software-Version
anzeigen lassen und vergleichen. aufspielen.
150 200 103 - 08 kann der Fehler
96 durch einen Fehler in der
KMC3 - Software verursacht
werden.
Replace SmartDrive
If required, replace wiring and
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check the SmartDrive power
supply and check wiring
LED +22-LD116 not flashing
Life signal from SmartDrive faulty
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Remedial measure
Check the safety output of KMC3
(output is always active with
engine shut off) and check wiring
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Recommend Check
Safety output for travelling gear of LED+22-LD102 not lit
KMC3 defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Error: 12 V supply voltage too low Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
114
Error No.
Page No. 18/136
114 Joystick overvoltage 12V
Description
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
high
Meaning
Check battery voltage
Check the dynamo
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Dynamo defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Turn Page please!
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
While engine is running, measure Replace the dynamo
on batteries. Voltage must not be
over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Replace joystick
Perform joystick diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Replace the dynamo
Replace charge indicator lamp,
renew cabling
Replace cabling
Determine via the terminal
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Check the cables.
Check charge indicator lamp
Change battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check the cables.
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Replace fuse +22-F65
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F65
Recommend Check
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
116 Joystick button voltage 12V
116
Status: 17.12.2008
115 Joystick undervoltage 8V
Description
Error: 12 volt button voltage voltage out of range
Error: 8.5 V joystick supply
voltage too low
Meaning
Charge battery
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Turn Page please!
Replace joystick
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check battery acid
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Battery dead
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Check the cables.
Check charge indicator lamp
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace fuse +22-F65
Check fuse +22-F65
Replace joystick
Remedial measure
Replace fuse +22-F57
Perform joystick diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Joystick power supply voltage too Check fuse +22-F57
low
Determine via the terminal
Internal joystick error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
115
Error No.
Page No. 19/136
118 Joystick power supply
outputs
118
Status: 17.12.2008
117 Joystick power supply LED
Description
Error: 12 volt supply voltage for
outputs - voltage out of range
Error: 12 volt supply voltage LED
out of range
Meaning
Charge indicator lamp defective
Check the cables.
Turn Page please!
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Check charge indicator lamp,
Charge battery
Replace joystick
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or
Check battery acid
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Battery dead
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Check the cables.
Check charge indicator lamp
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace joystick
Perform joystick diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Test dynamo
Check the cables.
Check charge indicator lamp
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
117
Error No.
Page No. 20/136
120 Joystick checksum error
FLASH
124 CU undervoltage 12V
120
124
Status: 17.12.2008
119 Joystick parameter error
Description
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
FLASH defective
Internal joystick error
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Power supply for operating panel
too low
Check fuse +22-F64
LED +22-LD64 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F62
Replace fuse +22-F48.1
Check fuse +22-F48.1
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Replace fuse +22-F47
Replace joystick
Replace joystick
Repeat download
Replace joystick
Replace joystick
Replace joystick
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F47
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
Download was interrupted
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
Incorrect values in EEPROM
Test dynamo
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error: 12 V supply voltage too low Determine via the terminal
Error: FLASH checksum
Error: Min/Max parameters
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
119
Error No.
Page No. 21/136
Status: 17.12.2008
126 CU vlt. 5V electronics too low Error: 5 V electronics supply
voltage too low
126
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
high
Meaning
125 CU overvoltage 12V
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Determine via the terminal
Check the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Replace operating panel
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
While engine is running, measure Replace the dynamo
on batteries. Voltage must not be
over 14.8V
Replace operating panel
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Replace the dynamo
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Check the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Replace charge indicator lamp, if
required also replace cabling
Determine via the terminal
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Replace battery
Check battery charge
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
Check the cables.
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
125
Error No.
Page No. 22/136
129 CU vlt. 12V LEDs too high
129
Status: 17.12.2008
127 CU vlt. 5V elctrncs too high
Description
Error: 12 V LED supply voltage
too high
Error: 5 V electronics supply
voltage too high
Meaning
Check the dynamo
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error, operating panel
While engine is running, measure Replace the dynamo
on batteries. Voltage must not be
over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Turn Page please!
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace operating panel
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
While engine is running, measure Replace the dynamo
on batteries. Voltage must not be
over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Replace operating panel
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Replace the dynamo
Determine via the terminal
Check the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Replace charge indicator lamp
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Charge battery
Remedial measure
Check battery acid
Recommend Check
Charge indicator lamp defective
Battery dead
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
127
Error No.
Page No. 23/136
131 CU checksum error FLASH
132 CU keyboard error (A16)
135 man. operation undervoltage
12V
131
132
135
Status: 17.12.2008
130 CU parameter err
Description
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +4-F33
LED +4-LD33 not lit
Replace operating panel
Change fuse +22-F56
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Replace keyboard
Replace operating panel
Replace CU
Repeat download
Replace operating panel
Replace CU
Set parameters
Replace operating panel
Replace battery change-over
relay
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F56
at least one key is pressed
continuously
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Keyboard defective
See Remedial action
FLASH defective
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Check whether the download is
complete
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
Download was interrupted
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Incorrect values in EEPROM
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Recommend Check
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Possible Reason
Error: 12 V supply voltage too low Power supply voltage for manual
operation too low
Error: Keyboard error (at least
one key is pressed continuously)
Error: FLASH checksum
Error: Min/Max parameters
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
130
Error No.
Page No. 24/136
137 man. operation vlt. 5V too
low
137
Status: 17.12.2008
136 man. operation overvoltage
12V
Description
Error: 5 V voltage too low
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
high
Meaning
Perform diagnostics for manual
operation
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
Determine via the terminal
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Turn Page please!
Replace manual operation
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Test dynamo
Replace manual operation
Dynamo defective
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
Replace the dynamo
While engine is running, measure Replace the dynamo
on batteries. Voltage must not be
over 14.8V
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
Remedial measure
Check the cables.
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
136
Error No.
Page No. 25/136
Status: 17.12.2008
139 man. operation vlt. 12V LEDs Error: 12 V voltage for LEDs too
too low
low
139
Error: 5 V voltage too high
Meaning
138 man. operation vlt. 5V too
high
Description
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error, manual operation
Power supply voltage for 12 V
LEDs too low
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Check fuse +4-F33
LED +4-LD33 not lit
Turn Page please!
Change fuse +22-F56
Check fuse +22-F56
Replace manual operation
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
While engine is running, measure Replace the dynamo
on batteries. Voltage must not be
over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Replace manual operation
Perform diagnostics for manual
operation
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
Replace the dynamo
Determine via the terminal
Test dynamo
Check the cables.
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Check charge indicator lamp
Charge battery
Remedial measure
Check battery acid
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Battery dead
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
138
Error No.
Page No. 26/136
Status: 17.12.2008
140
Error No.
Page No. 27/136
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
Replace manual operation
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace cabling
Test dynamo
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error, manual operation
Replace manual operation
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
While engine is running, measure Replace the dynamo
on batteries. Voltage must not be
over 14.8V
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Check battery voltage
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Change battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check the cables.
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Recommend Check
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
140 man. operation vlt. 12V LEDs Error: 12 volt voltage for LEDs too The controller of the dynamo is
too high
high
defective
Description
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
143 Manual operation Keyboard
error
143
Status: 17.12.2008
1300 Raise lifting gear valve
(Y32) defective
142 man. operation checksum
error FLASH
142
1300
141 man. operation parameter
err.
Description
Error: Raise lifting gear valve
Error: Keyboard error (at least
one key is pressed continuously)
Error: FLASH checksum
Error: Min/Max parameters
Meaning
Replace manual operation
Replace manual operation
Replace manual operation
Replace manual operation
Repeat download
Replace manual operation
Replace manual operation
Update parameters
Remedial measure
Check work pressure (0 - 200
bar)
See Remedial action
Work pressure defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace the EMR
Set work pressure
Function to raise lifting gear valve Check the function using manual Replace lifting gear valve
defective
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and no
noises in the lifting gear!
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
Determine via the terminal
Check keyboard
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
Keyboard defective
See Remedial action
FLASH defective
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
Download was interrupted
Check parameters
Recommend Check
Incorrect values in EEPROM
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
141
Error No.
Page No. 28/136
1302 EMR voltage fault!
1302
Status: 17.12.2008
1301 Lower lifting gear valve
(Y33) defective
Description
Error: Supply voltage too low
(less than 10V)
Error: Lower lifting gear valve
Meaning
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Replace the EMR
Remedial measure
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal EMR error
Charge battery
Change battery
Check battery acid
Check battery voltage
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F52
Replace the EMR
Replace the EMR
Set work pressure
Wiring defective
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Power supply voltage for EMR too LED +22-LD52 not lit
low
Check work pressure (0 - 200
bar)
Work pressure defective
Function to lower lifting gear valve Check the function using manual Replace lifting gear valve
defective
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and no
noises in the lifting gear!
Determine via the terminal
Internal EMR error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
1301
Error No.
Page No. 29/136
Status: 17.12.2008
1303
Error No.
Page No. 30/136
1303 EMR/OBE not active!!!
Description
Check the cables.
Check the dynamo
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Dynamo defective
Short circuit in the wiring to an
EMR sensor
Internal EMR error
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN3 bus
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
KMC3 was restarted but not the
EMR
Internal error KMC3
Internal EMR error
Replace the EMR
Replace the KMC3
Switch the ignition off and on
again
If required, rewire or replace
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check whether switch is switched Switch off the maintenance switch
on
Place the plug and switch the
ignition off and on again
Replace the EMR
Replace wiring
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
Replace charge indicator lamp
Remedial measure
The maintenance switch has
been switched on
Check plugs are secure
Check charge indicator lamp
Recommend Check
Charge indicator lamp defective
Possible Reason
Error: EMR has not received any The KMC3 control has been
CAN messages for at least 1
switched off manually (e.g. plug
minute, or it has been deactivated has been removed)
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
1305 Lifting gear pressure sensor Error: Pressure sensor for lifting
(B49) defective
gear - wrong signal
1305
Error: Sensor position lifting gear
- wrong signal
1304 Lifting gear position sensor
(B50) defective
1304
Meaning
Description
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Lifting gear position sensor plug
defective
Lifting gear position sensor
defective
Short circuit in the wiring to
another EMR sensor
Internal EMR error
Replace sensor plug
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check wiring
Lifting gear pressure sensor plug
defective
Lifting gear pressure sensor
defective
Short circuit in the wiring to
another EMR sensor
Replace wiring
Turn Page please!
Replace lifting gear pressure
sensor
Replace wiring to lifting gear
pressure sensor
Replace the EMR
Replace wiring
Replace lifting gear position
sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the lifting gear
position sensor
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Make adjustment
Remedial measure
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring to lifting gear
wiring for the lifting gear pressure pressure sensor
sensor
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Check wiring to the lifting gear
position sensor
Short circuit / broken cable in
wiring for lifting gear position
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Specify position of the sensor
Recommend Check
Sensor position of lifting gear not
adjusted
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 31/136
Status: 17.12.2008
1307 Header contour sensor right Error: Height of right lifting gear
(B48)
sensor - wrong signal
1307
Error: Height of left lifting gear
sensor - wrong signal
1306 Header contour sensor left
(B47)
1306
Meaning
Description
Check wiring to sensor for height
of left lifting gear
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Short circuit / broken cable in
wiring for height of the left lifting
gear sensor
Height of the left lifting gear
sensor plug defective
Height of the left lifting gear
sensor defective
Short circuit in the wiring to
another EMR sensor
Internal EMR error
The height of right lifting gear
See Remedial action
sensor has not been fitted,
because the grass pick-up has
been fitted, or corn operation has
been set, but no skids are present
Check setting of the sensor
Height of left lifting gear sensor
not adjusted
Turn Page please!
Deactivate the distance
adjustment if no skids are fitted,
or switch the machine to maize
operation on the display, if the
ground skids are fitted.
Replace EMR.
Replace wiring
Replace height of lifting gear left
sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to sensor for
height of left lifting gear
Make adjustment
Plug in front attachment plugs
Check the front attachment plug
Front attachment plug not
inserted
Replace the EMR
Remedial measure
Deactivate the distance
adjustment if no skids are fitted,
or switch the machine to maize
operation on the display, if the
ground skids are fitted
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
The height of left lifting gear
See Remedial action
sensor has not been fitted,
because the grass pick-up has
been fitted, or corn operation has
been set, but no skids are present
Internal EMR error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 32/136
1309 Valve oscillating right (Y38)
broken cable
1309
Status: 17.12.2008
1308 Valve oscillating left (Y37)
broken cable
Description
Check position of the sensor
Check wiring to sensor for height
of right lifting gear
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Height of the right lifting gear
sensor not adjusted
Short circuit / broken cable in
wiring for height of right lifting
gear sensor
Height of right lifting gear sensor
plug defective
Height of right lifting gear sensor
defective
Short circuit in the wiring to
another EMR sensor
Internal EMR error
Test coil
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal EMR error
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
Error: Turn pendulum frame valve Determine via the terminal
clockwise
Check wiring to valve
Broken cable in the wiring for the
valve
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Check the front attachment plug
Recommend Check
Front attachment plug not
inserted
Possible Reason
Error: Turn pendulum frame to the Determine via the terminal
left valve
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
1308
Error No.
Page No. 33/136
Turn Page please!
Replace the EMR
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace the EMR
Replace wiring
Replace height of right lifting gear
sensor defective
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to sensor for
height of right lifting gear
Make adjustment
Plug in front attachment plugs
Remedial measure
1311 Valve oscillating right (Y38)
error
1311
Status: 17.12.2008
1310 Valve oscillating left (Y37)
error
Description
Check valve plug
Test coil
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal EMR error
See Remedial action
Internal EMR error
Turning function of right
pendulum frame valve defective
Replace the EMR
Replace coil
Turn Page please!
Check the function using manual Change pendulum frame valve
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and no
noises in the pendulum frame!
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Error: Turn pendulum frame valve Determine via the terminal
right - current too high
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Replace wiring to valve
Check the function using manual Change pendulum frame valve
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and no
noises in the pendulum frame!
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Replace the EMR
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to the valve
Remedial measure
Turning function of left pendulum
frame valve defective
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Check wiring to the valve
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring for the
valve
Possible Reason
Error: Turn pendulum frame valve Determine via the terminal
left - current too high
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
1310
Error No.
Page No. 34/136
Status: 17.12.2008
2101
Error No.
Page No. 35/136
2101 KMC2 elctr. vlt. too low
Description
Error: Electronics voltage KMC2
too low
Meaning
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace wiring
Replace cabling
Short circuit in the wiring to a 12V Check wiring
sensor
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring defective
Check fuse 22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F61
LED +22-LD61 not lit
Replace the EMR
Power supply voltage of KMC2
too low
See Remedial action
Internal EMR error
Replace coil
Run electronics diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Replace wiring to valve
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring to valve
Recommend Check
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2103 KMC2 vlt. V1 defective!
2103
Status: 17.12.2008
2102 KMC2 elctr. vlt. too high
Description
Error: KMC2 output voltage of V1
Error: Electronics voltage KMC2
too high
Meaning
Check the dynamo
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error KMC2
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Turn Page please!
Replace fuse F13 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check fuse F13 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Fuse F13 in KMC2 defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD40 not lit
Output voltage of V1 defective
Check fuse +22-F87
Run electronics diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace KMC2
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
While engine is running, measure Replace the dynamo
on batteries. Voltage must not be
over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2102
Error No.
Page No. 36/136
Status: 17.12.2008
2104
Error No.
Page No. 37/136
2104 KMC2 vlt. V2 defective!
Description
Error: KMC2 output voltage of V2
Meaning
Recommend Check
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
LED +22-LD63 not lit
LED +22-LD38 not lit
Output voltage of V2 defective
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Determine via the terminal
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check battery voltage
Dynamo defective
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Change battery
See Remedial action
GAL component defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check release logic
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F86
Replace KMC2
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace GAL component
Replace GAL component
Test function of the release switch Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
Release switch defective
Wiring of release switch defective Check wiring
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
2105
Error No.
Page No. 38/136
2105 KMC2 vlt. V3 defective!
Description
Error: KMC2 output voltage of V3
Meaning
Determine via the terminal
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Check battery voltage
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Dynamo defective
Change battery
See Remedial action
GAL component defective
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Charge battery
Check release logic
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace release switch
Check release switch
Release switch defective
Replace KMC2
Turn Page please!
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace GAL component
If required, change GAL
component
Replace cabling
Replace fuse F6 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F6 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F60
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Recommend Check
Wiring of release switch defective Check wiring
Fuse F6 in KMC2 defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
Error No.
Page No. 39/136
Description
Meaning
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check battery voltage
Dynamo defective
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Change battery
See Remedial action
GAL component defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check release logic
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Turn Page please!
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace GAL component
If required, change GAL
component
Test function of the release switch Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Release switch defective
Wiring of release switch defective Check wiring
Replace fuse F12 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F12 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Fuse F12 in KMC2 defective
Check fuse +22 F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F85
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD37 not lit
Recommend Check
Output voltage of V3 defective.
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
2106
Error No.
Page No. 40/136
2106 KMC2 vlt. V4 defective!
Description
Error: KMC2 output voltage of V4
Meaning
Charge battery
Change battery
Check release logic
See Remedial action
Check battery acid
Check battery voltage
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
GAL component defective
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
Replace GAL component
If required, change GAL
component
Test function of the release switch Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Release switch defective
Wiring of release switch defective Check wiring
Replace fuse F2 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F2 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Fuse F2 in KMC2 defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F84
LED +22-LD36 not lit
Output voltage of V4 defective
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2107 KMC2 vlt. 12V dig.sensors
2108 KMC2 vlt. 8V dig.sensors
2107
2108
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
Error: 8V voltage of digital
sensors
Error: 12V voltage of digital
sensors
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Digital sensor defective
Check wiring
Check the excitation voltage,
check the wiring, replace the
dynamo
Dynamo defective
Short circuit in the wiring to a
digital sensor
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Turn Page please!
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace sensors
Test function of the sensors
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Digital sensor defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Replace the dynamo
Check wiring
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Remedial measure
Short circuit in the wiring to a
digital sensor
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Recommend Check
Charge indicator lamp defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 41/136
Status: 17.12.2008
2109
Error No.
Page No. 42/136
2109 KMC2 vlt. 8V ana.sensors
Description
Error: 8 V voltage of analogue
sensors
Meaning
Check charge indicator lamp,
check wiring.
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective.
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
If required, change charge
indicator lamp and/or replace
cabling.
Replace the sensor
Test function of the sensor
Analogue sensor defective
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2.
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2.
Replace dynamo.
Short circuit in the wiring to an
analogue sensor
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective.
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling.
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Check charge indicator lamp,
check wiring.
Charge battery
Replace the sensor
Remedial measure
Check battery acid
Test function of the sensor
Recommend Check
Charge indicator lamp defective.
Battery dead
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2112 KMC2 RAM initialised!
2201 Broken cable feed drive
valve forwards (Y5)
2202 Broken cable feed drive
valve backwards (Y6)
2112
2201
2202
Status: 17.12.2008
2110 KMC2 vlt. batt. 3V too low
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2.
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform feed drive diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Error: Minimum current feed drive Determine via the terminal
backward valve has fallen below
the normal level
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Replace cabling
Internal error KMC2
Internal error KMC2
See Remedial action
Replace backup battery in KMC2
none
Replace dynamo.
Replace backup battery in KMC2
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
3V backup battery voltage too low Measure voltage on the battery
none
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective.
Job computer KMC2 was
replaced
Check voltage of the battery
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Discharge the backup battery
Internal error KMC2.
Possible Reason
Error: Minimum current feed drive Determine via the terminal
Perform feed drive diagnostics
forward valve has fallen below the
normal level
Broken cable in the wiring for feed Check wiring
drive forward valve
Error: Re-initialization of the
battery backup RAM in KMC2
Error: Backup battery voltage 3
V too low
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2110
Error No.
Page No. 43/136
2204 Broken cable front
attachment valve forwards (Y7)
2204
Status: 17.12.2008
2203 Short-circuit feed drive
valves (Y5/Y6)
Description
Error: Minimum current front
attachment forward valve has
fallen below the normal level
Error: Maximum current of the
feed drive forward or feed drive
backward valves has been
exceeded
Meaning
Check wiring
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Broken cable in the wiring for
front attachment forward valve
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform feed drive diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Determine via the terminal
Replace valve plug
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Replace coil
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Short circuit in the wiring for feed Check wiring
drive forward/feed drive backward
valve
Perform feed drive diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Determine via the terminal
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring for feed Check wiring
drive backward valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2203
Error No.
Page No. 44/136
Status: 17.12.2008
2207 Reserve alarm
2207
Error: Maximum current of the
front attachment forward or front
attachment backward valves has
fallen below the normal level
2206 Short-circuit front
attachment valves (Y7/Y8)
2206
Meaning
2205 Broken cable front
Error: Minimum current front
attachment valve backwards (Y8) attachment backward valve has
fallen below the normal level
Description
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Short circuit in the wiring for front
attachment forward/front
attachment valve backward
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Perform front attachment
diagnostics
Check wiring
Broken cable in the wiring for
front attachment backward valve
Determine via the terminal
Perform front attachment
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2205
Error No.
Page No. 45/136
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
2209 Brkn.cble valve Rotate
discharge chute right (Y21)
2210 Brkn.cble valve Precontrol A
(Y63)
2211 Brkn.cble valve Precontrol B
(Y64)
2301 Shrt circuit valve Rotate
discharge chute right (Y21)
2209
2210
2211
2301
Status: 17.12.2008
2208 Reserve alarm
Description
Error: Maximum current to turn
discharge chute valve to the right
exceeded
Error: Minimum current turn
discharge chute to the right valve
has fallen below the normal level
Meaning
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Short circuit in wiring to turn
discharge chute valve right
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring
Broken cable in wiring to turn
discharge chute valve right
Determine via the terminal
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2208
Error No.
Page No. 46/136
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
2303 Shrt circuit valve Rotate
discharge chute left (Y20)
2304 Lift discharge chute valve
(Y24) defective
2303
2304
Status: 17.12.2008
2302 Brkn.cble valve Rotate
discharge chute left (Y20)
Description
Error: Lift discharge chute valve
Error: Maximum current to turn
discharge chute valve to the left
exceeded
Error: Minimum current turn
discharge chute to the left valve
has fallen below the normal level
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Determine via the terminal
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Broken cable in wiring to turn
discharge chute valve left
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring
Broken cable in wiring to turn
discharge chute valve left
Determine via the terminal
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Determine via the terminal
Test coil
Recommend Check
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2302
Error No.
Page No. 47/136
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Remedial measure
Status: 17.12.2008
2305
Error No.
Page No. 48/136
2305 Lower discharge chute
valve (Y25) defective
Description
Error: Lower discharge chute
valve
Meaning
Test function of solenoid valve
See Remedial action
Solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
Replace KMC2
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Replace coil
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Function to lower discharge chute Check the function using manual Change lower discharge chute
valve defective
operation on the hydraulic block
valve
valve. Ensure easy motion and no
noises in the discharge chute!
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Determine via the terminal
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Replace wiring to valve
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Remedial measure
Check the function using manual Change lift discharge chute valve
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and no
noises in the discharge chute!
Recommend Check
Function to raise discharge chute
valve defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2306 Lift ejector flap valve (Y22)
defective
2307 Lower ejector flap valve
defective (Y23) defective
2306
2307
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
Error: Lower discharge chute flap
valve
Error: Raise discharge chute flap
valve
Meaning
Test coil
Test function of solenoid valve
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
Replace KMC2
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Turn Page please!
Function to lower discharge chute Check the function using manual Replace lower discharge chute
flap valve defective
operation on the hydraulic block
flap valve
valve. Ensure easy motion and no
noises in the discharge chute
flap!
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Replace wiring to valve
Check the function using manual Change lift discharge chute flap
operation on the hydraulic block
valve
valve. Ensure easy motion and no
noises in the discharge chute
flap!
Function to raise discharge chute
flap valve defective
Replace KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Replace the solenoid valve
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Test function of solenoid valve
Recommend Check
Solenoid valve defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 49/136
Status: 17.12.2008
2308
Error No.
Page No. 50/136
2308 Chute NOT_up
Description
Error: Discharge chute not up
Meaning
Replace the sensor
Replace KMC2
Sensor for discharge chute centre Measure voltage on the sensors
position or discharge chute lower
position defective
Internal error KMC2
See Remedial action
Replace cabling and plugs
Correct setting of the sensors
Lift discharge chute
Replace KMC2
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Remedial measure
Wiring to one of the sensors
Check wiring and plug
discharge chute centre position or
discharge chute lower position
defective
Check setting of the sensors
Discharge chute centre position
or discharge chute lower position
sensor not adjusted correctly
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Test function of solenoid valve
Solenoid valve defective
Determine via the terminal
Check coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Check position of the discharge
chute
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Discharge chute is not up
Check wiring to valve
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2401 Broken cable discharge
chute sensor centre (B28)
2402 Short-circuit discharge
chute sensor centre (B28)
2401
2402
Status: 17.12.2008
2400 UDC not in park. position
Description
Error: Short circuit - discharge
chute centre position sensor
Error: Broken cable - discharge
chute centre position sensor
Error: Discharge chute not In
parking position
Meaning
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Discharge chute centre position
sensor defective
Internal error KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
discharge chute centre position
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace KMC2
Turn Page please!
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Internal error KMC2
See Remedial action
Replace the sensor
Sensor for discharge chute centre Measure voltage on the sensors
position or discharge chute lower
position defective
Correct setting of the sensors
Replace cabling and plugs
Check setting of the sensors
Discharge chute centre position
or discharge chute lower position
sensor not adjusted correctly
Remedial measure
Wiring to one of the sensors
Check wiring and plug
discharge chute centre position or
discharge chute lower position
defective
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2400
Error No.
Page No. 51/136
2404 Short-circuit discharge
chute sensor top (B29)
2404
Status: 17.12.2008
2403 Broken cable discharge
chute sensor top (B29)
Description
Error: Short circuit - discharge
chute top position sensor
Error: Broken cable - discharge
chute top position sensor
Meaning
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Short circuit in the wiring to the
discharge chute top position
sensor
Discharge chute top position
sensor defective
Internal error KMC2
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Measure voltage on the sensor
Discharge chute top position
sensor defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
discharge chute top position
sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Measure voltage on the sensor
Discharge chute centre position
sensor defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
Short circuit in the wiring to the
discharge chute centre position
sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2403
Error No.
Page No. 52/136
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
2406 Short-circuit discharge
chute sensor pulses (B30)
2407 Fault feed drive speed
2406
2407
Status: 17.12.2008
2405 Broken cable discharge
chute sensor pulses (B30)
Description
Error: Feed drive speed
Error: Short circuit discharge
chute moments of momentum
sensor
Error: Broken cable discharge
chute moments of momentum
sensor
Meaning
Check parameters for feed drive
Parameters for feed drive
incorrect
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform feed drive diagnostics
Measure voltage on the sensor
Discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor defective
Current is flowing through the
feed drive forward valve and the
diesel engine is running, but the
feed drive is not running
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Short circuit in the wiring to the
discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor defective
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2405
Error No.
Page No. 53/136
Turn Page please!
Correct parameters for feed drive
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
Status: 17.12.2008
2408
Error No.
Page No. 54/136
2408 Fault fr. attch. speed
Description
Error: Front attachment speed
Meaning
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check pump, engine, and valves When checking, eliminate
of feed drive and stop valve of
detected faults
metal detection. Note any noises!
Feed drive speed sensor
defective
Feed drive is not running,
although the feed drive is turned
on, and the diesel engine is
running
Check parameters for front
attachment
Parameters for front attachment
incorrect
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform front attachment
diagnostics
Check high pressure for feed
drive (420 bar)
High pressure for feed drive
incorrect
Current is flowing through the
front attachment forward valve
and the diesel engine is running,
but the front attachment is not
running
Set charge pressure for feed drive
Check charge pressure for feed
drive (30+/-3 bar)
Charge pressure for the feed
drive incorrect
Turn Page please!
Set parameters for front
attachment
Replace KMC2
Set high pressure for feed drive
Clean or change feed drive valves
forwards and feed drive valves
backwards
Feed drive forward and feed drive Check feed drive valves forwards
backward valves defective
and feed drive valves backwards
defective
Replace the sensor
Turn the sensor up to stop and
then turn back by approx. half a
turn and counter
Check the sensor setting and
correct if necessary
Feed drive speed sensor is not
adjusted properly
Replace cabling and plugs
Remedial measure
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
The cables to the feed drive
speed sensor are defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
2409
Error No.
Page No. 55/136
2409 Fault cutting drum speed
Description
Error: Cutting drum speed
Meaning
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check pump, engine, and valves When checking, eliminate
of the front attachment, and stop detected faults
valve of metal detection. Note any
noises!
Front attachment speed sensor
defective
Feed drive is not running even
though the front attachment is
turned on and the diesel engine is
running
Check setting of the sensor
Cutting drum speed sensor not
adjusted properly
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform work diagnostics
Check high pressure for front
attachment (420 bar)
High pressure for front
attachment incorrect
Determine via the terminal
Set charge pressure for front
attachment
Check charge pressure for front
attachment (30+/-3 bar)
Charge pressure for front
attachment too low
Turn Page please!
Correct setting of the sensor
Replace KMC2
Set high pressure for front
attachment
Clean or change front attachment
valves forwards and front
attachment valves backwards.
Front attachment forward and
Check front attachment valves
front attachment backward valves forwards and front attachment
defective
valves backwards
Replace the sensor
Turn the sensor up to stop and
then turn back by approx. half a
turn and counter
Check the sensor setting and
correct if necessary
Front attachment speed sensor
not adjusted properly
Replace cabling and plugs
Remedial measure
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
The cables to the front
attachment speed sensor are
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2411 Short-circuit cutting drum
sensor (B58)
2412 Metal detection defective
(A10)
2411
2412
Status: 17.12.2008
2410 Broken cable cutting drum
sensor (B58)
Description
Error: Metal detection defective
Error: Short circuit cutting drum
speed sensor
Error: Broken cable cutting drum
speed sensor
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform metal detection
diagnostics
Measure voltage on the sensor
Cutting drum attachment speed
sensor defective
Incorrect default setting
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
cutting drum speed sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform work diagnostics.
Measure voltage on the sensor
Cutting drum attachment speed
sensor defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Broken cable in the wiring to the
cutting drum speed sensor
Check main coupling
Main coupling defective
Perform work diagnostics
Check main belt
Main belt for cutting drum
defective
Determine via the terminal
Measure voltage on the sensor
Recommend Check
Cutting drum attachment speed
sensor defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2410
Error No.
Page No. 56/136
Turn Page please!
Replace KMC2.
Replace sensor.
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace main coupling
Change main belt
Replace the sensor
Remedial measure
2414 Fault discharge chute
sensor top (B29)
2414
Status: 17.12.2008
2413 Fault discharge chute
sensor centre (B28)
Description
Test function of metal detection
See Remedial action
Metal detection output defective
KMC2 input defective
Error: Discharge chute not up
when attempting to park or mirror
Check position of the discharge
chute
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check setting of the sensors
Discharge chute is not up
Determine via the terminal
Discharge chute top position
sensor is not adjusted properly
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Turn Page please!
Correct setting of the sensors
Lift discharge chute
Replace KMC2
Check discharge chute parameter Correct discharge chute
max pulses left and discharge
parameter max pulses left and
chute max pulses right
discharge chute max pulses right
More pulses to one side were
counted than permitted
Replace the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the metal detection
system
Perform test stop in metal
detection diagnostics display
Remedial measure
Discharge chute centre position
sensor defective
Check wiring and plug
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring between the metal
detection and the KMC2
Recommend Check
Conditions output metal
detection, and input KMC2
deviate from each other
Possible Reason
Error: Time exceeded when
Determine via the terminal
parking or mirroring the discharge
chute up to which discharge
chute centre position sensor
should have been alive
Wiring to the discharge chute
centre position sensor defective
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2413
Error No.
Page No. 57/136
2500 Broken cable front
attachment sensor left (B55)
2501 Short-circuit front
attachment sensor left (B55)
2500
2501
Status: 17.12.2008
2415 Fault discharge chute
sensor pulses (B30)
Description
Error: Short circuit front
attachment left sensor
Error: Broken cable front
attachment left sensor
Error: Sensor, discharge chute,
moments of momentum
Meaning
Measure voltage on the sensor
Front attachment left sensor
defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
Front attachment left sensor
defective
Short circuit in the wiring to the
front attachment left sensor
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Broken cable in the wiring to the
front attachment left sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor defective
Check setting on the display
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring to the discharge chute
moments of momentum sensor
The setting of the front
attachment in the display does
not agree with the actually
mounted front attachment
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2415
Error No.
Page No. 58/136
Turn Page please!
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Correct setting on the display
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
2503 Short-circuit front
attachment sensor right (B25)
2506 KMC2 FS field OFF! (S1)
2503
2506
Status: 17.12.2008
2502 Broken cable front
attachment sensor right (B25)
Description
Error: Action cannot be
performed, or was terminated,
because the field release switch
is, or was, turned off
Error: Short circuit front
attachment right sensor
Error: Broken cable front
attachment right sensor
Meaning
Check switching position of field
release switch
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Check wiring
Test function of release switch.
Determine via the terminal
Field release switch wiring
defective
Field release switch defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Field release switch is, or was,
turned off
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Front attachment right sensor
defective
Measure voltage on the sensor
Front attachment right sensor
defective
Check wiring and plug
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
front attachment right sensor
Short circuit in the wiring to the
front attachment right sensor
Check setting on the display
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
The setting of the front
attachment in the display does
not agree with the actually
mounted front attachment
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2502
Error No.
Page No. 59/136
Turn Page please!
Replace field release switch
Replace wiring
Switch on field release switch
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Correct setting on the display
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
2508 KMC2 quick stop ON
(S90/S91)
2508
Status: 17.12.2008
2507 KMC2 FS maintenance
OFF! (S5)
Description
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Recommend Check
Internal error, operating panel
Possible Reason
Error: Action cannot be
performed, or was terminated,
because the quick stop switch is,
or was, turned on
Check switching position of the
quick stop switch
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Check wiring
Test function of switch
Determine via the terminal
Wiring of the quick stop switch
defective
Quick stop switch defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Quick stop switch is, or was,
turned on
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Turn Page please!
Replace quick stop switch
Replace wiring
Turn quick stop switch off
Replace KMC2
Replace operating panel
Test function of the release switch Replace maintenance release
switch
Maintenance release switch
defective
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Switch maintenance release
switch off
Replace KMC2
Replace operating panel
Remedial measure
Wiring of maintenance release
switch defective
Error: Action cannot be
Maintenance release switch is, or Check switching position of
performed, or was terminated,
was, turned on
maintenance release switch
because the maintenance release
switch is, or was, turned on
Determine via the terminal
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2507
Error No.
Page No. 60/136
2510 Broken cable lower
additional axle valve (Y81)
2511 Broken cable additional axle
pressure sensor (B80)
2512 Error when lowering the
additional axle
2513 CAN to additional axle
2514 Additional axle voltage 12V
defective!
2515 Additional axle voltage 5V
defective!
2510
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
Status: 17.12.2008
2509 Broken cable raise
additional axle valve (Y80)
Description
Meaning
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Recommend Check
Internal error, operating panel
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2509
Error No.
Page No. 61/136
Replace KMC2
Replace operating panel
Remedial measure
3100 KMC3 fault vlt. Electronics
3100
Status: 17.12.2008
2600 CAN to KMC2
Description
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Internal error KMC2
Short circuit in the wiring to a 12V Check wiring
sensor
Replace wiring
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F62
LED +22-LD44 not lit
Check fuse +22-F44
Replace KMC2
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
KMC3 power supply defective
Run electronics diagnostics.
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit.
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit.
Central electrical power supply
defective.
Check fuse +22-F61
LED +22-LD61 not lit.
KMC2 power supply defective
Remedial measure
Perform CAN diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error: Electronic voltage - voltage Determine via the terminal
out of range
Error: CAN bus communication KMC2 to terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
2600
Error No.
Page No. 62/136
Status: 17.12.2008
3101
Error No.
Page No. 63/136
3101 KMC3 elctr. vlt. too low
Description
Error: Electronics voltage too low
Meaning
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Test function of dynamo
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Dynamo defective
Check the cables.
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F62
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F44
LED +22-LD44 not lit
Power supply voltage of KMC3
too low
Replace the KMC3
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Replace battery change-over
relay
Determine via the terminal
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Charge battery,
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Remedial measure
Check battery acid,
Battery dead
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Recommend Check
Charge indicator lamp defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
3102
Error No.
Page No. 64/136
3102 KMC3 elctr. vlt. too high
Description
Check wiring
Turn Page please!
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check charge indicator lamp,
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace cabling
Replace wiring
Check the cables.
Replace the KMC3
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Short circuit in the wiring to a 12V Check wiring
sensor
Wiring defective
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Check battery voltage
Internal error KMC3
Check battery acid,
Battery dead
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Change battery
Test function of dynamo
Dynamo defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Charge battery,
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Replace cabling
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Charge indicator lamp defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit in the wiring to a 12V Check wiring
sensor
Possible Reason
Error: Electronics voltage too high Power supply voltage of KMC3
too high
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
3103
Error No.
Page No. 65/136
3103 KMC3 vlt. V1 defective!
Description
Error: KMC3 output voltage of V1
Meaning
Wiring of release switch defective Check wiring
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling
Replace fuse F13 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F13 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Fuse F13 in KMC3 defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F81
LED +22-LD35 not lit
Output voltage of V1 defective
Replace the KMC3
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Replace battery change-over
relay
Determine via the terminal
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace the dynamo
Test function of the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
3104
Error No.
Page No. 66/136
3104 KMC3 vlt. V2 defective!
Description
Error: KMC3 output voltage of V2
Meaning
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check battery acid,
Check battery voltage
Dynamo defective
Battery dead
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling
Change fuse F6 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check fuse F6 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F63
Replace KMC3.
Replace the dynamo
If required, change charge
indicator lamp and/or replace
cabling
Replace GAL component
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Wiring of release switch defective. Check wiring
Fuse F6 in KMC3 defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
See Remedial action
Change battery
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Charge indicator lamp defective
Internal error KMC3
Charge battery
See Remedial action
GAL component defective
Replace GAL component
Check release logic
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Replace release switch
Remedial measure
Test function of release switch.
Recommend Check
Release switch defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
3105
Error No.
Page No. 67/136
3105 KMC3 vlt. V3 defective!
Description
Error: KMC3 output voltage of V3
Meaning
Check release logic
See Remedial action
Check charge indicator lamp
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
GAL component defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Check fuse +22-F60
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD63 not lit
LED +22-LD60 not lit
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD32 not lit
Output voltage of V3 defective
Check fuse +22-F78
Run electronics diagnostics
Replace the KMC3
Determine via the terminal
See Remedial action
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Internal error KMC3
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace the dynamo
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace GAL component
Replace GAL component
Replace release switch
Remedial measure
Dynamo defective
Check the cables.
Test function of release switch.
Recommend Check
Release switch defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
3106
Error No.
Page No. 68/136
3106 KMC3 vlt. V4 defective!
Description
Error: KMC3 output voltage of V4
Meaning
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check battery acid
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Battery dead
Run electronics diagnostics
LED +22-LD33 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Determine via the terminal
Output voltage of V4 defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
See Remedial action
Change battery
See Remedial action
GAL component defective
Internal error KMC3
Charge battery
Check release logic
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F79
Replace the KMC3
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace GAL component
If required, change GAL
component
Replace release switch
Test function of release switch.
Release switch defective
Replace fuse F12 in KMC3
Remedial measure
Replace cabling
Check fuse F12 in KMC3
Recommend Check
Wiring of release switch defective Check wiring
Fuse F12 in KMC3 defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3107 KMC3 vlt. 12V dig.sensors
3107
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
Error: 12 volts - voltage of digital
sensors
Meaning
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check battery acid
Check battery voltage
Dynamo defective
Battery dead
Run electronics diagnostics
Check wiring
Determine via the terminal
Short circuit in the wiring to a
digital sensor
See Remedial action
Change battery
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Charge indicator lamp defective
Internal error KMC3
Charge battery
Check release logic
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Replace wiring
Turn Page please!
Replace the KMC3
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
If required, change GAL
component
Replace release switch
Test function of release switch.
Release switch defective
Replace fuse F2 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F92
Remedial measure
Replace cabling
Check fuse F2 in KMC3
LED +22-LD11 not lit
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Recommend Check
Wiring of release switch defective Check wiring
Fuse F2 in KMC3 defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 69/136
Status: 17.12.2008
3108
Error No.
Page No. 70/136
3108 KMC3 vlt. 8V dig.sensors
Description
KMC3 Spg. 8V dig.sensors
Meaning
Check battery voltage
Check wiring
Check sensors
Check charge indicator lamp,
Short circuit in the wiring to a
digital sensor
Digital sensor defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Change battery
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check battery acid
Check battery voltage
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
If required, replace sensors
Replace wiring
Replace the KMC3
Replace the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Check wiring
Run electronics diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
See Remedial action
Change battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Internal error KMC3
Charge battery
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Charge indicator lamp defective
If required, replace sensors
Remedial measure
Check sensors
Recommend Check
Digital sensor defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
3200 Short-circuit Cracker engine Short-circuit Cracker engine
(M11)
(M11)
3200
Error: Backup battery voltage 3
volts too low
3110 KMC3 vlt. batt. 3V too low
3110
Error: 8 V voltage of analogue
sensors
Meaning
3109 KMC3 vlt. 8V ana.sensors
Description
Check battery acid
Check battery voltage
Battery dead
Determine via the terminal
Perform cracker diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Error: Maximum current engine
cracker has been exceeded
Measure voltage on the battery
Discharge the backup battery
See Remedial action
Change battery
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective
Internal error KMC3
Charge battery
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Charge indicator lamp defective
Turn Page please!
Replace the KMC3
Replace backup battery in KMC3
Replace the KMC3
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
If required, replace sensors
Check sensors
Analogue sensor defective
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to an
analogue sensor
Replace the KMC3
Remedial measure
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC3
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3109
Error No.
Page No. 71/136
Status: 17.12.2008
3201
Error No.
Page No. 72/136
3201 Broken cable Cracker
engine (M11)
Description
Error: Minimum current engine
cracker has fallen below the
normal level
Meaning
Perform cracker diagnostics
Check parameters
Check output voltage
Check wiring
Test function of plugs and
contacts
Test engine
Wrong parameter value for
minimum current of cracker
engine
Output voltage defective
Broken cable in the engine
cracker wiring
Plug defective
Engine cracker defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Determine via the terminal
Check Cracker engine
Engine cracker defective
Turn Page please!
Replace the engine cracker
Replace plug
Replace wiring
Adjust output voltage
If required, reduce current
Replace the KMC3
Replace the engine cracker
Replace plug
Check plug
Plug defective
If required, increase current
Replace wiring
Check parameters
Wrong parameter value for
maximum current of cracker
engine
Remove the dirt; grease the
mechanics
Remedial measure
Short circuit in the engine cracker Check wiring
wiring
Check mechanism for
contamination
Recommend Check
Power consumption too high due
to sluggish mechanics
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3203 Cracker sensor fault (B42)
3203
Status: 17.12.2008
3202 Cracker motor 0-setting
reached
Description
Error: Sensor cracker position
detected
Error: When reducing the cracker
gap, the current is monitored for
the zero position of the cracker
rollers. The current has a value
between the normal and the
maximum current
Meaning
Replace the KMC3
Remove engine and actuate
electrically, check whether it
rotates continuously. As long as
the engine is supplied with
current, a signal from the sensor
is expected. If this does not
occur, an error message is
issued.
Check whether corn conditioner is
mechanically jammed
See Remedial action
Test engine at no load
Check that corn conditioner
moves easily
Internal error in KMC3
Engine does not rotate
continuously
Replace cabling and plugs
Replace the sensor
Check wiring and plug
Wiring to cracker position sensor
defective
Set supply voltage
Replace the KMC3
Cracker position sensor defective Measure voltage on the sensor
Check power supply voltage
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Power supply voltage for
analogue sensors incorrect
Check wiring and plug
The wiring to the engine cracker
is defective
Replace cabling or plugs
Test default setting of the Cracker Perform a default setting of the
parameter s
parameter crackers
Wrong parameter value for
cracker
none
Replace the KMC3
Remedial measure
none
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
The zero position of the cracker
has been reached
Internal error KMC3
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3202
Error No.
Page No. 73/136
3302 Broken cable counterblade
engine left (M9)
3302
Status: 17.12.2008
3301 Short-circuit counterblade
engine left (M9)
Description
Error: Minimum current left
counterblade engine has fallen
below the normal level
Error: Maximum current left
counterblade engine has been
exceeded
Meaning
Check parameters
Check wiring
Check plugs and contacts
Check counterblade engine left
See Remedial action
Wrong parameter value for the
maximum current left
counterblade engine
Short circuit in the left
counterblade engine wiring
Plug defective
Left counterblade engine
defective
Internal error KMC3
Set output voltage
Check output voltage
Check plugs and contacts
Test function of engine
Output voltage defective
Plug defective
Left counterblade engine
defective
Turn Page please!
Replace left counterblade engine
Replace plug
Run default setting parameters
Replace the KMC3
Replace left counterblade engine
Replace plug
Replace wiring
Run default setting parameters
Remove the dirt; grease the
mechanics
Remedial measure
Wrong parameter value for the
Check parameters
minimum current left counterblade
engine
Perform counterblade diagnostics
Check mechanism for
contamination
Power consumption too high due
to sluggish mechanics
Determine via the terminal
Perform counterblade diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3301
Error No.
Page No. 74/136
3304 Short circuit counterblade
engine right (M10)
3304
Status: 17.12.2008
3303 Max current counterblade
engine right (M10)
Description
Error: Maximum current right
counterblade engine has been
exceeded
Error: Maximum current right
counterblade engine has been
exceeded
Meaning
Check plugs and contacts
Test function of the engine
See Remedial action
Plug defective
Right counterblade engine
defective
Internal error KMC3
sluggish mechanics
Check mechanics
Check wiring
Short circuit in the right
counterblade engine wiring
Power consumption too high due
to
Check parameters
Wrong parameter value for the
maximum current right
counterblade engine
Perform counterblade diagnostics
Check mechanics
Power consumption too high due
to sluggish mechanics
Determine via the terminal
Perform counterblade diagnostics
Check wiring
Broken cable in the left
counterblade engine wiring
Determine via the terminal
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Internal error KMC3
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3303
Error No.
Page No. 75/136
Turn Page please!
Remove the dirt; grease the
mechanics
Replace the KMC3
Replace right counterblade
engine
Replace plug
Replace wiring
Run default setting parameters
Remove the dirt; grease the
mechanics
Replace wiring
Replace the KMC3
Remedial measure
3305 Broken cable counterblade
engine right (M10)
3305
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
Error: Minimum current right
counterblade engine has fallen
below the normal level
Meaning
Check output voltage
Check wiring
Check plugs and contacts
Test function of engine
Output voltage defective
Broken cable in the right
counterblade engine wiring
Plug defective
Right counterblade engine
defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Check parameters
Test function of engine
Right counterblade engine
defective
Wrong parameter value for the
minimum current right
counterblade engine
Check plugs and contacts
Plug defective
Perform counterblade diagnostics
Check wiring
Short circuit in the right
counterblade engine wiring
Determine via the terminal
Check parameters
Recommend Check
Wrong parameter value for the
maximum current right
counterblade engine
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 76/136
Turn Page please!
Replace right counterblade
engine
Replace plug
Replace wiring
Set output voltage
Run default setting parameters
Replace the KMC3
Replace right counterblade
engine
Replace plug
Replace wiring
Run default setting parameters
Remedial measure
3308 Broken cable main coupling Error: Minimum current main
valve (Y12)
coupling valve has fallen below
the normal level
3308
Status: 17.12.2008
3307 Reserve alarm
3307
Meaning
3306 Reserve alarm
Description
Perform work diagnostics
Check wiring
Check valve plugs and contacts
Check coil. The coil must have a
resistance of approx. 2.2 ohm
See Remedial action
Broken cable in the wiring for the
main coupling valve
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC3
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC3
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3306
Error No.
Page No. 77/136
Replace the KMC3
- Coil with the valve \"Y11 1/2
intake volume HA\" has been
interchanged. The valve Y11 \"1/2
intake volume HA is connected to
connection A from the valve
block. The main coupling valve is
connected to connection B from
the valve block. The valve Y11
\"1/2 intake volume HA\" has an
internal resistance of approx. 8
ohm.
- Change coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace the KMC3
Remedial measure
3401 Reserve alarm
3402 Reserve alarm
3403 Reserve alarm
3404 Reserve alarm
3405 Reserve alarm
3406 Short-circuit grinding stone
sensor left (B36)
3401
3402
3403
3404
3405
3406
Status: 17.12.2008
3400 Reserve alarm
Description
Error: Short circuit left position
grinding stone sensor
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Left grinding stone sensor
position defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Perform grinding diagnostics
Recommend Check
Short circuit in the wiring to the
Check wiring and plug
left position grinding stone sensor
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3400
Error No.
Page No. 78/136
Status: 17.12.2008
3409 Broken cable grinding stone Error: Broken cable right position
sensor right (B37)
grinding stone sensor
3409
Error: Short circuit right position
grinding stone sensor
3408 Short-circuit grinding stone
sensor right (B37)
3408
Meaning
3407 Broken cable grinding stone Error: Broken cable left position
sensor left (B36)
grinding stone sensor
Description
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
Right grinding stone position
sensor defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Broken cable in the wiring to the
right position grinding stone
sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Left grinding stone sensor
position defective
Perform grinding diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
right position grinding stone
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform grinding diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Determine via the terminal
Check power supply voltage
Power supply for digital sensors
incorrect
Turn Page please!
Replace the sensor
Screw
Check wiring and/or plugs
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Change wiring and/or plugs
Replace the KMC3
Set supply voltage
Replace the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Left grinding stone sensor
position defective
Remedial measure
Change wiring and/or plugs
Perform grinding diagnostics
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring to the
Check wiring and plug
left position grinding stone sensor
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3407
Error No.
Page No. 79/136
3411 Broken cable maintenance
sensor (B59)
3500 UDC not in park. position
3411
3500
Status: 17.12.2008
3410 Short-circuit maintenance
sensor (B59)
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Error: Discharge chute not in
parking position
Error: Broken cable grinding
device maintenance flap sensor
closed
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
The discharge chute is not in
parking position
Set supply voltage
Check power supply voltage
Power supply for digital sensors
incorrect
Turn Page please!
Check whether discharge chute is Move discharge chute into
in parking position
parking position
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
grinding device maintenance flap
sensor closed
Grinding device maintenance flap Measure voltage on the sensor
closed sensor defective
Perform grinding diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Replace the KMC3
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Replace the sensor
Check wiring and plug
Replace the KMC3
Remedial measure
Grinding device maintenance flap Measure voltage on the sensor
closed sensor defective
Short circuit in the wiring to the
grinding device maintenance flap
sensor closed
Perform grinding diagnostics
Check power supply voltage
Recommend Check
Power supply for digital sensors
incorrect
Possible Reason
Error: Short circuit grinding device Determine via the terminal
maintenance flap sensor closed
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3410
Error No.
Page No. 80/136
Status: 17.12.2008
3504
Error No.
Page No. 81/136
3504 Fault pendulum frame
sensor (B52)
Description
Error: Sensor for transversal
inclination position
Meaning
Check setting on sensor
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check power supply voltage
See Remedial action
Sensor for transversal inclination
position not adjusted
Sensor for transversal inclination
position defective
Error in the wiring to the sensor
transverse incline position
Sensor for transversal inclination
position defective
Power supply voltage for
analogue sensors incorrect
Internal error KMC3
Replace the KMC3
Set supply voltage
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Set lifting gear
Make adjustment
Replace KMC2
Internal error KMC2.
See Remedial action
Replace the sensor
Sensor for discharge chute centre Measure voltage on the sensor
position or discharge chute lower
position defective
Correct setting of the sensors
Replace cabling and/or plugs
Check setting of the sensors
Discharge chute centre position
or discharge chute lower position
sensor not adjusted correctly
Remedial measure
Wiring to one of the sensors
Check wiring and plug
discharge chute centre position or
discharge chute lower position
defective
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Discharge chute centre or lower
position sensor defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Status: 17.12.2008
3507
3507 Diesel eng. maint.
Note: Maintenance work must be
performed
Check wiring
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring of the safety signal
Internal error - Smart Drive
Internal error - KMC3.
Check whether the maintenance
interval has expired
Perform engine diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
The maintenance interval has
elapsed
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to
another KMC3 sensor
Have maintenance performed at
the intended factory, and have
the maintenance reminders reset
Replace the KMC3
Replace wiring
Check fuel tank filling level sensor Replace fuel tank filling level
sensor
Filling level fuel tank sensor
defective
Change series resistor
Check series resistor
Replace wiring to fuel tank filling
level sensor
Replace the KMC3
Replace Smart Drive
Replace wiring
Replace cabling to the
SmartDrive
Remedial measure
Protective resistor defective
Check wiring to filling level fuel
tank sensor
Check the Smart Drive power
supply and check the wiring
SmartDrive power supply
defective
3506 Tank sensor (B44) defective Error: Filling level fuel tank sensor Error in the wiring of the filling
level fuel tank sensor
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
3506
Error: Safety signal - Smart Drive
to KMC3
Meaning
3505 SmartDrive safety signal
missing
Description
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3505
Error No.
Page No. 82/136
3509 Fill level hydr. oil
3510 Fault suct. rtn. air filter 1
3509
3510
Status: 17.12.2008
3508 Air filter contamination
Description
Possible Reason
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Error: Suction return air filter 1
filling level
Check hydraulic tank filling level
sensor
Check power supply voltage
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Hydraulic oil level sensor
defective
Power supply voltage for
analogue sensors incorrect
Short circuit in the wiring to
another KMC3 sensor
Internal error KMC3
Clean suction return air filter 1
Perform work diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Suction return air filter 1 dirty
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the hydraulic oil level
sensor
Check hydraulic fluid level
Measure voltage on the sensor
Air filter contamination sensor
defective
Error: Hydraulic tank filling level The hydraulic oil level is too low
Check wiring to air filter
contamination sensor
Cleaning the Air Filter
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for air filter contamination
sensor
Error: Air filter contamination (800 Air filter dirty
and 1000 have 2 air filters)
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3508
Error No.
Page No. 83/136
Turn Page please!
If required, change suction return
air filter 1
Replace the KMC3
Replace wiring
Correct supply voltage
If required, replace hydraulic tank
filling level sensor
Replace wiring
If required, top up hydraulic fluid
Replace the KMC3
Replace air filter contamination
sensor
Replace wiring to air filter
contamination sensor
If required, change air filter
Remedial measure
Status: 17.12.2008
3511
Error No.
Page No. 84/136
3511 Central lubrication fault
(M12)
Description
IMPORTANT: All malfunction
messages from the central
lubrication system must be
confirmed and deleted using the
DK key on the central lubrication
system. This will simultaneously
delete any intermediate
lubrication. Before deleting the
error message, determine the
cause of the error, and eliminate
it. See also Central Lubrication
System in the operating
instructions.
Error: Central lubrication
Meaning
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Suction return air filter 1 sensor
defective
Internal error KMC3
Check grease filling level
Perform work diagnostics
Check main distributor,
subdistributor and lubrication
points for blockage
No grease present
Determine via the terminal
Jam in the system or at a
connected lubrication point.
LED +22-LD42 not lit
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the suction return air
filter 1 sensor
Power supply voltage for central
lubrication defective
Perform work diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Clean and, if required, replace
main distributor, subdistributor
and lubrication points
Add grease as described in the
BiG X operating instructions,
chapter Maintenance central
Lubrication System. See also
Central Lubrication System in the
operating instructions
See also Central Lubrication
System in the operating
instructions
Check fuse +22-F89
Replace the KMC3
Replace suction return air filter 1
sensor
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
3513 oil pressure main gearbox!
3600 CAN to KMC3
4000 Metal Detection switched
off!
3513
3600
4000
Status: 17.12.2008
3512 Fill level hydr. oil
Description
Error: CAN bus communication KMC3 to terminal
Error: Main gearbox oil pressure
Error: Hydraulic oil filling level
Meaning
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Internal error KMC3
Replace the KMC3
Replace wiring and/or terminating
resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F62
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F44
LED +22-LD44 not lit
KMC3 power supply defective
Replace the sensor
Perform CAN diagnostics
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Replace wiring
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring to the sensor
Check wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring to the sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
3512
Error No.
Page No. 85/136
4002 Metal detection error
voltage 8V!
4002
Status: 17.12.2008
4001 Metal detection error
voltage 10V!
Description
Error: Power supply voltage too
low (<8V)
Error: Power supply voltage for
metal detection
Meaning
Check fuse +22-F55
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check the cables.
Power supply voltage for metal
detection too low
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Wiring defective
See Remedial action
Check battery voltage
Metal detection internal error
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Test function of dynamo
Change battery
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Charge battery
Check the cables.
Wiring defective
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Change fuse +22-F55
Replace the metal detection
system
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace fuse +22-F55
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F55
Recommend Check
Power supply voltage for metal
detection defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
4001
Error No.
Page No. 86/136
4010 Metal detection valve (Y35)
broken cable!
4010
Status: 17.12.2008
4003 Metal detection switched
on!
Description
Error: Broken cable - quick stop
valve
Note: Metal detection has been
turned on
Meaning
LED +22-LD71 glowing
Check fuse +22-F92
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Quick stop valve - broken cable
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Broken cable in the wiring for the
valve
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Metal detection internal error
none
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
none
Test function of dynamo
Replace the metal detection
system
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Change fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F71
none
Replace the metal detection
system
Replace the dynamo
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Dynamo defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Remedial measure
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Recommend Check
Charge indicator lamp defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
4003
Error No.
Page No. 87/136
4013 Metal detct. output dfctv.
4013
Status: 17.12.2008
4012 Metal detection output (Y35) Error: Overload quick stop valve
overload
4012
Error: Quick stop valve output
defective
Error: Short circuit in quick stop
valve
4011 Metal detection valve (Y35)
short-circuit!
4011
Meaning
Description
Perform metal detection
diagnostics
Output defective
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Check parameters
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check wiring to valve
Wiring to the valve defective
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Check fuse +22-F92
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
LED +22-LD71 glowing
Check fuse +22-F92
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Quick stop valve overload
LED +22-LD71 glowing
Recommend Check
Error: Short circuit in quick stop
valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 88/136
Turn Page please!
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Metal detection internal error
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F71
Replace the metal detection
system
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F71
Remedial measure
4033 Metal detection error Auto
Zero 2
4034 Metal detection error Auto
Zero 3
4048 Metal detct. chnl. 1 dfctv.
4033
4034
4048
Status: 17.12.2008
4032 Metal detection error Auto
Zero 1
Description
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Meaning
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Metal detection internal error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
4032
Error No.
Page No. 89/136
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Remedial measure
4050 Metal detct. chnl. 3 dfctv.
4220 Metal detection EEPROM
CAN set error
4222 Metal detection EEPROM
parameter error
4301 Metal in feed drive!!!
4050
4220
4222
4301
Status: 17.12.2008
4049 Metal detct. chnl. 2 dfctv.
Description
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Check whether there is metal in
the feed drive
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
Recommend Check
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Possible Reason
Error: Metal detected in feed drive Metal in feed drive
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
4049
Error No.
Page No. 90/136
Remove metal and then reverse
feed drive/front attachment
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Remedial measure
4302 Metal detection (A10) fault!
4400 Steering pressure sensor
(B63) < MIN
4302
4400
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
Error: Broken cable steering
wheel pressure sensor
Error: Fault, metal detection
Meaning
Perform metal detection
diagnostics
Run KMC2 diagnostics
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
Metal detection output defective
KMC2 input defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
If required, replace wiring and
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace the metal detection
system
Perform test stop in metal
detection diagnostics display
Perform default setting in the
display in the metal detection
diagnostics
Remedial measure
Check wiring to sensor
Check plugs and contacts
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor
Sensor plug defective
Turn Page please!
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Check steering hydraulic pressure Set steering hydraulic pressure
(0 - 200 bar)
Steering hydraulic pressure
defective
Steering pressure sensor function Check the function using manual Replacing the Pressure Sensor
defective
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and no
noises in the steering!
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check wiring between the metal
detection and the KMC2
Conditions output metal
detection, and input KMC2
deviate from each other
Determine via the terminal
Check default setting
Recommend Check
Incorrect default setting
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 91/136
4402 Steering axle sensor (B64)
< MIN
4402
Status: 17.12.2008
4401 Steering pressure sensor
(B63) > MAX
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Error: Broken cable steering axle
angle sensor
Replace autopilot
Replace the sensor
Remedial measure
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Check wiring to sensor
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to
another autopilot sensor
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring to sensor
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Replace wiring
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Check steering hydraulic pressure Set steering hydraulic pressure
(0 - 200 bar)
Steering hydraulic pressure
defective
Steering pressure sensor function Check the function using manual Replace pressure sensor
defective
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and no
noises in the steering!
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Measure voltage on the sensor
Recommend Check
Sensor defective
Possible Reason
Error: Short circuit steering wheel Determine via the terminal
pressure sensor
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
4401
Error No.
Page No. 92/136
4403 Steering axle sensor (B64)
> MAX
4404 Row tracer left (B65) < MIN
4403
4404
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
Error: Broken cable sensor row
tracer left
Error: Short circuit steering axle
angle sensor
Meaning
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor plug defective
Sensor defective
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Check wiring to sensor
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to
another autopilot sensor
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring to sensor
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Internal error autopilot
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Determine via the terminal
Check sensor plugs
Recommend Check
Sensor plug defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 93/136
Turn Page please!
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Replace wiring
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Remedial measure
Status: 17.12.2008
4407 Row tracer right (B61) >
MAX
4407
Error: Short circuit sensor row
tracer right
Error: Broken cable sensor row
tracer right
4406 Row tracer right (B61) <
MIN
4406
Meaning
4405 Row tracer left (B65) > MAX Error: Short circuit sensor row
tracer left
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Determine via the terminal
Check sensor plugs
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Sensor plug defective
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to
another autopilot sensor
Check wiring to sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug defective
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check wiring to sensor
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform autopilot diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error autopilot
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
4405
Error No.
Page No. 94/136
Turn Page please!
Replace autopilot
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Replace wiring
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Remedial measure
4408 Broken cable steering axle
valve left (Y39)
4409 Short-circuit steering axle
valve left (Y39)
4408
4409
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
Error: Short circuit steering axle
valve left
Error: Broken cable steering axle
valve left
Meaning
Check wiring to valve
Test coil
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Coil for solenoid valve defective
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Determine via the terminal
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot.
Check wiring to valve
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to
another autopilot sensor
Broken cable in the wiring for the
valve
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring to sensor
Recommend Check
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 95/136
Replace coil
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to valve
Replace autopilot
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace autopilot
Replace wiring
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Remedial measure
4410 Broken cable steering axle
valve right (Y40)
4411 Short-circuit steering axle
valve right (Y40)
4412 - Autopilot electronics
voltage Error (Sensor power
supply error)
4410
4411
4412
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Check fuse +22-F76
LED +22-LD30 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F50
Replace autopilot
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace autopilot
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace autopilot
Remedial measure
Power supply voltage for autopilot LED +22-LD50 not lit
incorrect
Perform diagnostics for autopilot
and electronics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Check wiring to valve
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check wiring to valve
Broken cable in the wiring for the
valve
Determine via the terminal
Perform autopilot diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error autopilot
Possible Reason
Error: Electronic voltage - voltage Determine via the terminal
out of range
Error: Short circuit steering axle
valve right
Error: Broken cable steering axle
valve right
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 96/136
Status: 17.12.2008
4413
Error No.
Page No. 97/136
Meaning
4413 - Autopilot sensor voltage
Error: Power supply voltage too
Error (Sensor power supply error) low
Description
Charge battery
Change battery
Check the cables.
Check battery acid
Check battery voltage
Wiring defective
Battery dead
Check wiring to the sensors
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensors
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Perform diagnostics for autopilot
and electronics
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000).
Determine via the terminal
While engine is running, measure Replace the dynamo
on batteries. Voltage must not be
over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to the sensors
Replace autopilot
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Test function of dynamo
Dynamo defective
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Recommend Check
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
4415 Reserve Autop. Error 0/15
4432 CAN to Autopilot
4415
4432
Status: 17.12.2008
4414 Reserve Autop. Error 0/14
Description
Error: CAN bus communication autopilot to KMC3.
Meaning
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Internal error autopilot
Replace autopilot
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F76
LED +22-LD30 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F50
Replace autopilot
Replace the sensor
Remedial measure
Power supply voltage for autopilot LED +22-LD50 not lit
incorrect
Perform diagnostics for autopilot
and CAN
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Determine via the terminal
Measure voltage on the sensor
Recommend Check
Sensor defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
4414
Error No.
Page No. 98/136
5001 KMC2 software - incorrect
machine type
5002 KMC3 software - incorrect
machine type
5003 Diesel eng. maint.
5004 Diesel eng. maint.
5005 Software inconsistent!
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
Status: 17.12.2008
5000 Display battery empt
Description
The maintenance interval has
elapsed
The maintenance interval has
elapsed
Wrong software loaded
Display the software versions on
the terminal of the machine on
the \"Software Info\" screen and
compare with the software
information in the
KroneDownloadCenter. The
control unit where the incorrect
software version has been
transferred, transfer
correspondingly new software
Check whether the maintenance
interval has expired
Check whether the maintenance
interval has expired
Check software version
Check software version
See Remedial action
Internal error display
Wrong software loaded
Check battery voltage
Recommend Check
Discharge the backup battery
Possible Reason
The installed software versions of One or more control units on the
the individual control unts are not machine have an incorrect
compatible.
software version.
Note: Maintenance work must be
performed
Note: Maintenance work must be
performed
KMC3 software - incorrect
machine type
Error: Wrong software
Error: Backup battery voltage
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
5000
Error No.
Page No. 99/136
Perform engine diagnostics
Have maintenance performed at
the intended factory, and have
the maintenance reminders reset
Perform engine diagnostics
Have maintenance performed at
the intended factory, and have
the maintenance reminders reset
Load new software
Load new software
Replace display
Replace backup battery in display
Remedial measure
7000 RockProtect acceleration
sensor left broken cable
7001 RockProtect acceleration
sensor left voltage too high
7002 RockProtect acceleration
sensor left error
7003 RockProtect acceleration
sensor right broken cable
7004 RockProtect acceleration
sensor right voltage too high
7000
7001
7002
7003
7004
Status: 17.12.2008
5006 Elec. Autopilot still active
Description
Error: Acceleration sensor right
voltage too high
Error: Acceleration sensor right
broken cable
Error: Acceleration sensor left
voltage too high
Error: Acceleration sensor left
broken cable
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
Right acceleration sensor
defective
Short-circuit of operating voltage
for acceleration sensor right
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
right acceleration sensor
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Replace KMC4
Replace left sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC4
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Replace left sensor
Check wiring and plug
Left acceleration sensor defective Measure voltage on the sensor
Short-circuit of operating voltage
for acceleration sensor left
Replace KMC4
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Renew wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
Replace left sensor
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
Left acceleration sensor defective Measure voltage on the sensor
Broken cable in the wiring to the
left acceleration sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
5006
Error No.
Page No. 100/136
7006 RockProtect path sensor
broken cable
7007 RockProtect path sensor
voltage too high
7008 RockProtect path sensor
error
7009 RockProtect valve broken
cable
7006
7007
7008
7009
Status: 17.12.2008
7005 RockProtect acceleration
sensor right error
Description
Error: Valve current is below the
minimum level
Error: Path sensor voltage too
high
Error: Broken cable - path sensor
Meaning
Check wiring
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Broken cable in the wiring for the
valve
Measure voltage on the sensor
Path sensor defective
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
Path sensor defective
Short-circuit of operating voltage
path sensor right
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Broken cable in the wiring to the
path sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Recommend Check
Right acceleration sensor
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
7005
Error No.
Page No. 101/136
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC4
Replace sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC4
Replace sensor
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Replace KMC4
Replace right sensor
Remedial measure
7011 RockProtect valve error
7012 RockProtect voltage Ub too
low
7011
7012
Status: 17.12.2008
7010 RockProtect valve
short-circuit
Description
Error: Voltage in KMC4 is too low
Error: Maximum valve current
exceeded
Meaning
Check coil
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error - KMC4
Dynamo defective
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check the cables.
Turn Page please!
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Check charge indicator lamp
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace wiring
Replace cabling
Replace KMC4
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Internal error - KMC4
Replace coil
Remedial measure
Short circuit in the wiring to a 12V Check wiring
sensor
Check the cables.
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Wiring defective
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Check coil
Recommend Check
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
7010
Error No.
Page No. 102/136
7013 RockProtect voltage Ub too
high
7014 RockProtect voltage
Sensors too low
7013
7014
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
Internal error - KMC4
Possible Reason
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Turn Page please!
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or check
cabling
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Replace cabling
Replace KMC4
Replace battery change-over
relay
Wiring to a 12 V sensor defective
Check the cables.
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Error: Voltage on sensors too low Wiring defective
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Replace the dynamo
While engine is running, measure Replace the dynamo
on batteries. Voltage must not be
over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Replace fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F39
LED +22LD6 not lit
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F40
Replace KMC4
Remedial measure
LED +22LD4 not lit
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Error: Voltage in KMC4 is too high RockProtect voltage too high
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 103/136
7016 Stone detected!
8000 Silage agent tank empty
8001 Fault silage agent pump
9611 AutoScan overvoltage
7016
8000
8001
9611
Status: 17.12.2008
7015 RockProtect voltage
Sensors too high
Description
Error: Power supply voltage too
high
Error: Rock detected in the feed
drive
Error: Voltage on sensors too
high
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4.
While engine is running, measure Replace the dynamo
on batteries. Voltage must not be
over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Turn Page please!
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
Check whether stone in feed drive Remove rock and then reverse
feed drive/front attachment
Replace KMC4
Replace battery change-over
relay
Determine via the terminal
Rock in feed drive
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Replace the dynamo
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Replace KMC4
While engine is running, measure Replace the dynamo
on batteries. Voltage must not be
over 14.8V
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
7015
Error No.
Page No. 104/136
Status: 17.12.2008
9612
Error No.
Page No. 105/136
Meaning
9612 AutoScan undervoltage 10V Error: Supply voltage too low (
Description
Test function of dynamo
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Internal error - AutoScan
Check battery voltage
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Change battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check the cables.
Wiring defective
Replace AutoScan
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Change fuse +22-F58
Check fuse +22-F58
Replace AutoScan
AutoScan power supply voltage
too low
See Remedial action
Internal error - AutoScan
Replace battery change-over
relay
Run AutoScan diagnostics.
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Test function of dynamo
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
9613 AutoScan undervoltage 8V
9614 AutoScan glass scratched
9615 AutoScan LED 1 defective
9613
9614
9615
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
Error: AutoScan LED1 defective
Error: AutoScan glass scratched
Error: Supply voltage too low (
Meaning
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
Check AutoScan for scratches
AutoScan glass scratched
Determine via the terminal
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error - AutoScan
Determine via the terminal
Test function of dynamo
Dynamo defective
Check battery voltage
Check the charge indicator lamp,
check the wiring
Change battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check the cables.
Wiring defective
Turn Page please!
Replace AutoScan
Replace AutoScan
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit.
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Change fuse +22-F58
Check fuse +22-F58
AutoScan power supply voltage
too low
Remedial measure
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 106/136
9616 AutoScan LED 2 defective
9617 AutoScan photo diode
defective
9618 AutoScan parameter error
9907 CAN to RockProtect
9911 CAN to AutoScan
9616
9617
9618
9907
9911
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
Error: CAN bus communication AutoScan to terminal
Error: AutoScan wrong
parameters
Error: AutoScan photo diode
defective
Error: AutoScan LED2 defective
Meaning
Check whether Autoscan is
available
Check fuse +22-F58
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
AutoScan power supply voltage
defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
Check parameters
AutoScan selected, even though
there is no AutoScan available
Wrong AutoScan parameters
See Remedial action
Test function of LED
AutoScan LED 2 defective
AutoScan photo diode defective
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
Test function of LED
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
AutoScan LED 1 defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 107/136
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Change fuse +22-F58
Perform CAN diagnostics
Deactivate AutoScan in the
display
Correct parameters
Replace AutoScan
Replace AutoScan
Replace AutoScan
Remedial measure
9921 CAN to CU
9921
Status: 17.12.2008
9920 CAN to joystick
Description
Error: CAN bus communication CU to terminal
Error: CAN bus communication joystick to terminal
Meaning
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F62
Change fuse +22-F48.1
Replace joystick
Check fuse +22-F48.1
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Change fuse +22-F47
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F47
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Power supply voltage operating
panel defective
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F65
Change fuse +22-F57
Perform CAN diagnostics
Check fuse +22-F57
Joystick power supply defective
Replace AutoScan
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Perform CAN diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error - AutoScan
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
9920
Error No.
Page No. 108/136
9923 CAN to EMR
9923
Status: 17.12.2008
9922 CAN to man. operation
Description
Error: CAN bus communication EMR to terminal
Meaning
Perform CAN diagnostics
LED +22-LD52 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
Power supply voltage EMR
defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN3 bus
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F52
Replace operating panel
If required, change wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F64
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD64 not lit
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
9922
Error No.
Page No. 109/136
9925 CAN to DIOM
9925
Status: 17.12.2008
9924 CAN to metal detct.
Description
Error: CAN bus communication DIOM to terminal
Error: CAN bus communication metal detection to terminal
Meaning
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F73
Replace the metal detection
system
LED +22-LD27 not lit
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Check fuse +22-F59
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
Replace wiring
LED +22-LD59 not lit
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Power supply voltage DIOM
defective
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace fuse +22-F55
Perform CAN diagnostics
Check fuse +22-F55
Power supply voltage for metal
detection defective
Replace the EMR
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Perform CAN diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal EMR error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
9924
Error No.
Page No. 110/136
9927 CAN to ADM2
9927
Status: 17.12.2008
9926 CAN to ADM1
Measure resistors
See Remedial action
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
Internal error ADM1
Perform CAN diagnostics
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F64
LED +22-LD64 not lit
Replace ADM1
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN3 bus
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F70
LED +22-LD17 not lit
Replace DIOM
Check fuse +22-F68
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
Remedial measure
Perform CAN diagnostics
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Possible Reason
Error: CAN bus communication - Determine via the terminal
ADM2 to terminal (800 and 1000)
Error: CAN bus communication ADM1 to terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Description
9926
Error No.
Page No. 111/136
Status: 17.12.2008
9942
Error No.
Page No. 112/136
Meaning
9942 hardw. restart to SmartDrive Error: Restart hardware
SmartDrive
Description
Check the safety output of KMC3
(output is always active with
engine shut off) and check wiring
Safety output for travelling gear of LED+22-LD102 not lit
KMC3 defective.
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check wiring and plug
Wiring defective.
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F77
Replace ADM2
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
See Remedial action
Internal error ADM2
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
LED +22-LD31 not lit
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
Replace wiring
SmartDrive power supply
defective
Check wiring
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN3 bus
Select correct machine type
Check fuse +22-F69
LED +22-LD16 not lit
Check machine type in the
display
Change fuse +22-F66
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F66
Recommend Check
Wrong machine type selected
Power supply voltage ADM 2
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
9946 hardw. restart Autopilot
9946
Status: 17.12.2008
9945 hardw. restart KMC2
Description
Error: Restart autopilot hardware
Error: Restart KMC2 hardware
Meaning
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Wiring faulty
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F76
LED +22-LD30 not lit
Replace KMC2
Check fuse +22-F50
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Power supply voltage for autopilot LED +22-LD50 not lit
incorrect
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring faulty
Check fuse 22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F61
Replace SmartDrive
LED +22-LD61 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check the power supply voltage
on the SmartDrive
Remedial measure
KMC2 power supply defective
LED+22-LD116 not flashing
Recommend Check
Life signal from SmartDrive faulty
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
9945
Error No.
Page No. 113/136
9951 Restart Hard AutoScan
9953 hardw. restart KMC3
9951
9953
Status: 17.12.2008
9947 Restart Hard RockProtect
Description
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Replace the KMC3
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring faulty
Check fuse +22-F62
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F44
Replace AutoScan
LED +22-LD44 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal error - AutoScan
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Change fuse +22-F58
Replace autopilot
Remedial measure
KMC3 power supply defective
Check wiring and plug
Wiring faulty
Error: Restart KMC3 hardware
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Check fuse +22-F58
Internal error autopilot
Possible Reason
Error: Restart AutoScan hardware AutoScan power supply voltage
defective
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
9947
Error No.
Page No. 114/136
9961 hardw. restart CU
9961
Status: 17.12.2008
9960 hardw. restart joystick
Description
Error: Restart CU hardware
Error: Restart joystick hardware
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F64
LED +22-LD64 not lit
Wiring faulty
Check fuse +22-F62
Replace operating panel
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F48.1
Change fuse +22-F47
Replace joystick
LED +22-LD62 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check wiring and plug
Wiring faulty
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F47
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F65
Change fuse +22-F57
Remedial measure
Power supply voltage CU
defective
Check fuse +22-F57
Recommend Check
Joystick power supply defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
9960
Error No.
Page No. 115/136
9963 hardw. restart EMR
9964 hardw. restart metal detect.
9963
9964
Status: 17.12.2008
9962 hardw. restart man.
operation
Description
Error: Restart metal detection
hardware
Error: Restart EMR hardware
Error: Restart manual operation
hardware
Meaning
LED +22-LD63 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal EMR error
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check wiring and plug
Wiring faulty
LED +16-LD1 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Power supply voltage for metal
detection defective
LED +22-LD52 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
Power supply voltage EMR
defective
Check wiring and plug
Wiring faulty
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F55
Replace the EMR
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F52
Replace manual operation
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +4-F33
LED +4-LD33 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Change fuse +22-F56
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F56
Recommend Check
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Power supply voltage for manual
operation defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
9962
Error No.
Page No. 116/136
9966 hardw. restart ADM1
9966
Status: 17.12.2008
9965 hardw. restart DIOM
Description
Error: Restart ADM1 hardware
Error: Restart DIOM hardware
Meaning
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F70
LED +22-LD17 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Change fuse +22-F68
Replace DIOM
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F68
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Power supply voltage ADM1
defective
Check wiring and plug
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD27 not lit
Wiring faulty
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F59
Replace the metal detection
system
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD59 not lit
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Power supply voltage DIOM
defective
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
Wiring faulty
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
9965
Error No.
Page No. 117/136
9982 restart CAN to SmartDrive
9985 restart CAN to KMC2
9982
9985
Status: 17.12.2008
9967 hardw. restart ADM2
Description
Error: Error - interruption of the
CAN communication to KMC2
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to SmartDrive
Error: Restart ADM2 hardware
(800 and 1000)
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error ADM2
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check wiring and plug
Replace wiring
Turn Page please!
Replace SmartDrive
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace ADM2
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F69
LED +22-LD16 not lit
Wiring faulty
Change fuse +22-F66
Replace ADM1
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F64
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F66
See Remedial action
Internal error ADM1
Power supply voltage ADM2
defective
Check wiring and plug
LED +22-LD64 not lit
Recommend Check
Wiring faulty
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
9967
Error No.
Page No. 118/136
9993 restart CAN to KMC3
9993
Status: 17.12.2008
9991 Restart CAN to AutoScan
9991
Error: Error - interruption of the
CAN communication to KMC3
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to AutoScan
9987 Restart CAN to RockProtect Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to RockProtect
9987
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to autopilot
Meaning
9986 restart CAN to Autopilot
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error - AutoScan
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal RockProtect error
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
Recommend Check
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
9986
Error No.
Page No. 119/136
Replace wiring
Turn Page please!
Replace AutoScan
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace RockProtect
Replace wiring and terminating
resistors
Replace wiring
Replace autopilot
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Remedial measure
15001 restart CAN to CU
15002 restart CAN to man.
operation
15003 restart CAN to EMR
15001
15002
15003
Status: 17.12.2008
15000 restart CAN to joystick
Description
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to EMR
Error - interruption of the CAN
communication to the manual
operation.
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to CU
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to Joystick
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN3 bus
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
Recommend Check
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
15000
Error No.
Page No. 120/136
Replace wiring
Turn Page please!
Replace manual operation
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace operating panel
Replace wiring
Replace joystick
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace the KMC3
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Remedial measure
15005 restart CAN to DIOM
15006 restart CAN to ADM1
15007 restart CAN to ADM2
15006
15007
Status: 17.12.2008
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal EMR error
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication - ADM2 to
terminal (800 and 1000)
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to ADM1
Error: Interruption in CAN
communication to DIOM
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error ADM1
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN3 bus
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN3 bus
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
Recommend Check
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
Possible Reason
15004 restart CAN to metal detct. Error: Interruption in CAN
Short circuit/broken cable in the
communication to metal detection wiring for the CAN2 bus
Description
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
15005
15004
Error No.
Page No. 121/136
Replace wiring
Replace ADM1
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace DIOM
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace the metal detection
system
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Replace the EMR
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Remedial measure
16001 DIOM temperature
16001
Status: 17.12.2008
16000 DIOM communication
Description
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Internal error DIOM
Internal error DIOM
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Replace DIOM
Turn Page please!
Allow DIOM to cool down
Replace DIOM
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD27 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F59
LED +22-LD59 not lit
Power supply voltage DIOM
defective
Replace ADM2
Perform CAN diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error ADM2
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
Recommend Check
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
Possible Reason
Error: DIOM temperature too high DIOM has overheated
Error: Communication - DIOM to
CAN
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
16000
Error No.
Page No. 122/136
16002 DIOM voltage In-company
16003 DIOM voltage UB
16002
16003
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
Error: DIOM UB voltage incorrect
Error: Internal voltage in DIOM
incorrect
Meaning
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD27 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F59
LED +22-LD59 not lit
Power supply voltage DIOM
defective
Replace DIOM
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring and plug
Wiring faulty
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD27 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F59
Run electronics diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Remedial measure
Internal voltage in DIOM incorrect LED +22-LD59 not lit
Recommend Check
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 123/136
16005 Current at the output
16005
Status: 17.12.2008
16004 DIOM total current
Description
Error: DIOM overall current
incorrect
Meaning
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
Wiring faulty
Internal error DIOM
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Replace DIOM
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD27 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F59
LED +22-LD59 not lit
DIOM overall current incorrect
Replace DIOM
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F92
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
Wiring faulty
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
16004
Error No.
Page No. 124/136
16007 DIOM voltage UC
16008 DIOM voltage 7.5V
16007
16008
Status: 17.12.2008
16006 DIOM hardware
Description
Error: DIOM 7.5 V voltage
incorrect
Error: DIOM UC voltage incorrect
Error: DIOM hardware defective
Meaning
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD27 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F59
Replace DIOM
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs.
LED +22-LD59 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Power supply voltage DIOM
defective
Check wiring and plug.
Wiring faulty
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F73
LED +22-LD27 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F59
LED +22-LD59 not lit
Power supply voltage DIOM
defective
Replace DIOM
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
16006
Error No.
Page No. 125/136
16010 Lock steering left (Y66)
overcurrent DIOM PWM1
16011 Lock steering right (Y67)
overcurrent DIOM PWM2
16010
16011
Status: 17.12.2008
16009 DIOM EEPROM
Description
Error: Maximum current on right
steering valve
Error: Maximum current on left
steering valve
Error: EEPROM defective
Meaning
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Test solenoid valve
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
Perform DIOM diagnostics
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Determine via the terminal
Perform DIOM diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Determine via the terminal
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
EEPROM defective
Check wiring and plug
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Recommend Check
Wiring faulty
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
16009
Error No.
Page No. 126/136
Replace DIOM
Turn Page please!
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
If required, replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace DIOM
Replace DIOM
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F60
Remedial measure
16012 Additional hydr. 2 DOWN
(Y62) overcurrent DIOM PWM3
16013 Additional hydr. 2 UP
(Y63) overcurrent DIOM PWM4
16012
16013
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
Error: Over-current in additional
hydraulics 2 UP on PWM4
Error: Over-current in additional
hydraulics 2 DOWN on PWM3
Meaning
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Perform work diagnostics
Test solenoid valve
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Determine via the terminal
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Check wiring to valve
Test solenoid valve
Solenoid valve defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Perform work diagnostics
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring to valve
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 127/136
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Remedial measure
Status: 17.12.2008
16016 Molasses relay (K28)
overcurrent DIOM DIG3
16016
Error: Over-current DIG3
Error: Over-current in additional
hydraulics 1 DOWN
16015 Additional hydr. 1 Hitch
DOWN (Y52) overcurrent DIOM
DIG2
16015
Meaning
16014 Additional hydr. 1 Hitch
Error: Over-current in additional
UP (Y51) overcurrent DIOM DIG1 hydraulics 1 UP
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
LED +22-LD28 not lit
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Power supply voltage molasses
relay defective
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Check wiring to valve
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Perform work diagnostics
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Determine via the terminal
Perform work diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Determine via the terminal
Test coil
Recommend Check
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
16014
Error No.
Page No. 128/136
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F74
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Remedial measure
16018 Lock steering left (Y66)
status DIOM PWM1
16019 Lock steering right (Y67)
status DIOM PWM2
16018
16019
Status: 17.12.2008
16017 Coupling 2nd diesel
engine (Y56) overcurrent DIOM
DIG4
Description
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the relay
Possible Reason
Error: Status of PWM2 on right
steering valve defective
Error: Status of PWM1 on left
steering valve defective
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
See Remedial action
Internal error in DIOM
Check wiring to valve
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Check wiring to valve
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Check wiring to valve
Check wiring
Recommend Check
Valve plug defective
Error: Over-current in coupling for Short circuit/broken cable in the
2nd diesel engine
wiring for the valve
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
16017
Error No.
Page No. 129/136
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug.
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
16020 Additional hydr. 2 DOWN
(Y62) status DIOM PWM3
16021 Additional hydr. 2 UP
(Y63) status DIOM PWM4
16022 Additional hydr. 1 Hitch
UP (Y51) status DIOM DIG1
16020
16021
16022
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
Error: Status of DI on additional
hydraulics 1 hitch UP defective
Error: Status of PWM4 on
additional hydraulics 2 defective
Error: Status of PWM3 on
additional hydraulics 2 defective
Meaning
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Perform work diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Determine via the terminal
Check valve plugs and contacts
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Valve plug defective
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Check wiring to valve
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 130/136
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug.
Replace wiring to valve
Remedial measure
16023 Additional hydr. 1 Hitch
DOWN (Y52) status DIOM DIG2
16024 Molasses relay (K28)
status DIOM DIG3
16025 Coupling 2nd diesel
engine (Y56) status DIOM DIG4
16041 Reserve DIOM PWM6
overcurrent
16042 Reserve DIOM PWM7
overcurrent
16023
16024
16025
16041
16042
Status: 17.12.2008
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
Check wiring to valve
Check wiring
Coil defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the relay
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
LED +22-LD28 not lit
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Power supply voltage molasses
relay defective
Perform work diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error: Status of DI on coupling for Short circuit/broken cable in the
2nd diesel engine defective
wiring for the valve
Error: Over-current DIG3
Error: Status of DI on additional
hydraulics 1 hitch DOWN
defective
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
Error No.
Page No. 131/136
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F74
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Remedial measure
16047 Reserve DIOM DIG8
overcurrent
16048 Silage agent pump (M16)
status DIOM PWM5
16047
16048
Status: 17.12.2008
16046 Reserve DIOM DIG7
overcurrent
16046
Error: Silage agent pump
defective
Error: Over-current - compressed
16045 Engine cleaning
compressed air (Y73) overcurrent air for engine cleaning
DIOM DIG6
16045
Error: Terminating resistor CAN2
KMC2 over-current
16044 Terminating resistor
CAN2_KMC2 (K15) overcurrent
DIOM DIG5
16044
Meaning
16043 Reserve DIOM PWM8
overcurrent
Description
Check silage agent pump
See Remedial action
Internal error DIOM
Silage agent pump defective
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Check wiring
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the pump
Check wiring to valve
Check wiring.
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the resistor
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Perform CAN diagnostics.
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
16043
Error No.
Page No. 132/136
If required, change silage agent
pump
Replace wiring
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace wiring.
Remedial measure
16050 Reserve DIOM PWM7
status
16051 Reserve DIOM PWM8
status
16052 Terminating resistor
CAN2_KMC2 (K15) status DIOM
DIG5
16053 Engine cleaning
compressed air (Y73) status
DIOM DIG6
16054 Reserve DIOM DIG7
status
16050
16051
16052
16053
16054
Status: 17.12.2008
16049 Reserve DIOM PWM6
status
Description
Possible Reason
Error: Compressed air for engine
cleaning status D
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
Check wiring
Perform CAN diagnostics
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the resistor
Error: Terminating resistor CAN2 Determine via the terminal
KMC2 status D
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
16049
Error No.
Page No. 133/136
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
16071 Reserve DIOM PWM10
overcurrent
16072 Reserve DIOM PWM11
overcurrent
16073 Reserve DIOM PWM12
overcurrent
16074 12/24V switchover (K41)
overcurrent DIOM DIG9
16075 Release voltage Feed
drive/front attachment overcurrent
DIOM DIG10
16076 Metal detection horn (K18)
overcurrent DIOM DIG11
16077 Grinding flap open/closed
(Y65) overcurrent DIOM DIG12
16071
16072
16073
16074
16075
16077
Status: 17.12.2008
16076
16055 Reserve DIOM DIG8
status
Description
Error: Over-current grinding flap
open/closed
Error: Over-current metal
detection horn
Error: Over-current feed
drive/front attachment
Error: Over-current 12/24-V
switching relay
Meaning
Determine via the terminal
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the horn
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Perform grinding diagnostics
Check wiring
Check wiring
LED +22-LD41 not lit
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
16055
Error No.
Page No. 134/136
Replace wiring
Replace wiring
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F93
Check fuse +22-F88
Remedial measure
16079 Reserve DIOM PWM10
status
16080 Reserve DIOM PWM11
status
16081 Reserve DIOM PWM12
status
16082 12/24V switchover (K41)
DIOM DIG9
16079
16080
16081
16082
Status: 17.12.2008
16078 Reserve DIOM PWM9
status
Description
Error: Over-current 12/24-V
switching relay
Meaning
Test coil
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
LED +22-LD41 not lit
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check wiring to valve
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
16078
Error No.
Page No. 135/136
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F93
Check fuse +22-F88
Replace DIOM
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Remedial measure
Status: 17.12.2008
Error: Grinding flap open/closed
16085 Grinding flap open/closed
(Y65) DIOM DIG12
16084
16085
Meaning
Error: Release voltage feed
16083 Release voltage Feed
drive/front attachment
drive/front attachment DIOM
DIG10
16084 Metal detection horn (K18) Error: Horn metal detection
DIOM DIG11
Description
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
Check wiring
Check wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Short circuit / broken cable in the
wiring for the horn
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG-X 500-1000
16083
Error No.
Page No. 136/136
Replace DIOM
Turn Page please!
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Replace wiring
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
Remedial measure
. . . konsequent, kompetent
Maschinenfabrik
Bernard Krone GmbH
Phone +49 (0) 59 77/935-0
Fax
+49 (0) 59 77/935-339
Internet: http://www.krone.de
eMail: [email protected]
18-Jun-2009
Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10, D-48480 Spelle
Postfach 11 63, D-48478 Spelle

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project